oS eee Bee ee | y orig @ “ode es AML LAL UP tae tat a A OU CR ROCA CAR aC DOR OCR RMR NC CL ( TV ? sue id , paohe Cr ay RN ee perm angen aed ? na Ce AL ‘ feratioid TRO Noah eid ae Wr OAM TAO rR ET RN REE r SONY Sn) Veber dade GOO ULE OER a On wana ftate tine Pr aeer das ted ey oe Re a ’ ” A rf al Be ey ga al yy arate DRAWER Vn ar a ere) a eun tia rst ouag een gto ped bag hada eee ey, CAN a ANAS ROLLE yew i aot bee ower rg 1 oe UI 4 a Asay o De rw) oy Aree it mat fale AOE ssa i ar ‘ i CU AS A RH CO Lai RCRA ONO OH Wa fie A pth Fr Nr male PEN Vy DCO OG gy : HTN) vat Y Bike Bt ve "ey vy ‘ a 7 } st ee wee On Tee a wee eae " +) UA AS a Mh ata ql haw © 40 Te ! ' AA WAL 4 wot Sear aaa we wo bh ’ 1 ry ios ewe tia eT era Mey UNV AAG ve ue Ce 2) ay ee, ' : Sud ay TG ae Be ia Bon Vr ewerins d Li war ‘ vue ey V5 Ret HAN 9: 0:8 th 1 La ¥ A OO Ch 10 SOY DER OY ATA it hoe Rising ’ 1 ' Ce Oe SO Ma Re) ao Pe ee POA CR An i) I. te eat t ‘ if i ay ay a) kL N PO wi es Nila gat yet CF F y " ' f Ce ey CM aa Wate Fada ny aly ulatiinnen Ue, KG voruuae ui PUR " 5 \ ‘ AAA) i F Vioraerkag gat ry 4 An Og AEE < ey tbr rat AMA i ' Vi a Weta REO bis i) n frat a a AY hayes iy 4 a aL! ae / yersgyoebeh ae Af Yrvyyalo yyy ; ‘sasty pi eeu at Wee a ie a WT SONA NH WOMEN A oe Lae HA ates “ igo ve tneraueus Tier in cs We Py ee Nea T Mn er - moan ’ povyo ead BEV OL yy ROAR LAA AUR AL) a Fy . ‘ beatles sy obey eka o yratey ran ASYM Why I Clty Vo m vy te prvve td bie Ua Ue UCD eed veo pana, » POSE Ae Wa i eA AN ti opea Powe 4 Pests Pol sae ea Oy EO A ne Wyte Ce a a YL he ‘ ye ttoataay Peay yey ley CMe RN MIE CR CRTC IC IC ACR NT TC fat f ARO SAL Ae eT DO OAR MM COHEN C f Lee phew avenge Vahl Pe altyta bts ae GAM RCRA LONI a NSM UNO Ds yy ay ROOK eee ee Goran tad HENSON NN SUM a i Nntotel sli est, Hite f ‘ ‘ ) ROOT UALR neve ass BURAK i } rif ee! OA SHIGE RIAA Het Hi) sth Nae ! iN i #4 putes iy any T a Ay WA rt y yi i Hi An ii A hetingaan ate ath ‘ 9 ! vie iy See a MAE we ke Uy 4h RL) Vrs st ) ‘ Re ik uN fie AD fi yea avn i PCE da p) DAD Ae ly wt, VAD age Welk: ge iy AA Ea TTY Ht bh Neen) Raa ch we Vb Edt Wty rte j ! why Ce WiC Ke Atalay ye f oe * Hae ’ SS ibt£ | ee fey i if fp DAR HN So ay aia a iy? Mh Maa ee Pith uy 1 syle iy vawtr eva ryy i DR ALL nile CLR CR ACU WN won ie! MEN De vol Aah) the ‘ Poy a] fy MN wy, vy ih: a ' ‘i wy re yr ia hai i roy yy Wty at N}) 4 sh hy ella een Pad i i wis iy ae Hin ‘h i) ARAN AANA) Nyy { a iyalh fy i Wy tety ta’ pis NN NH Mh mh b) Neeials HN 8 Pay Ley aes Uy ON yey SD bt 1h yy pit F iy sine yy i i fi wouge Cm) : i ge us f Be i 7 OO ae PH hse a HN 4 3. i . PARSE tates Age! asl RAN? DAR, Hania y a i ‘; i EMT Meh i AN Vat We Be be }y ay at Pra ih eke oy r fay ‘ shh A ih fie Uae Witch t an i i (U8 Di aaa i fk if ie) ine ili raed Ab 14? eee iy yak ee ee ans man sate Pret? i et nat & bet Bae . ee i by idee AGMA a any oe oe oe : is te cahae i ", 1 So Ale} uy T asi ie ae Ayal die. ay th DR Hea Rr a) Tl A mn) Wes Seah shy oe = rt , Jonas vit Use de NYT ia, CC ene t i bib ig TAK AWE ti i i ypu Eres een dedi ids ea Mee RAR win BO Rach HT) it ot Pha AS wd 4 tod poe itis ” eM NA Piet i bide te aaa NS Fe Wea Lat} ob Pek key wed ye TEN Ad 4 SUA a er) Ww ie pi make 48 all , fi ‘* need int i ee oe iy Hi Bar Ad ai iP dike ‘, a ity “ a i Ht 7 0 i ii 1G nn ae i) heey Hd ‘ Niet G4 . S PLAS he: Ps s a “ fat y PRE PC TE Voy oy) THE AMERICAN JOURNAL OF SCIENCE. Epirorn: EDWARD S. DANA. ASSOCIATE EDITORS Proressors GEORGE L. GOODALE, JOHN TROWBRIDGE, W. G. FARLOW anp WM. M. DAVIS, or CamprincE, Proressorss ADDISON E. VERRILL, HORACE L. WELLS, L. V. PIRSSON ann H. E. GREGORY, or New Haven, Proressor GEORGE F. BARKER, or PuHILapELprtia, Proressor HENRY S. WILLIAMS, or IrHaca, Proressor JOSEPH S. AMES, or Batrtimore, Mr. J. S. DILLER, or Wasuincron. FOURTH SERIES VOL. XXIIJI—[_WHOLE NUMBER, CLXXIII.] WITH 1 PLATE. NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT. 191 OM ee ZEONIAN AN INSTIFGS S MAT TIONAL WY A “Shadow en “eh ie ‘ = * CONTENTS TO VOLUME XXIII. Number 1 Ber Arr. I.—Colombian Meteorite Localities: Santa Rosa, Ras- Ratae a OCA Valter pi Vc ania Nee UNIRTD cH cese als Sa EE a te ~ 11.— Occurrence of Facetted Pebbles on the Central Platedu. OnE uaz ce Diy VA ie UISBOAU CSL ly ee EO slit. —Mineralogical Notes ; by F. A. Ohana IV.—Chemical | Composition of Amphibole; by 8. L. PrEn- IE Decne Hes: C2 SANGER Meee h 8 2) Ck es ae a 23 V.—Notes on the Relation of the two genera of tubicolous Annelids, Vermilia Lamarck, 1818, and Pomatoceros Emihippie hese byl. J. Buses oN Ashe ke 52 : VI.—Chalcopyrite Crystals from Arakawa, Japan; by W. E. TBD OTRRTDY. a eae Senet I ane ee ldeamet aula reg Na RINE Mar ecths OO oak Tas EL tcf ogy) SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. Chemistry and Physics—Vaporization of Solid Substances at Ordinary Tem- perature, C. ZENGHELIS: Investigations upon the Rare Harths, AUER von WELSBACH: Re-determination of the Atomic Weight of Potassium, T. W. Ricwarps and A. STaEHLER, 61.—Qualitative Analysis, W. C. Morean: History of Chemistry, F, P. Armirace: History of Chemistry, HE. v. Meyer: Absorption of Light, E. MOLLER and R. A. Housroun, 62.— Doppler Effect in Canal Streams, J. Stark: Oscillatory Discharge of a Polarized Cell, F. KrUGmr, 63.—Electric Waves, P. DrupE: Fluorescence and Magnetic Rotation Spectra of Sodium Vapor and their Analysis, R. W. Woop : Radioactive Transformations, EK. RUTHERFORD, 64.—Das elektrische Bogenlicht ; Seine Entwicklung und seine physikalischen Grundlagen, W. B. v. OzupNocHowskI, 69. Geology and Mineralogy—United States Geological Survey, 69.—Origin and Structure of the Roxbury Conglomerate, G. R. MANSFIELD : Geology of the Bighorn Mountains, N. H. Darron: Glacial History of Nantucket and Cape Cod, J. Howarp Witson, 67.—Les Variations Periodiques des Glaciers, H. F. Remp et EK. Murer: Roman Comagmatic Region, H. S. WASHINGTON, 68.—Geology and Petrography of Mt. Yamaska, Province of Quebec, G. A. YounG, 69.—Geology of the Veleanic Area of the Hast Moreton and, Wide Bay Districts, Queensland, Australia, H. I. Jensun : Building and Ornamental Stones of North Carolina, T. L. Watson and F, B. Laney, 70.—Clays ; their Occurrence, Properties and Uses with espe- cial reference to those of the United States, H. Rres: Palaeozoic Fossils, J. F. WaHITEAVES, 71.—Bryozoan Fauna of the Rochester shale, R. S. Bassuer: Fossil Fauna and Flora of the Florissant (Colorado) shales, T. _D. A. CocKkERELL: Geological Survey of Ohio: Handbuch der Mineral- ogie, C. HINTZE. Miscellaneous Scientific Intelligence.—Integrative Action of the Nervous Sys- tem, C. S. SHERRINGTON, 73.—Reports of the U.S. National Museum for the years ending June 30, 1905 and June 30, 1906, R. Rarapun: Report of the Superintendent of the Coast and Geodetic Survey, from July 1, 1905, to June 30, 1906, 74.—Annals of the Astronomical Observatory of Harvard College: Carnegie Institution of Washington, 75.—American Association : Amerikanisches Hochschulwesen: EHindriicke und Betracht- ungen, W. BortaeR: Notes on Adirondack Mammals, with Special Refer- ence to the Furbearers, M. Grant: Annual Report of the Director of the Weather Bureau of the Philippine Islands for the year 1904: Science Bulletin of the Museum of the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences, 76. NGS lv CONTENTS. Number 1384. Page Art. VII.—Ultimate Disintegration Products of the Radio- active Elements. Part If. Disintegration Products of Uranium’; by B. B.Botrwoop «2 222) eS VIII.—Dike of Diabase in the Potsdam Sandstone in the Valley, of Virginia 5 by T. 1. Watson 99.) seen 89 [X.—A Spectrum of the Réntgen Rays from a Focus Tube, and the Relative Selective Absorption of Réntgen Rays in Certain Metals. A preliminary note; by J. M. Apams. (With Plate I)____. iivis RL Ye 81 X.—Limeless Ocean of Pre-Cambrian Time; by R. A. Daty 93 XI.—Oceurrence, in the Rocky Mountains, of an Upper Devonian Fauna with Clymenia; by P. E. Raymonp __ 116 XU.—Wasatch and Wind River Rodents ; by F. B. Loomis 123 XIII.—Descriptions of the two genera of tubicolous Anne- lids, Paravermilia and Psendovermilia, with species from Bermuda referable to them; by K. J. Busw_.._.....-. 131 XIV.—Titration of Mereurous Salts with Potassium Per- manganate by Dis VANDA 62s oe 137 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. Chemistry and Physics—Occurrence of Argon with Helium in a Mineral, KITCHEN and WINTERSON: Researches on High Percentage Ozone Gas, E. LapDENBuRG, 141.—Determination of Halogens in Organic Compounds, STEPANOW: Cause of the Phosphorescence of Chlorophane, G. URBAIN, 142.—Comparison of the Optical Temperature Scale with the Nitrogen Thermometer up to 1600°, L. Hotporn and 8. VaLentineR: Light Im- pressions on Photographie Plates, P. H. Eykman and A. P. H. TrRIveELir: Ratio of the Energy of the Réntgen Rays to the Energy of the exciting Cathode Rays, E. Cartmer, 143.—Scientific Papers of J. Willard Gibbs, with Preface by H. A. BumstEap and R. G. Van Namr, 144.—Electron Theory, KE. E. Fournrer pb’ Avs, 145.—Lehrbuch der Optik, P. DRupE. Geology and Mineralogy—Maryland Geological Survey, W. B. CuarK, 146.— Fifth Report of the Vermont State Geologist, 148.—Geologie und Palzeon- tologie von Ostasien, etc., T. Lorenz: Geology and Paleontology of the Schoharie Valley, A. W. Graspau: Cephalopoda of the Beekmantown and Chazy Formations, R. Rurpemann, 148.—Geology of the Penn Yan-Ham- mondsport Quadrangles, D. D. LurHeR: Carboniferoéus and Permo-Carbon- iferous Invertebrata of New South Wales, E. ErHrREDGE and W. 8. Dun: Geology and Underground Waters of the Arkansas Valley, Colo., N. H. Darton : Geol. History of Mt. Greylock, T. N. Date: Treatise on Rocks, Rock-weathering and Soils, G. P. Mrerrity, 149.—Facetted Pebbles, Lis- BOA: Die Kristallinen Schiefer, V. GruBENMANN, 100.—Rock Minerals: their Chemical and Physical Characters, etc., J. P. Ippives, 152.—Das Salz: dessen Vorkommen und Verwertung, J. O. F. von Buscuman: Chemische Krystallographie, P. Grotu, 153. Botany and Zoology—Sinnesorgane im Pflanzenreich, G. HABERLANDT, 154: Principles of Botany, J. Y. BerGen and B. M. Davis: Second Report of Wellcome Research Laboratories, Khartoum, A. BaLurour, 156.—Animal Micrology; Practical Exercises in Microscopical Methods, M. F. Guyrr, 156. Miscellaneous Scientific Intelligence—Carnegie Institution of Washington, Year Book No. 5, 1906, 156.—Report of the Librarian of Congress, etc., 1906: Physikalische Chemie der Zelle, R. HorBer, 158.—Differential Equa- tions, D. F. CAMPBELL: Seismological Committee, 159. —Smithsonian Insti- tution: American Forestry Association : Celebration of the 200th Anniver- sary of the Birth of Benjamin Franklin: Amer. Philosophical Society, 160. CONTENTS. V Number 135. Page Arr. XV.—Evolution of the Horse Family, as illustrated in thenVale: Collections: pby iso. Ubi we ss wee ee 161 XVI.—Clay of Probable Cretaceous Age at Boston, Massa- ehusettst:: bye Ga map ss Breas Nee iee oe lie 183 XVII.—Lower Hnronian Ice Age; by A. P. Coneman. -_.. 187 XVIII—New Species of Baptanodon from the Jurassic of Wayominod-ebyA@AVVi: GimMORE: san ures eons tee mera OS XIX.—Almost Complete Specimen of Strenuella strenua (GSiiinness)) sab vac We cS ENTIMER RSS 8 ou sis Ee es hae 199 XX.—Changes of the Colloidal Nucleation of Dust-free Wet Auirin the Lapse.of Times by C. Barus. 122) 220523222 202 XXI.—Use of Succiniec Acid as a Standard in Alkalimetry and Acidimetry; by I. K. Purnrs and J. L. Husparp 211 XXII.—Divergence and Curl; by E. B. Witson-_--_----_-- 214 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. Chemistry and Physics—Misconception of Critical Temperature, J. W. Grecory: New Determination of Free Sulphur, EK. Breremr, 221.—Detec- tion of Traces of Zinc, BERTRAND and JAVILLIER: Compounds of Ferrous Salts with Nitric Oxide, Mancnor and ZECHENTMEYER, 222.—Chemical Abstracts of the American Chemical Society: Perception of Sound Direction, RAYLEIGH, 224.—TIonization of the Atmosphere over the Ocean, A.S. Eve: Diurnal Periodicity of the Ionization of Air, Woop and CAMPBELL, 224. Geology and Mineralogy—U.S. Geological Survey, 27th Annual Report, C. D. Watcortt, 225.—Publications of U. 5. Geol. Survey: Rate of Recession of Niagara Falls, G. K. GinBert, 226.—Geol. Report on Bay Co., Mich., W. F. Cooper: Illinois State Geol. Survey, H. F. Baty, 227.—Postglacial Faults of East. New York, J. B. WoopwortH: Lunar and Hawaiian Physical Features Compared, W. H. PickerinG, 228.—Origin of Laterites, M. MACLAREN, 229.—Roches alcalines de |’Est-Africain, ARSANDAUX, 230.— Theory of Glacial Motion, O. W. WinLcox: Decomposition of Feldspars, CusHMAN and Hupparp, 231.—Minerals from Lyon Mt., N. Y., H. P. WHITLOCK: Synopsis of Mineral Characters for Laboratory and Field Use, R. W. Ricnarps: Native Copper from Bisbee, 282. Paleobotany and Zoology—Cretaceous Flora of Southern New York and New England. A. Houiick, 233.—Life and Work of Bernard Renault, D. H. Scott, 234.—Present Position of Paleozoic Botany, D. H. Scorr: The Seed, a Chapter in Evolution, F.W. OLiveEr, 235.—Araucariez, SEwARD and Forp: Florule Portlandienne, Fuicur and ZeILLER: Rheetic flora of Persia, ZEIL- LER: Affinities of certain Cretaceous Plant Remains, A. Houuick and E. C. JEFFREY, 236.—Paleobotany of the Cretaceous of Long Island, A. Hor- Lick: Tertiary Lignite of Brandon. Vt., G. H. PERKINS: Sutcliffia insignis, D. H. Scott: Cycadofilices, D. WHitm: Seeds of Aneimites, D. WHITE, 237.—Microsporangia of Pteridospermex, R. Kipston: Flora der unteren Kreide Quedlinburgs, P. B. Ricuter: Dictyophyilum und Camptopris 4 spiaralis, A. G. NaTHorst, 2838.—Clathropteris meniscoides, A. G. Nat- HORST: Germinating Spores in Stanropteris oldhymia, D. H. Scorr, 239.— Tubicaulis Sutcliffi, Marre C. Stoprs: Structure of Sigillaria elegans, R. Krpston: Megaspore of Lepidostrobus foliaceus, Rina Scorr: Algue Oxfordienne, O. LicgnteR: Brillenkaimane, Brazil, F. Stmpnenrock, 240.— Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes, 241. Miscellaneous Scientific Intelligence--Annual Reports of the Smithsouian Institution, 242.—U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey: Carnegie Institution of Washington, 243.—Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teach- ing; First “Annual Report : Meteorite from Selma, Ala., 244. Obituar, y—Sir Micnuaret Fosrer: Prof. D. I. Menprevéer, 244. vi CONTENTS. Number 1386. Page Art. X XIII.—Topographie Features Formed at the Time of Earthquakes and the Origin of Mounds in the Gulf Plains by. Wi. AH. Hopes °... i 22. Se 245 XXIV. AG con: to the Geology of New Hanged No. a On Red Hill, Moultonboro; by L. V. Prrsson and H. _ AN ASIEN eTROS Sa Sho Sl 2 ee OEY 7 ae ee Stages in Streptelasma rectum Hall ; by DEC’ BROWN A e203) Bea ee ee XXVI.—A New Fly (Fam. Mycetophilide) from the Green River, Beds ; by 3D At CocknRntin) 3275.4 285 XXVII.—Marignacite, a New Variety of Pyrochlore from Wausau, Wisconsin; by 8. Werrpman and V. LennErR 287 XXVIII.—Arsenate Process for the Separation of Magne- sium and the Alkalies ; by P. EK. Brownine and W. A. DRUSHEL 2226 20:22) Ne Ue ees X XIX.—Chemical Composition of wee Ocher; by W. Po SCHALLER epi DE eae eos eee ee SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. Chemistry and Physies—Preparation of Pure Helium, JacquERop and Perrot: Calcium as an Absorbent of Gases, Soppy, 304.—Method for Determining Halogens in Organic Compounds, E. CoaBLtay: Hydrates in Aqueous Solution, H. C. Jongs, 305.—Entwicklungsgeschichte der Chemie, A, LADENBURG, 306. Geology and Mineralogy—Geological Survey of Canada, 306.—Cruise of the Neptune, A. P. Low, 307.— Geological Survey of Brazil: Geological Com- mission, Cape of Good Hope, 308.—Seismic Geology, W. H. Hoss, 309.— Die Fossilen Insekten, A. HANDLIRSCH, 311.—Geology of the Cape Lis- burne Region, Alaska, A. J. Counrer: Die Trochilisken, A. KarPrInsKy, 314.—Echinoderma, Miss M. Grant: Die Ostbaitischen Silurischen Trilo- biten, Fr. Scumipt: The Genus Fusulina, H. Yasr: Palaeontologia Universalis: Primary Septa of the Rugosa, J. E. DuERDEN and R. G. CARRUTHERS, 315.—Marine Trias, Zacatecas, C. BurcKHARDT, 316.—La Faune Jurassique de Mazapil, C. BurckHarpDT, 317.—La Fauna de Molus- cos de Cardenas, H. B6sE, 518.—Strenuella strenua. H. W. Sumer: Black Sands of the Pacific Slope in 1905, D. T. Day and R. H. Ricwarps, 319.— Mineralogia Groenlandica, O. B. BOGGILD, 520. Miscellaneous Scientific Intelligence—British Museum Publications : Report of the Surveyor of Hawaii, 321.—The Bureau of Science, Manila, Paun C. Freer: Bulletin of the Imperial Earthquake Investigation Committee, Tokyo, 322.—Manual in Physical Geography, C. T. Wricur: Symposium on Water Supplies in Michigan: Astronomical Observatory of Harvard College Publications, 323.—Publications of the Washburn Observatory, 324. Obituary—HEnrI Morssan: P. E. M. BERTHELOT: WILHELM VON BEZOLD: MarceL. BERTRAND: NicoLas SoKOLOV : JoHN K, Regs: Henry D. Topp: W. J. RHEES, 3524. CONTENTS. : vil ; Number 137. Arr. XXX.—Wave-cut Terraces in Keuka Valley, Older than the Recession Stage of Wisconsin Ice; by F. (CUTS th ees aye 1 a a eae Sa ea 325 XX XI.—Form of Outwash Drift; by F. Carney-.-.-..--- 336 XXXII.—Vapor Nucleation in the Lapse of Time; by C. SUIS eng ae Ee eA nie Se el ea 342 XX XIL.—Types of Permian Insects ; by E. H. Szetuarps__ 345 XXXIV.—Origin of the Wasatch Deposits; by F. B. Loomis 356 XXXV.—Method for the Estimation of Iron in presence of Titanium ; by F. A. Goocs and H. D. Newton _-_----.- 365 XXXVI.—Hsterification of Succinic Acid; by I. K. Puetrs ANGed cs Pe UBBARD noo a2) oe Ay ee a i ew ee 868 XXXVII.—Transmission of Réntgen Rays through Metallic Sheets byes Mn ADAMS or is0) Sie yea Cy ees 375 XXX VIII.—The Elm Creek Aérolite; by K. 8S. Howarp ._ 379 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. Chemistry and Physics —Oxysulphides of Zirconium and Thorium, O. Hatvser: New Method of Preparing Titanium Tetrachloride, VicouRoux and ARRIVANT, 382.—Separation and Estimation of Beryllium, Parsons and BaRNES: Atomic Weights of Manganese and Cobalt, BAxTER and Hines: Introduction to Metallurgical Chemistry, J. H. Stanspie: A Text Book of Electro-Chemistry, M. Lm Buanc, 585.—Exercises in Chemistry, W. McPuHeErson and W. EK. HENDERSON: Specific Charge and Velocity of Cathode Rays excited by Réntgen Rays, A. BESTELMEYER: Wave Length of Réntgen Rays, J. D. VAN DER WAALS, Jr. : Chemical Effects of the Electric Discharge in Rarified Hydrogen and Oxygen, P. J. Kirpy, 384.— Radio-active Matter in the Karth and the Atmosphere, G. A. BLANC, 880. Geology and Mineralogy—Manual of the Geology of Connecticut, W. N. RicE and H. E. Grecory, 385.—Preliminary Geological Map of Connecticut, H. E. Grecory and H. H. Roprnson, 392.—Second Biennial Report of the Commissioners of the State Geological and Natural History Survey of Con- necticat : lowa Geological Survey, Volume XVI: Limeless Ocean of Pre- Cambrian Time, 393.—Samples of the Sea-floor along the Coast of Kast Greenland, 744-70 N. L., O. B. Béaeartp : Mikroscopische Physiographie der Massigen Gesteine, H. Rosenpuscu, 394.—Hendersonville Meteorite, G. P. Merritt: Reproduction Artificielle de Mineraux au xix® siécle, P. TCHIRUWINSKY, 395. Miscellaneous Scientific Intelligence—National Academy of Sciences, 395.— Commemoration of the Two Hundredth Anniversary of the birth of Lin- nzus, 396.—Director United States Geological Survey : Ricerche Lagunari : River Pilcomayo, GunnaR Lanes, 397.—British Tunicata, Atprr and Hancock : Die Insektenfamilie der Phasmiden, WatTENWYL und REDTEN- BACHER: Trades and Anti-Trades: Museum of the Brooklyn Institute of Art and Sciences, CHARLES SCHAEFFER, 398.—University of Illinois Bulle- tin, EDWARD Barrow : Bulletin, No. il of the Carnegie Foundation for fhe Advancement of Teaching : Dictionnaire-Manuel-Illustré de Géo- graphie, A. D—EMANGEON: Self-Propelled Vehicles, J. E. Homans, 399.— Ostwald’s Klassiker der Exakten Wissenschaften : Frequency Curves and Correlation, W. P. EtpErton, 400. : 4 Vill CONTENTS. Number 138. Page Art. XXXIX.—The Mesozoic Sediments of Southwestern Orecon si bycd 1S) UnTAER, eee lo SU 401 XL.—Studies in the Cyperacez ; by Tauro. Hotm.__.._._.. 422 XLI.—Contributions to the Geology of New Hampshire ; No. III, On Red Hill, Moultonboro ; by L. V. Prrsson and HS. WASHINGTON. 2. 32222222. 3 1) ter XLII.—A Method for the Qualitative Separation and Detec- tion of Ferrocyanides, Ferricyanides and Sulphocyan- ; 448 ides ; by P. E. Browntne and H. E. Patmur ________- XLII.—Irvingite, a New Variety of Lithia-mica; by S. WRIDMAN. (6.206 Se as oa ee ae eee XLIV.—The Composition of Molybdite from Arizona ; by Be No GUieD 2 oS eee ee eon es eye eee XLV.—On Climatic Conditions at Nome, Alaska, during 451 455 the Pliocene, and on a new Species of Pecten from the Nome Gold-bearing Gravels; by W. H. Dati. .__. ___- 457 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. Chemistry and Physics— Platinum Amalgam, Moissan: Explosion-Limits of Certain Gas Mixtures, N. Tectu: New Method of Forming Organie Com- pounds of Phosphorus, BertHaup, 459.—Oeuvres Complétes de J.-C. Galissard de Marignac, E. Apor: Outlines of Industrial Chemistry, F. H. THorpP: Note on the Decay of Ions in the Fog Chamber, C. Barus, 460.—Electric Conductivity, K. BADEKER: Interference of Wireless Tele- graph Waves, F. Kirpirz: Rays of Positive Electricity, J. J. THomson, 461.—Electrons, O. Loper, 462.—La Moderna Teoria dei Fenomeni Fisici, A. Rigut: La Ionizzazione e la Convezione Elettrica nei Gas, L. AMADUZZI, Geology and Natural History—Geological Survey of Western Australia, the Pilbara Goldfield, A. G. Marrnuanp, 465.—The Prospects of Obtaining Artesian Water in the Kimberley District, R. L. Jack: New Zealand Geo- logical Survey, 464.—Cape of Good Hope Geological Commission : Stone Implements of South Africa, J. P. Jonnson, 465.—Ore Deposits of the Silver Peak Quadrangle, Nevada, J. E. SpuRR: Geology and Gold Deposits of the Cripple Creek District, Colorado, W. LinpGren and F. L. RANSOME, 466.—The Genus Encrinurus, A. W. VoapEs: Pelmatozoa from the Chazy Limestone of New York, G. H. Hupson: Jurassic Fossils from the Black Hills, R. P. Wuitrienp and EK. O. Hovey: Some New Devonic Fossils, J. M. Cuarke: The Eurypterus Shales of the Shawangunk Mountains, J. M. CLARKE, 467.—‘‘ Organbildende Substanzen” und ihre Bedeutung fiir die Vererbung, C. Rasu: Die Vererbung erworbener Eigenschaften, EH. Ric- NANO, 468.—Guide for Laboratory and Field Work in Zoology, H. R. Lin- VILLE and H. A. KELLEY: Pierre-André Latreille, L. pz Nussac: Hinfluss des Klimas auf den Bau der Pflanzengewebe, C. HottermMann, 469. Miscellaneous Scientific Intelligence—Carl Friedrich Gauss Werke, 470.— Temperature of Mars, P. LowrLi: The Evolution of Matter, Life and Mind, W. S. Duncan; Esperanto in Twenty Lessons, C. S. GRIFFIN: Wellcome’s Photographic Exposure Record, 471. iY Bay a r. Cyrus Adler, Smithsonian Institution. VOD ee a eee eT () 253.6) Ife ed Res as eles aE 0-04 OU aa bet eee Mines Soa ah es O'18 Ores ede tae ee oe, oe an eee 100°20 If C, P, and§ are calculated as cohenite, schreibersite, and troi- lite, respectively, the above separate as follows Cohenite. Schreibersite. Troilite. Nickel-iron. Fiemme ont 9°45 B35) 0:07 88°43 INSP tgs ace 0°06 0°62 Eee 5°84 COvaeo meee 0°01 0-01 aie 0°76 Cutest ese NGS Dek arte 0:02 | peli eae eater eee 0°36 ae see SS at Soul wraneces So iss 0°04 SS Cite 0°18 wie ane z Gixistests: aie Peat: Se Shes tr 2°70 9°34 O11 95°05 The nickel-iron has the composition of kamacite, which corre- sponds with the microscopic state, taenite and plessite wanting. Cohenite is in most cases not to be distinguished from schreiber- site otherwise than by chemical proofs ; and for this reason by many authors carbon is not counted as cohenite, but accredited to nickeliron. It has been shown, however, by Moissan and Osmond that cohenite constitutes the outermost layer on the schreibersite corona which surrounds the nuggets of troilite ard graphite. Where these two companions have been distinguished, they proved to be developed in nearly equal quantities. For this reason © is to be calculated as cohenite where cohenite and schreibersite have not been distinguished. The iron of Santa Rosa is a member of the Zacatecas group of brecciated octahedrites. Three localities have furnished these— Zacatecas in Mexico, known since 1520, Santa Rosa in Colombia, found in 1810, and Barranca Blanca in Chile, found in 1845. Dr. AxtstipEsS BREZINA Vienna, June, 1906.” The description by Cohen, referred to by Brezina,* is the earliest in which Santa Rosa is distinguished as an Rominediaie. According to this, the octahedral structure is not uniform throughout an sivanedl face; but the lamelle are differently oriented over each of the small areas up to 2°5°™ across, into * That referred to on page 2 of this article. H. A. Ward—Colombian Meteorite Localities. Ne which the etched face is divided by fine fissures. Fissures are not everywhere present, and are so fine that they may often escape notice except where they are filled with schreibersite or magnetite. The lamelle are short and fine, seldom exceeding 4°™ in length and 2™" in width. The kamacite is oranular, and contains etching pits which give it an oriented shimmer similariy oriented throughout individual lamellae, and often throughout bundles of them. Plessite is not prominent partly because of its limited quantity, and partly because it is not to be distinguished from the kamacite in either color or structure. Great difficulty was experienced in slicing the iron. A gang of eight saws, fed with emer ‘y, was kept running for 197 hours to obtain seven slices ranging from 450. to 600 square centi- meters in size. When it was finally laid open, the first thing about the sections to attract attention was what appear in section to be almost, if not quite, perfectly spherical troilite nodules from 3 to 6™" in diameter. It was not until after a closer scrutiny, and after a comparison of the concretions in the different slices, that they were found to be cigar-shaped, rather than spherical. The lay of these is, as nearly as may be determined, mutually parallel. Their direction ‘is approxi- mately perpendicular to the long axis of the meteorite, and happens also to be at right angles | to the plane of the slicing. In all, twenty-nine sections ‘of different concretions are to be counted on the five main slices. Tlifteen of these are of con- cretions extending through all five slices. In other words, of the twenty-nine different concretions met with in five succes- sive slices of less than 600 square centimeters each, fifteen at least are parallel in position and more than 5 in length. The evenness of distribution, length, symmetry of form, and parallelism of direction, of this secreted troilife in the Santa Rosa siderite is a characteristic feature which, though ap- proached in some few other meteoric irons, notably LaCaille, is equalled in none so far as I have observed. The structure of the iron has been described so completely by Cohen and Brezina as to make further commeut almost un- necessary. Polished faces are divided more or less completely by fine hair-like fissures into irregular areas 2 or 3" across. The fissuring is everywhere present, but is not always equally pronounced. A second form of fissuring is in the nature of magnetite-filled cracks, sometimes as much as a willimeter wide, extending inward sometimes 3 from the natural surface. One such magnetite-filled crack passes directly through a troilite concretion. One of the slices, which has been etched, presents a mottled appearance of shimmery and dull areas, and as the angle of reflection is changed the bright spots vanish and new ones ap- pear. This var iable mottling i is due in part to the fact that 8 IT. A. Ward—Colombian Meteorite Localities. the sheen of the kamacite is differently oriented in different individual beams or groups of beams, and in part to the fact that a difference of orientation of the sheen as well as of the etching figures exists in the different areas marked off by the fissures. The iron is not a typical representative of the brecci- ated group, however, for the orientation is not invariably af- fected by the granulation. Sometimes a general orientation of the kamacite beams and of their sheen is to be found, with local disturbances, over areas 8 or 10° across. No traces of taenite are visible; and plessite, if present, is not distinguishable from the closely packed kamacite. All of the troilite in the iron has been secreted to form the great cigar-shaped concretions. Schreibersite, although finely 2 divided, is an important mineral accessory, filling most of the breccia-forming fissures, and thickly scattered in grains be- tween lamellae. : Cohen’s hypothetical division of the Colombian meteoric irons is thus seen to be correct in so far as it deals with the Santa Rosa locality, and the specimens of ataxitic iron recorded in certain of the meteorite collections under that name are wrongly designated. Apart from the conclusive proof afforded by the structure of the iron, this same conclusion is to be drawn from the fact already stated, that no appreciable amount had ever been removed from the meteorite up to last spring. Brev- ity forbids comment on the large specimen of Rasgata secured at Bogota for the Ward-Coonley Collection further than to state that its structure agrees with that of Cohen’s Rasgata. But his justification of his third division, that of Tocavita, finest octrahedrite, is not so certain. There are no such frag- ments to be found either at Santa Rosa de Viterbo or in the National Museum at Bogota; nor is there any record or-tra- dition anywhere except in the memoir by Rivero and Bous- singault of the finding of such fragments. Lishoa— Pebbles on the Central Plateau of Brazil. 9 Art. Il.—TZhe Occurrence of Facetted Pebbles on the Cen- tral Plateau of Brazil ; by Mieunt Arrosapo R. Lispoa. Arter the observations that were made upon facetted peb- bles—the German Dreikanter—by Koken and Noetling in the Salt Range of India, and by E. Philippi in the south polar regions, the subject seems to be assuming the same importance as when Behrendt in 1876 first brought it to the notice of the Geological Society of Germany. A plausible explanation,* based on local observations, gave rise to the theory of the glacial origin of the facetted pebbles of the Salt Range. This theory became more plausible after the discovery, by the Gauss expedition,+ of facetted pebbles in the Antarctic polar regions. The theory of glacial origin for all facetted pebbles is far from being accepted by geologists, and several objections have also been raised to the theory of their formation by the action of wind-blown sand in arid regions. The occurrence of these pebbles in hitherto unknown loeali- ties will furnish a contribution to the subject worthy of atten- tion. The author consequently takes the opportunity of announcing the discovery of characteristic facetted pebbles on the central plateau of Brazil. Only two references to the existence of facetted pebbles in South America have been found. One of them, by Bracke- busch,} refers to their occurrence in the Argentine valleys near the dunes derived from the sands of the Atacama desert, 4000 meters above sea level. In the valleys of Tinogasta and Belen, effects analogous to those produced by glaciers were attributed to the action of sand blown by winds over the Bolivian desert. These facetted pebbles are, therefore, referred to as being of eolian origin. The other reference in the journal of the Ger- man Geological Society$ is a statement by Prof. Bruhns to the effect that in the Strasburg collection of South American rocks there are facetted pebbles of eeolian origin, but the author does not know whether they come from the locality mentioned by Brackebusch. When in 1884 Behrendt advanced the theory of the glacial origin of Dreikanter, the occurrence of these pebbles was * HW. Koken und F. Noetling, Geologische Mittheilung aus der Saltrange (pandschab) Centralblatt fiir Mineralogie, Geol. und Paleontoiogy, 1905, n. 3, py ve, Oo. 4. op. 97. + E. Philippi, Ueber recente Facettengeschiebe von antarktische Kisbergen. Centralblatt f. Min., Geol. u. Pal., 1904, n. 24, 737. ¢ Petermann’s Mittheilungen, 1895, xxxix, 155-158. $ Zeitschrift der Deutschen Geologischen Gesellschaft, lvi, Protokoll- notiz, p. 168, 1904. 10 = Lishoa—Pebbles on the Central Plateau of Brazil. considered to be a proof of local glacial action. Later, when Behrendt’s theory was displaced by the theory of the ‘action of sand blown by wind, the same pebbles were taken as a proof of existence of arid wastes or steppes in different geo- logical periods. “Prof. Johnson* observes that in treating of existing deserts the glacial origin of facetted pebbles must: be abandoned, so that, in view of the evidence of the Permian facetted pebbles and of the glacial pebbles of the south pole, we are confronted by two theories that demand essentially different geological conditions. It does not seem likely that two such different causes as glaciers and wind-blown sand would produce exactly the same type of facetted pebbles. To a certain extent, the existence of strize would offer a point of reference for this determination, but the difficulty of proving their formation contemporary with the formation of the facets, and their complete absence in pebbles of undoubted glacial origin, show that other characteristics must be found to make it possible to discriminate between the two distinct types. This discrimina- tion would be established if unquestionable facts confirmed the co-existence of the two causes in the formation of the pebbles. From these considerations it is clear that only after the prob- lem is completely solved will the occurrence of facetted peb- bles form a secure criterion for the determination of glacial or eeolian phenomena. +957 2 > O14" S:)-958 lee eee | Ii.” Lee AFI PR ONS Soe Ayl f] ‘991 (We Greiner OB Si os) ON meanness Onmnel mame “997 Bi Russell = ©) ay eatin: () 4] ieee nee: O () Seen ee “993 Actinolite { Kragerd 880 : ‘059 : ‘874 1 : 993 [ ae Pierrepont: 876) 29) 04500: Oe seem 1:05 In the first five analyses the ratios of SiO, : R"O+F, are almost exactly as 1:1, and attention may be called to the fact that such close approximations to an exact ratio are seldom met with in mineral analvses. It may be concluded therefore from the ratios that the materials were very pure, the analyses exceptionally good, and that both water and fluorine, which have been gener ally disregarded in previous calculations, must be taken into consideration. Five such results preclude the possibility that the close agreement of the ratios to 1:1 isa matter of accident. Analysis VI is irregular in that it shows an excess of (R"O+F,) over SiO,.. This may be due to defects in the analysis, to possible impurities in the material, or this special variety may be a transition between actinolite and horn- blende, the latter, as will be shown later, being characterized by having an excess of (R"O+F,) over SiO,. Nnaly ses LY, V VI, the ratios derived from them, and the percentages of the several constituents are so nearly alike, that it seems best to class the mineral from Pierrepont as actinolite. The analysis needs revision. Except as regards fluorine, the ratios derived from the six analyses oomifinrn the theory of Rammelsberg, namely, that the ‘composition is RSiO, + R,O,, the RSiO, including MgSiO,, FeSi0,, CaSiO, and Na, SiO,, while considerable H, SiO,, which Rammelsberg left out of consideration, must also be included. The ratios also confirm in a general way the theory of Tscher- mak except that considerable hydrogen would have to be brought into the formulas ‘and some provision made for fluorine. Moreover the ratios indicate clearly that the idea advanced by Tschermak, that sodium is present as a molecule, Na, A1,8i,O,,, is quite untenable, since for every Na,O there would have to be deducted 1A],O, and 4810,, which would deplete the total silica and destroy the 1:1 ratio. Ina large number of minerals it has been shown that fluorine and the isomorphous hydroxyl unite with metallic elements to form radicals, thus (MgF)’, or (MgOH), univalent, and (AIF)” or (A1OH)” bivalent, a it seems probable that fluorine, and to some extent hv droxyl, enter in some way into the amphibole molecule in combination with trivalent aluminium and iron. It is possible in one way to account for the presence of both RO, and fluorine without destroying the 1:1 ratio shown by Chemical Composition of Amphibole. BT the analyses. Thus, for example, the constituents Al,O, and Fe,O, may be regarded as combined with F and OH to form the following radicals : == /\ lll — AN _OEL =|) Ot) ——e=—©@) Eel SO SO SC >0 meee Seton ne kn eon The foregoing radicals are bivalent and, as may be seen, the addition of F, to the protoxide ratios means the introduction of Al, (or Fe,) into the inolecule, and when F, fails or is not sufficient to satisfy all of the sesqioxides, (OH),, derived from HO, accomplishes the same result. If, therefore, the ideas as set forth on page 28 are correct, namely that amphibole is a salt of a complex metasilicic acid, the assumption is now made that some of the hydrogen atoms of the acid are replaced by bivalent radicals, containing aluminium and ferric iron in com- bination with fluorine and hydroxyl as given above. These bivalent radicals therefore are regarded as isomorphous with Fe and Mg. It may be asked why the radicals [R,/”OF,]” and pie OO H) |’ have been selected instead of others? for exam- ple, ER” or [R’’F,]’, and their respective hydroxyl equiva- lents, and the answer is simply because only the former satisfy the 1:1 ratio of silica to protoxide bases shown by the analyses. Since, however, the amounts of Al,O, and Fe,O, in tremolite and some varieties of actinolite are small, the assumption of either of the radicals [R’’(F, OH)|" or [R’(F, OF), |’ would not materially affect the ratios in some cases. For the sake of comparison the possible fluor-hydroxyl radicals of trivalent ele- ments in combination with metasilicic acid: may be expressed graphically as follows: 0 O—R—(F,OH) O=RG ol sie SR (pon) Ofsic 4 So 08S) INES NO oe on According to the first assumption, bringing R’” into the molecule as a bivalent radical | R—(F, OH))”, the protoxides as given on page 36 would be increased ; according to the last [B,(F, OF), |” the protoxides would be diminished, the result- ing ratios being as follows: Si0e : R’O+[R’(F, OH)]’0 Si0. : R”’O+[R’’(F,OH)2]’20 I lige ae 1:02 1 0:98 ih 1 Wig 1:01 1 0:97 III egy: 1:02 1 0:98 LV: Tess: 1-04 1 0°95 V Weiser 1:06 1 0:93 - 38 Penfield and Stanley— The ratios are not bad in the first three analyses, but in the last two they are unsatisfactory and, moreover, in analysis V there is not sufficient fluorine and hydroxyl to satisfy the last assumption. The burden of proof rests w ‘ith the more exact ratios as given on page 36, and the assumption that the sesqui- oxides enter the metasilicate molecule as bivalent radicals corresponding to [R,’“O(FOH), |”. It is interesting to note to what extent the hydrogen atoms of the amphibole acid are replaced. According to the long- accepted formula for tremolite, Mg,OaSi,O,,, three-quarters, or 75 per cent, are replaced by Me and the remaining quarter by Ca, while in actinolite the isomorphous Fe, Mn and Mg together have been regarded as replacing three-quarters of the hydro- gens. The replacement, expressed in per cents, as they appear im the analyses, are as follows: I JHE Ill IV Vv [Fe+Mn+Mg]".........65:2 642 655 63:2 64:8 [Ca+K,+Na, Iss ray bee ae 25°8 25°7 23°7 25°5 26-1 PRO (EOL) Meera eee goss 1:9 18 4:5 6°7 , In excess a (OEM) Re e659 8:2 9°0 6°8 2°4 o alomepss IN iNan Mee tas 24-0 24°7 23-1 23°8 21°6 * A slight excess of fluorine (0°23) in the analysis. See page 50. It may be seen from the foregoing table that (Fe+Mn+ Mg) never make up 75 per cent of ‘the total hydrogen replacement, and that the figures are nem constant at about 65 per cent, Ca alone never replaces 25 per cent of the total hydro- gens, but if there are added to the Ca the small amounts of alkali metals present, K, and Na,, the near approach to 25 per cent is remarkable; in analysis [1, where Ca alone is low, the deficiency is made up by a rather high percentage of Na, O (2:152), while in the remaining analyses it ranged frem 0°19 ‘to 0°82, averaging 0°54%. In all cases K,O was low, ranging from 0°22 to 0° BA and averaging 0°33. The trivalent elements, Al and Fe, presumably entering into the amphibole molecule as bivalent fluor- hydroxyl radicals, are quite variable, and so also are the amounts of hydrogen in excess of that required in each analysis for combination as hydroxyl with Aland Fe. EpEnITE— PAarGastt= —HoRNBLENDE. The name edenzte has been employed to designate light- colored varieties of amphibole containing considerable alumina. Chemically there are analogous dark-colored varieties some- times called pargasite, containing high percentages of iron, and both kinds doubtless grade imperceptibly into one another Chemical Composition of Amphibole. 39 and also into actinolite. The names are not very characteristic nor significant, and perhaps the designation of these various varieties as hornblende is more satisfactory than the attempt to make use of several names. As will be shown, the hornblendes are characterized by having a somewhat different ratio of SiO, to the protoxide bases than that determined for tremolite and actinolite. VIL. Hornblende from Renfrew, Ontario, 4 Canada.—The erystal analyzed was of an unusually black color and brillant luster, showing the forms @ (100), 6 (O10), m (110), 7 (011) and ¢@ (031), figure 4. The specimen is No. 487 of the Brush Collection. Frag- ments used for analysis floated at 3°330 and sank at 2°249, the mean specific gravity being . 3°290. - The results of the analysis follow :— Per cents of I II Average Ratios protoxide bases Si0, 43°92 43°60 43°76 °728 ) 138 Oe “78 um ‘78 7010 | AIO). 8°35 erat 8°33 081 194 HeO} 6°99 6°80 6:90 7043 FeO 10°40 10°54 10°47 °146 | 18°3 } MnO 50 syne 50 007 09 + 58:7 MgO 12°67 12°60 12°63 °315 | 39°5 J CaO 9°86 9°82 9°84 "176 | “97 BOA K,O 1:28 ee 12s old 1:8 a 8 Na,O 3°43 nee 3°43 "055 §°9 H,O S75) Cys) 65 "036 | 4°5 F, 1ss2 Se 182 “048 J 6:0 Loss at 110° “10 100°0 100°49 (0) = FP, “76 99°73 VIL. Hornblende from Edenville, Orange Co., New York.— Crystals from this locality occur large and of a black color, very closely resembling those from Renfrew; the forms also, b, m, yr and 7 are frequently developed as in figure 4. The material used for analysis floated at 3°291 and sank at 3-278, the average being 3°285. The results of the analysis follow: 40 Penfield and Stanley— Per cents of I II Average Ratios protoxide bases Si0, 41°92 42°06 41°99 699 ) ral AiO} 1-46 eae 1-46) eos Ol San Al,O, 11°73 11°51 11°62 plea) 199 Fe,O, 2°54 2°80 2°67 CON IG Wo dee FeO 14:28 14°36 14°32 19) 25°0 MnO "25 pays! "25 003 "4 > 60°4 MgO HILez TI WSIS} YALeni7 AU) | 35:0 CaO 11°50 11°54 11°52 206 | 798 26°0 KO 292 1:04 “98 “010 r WD) > Bee Na,O 2°66 2°32 2°49 "040 5°0 H,O 66 "36 “61 "038 | 4°8 F, 80 pes 80 502215) 2°6 Loss at 110° 08 100°0 99°96 O=F, 33 99°63 IX. Hornblende from Cornwall, Orange Co., New York.— This is a very black hornblende occurring in masses lar ger than a walnut and without crystalline outline, imbedded in a rather coarse aggregate of quartz and feldspar. It was originally described by Beck* in 1842 as a new species to which the name Hudsonite was given. It was classed by J. D. Danat under pyroxene and was analyzed by Brewert and by Smith and Brush.§ It has recently been reinvestigated by Weidman,| the material used being a specimen from the Brush Collection No. 139, sent to Professor Brush in 1853 by S. R. Horton, who first found the mineral and supplied Beck “with specimens for his original description. The prismatic angle m A m was meas- ured by Penfield and found to be 55° 31". The optical proper- ties are described in detail by Weidien and he also gives a new analysis by J. L. Nelson of the chemical department of the University of Wisconsin. On testing the mineral in a closed tube it was found that the water given off at a high temperature was decidedly acid and accompanied by a deposi- tion of silica, indicating the presence of fluorine, hence it has been possible to make Nelson’s analysis more complete by making a determination of fluorine in the material, 0°27 per cent being found. It may also be added that the presence of fluorine in the mineral was suspected because the analysis did not conform to the new ideas concerning the ratios it should * Min. N. Y. 405, 1842. +System of Mineralogy, 2d ed., 1844. + Dana’s Mineralogy, 3d ed., 269. § This Journal, xvi, 1853. || Ibid., xv, 227, 1903. Chemical Composition of Amphibole. 41 give. The analysis of Nelson, modified by the introduction of 0-27 per cent of fluorine, follow :— Per cents of Ratios protoxide bases SiO, 36°86 C14 aor TIO) 1:04 ONS ve Al,O 12°10 DOT ea a Fe,O 741 046 J FeO 93°35 324 | 45°9 ) MnO O77 “005 “hee MeO 1-90 047 | 6-6 | CaO 10°59 "189 | 09 26°6 ] K,O 3:20 one yO Sy Boel Na,O 1:20 “052 | a3 \ H,O 1°30 OD 10:1 F 27 007 | 1-0 99:99 100-0 O-F, ali 99°88 X. Hornblende from Monte Somma, Ltaly.— 5 The material analyzed was taken from a speci- men showing an aggregate of small greenish black crystals, many of them terminated by faces having a brilliant luster, developed as shown in figure 5, the forms being, m (110), considerably striated, 7 (011), p (101) and some- times z(121). The material used for analysis floated at 3°310 and sank at 3:255, the average specific gravity being 3°283. The results of the analysis follow :— Per cents of I I Average Ratios protoxide cases Si0, 39°41 39°55 39°48 “658 ) 662 MO; “30 Plea 30) “004 | hs Al,O 12°71 13°27 WAI) 2) 179 Fe,O, 7:30 leo 125 O45 foe FeO 10°73 Lane 10°73 149 | 19°6 MnO 1°14 85 1:00 014 9 a0 MeO) 11°76 Ibe Iy 11:47 1287 | 37°8 CaO NENG) 11-95 12°01 DANA cage 28:2 | K,O 2°29 are 2°39 025 r oh) S03}. > Bisel Na,O i a er. 0 3-6 | H,0O "82 "95 “76 042 | 55 F, "05 ae "05 001 | al Loss at 110° a2 —- 100°0 100°25 sie Oe 2 100°28 49 Penfield and Stanley— The hornblendes represented by analyses VI to X constitute a group by themselves, which may next be considered. They differ from the tremolite-actinolite group in that the ratio of SiO, : RO, instead of being as 1: 1, indicates an excess of RO over SiO, and with the increase of RO there is a correspond- ing increase in the amounts of Al,O, and Fe,O,. The relations are best shown in the accompanying tables, ‘where the Te quotients, (the sum of the results obtained by div iding the per- centages of Al,O, and Fe,O, by the corresponding ‘molecular weights) are given together. with the SiO, : RO ratios, RO including Na, O, K,O, H,O and F,. R.O; quotients SiO. RO VI. Pierrepont "045 1B TOR VII. Renfrew 124 1S) OS) VIII. Edenville 129 1 LTO IX. Cornwall "165 1 Terk xe Mte. Somma a7 l 1°14 The first analysis of this group forms a connecting link between the actinolite and hornblende groups. If it is com- pared with analysis V no essential differences will be found; it is only when the ratios are examined that a slight excess of RO is noted in the mineral from Pierrepont, and this oceurs with a smaller R,O, quotient than that found in the actinolite from Krageré; as previously stated, the two groups grade imperceptibly into one another. The other analyses are, “how- ever, considerably different from any thus far considered ; they are all of dark green to black varieties, the color due to the presence of iron; the percentages of sesquioxides are high, about 20 per cent in TX and X, and the excess of RO as shown by the ratios is very noticeable. Another marked difference is seen on comparing the silica percentages; starting with about 57°5 per cent in tremolite, it falls below 37 per cent in analysis 1X. It is evident that if the minerals of the amphibole group are all to be regarded as salts of one acid, we must in some way be able to account for the introduction into the amphibole molecule of both sesquioxides and increasing amounts of pro- toxides. This may be done by assuming in addition to the fluor-hydroxyl radical [R’”’,0 (F,OH),]” thus far considered, some other radicals containing both R,O, and RO. Thus there might be considered the following alumina and the correspond- ing ferric iron radicals. —Al—0 Bae ONE at ok iy ee Nea ; —— ——— Chemical Composition of Amphibole. 43 The attempt will now be made to show that by assuming the existence of certain bivalent basic radicals of the type just indicated, and regarding them as replacing the hydrogen atoms of the amphibole acid, a similarity may be found between these basic hornblendes and the members of the tremolite-acti- nolite group. There will first be deducted from the ratios the —AI—(F,OH) alumo, fluor-hydroxyl radical 0 , the same as in . —Al—(F,OH) the tremolite group. Next there will be deducted a radical of O—Na the type 0 and in most cases these two JI o->(Fe,Mg) oO Na | radicals may be so chosen as to satisfy or include all of the sesqui- oxides, and leave the protoxide base in sufficient amount to form RSiO,. In one analysis (X) a third radical seems neces- sary . >O >R . To indicate the method of calculation ; fo —A|l—O there will be deducted from the total ratio first the alumo, fluor-hydroxyl! radical, with its equivalent of silica, thus SiO,, Al,O, and (F,OH) in the proportion 1: 1:1, and next the basic radical with A1l,O,, (Fe,Mg)O and Na,O with its equiva- lent of silica in the proportion 1:1:1:1. It is then possible to calculate the proportion of the total hydrogen atoms replaced by the several bivalent radicals and the different bases, and attention may be called to the fact that calcium, helped out at times by traces of sodium and potassium, satisfies 25 per cent, or one quarter of the total hydrogen atoms of the amphibole acid, the same as in the tremolite group ;—that this is a mere coincidence seems hardly possible, and it may be taken, it is believed, in support of the theory advanced. ‘The results of calculation are as follows :— Anatysis VIf, Renrrew, Canaba. Alea " ors | Ratios O Residue ook Residue | AI(B,OH) | | AON | [Si,Ti]O, "738 —'065 673 —'059 614 [Al,Fe],0, 124 —065 059 —-059 ote [Fe,Mn,Mg]O 468 468 —'059 "409 CaO - +176 176 176 [K,Na],O “069 069 — 059 010 aa Oe aa oh ROle 019 Total RO= -614 GaN; "7 PASO1)] fF Ale a Ratios | | Residue | ook Residue | ae (F,OH) | AKOLNa | [Si,Ti]O, T17 051 666 Ue 588 Al,Fe],0, 129 —051 078 — 078 Sige [FeMn, Mg]O 481 Shes 481 — ‘078 403 CaO -209 eee “209 ) a 181 EES Na],O “050 oe "050 5 mines: a H,O 030 } ysl Notal RO=—53845 F, OO \ eect Phan Proportion of radicals and remaining bases :— Ratios Per cents [Al,0(F,OH),]0 051 71 [ Al,O,RNa, ]"O 078 11-6 [Fe,Mn,Mge|O 403 56° CaO “181 25°4 100°0 44 Penfield and Stanley— The proportion of the various radicals and of the remaining bases in the foregoing analysis are as follows :— Ratios Per cents [ Al,O(F,OH,]’0 065 8°8 [ Al.O,RNa, |’O 059 8-0 [Fe,Mn,Me|O 409 : 55°4 [| Ca,Na,]O "186 2am H,O “019 2°6 HOS 100°0 From the foregoing interpretation it may be seen that all of the fluorine and inate half of the hydrogen are needed to form the alumo, fluor-hydroxyl radical ; that sodium is present — in just about sufficient amount to form the second basic radi- eal, and that calcium plus the trifling excess of sodium satisfies 25 per cent of the hydrogen atoms of the amphibole acid. Anatysis VIII, Eprenvitin, N. Y. According to the interpretation, in this analysis all of the fluorine and water are needed for the alumo-hydroxyl radical ; sodium is not quite sufficient for the second basic radical, so a very little of its nearest related constituent, calcium, is taken ; in the final residue SiO, and RO are present in the proportion 588: 584 or 1: -992; while again it is found that the residual calcium satisfies 25 per cent of the hydrogen atoms of the amphibole acid. Chemical Composition of Amphibole. 45 Awnatysis IX, Cornnwatn, N. Y.—Hupsonire. | Al—(F,OH) | ” O—Na |” Ratios | > O | Residue Oee Residue L AIC (F,OH) | Loe L O—Na | [Si, Ti]O, 627 —-076 ‘551 —-089 462 [Al,Fe],0, 165 076 089 —-089 ae [Fe,Mn,Mg|O -376 ae 376 —'089 287 CaO 189 nae 189 ee 165 [K,Na],O 065 one 065 : 072 ) Hee: 003 003 F, ‘007 § Ee a Total RO=:455 Proportion of radicals and remaining bases : Ratios Per cents [ Al,O(F,OH), |’’O 076 12) [ Al,O,RNa, ]O 089 14:3 [| Fe,Mn,Mg|O 287 46°3 CaO °165 26°6 H,O “0038 st) 620 100°0 The interpretation of this analysis is essentially like that of the previous one. Analysis X, Mte. Somma.—tIn this analysis the amount of water is small and only a trace of fluorine is present, conse- quently in order to establish a 1:1 ratio between SiO, and RO it seems necessary to assume, in addition to the radicals pre- viously suggested, a third one of the following type : Al Os SO Re NEO The interpretation is then as follows :— Penfield and Stanley— 46 O6F: anpIsayy OW [83°90 anptsery [ “ L 380-— 620 == GEV ssa ew kK ON || Sein anptsery 70-— eF0-— SF0.— [Ho—lv | LOR 7 HOI | SO1JRY “iL Ou olen] O70) ols Ww uno | ‘oO Pa‘tv] ‘ols | Shemical Composition of Amphibole. 47 Proportion of the radicals and remaining bases :— Ratios Per cents [ Al,O(OH),|"O 043 ™ 6°5 | Al,O,R]O O82 4:8 [| Al,O,RNa,|O ‘097 Wale | Fe,Mn,Mg|O 321 A8°5 CaO "169 25°5 662 100-0 Except for the added radical the interpretation of this analysis is like that of the previous ones, and again the residual calcium replaces 25 per cent of the hydrogen of the amphi- bole acid. : Attention will next be called to some varieties of hornblende which do not conform to the two groups previously considered. XI. Basaltic Hornbiende from Bilin, Bohemia.—To col- lectors, this is probably the best known of all basaltic horn- blendes. It occurs in good sized and well formed crystals, generally showing the forms m (110), 6(010), 7 (011) and p (101), often developed so as to appear like a hexagonal prism with rhombohedral terminations. The material used for analysis was obtained from carefully selected crystals, sent to this laboratory by Mr. Warren M. Foote of Philadelphia. The material used for analysis floated on the heavy solution at the specitic gravity 3°242 and sank at 3-210, the average being 3°226. The results of the analysis are as follows — Per cents of I II Average Ratios protoxide bases S10, 39°88 40°02 39°95 666 } 687 TiO, 1°70 1°66 1°68 qi (26 Ore ey 40 Gs 17°58 IE oni Ber: 7°25 7°25 7°25 045 ( 7 FeO 2°18 sn 2°18 031 } 4:5 } MnO trace pen trace Se Fae pS MgO 14714 14:16 14°15 "354 | 51-0.| CaO 12°07 11°86 11°96 DNS} be 30°7 KeO 1:98 wens 1:98 021 oot 350) 741-1 Na,O 3°16 eee 3°16 051 74 Ee Ose a>) :55 "53 “41 023 | 3°3 F, "03 Bgl "08 001 | a Loss at 110° (733 = 100-0 100°46 E Oh Cl 100°45 48 Penfield and Stanley— In this analysis it will be noted that with a large R,O, quo- tient the ratio of SiO, : RO=-687 : 694=1-00 : 1-01, or almost exactly 1:1, thus differing from analysis VII to aK (summe- rized on page 42), all of which showed an excess of RO. It is also interesting to note that the ratio of this hornblende is like that of garnet; SiO, : R,O,: RO being 3:00 : 0°95 : 3-03, a very close approximation tO OLE: In the interpretation of the analysis there may be assumed, in addition to the alumo-hydroxyl radical, one similar to that used in analysis X, [A],O,R], except that in this case it is pro- posed to double the radical and make one R equal (Fe,Mg) the other Na, plus a little Ca; or, since there is practically no fluorine in the mineral, the water may be regarded as basic and only one radical need be used. The results in detail, regarding (OH) as combined with aluinina, are as follows: Ratios aa | Residue [Al O,(Be, ie) : | AI—OH | | Al, O,(Na,,Ca) | Residue [Si,Ti]O, 687 —24 663 —194 “469 | Al, Fe], O, 218 —'024 °194 —194 eas [Fe,Mg]O *385 I: "385 —097 288 CaO SS} Dre 213) 7) gaye 188 [K,Na],O 072 ee “072 | : H,O 023 | ay Seis ES es zeae F, “OOL | -—- Total RO 3 -A7e Or disregarding the small amount of fluorine present and con- sidering ‘all the. water as basic, only the second radical need be used, as follows: [ Al,O,(Fe Mg)|" Ratios | Al, O° (Na, sCayila Residue [Si,Ti]O, “687 ——9.118 “469 [ Al,Fe],0, 218 —-218 ei | Fe,Mg|O "385 == OY) OG CaO 213 fe 176 [Kk,Na],O 072 foe dP H,O 023 02 Total RO= -475 Proportion of radicals and remaining bases, I regarding (OH) as combined with Al, II regarding water as basic: Ratios I PercentsI Ratios II Per cents II [ALO(OH),]"O0 — -024 3-4 she en [ Al,O,R]"O 194 28°0 "218 315 [ e,Mg|O *288 415 COAG 39°8 CaO "188 27-1 EIG 25°4 H,O Mae ips - 023 38 “694 100°0 692 100°0 Chemical Composition of Amphibole. 49 Of the two interpretations the latter is probably the sim- pler and brings the residual calcium nearer to 25 per cent as in the previous analysis. It should be pointed out also that if the basic alumo-radical used in this analysis is taken by itself and combined with its equivalent of silica, the result becomes (Na,,Ca)(Fe,Mg)A1,Si,0,,, analogous in type to the basic ~ ,alumo-silicate molecule of ieehien mak, page 24. The essential difference in this particular case between Tschermak’s theory and the present one is that, according to the former a definite basic alumo-silicate molecule is regar rded as isomor phous with Ca(Fe, Mg),8i,0.,. XIL. Hornblende from Grenville township, Quebec, Canada. —This hornblende is very unusual on account of the large amounts of alumina and fluorine it contains and the low per- centages of iron, a combination not often met with. It has been analyzed by Prof. B. J. Harrington,* who has kindly sent on material for Pueee and by R. A. A. Johnston.¢ The color of the mineral is a ight brown, with somewhat of a reddish tune: it is unusually transparent and shows a perfect prismatic cleavage. The specific gravity as given by Harrington is 3°110. The new analysis by Stanley, from which the ratio is calculated, confirms the results of the earlier analyses. Per cents of Harrington Johnston Stanley Ratios - See bases SiO, 45°50 46-09 45°79 763 }°773 56-5 $575 Oe 68 undet. 1:20 015 208 ANIOY 12°25 12°92 11°37 "112 Ite Oe 28 <7) “42 003), 115 ‘ FeO “G5 none “42 006 § MnO Blah 36 "39 006 ) 6 MgO 20°63 20°82 Dele 528 6 577 CaO 13°31 12°91 eq th "227 | wot K,O 1-76 1°84 1°69 018 \ 1994 248 Na,O 2°76 2°36 2°51 “040 | 200 H,O 40 66 67 037 4°2 EF. 2°80 2°84 2°76 072 | 3°9 J 7-9 101°28 101°60 101°06 —— OE tee ell 19 1°16 100°0 100°06 100°41 99°90 It may be noted first that with a sesquioxide quotient ot "115 the ratio of Si0,: RO+F, is as 1: 1:20, which is not exactly in accord with ‘the results obtained from analyses VII * This Journal, xv, 392, 1908. + Geol. Sur. of Can., vol. xiii. Am. Jour. Sct.—FourtH SERIES, VoL. XXIII, No. 183.—January, 1907. 4 50 Penfield and Stanley— to X as summarized on page 42. The relations, moreover, are not materially altered if the titaninm is regarded as T1,0,, when the excess of oxygen recorded in the analysis as TiO, would be just about sufficient to convert the FeO and MnO of the analysis to sesquioxides : according to the latter interpre- tation the sesquioxide quotient becomes -128, and the ratio of SiO,: RO=1:1:21. With the high percentage of fluorine: in the mineral it seems necessary to assume that some of it is united with a bivalent element, magnesium for example, to form a radical [Mg]; and according to this assumption a balance may be struck so as to leave a final residue in which SiO,: RO=1:1. The interpretation is as follows :— O—Na |” Ratios [ Mek ] '’ Resi- esau Resi- EN, R | | MeF | due MCF due | A Ob | ae k< 2 la O—Na | [Si,Ti]O, 778 —038 740 —-034 ‘706 — 081 NIMES Ose 115 25 AN eae» dL =o | Fe,Mn,Mg|O -540 S01 464 See 464 ——s0.0 CaO 297 Se 207 aan eo) ie [K,Na],O ‘058 Se a5) OSS) tee "058 | ae HO 037 ere 03 ee eae 057 tern i ‘O120s 8 —=03980 02044 =. 032 eaten ei Total RO Proportion of radicals and remaining bases :— Ratios Per cents [MeF’],0 038 4:9 [ Al,OF,|"O "034 4:4 [Al,O,RNa,J’O — -081 10-4 [Fe,Mn,Me|O 383 49°3 CaO 204 26°2 H,O 037 4°8 Pe 100°0 The final result here again shows 25 per cent (a little over) of the hydrogen atoms replaced by calcium. In analysis I there was noted a slight excess of fluorine over that required by the alumina to form the radical [A1,OF,]’, 037 "624 and it may be assumed that a very small amount of the radi- cal [MgI'] is present in that variety of tremolite. Summary and Conclusion.—The chemical composition of amphibole can be explained by assuming that it is based upon a metasilicate molecule, which is, however, undoubtedly of a multiple and complex nature. The uniformity in crystalliza- tion of the different varieties in spite of the fact that they show a wide range in their chemical composition, is a strong Chemical Composition of Amphibole. 51 argument for the uniformity in structure of the acid part of the molecule, enabling it to exert a controlling influence throughout the series and so to determine the er -ystal form. That fluorine and hydroxyl present are integral parts of the amphibole molecule and that they are to be regarded as iso- morphous with the protoxides is considered as definitely proven by the results of the analyses. The presence in many amphi- boles of considerable amounts of sesquioxides is explained by their introduction into the metasilicate molecule in the form of various basic, bivalent radicals. It is suggested that the char- acter of Anes radicals and the degree to which they enter the amphibole molecule may be due to the influence of mass effect determined by the conditions under which the mineral was formed. This method of interpretation of the analyses of amphibole is upheld by the following facts: first, in the analy- ses of the simpler varieties, tremolite and actinolite, thet sa ratio between RO and SiO, is very sharp and indicates clear ly that the structure of the molecule is that of a metasilicate and the small amounts of RO present cannot be introduced into the formula without destr oying this ratio except in the form of the —R—(F,OH) bivalent radical O ; secondly, the identity of the —R (F,OH) crystalline structure of the whole amphibole series points strongly to the assumption that the acid radical is the same throughout; thirdly, in the analyses of the hornblendes, by the assumption that two or more radicals, containing the trivalent elements with smaller amounts of the protoxide bases, enter the molecule isomorphous with RO, the residue left after the subtraction of these molecules gives the metasilicate ratio of RO:S8i0, =1:1; fourthly, in all cases the calcium oxide of the analyses together with the small amounts of oxides of the alkalies available forms very closely 25 per cent of the various radicals and bases, or in other words replaces one-fourth of the hydrogen atoms of the amphibole acid. This last fact is too constant throughout the analyses to be looked upon as a coin- cidence, but would seem rather to be a fundamental fact con- cerning the amphibole molecule, and furnishes one of the strongest pieces of evidence as to the correctness of the present method of interpreting the chemical constitution of the min- eral. Mineralogical Laboratory of the Sheffield Scientific School of Yale Univ ae New Haven, Conn., October, 1906. 52K. J. Bush—Two genera of tubicolous Annelids. Art. V.—WNotes on the Relation of the two genera of tubi- colous Annelids, Vermilia Lamarck, 1818, and Pomato- ceros Philippi, 1844; by K. J. Busy, Ph.D. [Brief Contributions to Zoology from the Museum of Yale Univ., No. LXVII.] In 1844 Philippi described a species from the Mediter- ranean, figuring its operculum (/) under the name of Pomatoceros tricuspis, creating for it the then new genus Pomatoceros, at the same time calling attention to its possible identity with Serpula triquetroides Delle Chiaje ’28, which identity was established by Claparede ’69 (p. 182). Philippi also pointed out its resemblance to Vermilia triquetra Lam- arck °18, but on a later page applied this latter name to a form having a different operculum cap, which he also figured (7). Among a number (12) of beautifully preserved specimens recently received from the Naples aquarium, under the name Pomatoceros triquetroides ( Vermilia triquetra),* two have the operculum capped by a low asymmetrical caleareous cone surmounted by a group of three conspicuous tapered spines, well figured (P) in front view by Philippi, as P. tricuspis. Two have a similar but much elongated cone gradually tapered to the narrow truncated tip without spines, well figured (7’) in back view by Philippi,t as Vermilia tr iquetr a Lamarck ; one is splitting at the summit, revealing a shorter interior cone. All of the others have the short cone without spines, compara- tively broadly truncated on the end, the tip sometimes elon- gated and indistinctly notched. Similar gr eat variation in form of the operculum cap is found among specimens in the Yale Museum, of Pomatoceros triqueter “Linné from Denmark. The same forms were also figured by Sowerby 720 (pl. 1, figs. 2 a, b, c,), as Serpula triquetra Linne} ( Vermelia Lamarek, explanation of plate). The various species and even the genera with which these forms, being separated, have been identified by several more recent authors , apparently without establishing other more essential ai@onenaee, has bronght about the present great misconception or misinterpretation of the original application of names. In the two species under obser- vation no generic differences, as the development of the tho- * This combination is given by Lo Bianco 793 (p. 86). } The operculum is often found with concave base, the wall drawn upward, giving in back view the effect of the median angle shown in Philippi’s figure. { As the fragment of mollusk to which the tubes of Vermilia represented in Sowerby’s fioure 2 are attached is presumably that of Pecten maximus found on the coast of England, his species could not have been the true Ser- pula triquetra. Its identity as suggested by Johnston ’65, with Vermilia conica Fleming ’25 and Serpula armata Johnston (not Hdwards + Litken + Grube), seems not to have been definitely established. K. J. Bush—Two genera of tubscolous Annelids. 53 racic membrane, form of collar, setze and uncini, are found, but only those of specific importance, as comparative size, number of branchie, comparative length and breadth of setee and num- ber of teeth on uncini, as well as the form of the operculum cap. The form of the tubes from Naples is also accurately shown in Sowerby’s figure 2. Lamarck 718, under this name ( Vermilia triquetra), gives three widely separated localities (European Ocean, Mediter- ranean Sea, and Australian Sea), showing that there must have been three similar but distinct species under consideration, presumably Serpula triqueter Linné from North Atlantic, Serpula triquetroides Delle Chiaje (Philippi’s figure /’) from the Mediterranean, and variety > from Australia, which does not appear to have been identified with any of the more recently established species from that region. As JV. rostrata, the first species given by Lamarck under his genus Vermilia, has been found to be a typical Sperobranchus (Blainville °17), the second species would naturally stand for the type and the first named locality as the type locality, thus making Serpula triqueter Linne* (Lamarck in part) the type of the genus Vermilia, and as the triqueter Linné non Lam- ‘arck has been correctly referred by more recent authors to the genus Pomatoceros (Philippi ’44), this name becomes synony- mous with Vermilia, but for convenience might possibly be used as a varietal name to distinguish the form having the cluster of spines on the operculum cap, which occurs in the various species. Quatrefages 65 united Pomatoceros and Ver- milia, but extended the limits of this genus to include many distinct genera. Among the nine (9) species placed in the genus by Philippi "44, the first ( Vermalia triquetra) only occurs among the eight (8) originally described by Lamarck, so that Philippi’s inter- pretation is correct only as far as his species agree with this type. His species differ, however, not only in having the operculum capped by a calcareous or chitinous end, but also in the form of the peduncle, some being simple, stemlike, some- times annulated, others somewhat compressed with conspicu- ous side appendages, as V. triquetra (fig. ’}, V. elongata (tig. L), V. polytrema (fig. WV), a character apparently not hitherto considered of special interest; the manner of its attachment to the operculum or the relation of one to the other, which considerably modifies the form of both, is also important. These facts have been either ignored or, as stated by Claparéde "70 (p. 523), thought of small importance, until the genus '* This was erroneously given by the writer ’05 (p. 222) as the type of the. genus Pomatoceros. P. tricuspis Philippi 44 (not Leuckart ’49) was the only species given by Philippi. 54. K. J. Bush—Two genera of tubicolous Annelids. Vermilia has become a kind of dumping ground for ill- defined, little understood, often untigured forms, even some- times for the empty tubes themselves. As more material has been studied, the species thus becoming better understood, the animals in many instances have been ‘found to agree only in having a more or less bulbous operculum on a simple stemlike peduncle, capped by a horn-colored chitinous end (see Langer- hans, Marenzeller, Ehlers, Moore). Comparative studies of other characters have revealed tangible differences, showing that even this interpretation, often designated as the Vermilia of Philippi, has been too laxly applied, necessitating the estab- lishing of new genera, as follows :— VERMILIOPSIS Saint- ‘Joseph 94, restricted,—type YT. infun- dibulum Philippi *44, as Vermilia, figure, not of authors. See p. 56. Mediterranean Sea. The uncini have about 13 angular closely appressed teeth (in profile), the last one large and truncated. ‘The abdominal sete are strongly bent at the base of the rather broad angular tapered blades. Meravermitia Bush *05,—type J/. multicristata (Philippi "44, as Vermilia, figure+Marenzeller °93, as Vermelia, fig- ures) Bush. Mediterranean Sea. The uncini approach the form of those characteristic of the genus Protula and haye about 18 sharp closely appressed teeth, the last one long, slender and curved. The abdominal setee are but moderately bent, with broad abruptly tapered blades. Paravermitta Bush ’05,—type P. bermudensis Bush ’ Bermuda. The uncini with about 15 sharp appressed teeth, the last one large and truncated and more prominent. The abdominal setee are but little curved, with long angular regularly tapered blades. Thoracic membrane forming a 3-lobed collar and lateral border to about the fifth segment; no posterior border. PsEUDOVERMILIA gen. nog occidentalis (McIntosh 785, as Spirobranchus, figures) Bush. Bermuda. The uncini with about 13 closely appressed teeth, the last one prominent, large and bifid on end. The abdominal setze bent, with long, angular abruptly tapered blades. Thoracic membrane forming a 38-lobed collar only, without lateral and posterior border.— Specimens of Vermilia triquetra Linné (Pomatoceros tri- queter Morch) in the Yale Museum from Denmark are of good size, twice as large as V. trequetroides (Delle Chiaje), with 7 thoracic and about 70 abdominal segments, the branchize and peduncle beautifully banded with blue. There are 16 rather short, stout branchize in each lobe, connected by a basal mem- K. J. Bush—Two genera of tubicolous Annelids. 55 branous web. The peduncle arising from the outer base of one of the lobes is compressed, with a thin gradually widening membrane on each side terminating in a long tapered free end at the base of the operculum, which, developing abruptly at the back, is in profile somewhat triangular in form, deep in front, oblique beneath, and truncated on top, capped by a calcareous more or less flattened disk having an abruptly developed asymmetrical cone-shaped mass or node of calcare- ous deposit on top, often bearing a group of three conspicuous spines, in other instances very ir rreeular in outline; none seen forming a regular elongated cone as in Sowerby’ 5 figure 2e. The thoracic membrane is conspicuously developed, ‘for ming a deep rolling 3-lobed collar, the median lobe large, deepest in the middle, “with conspicuously fimbriated edge, the lateral lobes less fimbriated, extending backward as a wide free lateral border joining a deep angular posterior flap. Inside the collar at the base of each lateral incision or cleft is an elongated irregular-shaped organ. Collar fascicle small, the setze some- what geniculate, with rapidly tapered blades; other six fasci- cles in very oblique series at the end of long tori situated in the posterior border of separate membranous areas, the setze simple tapered; the uncini trapezoidal with 8 rather coarse strongly curved pointed teeth, the terminal one square cut and twisted. Abdominal sete a little flari ing with serrate edge and long slender tapered end. Vermilia triquetroides (Delle Chiaje) is readily distinguished by the very different form of the operculum and operculum cap, it being rather shallow, con- cave beneath, but giving evidence of becoming inflated and bulbous in form under favorable conditions ; ane cap is Invari- ably an asymmetrical calcareous cone roughened by concentric lines of growth (see p. 52). There are 14 or 15 branchize in each lobe united for a con- siderable distance by a delicate membranous web. The tho- racic membrane is much developed, forming a very deep roll- ing 3-lobed collar, with conspicuously fimbriated edge merging into a wide lateral border and deep tapered posterior lobe. A peculiar irregularly shaped elongated organ is attached inside the collar at the base of each lateral cleft or incision. Philippi *44 and Lo Bianco ’93 give the number of branchie as. 18 in each lobe, so that the specimens under consideration cannot be fully developed. Animals taken from the tubes are beautifully banded with blue. A very young specimen between 2 and gmm long, taken from its tube, has the side appendages on the peduncle with the very slender free ends at the base of the small angular opercu- lum, which is capped by a simple unequally thickened calea- 560K. J. Bush—Two genera of tubicolous Annelids. reous disk (there are 5 branchiz in each lobe). Another con- siderably larger specimen has a scarcely raised asymmetrical cone, which in profile has the appearance of an unevenly thickened disk very much like figure VV given by Philippi as Vermilia polytrema (p. 194) and described as a very short oblique cone, so that there can be little question that his spe- cies represents the young of the Mediterranean V. trique- troides. The figure given by Langerhans ’83, under the name V. polytrema variety ‘digitata, from Madeira is also probably the young of some species; the drawing (fig. 48) is, however, very ‘misleading, as the digitate or fimbriate edge of the collar appears as a part of the operculum. The Vermilia dinema Morch ’63 (p. 388) also becomes synonymous. Historical Notes on the name Vermilia infundibulum. SERPULA INFUNDIBULUM - Martini, 1776 (figure); Gmelin, ed. 1806 (p. 607); Lamarck 1818 (p. 364). Seas of India, on stones, tube only. Lamarck describes tubes in his cabinet from the same locality with variety 6 from Isle of King, Australia. The name does not occur under his genus Vermilia. West Indies is given by Morch ’63 (p. 389) as the locality for Martini’s species, which does not appear to be again mentioned under any of the species belonging to that fauna ; Lamarck is quoted (p. 882) in the synonymy of Serpula vermicularis ; his locality, however, is omitted. Both Quatrefages *65 (p. 524) and Claparede 770 (p. 523) state that it-is impossible to cor- rectly determine Gmelin’s species. Serpula infundibulum Delle Chiaje °28 (p. 226, figures) + Lo Bianco 793 (p. 83) non Mar tini. SERPULA CRATER Olaparéde ’70 (p. 525, figures). Mediter- ranean, Bay of Naples. This species is referred to the genus Hydroides by Morch °63 (p. 380). Vermilia infundibulum Philippi °44 (p. 198, figure) not of authors. Vermilia multivaricosa Morch °63 (p. 389) + Marenzeller "93 (p. 39, figures) non Lo Bianco. Ver miliopsis multivaricosa Saint-Joseph ’94 + Bush ° (type, p. 223). VERMILIOPSIS INFUNDIBULUM (Philippi) Bush non Saint- Joseph. Mediterranean. As none of the foregoing species prove to be the same as Philippi’s, the name multivaricosa becomes superfluous, unfor- tunately causing great confusion in names, especially as mzzlte- varicosu was given for the type of the genus Vermiliopsis in K. J. Bush—Two genera of tubicolous Annelids. 57 1905 and Saint-Joseph’s interpretation in 1906 does not appear to be in accord with Philippi’s species. A comparison of the figures of the operculum given by the two authors, as well as 3 those of the setae and uncini given by Langerhans 784, as V. infundibulum and V. spirorbis, and Marenzeller ’93, as V. multivaricosa, reveals well-marked differences. The species described by Lo Bianco °93 pe very like the one given by Marion and Bobretzky *75, as V. infundibulum. Vermilia infundibulum Claparéde 70 (p. 528, figures) + Langerhans ’80 (p. 119, figures) non Philippi. Genus? Craparbper nom. nov, Bay of Naples and Atlantic at Madeira. Although well-figured and described, the true generic rela- tion of this species, for which a new name is required, cannot be determined, as the thoracic membrane is not sufficiently well defined. It is. described as large, forming a 3-lobed collar, and is represented in the figure as not forming a pos- terior border. The species is cited by Saint-Joseph as a typical Vermilia. Figures given by Langerhans ’84 as V. spirorbis show marked affinity with those of Claparede. Vermilia infundibulum Marion and Bobretzky °75 (p. 98, figures) non Philippi and Claparede. ? Vermilia multivaricosa Lo Bianco *93 (p. 98) non Maren- zeller. Genus ? MARSEILLESENSIS nom. noy. Mediterranean at Marseilles and Bay of Naples ; off Cannes ? Generic relation doubtful, shows affinity with the species dredged off Cannes, figur ed (116) by Saint-Joseph ’06, as Vermiliopsis infundibulum 3 in part. The Vermilia galeata Grube ’60 (p. 113, figure) from Porto Re, Adriatic, is a related species. Vermilia infundibulum Langerhans ’84 (p. 278) non ’80 and preceding authors. (Teste Saint-Joseph.) Vermiliopsis infundibulum Saint-Joseph 06 (p. 249, figure) in part. PARAVERMILIA (?) MEDITERRANEA nom. nov. Atlantic at Madeira and Mediterranean off St. Raphaél. This species as described by Saint-Joseph has some atftinity with the type of the genus Paravermilia, but a comparison of the setee and uncini is necessary before this generic rela- tionship can be definitely established. The second briefly mentioned example seems a distinct species. = 58 = A. J. Bush—Two genera of tubrcolous Annelids. BrsLioGRAPHY. Blainville, H. M. D. de. 1819. Dictionnaire d’histoire Natu- relles, Paris, France. Bush, K. J. 1905. Tubicolous Annelides of the Tribes Sabel- lides and Serpulides from the Pacific. Harriman Alaska Expedition, XII, New York, U.S. A. Chiaje, St. Delle. 1828. Memorie sulla storie e notomia degli animali senza vertebre del regno di Napoli, III. Claparéde, E. 1869-70. Les annélides Chétopodes du golfe de Naples. Mem. Soc. phys. Hist. nat. Geneve, XX. Fleming, J. 1825. On the British Testaceous Annelides. Edin- burgh Phil. Jour., XII. Gmelin. Edition 1806. Systema Nature. Johnston, G. 1865. Catalogue of the British non-parasitical worms in the collection of the British Museum. Lamarck, J. B. P. A.de. 1818. Histoire naturelle des animaux sans vertébres, V. : Langerhans, P. 1880 and 1884. Die Wurmfauna von Madeira, Pts. Land IV. Zeitsch. wiss. Zool., XX XIII and XL. Linné, C. von. 1767. Systema Nature, XII. Lo Bianco, 8. 1893. Gli anellidi tubicoli trovati nel golfo di Napoli, Atti R. Accad. Sci. Napoli (2), V. McIntosh, W. C. 1885. Report on the Annelida Polycheta H. M. 8. Challenger, XII. Marenzeller, E. von. 1893. Polychaeten des Grundes. Denks. Kais. Akad. wiss., LX. Marion, A. F., et Bobretzky, N. 1875. Annélides du golfe de Marseilles. Ann. Sci. Nat. (6), IL. Martini. 1776. Berl. Beschift., 2. Mérch, A. L. 1863. Revisio Critica Serpulidarum. Naturhist. Tidsskrift, I. Philippi, A. 1844. On the genus Serpula, enumeration of Medi- terranean species. Archiv fiir Naturg., X. Quatrefages, A. de. 1865. Histoire Naturelle des Annéles, II. Saint-Joseph, Baron de. 1894 and 1906. Annélides polychétes des cotes de Dinard. Ann. Sci. Nat. (7), XVIII. Annélides polychétes deg cotes de France. Ann. Sci. Nat. (9), IIL Sowerby, J. 1820. Genera of recent and fossil Shells, I. Zoological Laboratory, December 14th, 1906. Ford— Chalcopyrite Crystals from Arakawa, Japan. 59 Arr. VI.—Chaleopyrite Crystals from Arakawa, Japan ; by W. E. Forp. A sMALL suite of unusually interesting chalcopyrite crystals from Arakawa, Japan were recently presented to the brush Collection by Professor T. Wada of Tokyo. The crystals present no forms new to the mineral but show such unusual habits of crystallization for chalcopyrite as to warrant a brief description. The following forms were identified upon the enyctals:; 6: (O01). 7 U0), ¢:(203); eo), a (113). oy (ye a: (113), p, (111), f (312), s (518) ; the only quite rare form among them being the tetragonal scalenohedron (312), which has been designated by the letter f This form has been previ- ously observed by Sonheur on crystals from the Victoria Mine near Burgholdingshausen, Siegen*. All of the different forms present on the crystals are represented in an ideal combination in figure 1, which will also serve to illustrate one of the types of development. The peculiar development of the crystals is brought about by the entire suppression or the great subordination of half of the faces of the forms ¢, x, p,m, and p,. This causes the crystals to be greatly lengthened in the direction of one of the horizontal diagonal axes and gives a prominent development to the faces in the zone m, p, c, while the occurrence of only one base causes the faces of the negative sphenoid p, to meet in a sharp keel-like angle below... Figure 2, which is an ortho- graphic projection upon aplane p arallel to m’” (110), of the ideal crystal represented in figure 1, has been introduced to better illustrate this last peculiarity. Only the upper faces of the various scalenohedral forms are to be found and they serve to terminate the crystals at either end. * Zs. Kryst., xxiii, 545, 1894. 60 Ford—Chalcopyrite Crystals from Arakawa, Japan. Figure 3 is an attempt to represent one of the crystals of this type in its true proportions. The faces g, p,, and e, as is shown, often are repeated many times at the ends of the erystals ; g and p, by their oscillation with each other form at first a series of steps, but this soon results in simply fine striation lines which give a rounded appearance to the ends of the erystals. The crystal represented by figure 3 is 17™™ in its greatest length and 5™™ in height. Figure 4 is of a crystal of the same general type but having the tendency to elongate parallel to the diagonal axis greatly accentuated. The vertical extension of a portion of the crystal as shown in the figure is quite characteristic. ‘This crystal is much smaller than the one previously illustrated, its length being 16"™ and its height 1:°5™™. The length of the complete crystal however may have been much greater, as the specimen is only terminated at one end, the other being broken. Figure 5 represents a crystal which, while showing the same forms as those already described and having some of the same peculiarities of development, presents however quite a different appearance. This is due chiefly to the absence of the upper basal plane which was prominent.on the first type; in this case the crystal being terminated above by the faces of the pyramid of the second order e (101). All of the faces on this erystal are striated on account of the oscillation of faces in the same zone with each other, and in the case of m and p, no sharp dividing line between them can be observed, one face yielding gradually to the other. This crystal is the largest of the suite, its greatest dimensions being 23™" in length and 12™™ in height. Figure 6 is interesting as showing a crystal which combines the two types described above. The larger crystals, like those shown by figures 3 and 5, are bright in Inster, being only slightly tarnished, while the slender and smaller erystals, like » figures 4 and 6, are dull in color, being covered with a greenish black deposit. Mineralogical Laboratory of the Sheffield Scientific School of Yale University, New Haven, Conn., November, 1906. Chemistry and Physics. 61 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. I. CHEMISTRY AND PHYSICS. 1. The Vaporization of Solid Substances at Ordinary Tem- perature.—It has been shown by C. ZENGHELIs that many solid bodies, even at ordinary temperature, possess a certain vapor pressure. This is exceedingly minute in the case of substances which have a very high melting point, such as metals, “their oxides, and other metallic compounds, so that it has escaped the attention of chemists. The author’s method of detecting such vapors consists in absorbing them by means of thin silver leaf which is placed for a long time above the substance to be tested, in a closed space. In many cases the presence of the volatilized substance was detected analytically in the silver leaf, although its presence was usually readily recognized by the change in color of the silver. Other means were also used to detect vola- tilization, for instance potassium ferrocyanide solution for metal- lic copper and iron. Moisture appeared to facilitate the volatilli- zation, while silver appeared to be the only metal capable of detecting the vapors with delicacy. The less readily oxidizable metals showed no volatility in these experiments, but copper, lead, iron, zine, tin, antimony and arsenic, when used in a finely divided form, showed volatilization. Many oxides, for instance, CuO, PbO, ZnO, Fe,O, and Fe,O, gave a reaction, as did also several hydroxides, Ba(OH),, Cr(OH),, etc., and a very large number of salts.—Zeitschr. physikal. Chem., lvii, 90. H. L. Ww. 2. Investigations upon the Rare Earths.—AvER von WELS- BACH, whose investigations of more than twenty years ago led to the well-known important results in practical illumination, and who separated the old supposed element didymium into neody- mium and praseodymium, has announced that he is again work- ing in the field of the rare elements. Long ago he became con- vinced from his observations that certain of these substances which have been considered as elements are actually compound bodies, and that it 1s within the range of possibility to separate them into their true elements. In a preliminary article he describes work of fractionation carried out upon half a ton of the yttrium earths obtained from monazite, and states that he has obtained certain indications of the decomposition of ytterbium.—Monat- shefte, xxvii, 935. H. L. W. 3. Re-determination of the Atomic Weight of Potassium.— Turopore W. Ricwarps and ArtTHuR STAEHLER have deter- mined the ratios KCl: AgCl and KCl: Ag, and assuming the atomic weights Ag=107:93 and Cl=35-473, they have obtained in each case the result K=39:114. This determination is lower by -007 than the recent result of Archibald, and consequently it varies still more from the previously accepted atomic weight based upon the work of Stas. The details of the work are 62 Scientific Intelligence. highly interesting as an example of the refinement of the work of Richards in atomic weight determinations.— Berichte, xxxix, 3612. H. L. W. 4. Qualitative Analysis, by Witt1am Concer Morean, 8yo, pp. 351. New York, 1906 (The Macmillan Company. Price $1.90 net).—This text-book has been prepared for use in teach- ing qualitative analysis during freshman year in college. The course presupposes good chemical training in secondary schools. The first, or general part, of about 60 pages, is devoted to such theoretical matters as have a bearing upon qualitative analysis, including ionization. The second part, of about 175 pages, gives an extensive description of qualitative reactions. The elements in this part are arranged strictly according to the order of Mendeleéff’s periodic system, which makes it very in conve- nient for reference in connection with the analytical groups. There are some useful tables here showing the formula, color, character, and solubility of each of the commoner salts of sodium, potassium, silver, and-barium. The third part, syste- matic analysis, occupies about 90 pages, and is mostly tabular in its arrangement, with notes or discussions on the pages facing the tables. The methods appear to be generally well chosen for the purpose in view. The use of the terms “basic analysis ” and “acid analysis” in this part is hardly in keeping with the modern aspect of the terms usnally employed. The book as a whole may be praised as showing many good features, but the reviewer cannot read with patience such spellings as “ oxid,” *jodin”’ and “sulfid,” for they lead to the mispronunciation of these English words. H. L. W. 5. A History of Chemistry, by F. P. AnmiracE, 12mo, pp. 259. London, 1906 (Longmans, Green & Co.).—This is an ably written book dealing iargely with the development of chemical theories. It is adapted for the use of the student of chemistry rather than for that of the general reader. In all cases, where possible, authorities have been made to tell their own story. The nomenclature and notation used are those of the times described. The work is to be highly recommended to serious students of chemistry who wish to grasp the problems that have been pre- sented and solved in the past. H. L. W. 6. A History of Chemistry, by ERNst von Mryer. ‘Trans- lated by Grorce McGowan, 8vo, pp. 691. London and New York (Macmillan Company. Price $4.25 net).—This is the third English, translated from the third German edition, of a well known and valuable work which is well worthy of the attention, not only of chemists, but of all who are interested in the devel- opment of science. The English text has had the advantage of the author’s revision, and contains various additions not found in the corresponding German edition. H.W 7. Absorption of Light.—Two investigators, working with similar apparatus, publish papers on this subject. The paper by Ernst MUxuer is entitled Absorption of Light in Solutions, and Chemistry and Physics. 63 that of Ropert ALEXANDER HovusrTown is entitled Investigation upon the Influence of Temperature on the Absorption of Light in Isotropic Bodies. Miiller gives tables of the extinction-coeffi- cient € in various substances; « is defined by the formula: log tan a,—log tan a, d in which a, and a, are angles through which the polarizing appa- ratus must be turned to bring two beams of light passing through two solutions to equal brightness: d is thickness of solution. The method is an interesting one, and the conclusions are important to the student of molecular physics. The chief interest of Mr. Houstoun’s paper lies in its bearing on the electron theory. He remarks that it is apparent that the number of electrons with fundamental vibrations per unit of mass changes with tempera- ture in the visible spectrum, and that the simple dispersion theory is extended by a consideration of the wechselseitige forces of the electron.—Ann. der Physik, No. 18, 1906, pp. 515-573. Se a 8. The Doppler Effect in Canal Streams.—if the cathode in an exhausted tube is perforated with holes 0°5 to 1™™ in diameter, the so-called canal streams are observed behind this cathode, apparently streaming diametrically opposed to the direction of the cathode rays toward the anode. J. Srarx publishes three papers on these canal rays, entitled, respectively, Light Emission of the Canal Rays in Hydrogen, Canal Rays in Potassium and Sodium Vapor, The Doppler Effect’ in the Spectrum of Mercury Vapor. He finds a displacement of certain spectrum lines which he attributes to a change of velocity in.the line of sight, and thus substantiates his previous observations on canal rays. Not only is there a displacement, but also a broadening, which is proof to his mind of this Doppler effect—analogous to the change in position of a spectrum line of a star which is either approaching or receding. This Doppler effect has been sought by various observers, “put has not been hitherto observed. Stark’ discusses at considerable length the conditions of temperature and pressure for the proper observation of this effect, and the broadening of series lines due to this effect. The papers seem very important : but are difficult to review on account of a certain diffusiveness of style and lack of a summary of conclusions.—Ann. der Physik, No. 13, 1906, pp. 401-470. Jee 9. Oscillutory Discharge of a Polarized Cell—¥. Krteur, by means of a Helmholtz pendulum, detects oscillatory dis- charges as well as non-oscillatory discharges of polarized cells. The oscillatory discharges are often concealed, but can arise since the cells have electrostatic capacity and self induction is provided by the leading wires. He quotes Nernst’s observations on the analogy between the oscillations of the polarized cells and the movements of a stimulated nerve. The observations are sup- ported by a long mathematical discussion on the diffusion capac- i 64 Scientific Intelligence. ity and the concentration of ions. Interesting curves of the oscillations and aperiodic effects in various forms of cells accom- pany the paper.—Ann. der Physik, No. 14, 1906, pp. 701-755. Cee 10. Electric Waves.—A paper on this subject forms the last contribution of P. Drup& to the Annalen, and, therefore, has a peculiar interest. The conclusions of the paper are as follows : The best systems of wireless telegraphy, in his opinion, must have: (1) Magnetic coupling. (2) Perfect identity between sender and receiver. (3) As a receiver, the iron bundle of wires (magnetic detector) must be surrounded by the wire which is connected to the capac- ity.—Ann. der Physik, No. 14, 1906, pp. 832-847. Tele 11. Mluorescence and Magnetic Rotation Spectra of Sodium Vapor and their Analysis —Professor R. W. Woop has dis- covered a remarkable effect of the magnetic field on the radia- tions emitted by sodium vapor when it is stimulated by light of various wave-lengths and hght from different sources. He shows that the complex fluorescent spectrum is made up of six or more series of lines, with regular spacings.— Phil. Mag., Nov., 1906, pp. 499-524. J. T. 12. Radioactive Transformations ; by EK. Rurarrrorp. Pp. 287. New York, 1906 (Charles Scribner’s Sons).—This volume presents in published form the series of eleven lectures delivered in March 1904 in the Silliman Memorial Lecture course at Yale University. The subject is treated systematically and critically from the standpoint of the disintegration theory, and as the work of the pen of so eminent an authority in these matters is a valuable contribution to the literature. In a short historical introduction, the theories concerning the electrical nature of matter, the ioniza- tion of gases, the more important properties of radio-active bodies and the various methods of measurement of radio-active quantities are briefly but clearly given. The succession of radio- active changes taking place in thorium are then treated in detail as a typical example of the processes occurring in radio-active substances and the theories advanced for their explanation. The more complex problem of the changes in radium is next con- sidered and the successive transformations taking place in this series are explained and analyzed. ‘This is followed by a chapter on uranium and actinium and the connection between the dif- ferent radio-elements. The production of helium, the radio- activity of the earth, the properties of the a rays and the radio-active processes in general are then discussed in separate chapters. It is significant of the rapid increase in our knowledge on the subject of radio-activity that the author has thought it desirable to incorporate the results of many important investiga- tions which have been made since the lectures were delivered. The book is most readable and suggestive throughout and Geology and Mineralogy. 65 would seem to supply the demand which has existed up to the present for a work on the subject of radio-activity which is not too technical and which is at the same time trustworthy and entertaining for the average scientific reader. BBs Bs 13. Das elektrische Bogenlicht.- Seine Entwicklung und seine physikalischen Grundlagen ; von WattHER BiEGon von Czup- nocHowski. Lief IV-VII, pp. 291-698. Leipzig, 1906 (S. Hirzel).—The earlier parts of this admirably exhaustive work on the electric arc light have already been noticed in this Journal. The four parts now issued carry the work through to its conclu- sion. Of these Parts 4, 5, and 6 continue the historical account of the development of the are light including the period from 1879 to 1900, in which the greatest activity and variety of inven- tion were exhibited, and then from 1900 to the present. The second portion of the work inciuded in Part 7 discusses the theory and practice of the present time, dealing first with the electrodes, then with the lamps and current generators, and finally with the various forms of accessory apparatus which are essential. The work as a whole covers about 700 large octavo pages, is well illustrated, and brings together a vast amount of information which is both scientifically and practically interest- ing and important. IT. Gronroay anp MINERALOGY. 1. United States Geological Survey ; Cuartes D. Watcort, Director.—The recent publication of the U. 8. Geological Survey are noted in the following list : Fouio, No. 140.—Geologic Atlas of the United States. Mil- waukee Special Folio, Wisconsin. Description of the Milwaukee Quadrangle ; prepared under the supervision of T. C. CoamBeEr- LIN, geologist in charge ; by Witiiam C. ALDEN. ce 12, with 2 colored maps and 15 “figures. No. 141. Bald Mountain- Dayton Folio, Wyoming. Descrip- tion of the Bald Mountain and Dayton. Quadrangles ; by N. H. Darton. Glacial Geology, by R. D. Sarispury. Pp. 15, with 7 colored maps and 12 figures. PROFESSIONAL Papers, No. 46.—Geology and Underground Water Resources of Northern Louisiana and Southern Arkansas; A. C. Veatcu. Pp. 422, with 51 plates and 33 figures. No. 51.—Geology of the Bighorn Mountains; by N. H. Dar- TON. Pp. 129, with 47 plates and 14 figures. No. 54.—Geology and Gold Deposits of the Cripple Creek District, Colorado; by Watpremar Linparey and F. L. Ran- SsoME. Pp. xix, 516, with 29 plates (3 in pocket) and 64 figures. No. 55.—Ore Deposits of the Silver. Peak Quadrangle, Nevada; by Jos1an Epwarp Spurr. Pp. 174, with 24 plates and 40 figures. Am. Journ. Sc1.—FourtH SEeRies, Vou, XXIII, No. 1383.—January, 1907. 5) 66 Scientific Intelligence. Butietixs. No, 283.—Geology and Mineral Resources of Mississippi; by A. F. Criprer. Pp. 99, with 4 plates and 3 figures, | No. 289.—A Reconnaissance of the Matanuska Coal Fields, Alaska, in 1905; by G. C. Martin. Pp. 36, with 5 plates and 4 figures. No. 292.—The Bryozoan Fauna of the Rochester Shale; by LAY S. BassteR. Pp. 137, with 31 plates. No. 293.—Reconnaissance of some Gold and Tin Deposits of the Southern Appalachians ; by L. C. Graron with Notes on the Dahlonega Mines by Watprmar LinpGren. Pp. 134 with 9 plates and 16 figures. No. 295.—The Yukon-Tanana Region, Alaska. Description of Circle Quadrangle; by L. M. Prinpie. Pp. 27, with map in pocket and 3 figures. No. 298.—Record of Deep-Well Drilling for 1905 ; by Myron L. FuLLER and SaMUEL SANFORD. Pp. 299. No. 299.—Geographic Dictionary of Alaska; by Marcus Baker. Second edition. Pp. 690. Prepared by Jamus McCormick. No. 301.—Bibliography and Index of North American Geol- ogy, Paleontology, Petrology, and Mineralogy for the year 1901— 1905, inclusive ; by FRED Bovucuton WeEEks. Pp. 770. W ater Superiy AnD IRriGaTIon Parers.—No. 159. Summary of the Underground Water Resources of Mississippi; by A. F. Criper and L. C. Jounson. Pp. vi, 86, with 6 plates and 11 figures. No. 161.—Quality of Water in the Upper Ohio River Basin and at Erie, Pa.; by Samurnt James Lewis. Pp. i14, with 6 plates and 3 figures. No. 164,—Underground Waters of Tennessee and Kentucky West of Tennessee River, and of an Adjacent Area in Illinois ; by L. C. Grenn. Pp. 173, with 7 plates and 13 figures. Nos. 175, 177.—Report. of Progress of Stream Measurements for the Calendar Year 1905: prepared under the direction of F. H. Neweri.—Part XI.—Colorado River Drainage above Yuma; by M. C. HinperRniper and G. L. SwenpsEN. Pp. v,194, with 1 plate and 2 figures. Part XIII.—Great Basin and Pacitic Ocean Drainages in California, and Colorado River Drainage below Gila River; by W. B. Craprr and J.C. Hoyt. Pp. 273, with 1 plate and 2 figures. No. 179.—Prevention of Stream Pollution by Distillery Refuse, based on Investigations at Lynchburg, Ohio ; by Herman STas- LER. Pp. 34, with 1 plate and 5 figures. No. 180.—Turbine Water Wheel Tests and Power Tables; by Rosert H. Horton. Pp. 134, with 2 plates and 33 figures. ; No. 181.—Geology and Water Resources of Owens Valley, California ; by Wiuuis T. Ler. Pp. 28, with 6 plates. No. 184.—The Underflow of the South Platte Valley ; by C. S. Suicuter and H. C. Wotrr. Pp. 48, with 13 figures. No. 185.—Investigations on the Purification of Boston Sewage with a History of the Sewage-disposal Problem; by C.-E. A. Winstow and E, B. Pures. Pp. 163, with 22 figures. Geology and Mineraloyy. 67 No. 186.—Stream Pollution by Acid-Iron Wastes. A Report based on Investigations made at Shelby, Ohio ; by Herman SraBLER. Pp. 36, with 1 plate. _ 2. The Origin and Structure of the Roxbury Conglomerate ; by Grorcr Rogers MansFietp. Pp. 180, 7 pls. Cambridge, Mass., Nov. 1906. Bull. of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College, vol. xlix. Geol. Series, vol. viii, No. 4.— The term Roxbury Conglomerate is applied to a series of ancient sediments which occupy a large part of the so-called Boston Basin. The series consists of arkoses and coarse and fine con- elomerates, interbedded with sandstones and shales, and is considered to be the equivalent of the massive Carboniferous conglomerates of the Narragansett Basin. The author has made a thorough study of the formation as a whole, but to geologists in general the most valuable portion of the report consists in the discussion, covering forty-five pages, on the origin of conglomerates. A careful search of the literature has been made and the observations and opinions of various writers assembled and well discussed. The careful reader will notice, however, that there is a great scarcity of real observa- tion and too much hypothesis in many of the statements quoted, causing generalizations to be founded upon few examples and sometimes upon mere opinions. In the general summary eleven conclusions are stated of which perhaps the two most significant are: (8) The evidence, largely negative and unsatisfactory, favors pon-marine origin for this Carboniferous formation; (9) Glaciers were not directly con- cerned with the deposition of the conglomerates, but they prob- ably furnished material to torrents by which it was deposited either upon the land or in lakes. iy a8 3. Geology of the Bighorn Mountains ; by N. H. Darron. U.S. Geological Survey... Professional Paper No. 51. Pp. 129, pls. 47, figs. 14, 1906. Washington.—This paper, accompanied by a geological map, is a readable and valuable report of a region interesting alike to the tourist and to the scientist. The geologi- cal structure is well exposed, the marks of previous glacial action are strongly developed and the scenery is of a high order. The illustrations, reproduced from photographs, taken by several geologists, are of high artistic merit and add greatly to the attractiveness and value of the report. The treatment of the sedimentary formations is especially complete. Te 335 4, The Glacial History of Nantucket and Cape Cod, with an argument for a fourth center of glacial dispersion in North America; by J. Howarp Witson. Pp. 90, pls. and folding maps xxxvili, 1906. New York (The Columbia University Press. The Macmillan Co. agents)—Mr. Wilson has made a very complete study of the glacial phenomena of Cape Cod and the islands to the south, representing the most southeasterly exposure upon the continent of the terminal moraine. Evidence is found for the unsuspected conclusion that Newfoundland and Nova Scotia formed a separate center of glacial dispersion of 68 Scientific Intell igence. which Martha’s Vineyard and later Cape Cod formed the most southwesterly limits. This hypothesis, well supported by the facts, assists in the solution of a problem, pointed out by Shaler, that the drift of Cape Cod and Nantucket contains igneous and sedimentary materials not known to occur in place in southern New England. Some knowledge is thus obtained of geological formations now submerged on “the eastern portion of the conti- nental shelf, Cambrian fossils have in the past fifteen years been determined from some of these erratics. Evidence of a glacial lake has been determined, formerly existing over Cape Cod and Cape Cod Bay and confined between two lobes of the glacier. This body of glacial water has been named Lake Shaler. 4g. B. 5. Les Variations Periodiques des Glaciers. Onziéme rap- port, 1905 rédigé par Dr. Harry Fiertpine Rep et EK. Murer, Président et Secrétaire de la Commission Internationale des gla- ciers. Extrait des Annales de Glaciologie, t. I, Sept. 1906, pp. 161-181. Berlin (Freres Borntraeger, Editeurs).—Reports are published concerning glaciers of all the continents, showing the amount of advance or retreat or the stationary attitude. The report contains a valuable series of data which in the course of time must throw a great deal of light upon the question of the smaller and larger variations of climate. Jou 6. The Roman Comagmatic Region, by H. 8. WasHineron. Carnegie Institution, Publication No. 57, 8vo, 199 pp. Washington, D. C., 1906.—This volume contains the results of a great amount of careful, accurate and laborious work, in the field and in the laboratory, upon the volcanic rocks of central Italy. The work is essentially petrographic and not geologic in character, though enough descriptive matter of a geologic nature has been added by the author to enable the reader with the aid of the map to nnderstand the relation of the places and mode of occurrence of the different rocks investigated. These comprise the various types which occur in the main line of volcanoes extending from Lake Bolsena southeast to Vesuvius and the Phlegrean Fields. They have been thoroughly studied and compared and of forty- four of them complete and elaborate chemical analyses have been made, thus adding very greatly to our knowledge of the chemical nature of the magmas composing this interesting and important series of eruptive centers. As one result of this exhaustive study of a large number of leucitic rocks the author is able to present certain interesting generalizations regarding the origin and conditions of formation of leucite. In the final portion of the work the author treats the district as a whole and presents its general aspects as a “petrographic province” or as he suggests in the place of this term a comag- matic region. In other comagmatic regions which have thus far been studied, the only one which, in the high potash content of its rocks approaches it, is that of Central Montana. The new quantitative classification has been employed through- Geglogy and Mineralogy. 69 out and in each case a typal qualifier derived from a geographic root has been applied to the magmatic name of the new system, to indicate the modal appearance presented by the minerals, tex- ture, etc. The author has also cast the petrographic description into a certain definite form which is proposed for future usage. The work may thus be taken asa practical example of the new system; the many new names and terms and the definiteness and conciseness of the descriptions will make it appear very strange to those accustomed only to the more or less general names and indefinite methods of description prevailing under the old ter- minology and classifications. For the benefit of such the older names, as well as the newer ones, are used to designate the rocks. It is especially on the chemical side that this work exhibits its highest value; a great number of analyses of the rocks of central Italy have been previously made, but they are either old, so that the analytical methods were inadequate to’ yield complete and accurate results, or they have been made by persons whose train- ing and experience were not extensive enough to enable them to obtain results sufficiently complete and exact to meet the de- mands made by modern petrographical science. The rocks of central Italy have been so long well known and many of them have been so often studied in other ways that they have become classic in the literature of petrography: the lack of thoroughly complete and trustworthy analyses has been felt to be a serious gap in our knowledge concerning them, and this contribution by Washington is therefore particularly valuable and timely in sup- plying this omission. The institution under whose patronage this work has been carried on and finally brought out is to be congratulated, no less than the author, on the excellence of the results which have been obtained. Ibs Vane: 7. Geology and Petrography of Mt. Yamaska, Province of Quebec; by G. A. Young. Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Canada, vol. xvi, Pt. H, 43 pp.+map.—Through the investigations of Prof. F. D. Adams and his associates the line of igneous intrusive masses extending eastward from Montreal, and to which he has given the name of the Monteregian Hills, have proved petro- graphically of great interest. In this complete and careful study of one of them by Dr. Young another chapter has been added to our knowledge concerning them. The mountain consists of a voleanic neck of igneous rock projecting upward through the Cambrian-Silurian sediments, which have been considerably metamorphosed by it. Several varieties of igneous rocks compose the mass, ranging from feld- spathic to ferromagnesian types, and their arrangement and gra- dations into one another are such as to lead to the belief that they have been produced by differentiation in place, with some subsequent movement. The types described consist of syenite (var. akerite), essexite and a very basic variety termed yamaskite. These are associated with, or cut by, dikes of syenite-aplite, nephe- lite-syenite, bostonite and camptonite. The general arrangement 70 Scientific Intelligence. of the mass is such that the most feldspathic variety, dkerite, is on the periphery while the most basic, the yamaskite, is at the center. The yamaskite, which is a new rock type, has the same general chemical composition as the jacupirangite of Derby and Wash- ington but differs quite decidedly in its mineralogical compesi- tion. It consists of pyroxene, pink and pleochroic in section, basaltic brown hornblende, anorthite and ilmenite as the chief minerals. It is far more basic than essexite, as may be seen from the two analyses quoted : SiO, 'Al,0," FeO, HeO “MgO CaO WarOmenee TE 39°97° 8:68 8:63) 7-99) “10:32 ©" 1518) aoa Liye 3624 9°05 10°64 9°58 775 14°97 1°05 0°43 CO, TiO, E30: FeS, MnO HO". shotal tas A S05, ONO 101 0-19 O55 oO ial 1 Rees ql 0-01 0:97 0:29 0:65 = 99:75 It is noteworthy that No. II, which is an extremely basic rock, has more anorthite than No. I, containing about 15 per cent. The rock has a coarse, even granular textttre. Its codrdinates in the new quantitative classification are IV; 2, Sec. 1; I, See. 2 ; 2, which is termed yamaskose, as it is a hitherto undescribed sub-rang. The work represents a thesis prepared as a part of the require- ments for the attainment of the degree of doctor of philosophy in Yale University. Le Nones 8. Geology of the Volcanic Area of the East Moreton and Wide Bay Districts, Queensland, Australia ; by H. lL JENSEN, Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales, 1906, Pt. 1, pp. 73-173.— This account of the geology of two districts in Queensland is of more than local value on account of the interesting types of rare volcanic rocks which are described. These are alkalic trachytes and allied rocks, comendites and pantellarites. They contain blue amphiboles (riebeckite and arfvedsonite) and cossyrite (aenigmatite). They are somewhat briefly described and a num- ber of excellent analyses of them are given. The work shows clearly the existence of a province of alkalic rocks in the region described, whose complete petrographic investigation would undoubtedly yield results of great interest and value. L. v. P. 9. The Building and Ornamental Stones of North Carolina; by THomas L. Watson and Francis B. Laney, with the collab- oration of GrorGE P. Merritt. Pp. xili, 283, with 32 plates and 11 figures. Raleigh, 1906 (H. M. Uzzell). Bulletin No. 2 of the North Carolina Geological Survey: JosepH HyprE Pratt, State Geologist.—The State of North Carolina is well supplied with a great variety of building stones, particularly those of the granitic type; with the possible exception of Georgia, it ranks higher in this field than any of the other Appalachian States south . of New England. This fact, taken in connection with the mildness of the climate and the cheapness of labor, should result in the a Geology and Mineralogy. (Gl development of a very extensive industry, an end which will be materially stimulated by the present volume, The various types of rocks, from the granites to the sandstones and quartzites, are described in detail and an account is also given of the quarries in actual operation. Under the marbles some new localities are mentioned, and one marble of special interest is described from Mitchell County ; this is pure white in color and suitable for those purposes for which the finest grades of marble are required. Some stones of peculiar interest in the State are the quartz porphyry or leopardite, found in Mecklen- burg County, and the orbicular-gabbro diorite, found in Davis County. Both of these are attractive stones for monumental purposes. Another unusual rock is the variety of granite known as unakite, composed of yellow-green epidote, dull pink or red feldspar and quartz. The concluding chapters describe the methods of quarrying, the weathering of building stones and the rocks suitable for road building. 10. Clays: Their Occurrence, Properties and Uses with especial reference to those of the United States ; by Heinricu Rixzs. Pp. xiv, 490, with 44 plates and 65 figures. New York, 1906 (John Wiley & Sons).—The author of this volume has already made extensive studies of the clays and clay industries in the United States, in connection with the U.S. Geological Survey and also the Surveys of Maryland and New Jersey. He has now ren- _ dered a great service not only to geologists and chemists, but also to those commercially interested, by bringing together within the limits of a single volume all that is most important in relation to this subject. The book opens with a brief state- ment in regard to the origin of clay beds, and then goes on to discuss in detail the chemical and physical properties and the different types of clays useful for different purposes. The last half of the book is given to an account of the distribution of clay at the many localities at which it occurs in the different states, the facts being arranged conveniently according to the geological formations. This latter portion of the work is liber- ally illustrated with many reproductions from photographs, which add much to the value of the descriptions. 11. Paleozoic Fossils, Vol. YH, Part IV: by J. F. WurrEaves. Geol. Surv. Canada, 1906, pp. 243-352, pls. xxiii-xliii—This part concludes the third volume of Paleozoic Fossils perme by Billings in 1861, and consists of four papers, as follows 5. The Fossils of the Silurian (Upper Silurian) ae of Kee- wa tin, Manitoba, the northeastern shore of Lake Winnepegosis, and the lower Saskatchewan River. 6. The Canadian species of Plectoceras and Barrandeoceras. 7. Illustrations of seven species of fossils from the Cambrian, Cambro-Silurian, and Devonian rocks of Canada. 8. Revised list of the fossils of the Guelph formation of Ontario. With appendix, consisting of a list of errata, and an index to the velume. C. S. 72 | Scientific Intelligence. 12. The Bryozoan Fauna of the Rochester shale ; by Ray §. Basser. Bull. No: 292, U. 8. Geol. Survey, 1906, 137 pp., 31 pls.—This Silurian formation of western New York has 48 genera and 80 species of Bryozoa, of which 30 forms are here described for the first time. The writer shows that the Rochester forma- tion is chiefly, if not exactly, equivalent of the Osgood beds along the western side of the Cincinnati axis, for more than 40 per cent of the Bryozoa of the former region are also found in the West, while less than 20 per cent are common to the Roch- ester and the Waldron shale which lies above the Osgood. Pale- ozoic Bryozoa are usually regarded as limited in geographical range, but in this case at least five species are common to Amer- ica and the Wenlock (Buildwas) of England and of Scotland. Four of these forms, however, belong to the simpler Ctenosto- mata and Cyclostomata. Gp, Ss 13. The Fossil Fuuna and Flora of the Florissant ( Colorado) shales; by T. D. A. Cock RELL. Univ. Colorado Studies, iii, 1906, pp. 157-176, one plate.—This paper gives a summary of the fossils thus far recovered from about Florissant. There are 11 vertebrates (2 birds, 9 fishes), 1 mollusc (Planorbis), 1032 insects of which 608 are described, 213 Coleoptera (187 undescribed), 2 Hymenoptera (228), 9 lepidoptera (7), 54 Diptera, 24 Orthop- tera, 80 Homoptera, 140 Sees 6 Ephemeroptera, 12 Neuroptera, 9 Odonata, 6 Platyptera, 22 Trochoptera, 1 Thysa-. nura, 1 Ballostoma, 30 spiders, and 145 plants. The author states “that we must cease to refer to the Floris- sant shales as belonging to the Green River Group,” and with Lesquereux regards the fossils as of Miocene age. The climate of Florissant was then ‘“‘moister and warmer than that of the present day. ...a warm temperate region . and .. . semi- alpine or bareal in character.’ Cus 14. Geological Survey of Ohio, Enwarp Orton, JR., State Geologist, Bulletin Six: A Bibliography of Ohio Geology. Part I, pp. 1-283, a subject Index of the Publications of the Geological Survey of Ohio, from its inception to and including Bulletin Eight of the Fourth Series; by Atice GREENWOOD Dery. Part II, pp. 285-332. A Bibliography of the Publica- tions relating to the Geology of Ohio, other than those of the State Geological Survey ; by Mary Witson Prosser. Colum- bus: August, 1906.—The completeness of the bibliographies in the two parts of this Bulletin make it a highly important contri- bution to all those concerned with the geology of Ohio. 15. Handbuch der Mineralogie; von Dr. Cart HInTzE. Zehute Lieferung. Pp. 1441-1600, with 35 text-figures. Leip- zig, 1906 (Veit & Comp.).—Mineralogists will be interested in the appearance of the tenth part of Volume I of Hintze’s Min- eralogy. It completes the description of quartz, includes also the other forms of silica, and the three forms of TiO,, brookite, anatase (octahedrite) and rutile. This is the twenty-second part of the entire work, which was begun in 1889, and brings the completion of the whole within sight, an end which both the author and the mineralogical public have long desired. Miscellaneous Intelligence. 73 Ill. MiscELLANEOUS SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. 1. The Integrative Action of the Nervous System ; by Cuas. S. SHERRINGTON, Professor of Physiology in the University of Liverpool. Being the Silliman Memorial Lectures for 1904 at Yale University. Octavo, 393 pages with numerous graphic records and index of bibliography. New York (Charles Scribner’s Sons).—The problem dealt with in these lectures is postulated thus : “In the multicellular animal, especially for those higher reactions which constitute its behaviour as a social unit in the natural economy, it is nervous reaction which par excel- lence integrates it, welds it together from its components, and constitutes it from a mere collection of organs an animal individ- ual.” The elementary form of nervous system, the simple nerve- net exemplified in Medusa, affords merely diffuse conduction. It obevs the “all or none” law, and affords the animal only a single invariable response to all adequate stimuli whatever their character or point of application. Contrasted with this simpli- city and uniformity, the wide variety of response by which the higher animals adjust themselves to, and indeed dominate their environment, is not merely due to the greater complexity of their “‘ effector ” mechanisms, but is peculiarly the endowment afforded by the ‘“‘synaptic” nervous system. The unit reaction in nerv- ous integration, the simple reflex, is probably a purely abstract conception, but a fiction which is essential to the analysis of com- plex codrdinated reactions. Its machinery consists of (1) a “receptor” organ which is usually endowed with a specialized irritability so that because of its low threshold value for one form of stimulus and relative insensibility to all other changes of the environment it affords a selective character to the reaction which it evokes. (2) A “private path” or afferent neurone connecting the “receptor” with the central grey matter of the nervous system. (3) The efferent neurone which the author denominates the ‘final common path” because upon it debouch all the “ private paths ” and through it are effected all reactions. (4) The “effector” organ, muscle fiber or gland cell. And (5) between the afferent and efferent nev'rones a “‘synapse” or surface of separation between their interlaced but non-continu- ous dendrites. Nerve fibers are mere conductors. Bethe’s experiment on Carcinus shows that the perikarya (nerve-cell bodies) are not responsible for the features characteristic of reflex are conduction. In the “synapse” therefore must be found those properties upon which depend such phenomena as latency, after-discharge, summation, ‘ Bahnung” fatigue, inhibi- tion, tonus, refractory phase, and the manifold relations between intensity of stimulus and intensity of reflex reaction. These phenomena are in turn discussed on the basis of the author’s illuminating investigations on the “spinal” dog. Especial atten- tion is devoted to the phenomena of “interference” at the “synapse” by which when any private path because of excita- 74 Scientific Intelligence. tion connects with the ‘final common path” to induce its char- acteristic reaction all antagonistic afferent arcs are thereby simultaneously excluded. This is the basis of all codrdination of reactions and also of the great psychical process of “ attention.” From it result the singleness of action every instant and the pre- vention of confusion which are the keystones of the unity of the individual. The term ‘proprio-ceptors” is applied to those afferent end- organs which lying beneath the animal’s surface are influenced only by interior conditions. Their important shares in codrdina- tion are discussed, and the conclusion reached that “cerebellum is the head g ganglion of the proprio-ceptive system.’ The “‘distance-receptors” for sight, hearing, and smell initiate and guide long series of reactions of the animal as a whole. Their influences are dominant, for through long chains of reactions conductive to a final reaction relatively remote they direct the animal to obtain its food, and escape its enemies. The conscious concomitants of these processes constitutes mentality. “The cerebrum is the ganglion of the distance-receptors.” Space forbids a further discussion of these intensely interesting lectures. The striking individuality of treatment involving the development of a terminology in great part new, the importance of the experimental data afforded by Professor Sherrington’s researches in the difficult field between the physiologic and the psychic realms, the breadth of grasp and depth of insight in the treatment of the subject matter, are such as cannot fail to influ- ence profoundly the attitude toward the problems of the nerv- ous system of every physiologist who carefully reads this book. For the psychologist it possesses an even greater interest, for it represents a long step forward toward the comprehension of the physiologic basis of psychic phenomena. sYiu el 2. Annual Report of the Board of Regents of the Smithso- . nian Institute. Report of the U. 8. National Museum for the year ending June 30, 1905. Pp. 131. Report of the U. 8. Na- tional Museum jor the year ending June 30, 1906 ; by Richarp RATHBUN. Pp. 120. Washington, 1906.—These reports pre- pared by Dr. Rathbun give a very interesting account of the growth of the National Museum down to the middle of 1906. The construction of the new building, commenced in 1904, although carried forward less rapidly than was expected, is now well under way and the completion is anticipated in two years more. The facilities which this building will provide are urgently needed, since the collections are increasing at a very rapid rate, during the last year, for example, to the extent of upwards of 250,000 specimens. These additions cover all the different departments of science, from geology and natural history to ethnology, archeology and technology. 3. Report of the Superintendent of the Coast and Geodetic Survey, showing the Progress of the Work from July 1, 1905, to June 30, 1906. Pp. 230, with 9 pocket maps. Washington, 1906.—This annual report of Dr. O. H. Tirrmann gives a sum- Miscellaneous Intelligence. 75 mary of the work of the Survey during the year. It includes the determination of longitude in Alaska, both on the coast and in the interior, by the telegraphic method ; the examination of the boundary lines between Alaska and Canada, and also between Canada and the New England States, were both carried forward. The magnetic survey includes observations at 382 stations and also contains records of the observations at the permanent obser- vatories at Cheltenham, Md., Baldwin, Kans., Sitka, Honolulu, and Vieques, P. R.; special observations were also made during the solar eclipse of August 30th. These observations are given in Appendices 3 and 4. 4, Annals of the Astronomical Observatory of Harvard Col- lege; Epwarp C. Pickertne, Director. — Recent publications include the following : Vol. XXXIX, Part II. Peruvian Meteorology 1892-1895, compiled and prepared for publication by Soron I. Baitey, under the direction of Epwarp C. Pickertne. Pp. 157-292, with five plates and six figures. The nine stations occupied, and for which (except Arequipa) the tabular observations are given, vary in altitude from Mollendo near the sea-level (80 ft.) to Chachani 16,650 ft. and the summit of Misti at 19,200 ft. An appendix contains an account of the remarkable sand dunes near La Joya in the desert of Islay. Vol. LVI, Part I. Observations and Investigations made at the Blue Hill Meteorological Observatory, Massachusetts, in the years 1903 and 1904, under the direction of A. LawRENcE Rorca. With an Appendix on the Errors of Absorption Hygrometers. Pp. 67-141, with one plate. Vol. LX, No. L. Geometrical Methods in the Theory of Com- bining Observations ; by ArrHur Suartg. Pp. 1-82. No. If, Early Observations of the Sixth Satellite of Jupiter. Pp. 33-42. CircuLars 113-118. 5. Carnegie Institution of Washington.—The following pub- lications have been recently issued : No. 32. Chimaeroid Fishes and Their Development; by Basurorp Dean. Pp. 194, with 11 plates and 53 figures. No. 33. Researches in Stellar Photometry during the years 1894 to 1906 : made chiefly at the Yerkes Observatory; by JoHN A. Parkuurst. Pp. 192, with 119 tables and 39 figures. No. 36, Part II. Studies in Spermatogenesis, Part II. A Comparative Study of the Heterochromosomes in certain species of Coleoptera, Hemiptera and Lepidoptera, with especial refer- ence to Sex Determination; by N. M. Srrvens. Pp. 33-74, with plates viii—xv. No. 57. The Roman Comagmatic Region; by Henry S. Wasuincton. Pp. vi, 199, with 3 figures. Contributions from the Solar Observatory, Mt. Wilson, Cali- fornia. No.9, Latitude and Longitude of the Solar Observatory ; by Grorcr EK. Hate. Pp. 4. f 76 Scientific Intelligence. No. 10. The Spectroscopic Laboratory of the Solar Observa- tory ; by Georce E. Hare. Pp. 7. No. 11. Preliminary Paper on the Cause of the Cliaracteristic Phenomena of Sun-spot Spectra; by G. E. Hatz, W. 8. Apams and H. G. Garr. Pp. 29. No. 12. Sun-spot Lines in the Spectrum of Arcturus; by W.S. Apams. Pp. 9. 6. American Association.—The fifty-seventh meeting of the American Association for the Advancement of Science will be held at Columbia University in New York City, during the week from December 27, 1906, to January 2,1907. Dr. W. H. Welch, of Baltimore, is the president. Eleven societies meet in New York in affiliation with the Association at this the fifth of its convocation week meetings. - 7. Amerikanisches Hochschulwesen: Eindriicke und Betracht- ungen von Dr. W. Botraer, Pp. 70. Leipzig, 1906 (Wilhelm Engelmann).—The author of this pamphlet spent a year as research associate in the laboratory of physiological chemistry in the Boston Institute of Technology. The results of his observa- tions and studies in regard to the general system of American universities were presented by him in a lecture delivered before the Chemical Society of Leipzig. This lecture is the basis of the present paper, which has been expanded and completed. Those interested in university work, and particularly in the essential differences between the institutions in this country and Germany, will find here much of interest. 8. Notes on Adirondack Mammals, with Special Reference to the Furbearers; by Mavison Grant. Reprinted from the eighth and ninth Reports of the Forest, Fish and Game Com- mission, State of New York. Pp. 319-334.—A brief account of the larger mammals of the North Woods, including some which have long since disappeared from the region. The ae is accompanied by 24 plates of very satisfactory photographs of these animals. 9. Annual Report of the Director of the Weather Bureau of the Philippine Islands for the year 1904. PartsT and Il. Pp. 208. Manila, 1906 (Bureau of Printing).—This report of the Rev. Jose Algué, Director of the Weather Bureau at Manila, contains the hourly meteorological and magnetic observations made at the Manila Central Observatory in 1904. The Director has also issued from the advance sheets of the September bulletin an account of the destructive Hongkong typhoon of September 18, 1906. 10. Science Bulletin of the Museum of the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences. Vol. 1, No. 9.—This recently issued bul- letin contains the following papers: On new and known genera and species of the Family Chrysomelidae ; by CHARLES SCHAEF- FER. Pp. 221-253. Hemiptera from Southwestern Texas; by H. G. Barper. Pp. 255-289. FU NT" Bs. LITHOLOCICAL COLLECTIONS OF ROCKS. Our $50 and $25 collections of rocks have just been revised. For the list of species presented in these collections send for Circular 70. ‘Everything in Natural History.’’ WARD’S NATURAL SCIENCE ESTABLISHMENT, - 76-104 College Ave., Rochester, N. Y. Warps Natura Science EstaBlisHMent A Supply-House for Scientific Material. Founded 1862. - Incorporated 1890. DEPARTMENTS: Geology, including Phenomenal and Physiographic. Mineralogy, including also Rocks, Meteorites, etc. Palaeontology. Archaeology and Hthnology. Invertebrates, including Biology, Conchology, ete. Zoology, including Osteology and Taxidermy. Human Anatomy, including Craniology, Odontology, ete. Models, Plaster Casts and Wall-Charts in all departments. Circulars in any department free on request; address Wards Natural Science Establishment, 76-104 College Ave., Rochester, New York, U.S. A. C/O N-THE Nei: Page Art. I.—Colombian Meteorite Localities: Santa Rosa, Ras- gata, Tocavita: by H. AS Warp =-2) e0 e 1 Il.—Occurrence of Facetted Pebbles on the Central Plateau of Brazil; by M.-A.OR. Dissoacs2 22 38 - Ser IIfT.—Mineralogical Notes ; by F. A. Canrrecp _._-------.2 20 IV.—Chemical Composition of Amphibole; by 8. L. Pxy- FIELD and W.-C. (STANDEY ©- 5 ees oe. eee V.—Notes on the Relation of the two genera of tubicolous Annelids, Vermilia Lamarck, 1818, and Pomatoceros Philippi, 1844-;-by KJ. bUsH 2o-02 = ee See 52 VI.—Chalcopyrite Crystals from Arakawa, Japan ; by W. E. Rompe: 5525 eee ee 59 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. Chemistry and Physics—Vaporization of Solid Substances at Ordinary Tem- perature, C. ZENGHELIS: Investigations wpon the Rare Earths, AUER von WeELSBACH: Re-determination of the Atomic Weight of Potassium, T. W. RicHarps and A. STAEHLER, 61.—Qualitative “Analysis, We C. Morean: History of Chemistry, F. P. ARmiTacEe: History of Chemistry, HK. vy. Meyer: Absorption of Light, E. MULLER and R. A. Houstoun, 62.— Doppler Effect in Canal Streams, J. Stark: Oscillatory Discharge of a Polarized Cell, F. KrUcur, 63.—Electric Waves, P. DrupE: Fluorescence and Magnetic Rotation Spectra of Sodium Vapor and their Analysis, R. W. Woop: Radioactive Transformations, E. RUTHERFORD, 64.—Das elektrische Bogenlicht ; Seine Entwicklung und seine physikalischen Grundlagen, W. B. Vv. CzUDNOCHOWSKI, 60. Geology and Mineralogy— United States Geological Survey, 60.—Origin and Structure of the Roxbury Conglomerate, G. R. MANSFIELD: Geology of the Bighorn Mountains, N. H. Darron: Glacial History of Nantucket and Cape Cod, J. Howarp Wutson, 67.—Les Variations Periodiques des Glaciers, H. F. Rem et E. Murer: Roman Comagmatic Region, H. 8. WASHINGTON, 68.—Geology and Petrography of Mt. Yamaska, Province of Quebec, G. A. YouneG, 69.—Geology ot the Volcanic Area of the Hast Moreton and Wide Bay Districts, Queensland, Australia, H. 1. JEnsun : Building and Ornamental Stones of North Carolina, T. L. Watson and F. B. Laney, 70.—Clays ; their Occurrence, Properties and Uses with espe- cial reference to those of the United States, H. Ries: Paleozoic Fossils, J. F. WHITEAVES, 71.—Bryozoan Fauna of the Rochester shale, R. §. BassLER: Fossil Fauna and Flora of the Florissant (Colorado) shales, T. D. A. CockERELL: Geological Survey of Ohio: Handbuch der Mineral- ogie, C. HINTZE. Miscellaneous Scientific Intelligence.—Integrative Action of the Neryous Sys- tem, C. S. SHERRINGTON, 73.—Reports of the U. S. National Museum for the years ending June 30, 1905 and June 30, 1906, R. Rataspun: Report of the Superintendent of the Coast and Geodetic Survey, from July 1, 1905, to June 30, 1906, 74.—Annals of the Astronomical Observatory of Harvard College : Carnegie Institution of Washington, 7).—American Association : Amerikanisches Hochschulwesen: Hindrticke und Betracht- ungen, W. Borrapr: Notes on Adirondack Mammals, with Special Refer- ence to the Furbearers, M. Grant: Annuai Report of the Director of the Weather Bureau of the Philippine Islands for the year 1904: Science Bulletin of the Museum of the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciencés, 76. r. Cyrus Adler, a ghia Sg oie Librarian U. S. Nat. Museum. % VOL. XXIII. FEBRUARY, 1907. Established by BENJAMIN SILLIMAN in 1818. THE AMERICAN JOURNAL OF SCIENCE. Epitror: EDWARD S. DANA. ASSOCIATE EDITORS PROFESSORS GEORGE L. GOODALE, JOHN TROWBRIDGE, W. G. FARLOW ann WM. M. DAVIS, or Cameprince, Proressorss ADDISON E. VERRILL, HORACE L. WELLS, L. V. PIRSSON ann H. E. GREGORY, or New. Haven, Proressor GEORGE F. BARKER, or PHILADELPHIA, Proressor HENRY S. WILLIAMS, or Iruaca, Prorressorn JOSEPH S. AMES, or Battiore, Mr. J. S. DILLER, or Wasuinerton. FOURTH SERIES VOL. XXII_[WHOLE NUMBER, CLXXIII.] No. 134—FEBRUARY, 1907. WITH PLATE I. fraud NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT. FUE 1907 THE TUITLE, MOREHOUSE & TAYLOR CO., PRINTERS, 123 TEMPLE STREET. Published monthly. Six dollars per year, in advance. $6.40 to countries in the Postal Union. Remittances should be made either by money orders, registered letters, or bank checks (preferably on New York banks). RECONSTRUCTED RUBIES. At the recent meeting of the American Society for the Advancement of Science, these rubies were exhibited as made in a crucible and also in the different raw shapes and cut gems, and attracted more attention from the scientists present than anything else exhibited at this meeting. A number of orders from Washington officials and other scientists have been received since, and almost all have duplicated their orders. These rubies are as good as the natural ones, if not better; are made from the same chemical substance, and have the same hardness and lus- trous color, as a genuine ruby. They have also the true pigeon-blood color. The only difference between a natural one and a reconstructed ruby is, that the natural one comes out of the pocket of a rock, and the recon- structed one comes out of a crucible. Litigation is now going on in the Custom House, to put a larger duty on reconstructed rubies. It is agreat damage to the large gem dealers, who have large quantities of genuine rubies, so they are fighting to put a large duty on the reconstructed rubies also. So if you want to secure one, you can now secure them ata very reasonable price; but, as soon as the Custom House raises the tariff, naturally enough, we have to increase the price. We have about 400 on hand, from 4 to 3k. and cost from $8 to $d per carat. We can furnish you some, in a rough pear-shape form, ;4, x5 in. Their weight is from 10 to 114 carat. Priced from $5 to $8 according to quality. RARE MINERALS. Anatase, St. Gothard; Bakerite, Calif.; Stibiotantalites, Calif.; Slippery Beryls, new find, Brazil; Crocoite, Brazil and Tasmania; Hematite, tabular form, Brazil; Columbite crystals, N. C.: Microlite in Albite, large crystals, Va.; Phosgenite, matrix specimens and loose crystals, Eng.; Samarskite, N. C.; Euclase from Ural Mts. and Brazil; Zeophyllite, Radzein, Bohemia; Pseudomorph from Chalcedony, rare, Germany; Freibergite, Germany ; Niccolite crystals on matrix, Germany ; Argentite, rare crystals in matrix ; Bismuthinite, England: Torbernite, England. Other extremely rare min- erals will arrive in a few days. LATEST ARRIVALS. A few of the choice minerals mentioned last month still remain. In addition to these, another very fine consignment, has arrived, a partial list of which we give below : ALEXANDRITE, two fine specimens, in matrix. Fine crystals from Ural Mts. priced from $20 to $28. RUBELLITE, two crystals, in matrix, 14x 2in. Ural Mts. priced $20. CINNABAR, in fine, brilliant crystals on an attractive matrix, from 24 to 4 in. in size, Sonoma Co., Calif. Also from Idria, Austria. COLEMANITE. We have an elegant lot showing fine, transparent groups of crystals, from 33 to 5 in. in size, San Bernardino Co., Calif. CALIFORNITE, Pala, Calif. Polished slabs from 2 to 5 in., very attractive. ~ PYRITES, from California, in very brilliant crystals with rare planes. BLUE and WHITE TOPAZ CRYSTALS. A new find from Ro- mona, Calif. Some of them haverare planes. Crystals 1 to 14 inches. KUNZITE CRYSTALS. We have three grades of these crystals, some are doubly terminated, and of good color. A number of them are of good cutting material. PINK BERYLS, Pala, Calif., 4 to 3 in. diam., loose crystals and in matrix. Gem Matrix Specimens. We have all kinds of gem matrix specimens. Write for further particu- lars. ALBERT H. PETEREIT, 81 & 83 Fulton Street, New York City. THE AMERICAN JOURNAL OF SCIENCE [FOURTH SERIES.] Arr. VII.—On the Ultimate Disintegration Products of the Radio-active Elements. Part Il. The Disintegration Products of Uranium ; by Bertram B. Borrwoop. [Contributions from the Sloane Physical Laboratory of Yale University. | Tue general question of the nature of the ultimate disinte- gration products of the radio-active elements, as indicated by the occurrence of certain chemical elements in the radio-active minerals, has been discussed in an earlier paper,* and it was there pointed out that lead, bismuth and barium might per- haps be included among the possible disintegration products. As more recent experimentst have indicated, however, that actinium is probably an intermediate product between uranium and radium, the number of possible ultimate products has been correspondingly reduced. In addition to this careful examinations have been made of specially selected samples of typical primary uraninites from Branchville, Conn., and Flat Rock, N. C., and of thorianite from Ceylon, which have led to the conclusion that neither bismuth nor barium can be con- sidered as disintegration products in the main line of descent from either uranium or thorium, at least on the basis of the present disintegration theory. The conditions essential for the identification of the final disintegration products of uranium from a study of the com- position of the natural minerals which contain this element would appear to be the following: In unaltered primary min- erals of the same species, and of different species from the same locality, that is, in minerals formed at the same time and therefore of equal ages, a constant proportion must exist between the amount of each disintegration product and the * This Journal, xx, 253, 1905. + Ibid., xxii, 537, 1906. Am. Jour. Sci.—FourtH Serizes, VoL. XXIII, No. 184.—Frprvary, 1907. i 78 B. B. Boltwood— Ultimate Disintegration Products amount of the parent substance with which it is associated. And, in unaltered, primary minerals from different localities, the proportion of ‘each disintegration product with respect to the parent substance must be greater in those minerals which are the older and should correspond with the order of the respective geological ages of the localities in which the min- erals have been found. It also follows that in secondary min- erals, namely, in minerals which have been formed by the subsequent alteration of the original, primary minerals, the relative amounts of the disintegration products must be less than in the primary minerals from the same locality, provided, however, that the disintegration products can not be considered as original chemical constituents of the secondary mineral. It is the purpose of the present paper to show that the above requirements are practically fulfilled by lead and by helium also, in so far as the gaseous nature of the latter ele- ment will permit of its retention in the minerals. The sug- gestion that lead was one of the final (inactive) disintegration products of uranium was first made by the writer in a paper presented before the New York Section of the American Chem- - ical Society on February 10, 1905, and published later in the Philosophical Magazine.* The amounts of uranium and lead present in a considerable number of primary uranium minerals have been calculated from the published analyses of these minerals. The number of such analyses to be found in the literature is not large, and, what is still more unfortunate, with the exception of those made by Hillebrand and a few others, cannot be considered as particularly accurate. Many of the analyses were made with special objects in view, such as the identification of a given specimen with a species already known or its recognition as a new variety or species. There is also what is perhaps an unfortunate tendency on the part of many mineralogists to carry out an analysis merely for the purpose of assigning to the mineral some definite chemical formula, which often leads to the oyerlooking or ignoring of a number of the minor con- stituents. And in addition to this there are also the actual analytical difficulties to be taken into account, which may be very considerable in the case of such minerals as samarskite, fergusonite, euxenite and other minerals containing notable proportions of niobium, tantalum and _ titanium. "Notwith- standing these objections, however, it is necessary to rely very largely on these published analyses, for the simple reason that the greater number of the uranium minerals are extremely rare and the obtaining of suitable samples of the various spe- cies and varieties is either extremely difficult or altogether impossible. * April, 1905. No. of the Radio-active Hlements. 79 In the table which follows (Table I) are given the results obtained from the calculation of the ratio of the percentage of lead to that of uranium contained in the different minerals as indicated by the analyses. Mineral Locality Uraninite, Glastonbury, Conn., . Uraninite, Glastonbury, Conn., . Uraninite, Glastonbury, Conn., . Uraninite, Glastonbury, Conn., . Uraninite, Glastonbury, Conn., . Uraninite, Branchville, Conn., . Uraninite, Branchville, Conn., . Uraninite, Branchville, Conn., Uraninite, Branchville, Conn., . Uraninite, Spruce Pine, N. C., . Uraninite, Spruce Pine, N. C., Uraninite, Spruce Pine, N. C., Uraninite, Marietta, S. C., Uraninite, Llano Co., Tex., . Uraninite, Ilano Co., Tex., . Mackintoshite, Llano Co., Tex., . Yttrocrasite, EKurnet Co., Tex., . Samarskite (? Douglas Co., Colo., . Samarskite (?) Douglas Co., Colo., . Samarskite (?) Douglas Co., Colo., . Uraninite, Anneréd, Norway, Per cent C oO Per cent Pb 2°9 3°0 2°8 3°0 2°9 4°0 4:0 4°0 3°d 3°9 4:2 3°38 9-4 9°5 a4 Ratio Pb Wi 0:041 0-043 0:040 0:042 0-040 0°054 0:053 0-054 0:053 0-051 0:055 0-049 0:046 Analysis by Hillebrand, this Jour- nal, xl, 384, 1890. Hillebrand, /. ¢. Hillebrand, 7. e. Hillebrand, 7. e. Hillebrand, Z. c. Hillebrand, J. c. Hillebrand, Z. ¢. Hillebrand, 7. c¢. From an analysis by the writer. Hiillebrand, J. ¢. Hillebrand, 7. ¢. From an analysis by the writer. ; Hillebrand, this Jour- nal, xlii, 390, 1891. Hillebrand, /. ¢. Hidden and Mackintosh, this Journal, xxxviul, 481, 1889. | Hillebrand, this Jour- nal, xlvi, 98, 1893. Hidden and Warren, this Jour., Xx11, 515, 1906. Hillebrand, Proc. Col. Se. Soc., ili, 38, 1888. Millebrand, /. ¢. - Hillebrand, J. c. Hillebrand, this Jour- nal, xl, 384, 1890. 80 B. B. Boltwood— Ultimate Disintegration Products Anneréd, Nor., . Annerdédite, Anneroéd, Nor., Uraninite, Elvestad, Nor., . Uraninite, Elvestad, Nor., . Uraninite, Skaartorp, Nor., . Uraninite, Huggeniskilen, Nor., . Uraninite, Huggeniaskilen, Nor., . Thorite, Hitteré, Nor., . Uraninite, Arendal, Nor., . Uraninite, Arendal, Nor., . Uraninite, Arendal, Nor., . Thorite, Arendal, Nor., . Orangite, Landbé, Nor., . Xenotime, Naresto, Nor., . Hielmite, Falun, Sweden, . Polyerase, Slattakra, Sweden, . Thorianite, Sabaragamuwa Province, Ceylon, . Thorianite, Sab. Prov., Cey., . Thorianite, Sab. Prov., Cey., . Thorianite, Sab. Prov., Cey., . Thorianite, Cev., . Thorianite, Galle District, Cey., 68 15 66 Lbs) 0°12 Per Per Ratio Mineral Locality cent cent Pb Analysis by U Pb U . Uraninite, Blomstrand, Jour. prakt. Chem., xxix, 191, 1884. Blomstrand, Dana’s Sys- tem of Min., p. 741. Hillebrand, this Jour- nal, xl, 384, 1890. Hillebrand, 7. ¢. Hillebrand, /. e. Hillebrand, 7. ¢. Lorenzen, Nyt. Mag., XXVlll, 249, 1884. Lindstrém, G. For. Forh., v, 500, 1881. Hillebrand, @. ¢. Hillebrand, 7. ¢. Lindstrém, Zeit. f. Kryst., 11, 201, 1878. Nordenskiéld, G. For. Forh., iii, 228, 1876. Hidden, this Journal, xli, 440, 1891. Blomstrand, G. For. Forh., ix, 185, 1887. Weibull, cbid, ix, 371,. 1887. Blomstrand, Dana’s Min., p. 745. Dunstan and Blake, Proc. Roy. Soc. Lond., Ixxvi (A), 253, 1905. Dunstan and Blake, Z. c. Dunstan and Blake, Z. ec. Analysis by writer. Biichner, Nature, Ixxv,. 169, 1906. Dunstan and Jones, Proc. Roy. Soc., Lond.,. Ixxvil (A), 546, 1906. of the Radio-active Elements. 81 In the above table the minerals can be divided into seven general groups according to the localities from which they were obtained, namely ; Group I from Connecticut (Nos. 1 to 9); Group II from North and South Carolina (Nos. 11 to 18) ; Group III from Texas (Nos. 14 to 17); Group IV from Colo- rado (Nos. 18 to 20); Group V from Norway (Nos. 21 to 35); Group VI from Sweden (Nos. 36 and 37); Group VII from Ceylon (Nos. 38 to 43). These groups can be further sub- divided into Group I, from Glastonbury* and Group I, from Branchville, Group V, from localities in the neighborhood of Moss (21 to 29) and Group V, from Arendal, and Group VII, from the Sabaragamuwa Province and Group VII, from the district of Galle. If the ratio of the lead to the uranium in these groups is now considered, it is evident that in Group I, the average value is 0041 and the maximum divergence is less than five per cent. In Group I, the average is 0°0535, which is in close agreement with the four separate values given. In Group II the agreement of the different values is not so good, but is still very striking when the fact is taken into account that the two specimens from North Carolina examined by Hillebrand showed unmistakable evidence of slight secondary alteration as did also the specimen from South Carolina, which moreover is from a different locality and is placed with this group only because there are no others with which to compare it. The material used by the writer was to all appearances free from alteration. In Group III an opportunity is afforded for the comparison of different species from the same locality, for the yttrocrasite described by Hidden and Warren was found only just across the Colorado River from the famous Barringer Hull locality which supplied the other Texas specimens. Here the agree- ment of the ratios is again very satisfactory, especially in the case of the yttrocrasite, which is one of the minerals the care- *T have been informed by Mr. E. B. Hurlburt of Glastonbury, Conn., who has made a careful study of the mineral occurrences in his locality, that he considers it to be highly improbable that the specimens examined by Hillebrand and described as from Glastonbury were actually found in that place or even in the neighboring quarries of South Glastonbury. Colum- bite, monazite, a mineral resembling polycrase and autunite are found at South Glastonbury, but Mr. Hurlburt, who has looked into the matter quite thoroughly, is of the opinion that the specimens of uraninite credited to Glastonbury must have been found in the feldspar quarries of Portland, a town on the east bank of the Connecticut River between South Glastonbury and Middletown. A number of years ago uraninite in some quantity was found at Portland, and as some of the workmen in the Portland quarries had their homes in South Glastonbury, its occurrence in the latter locality may readily have been assumed by the collectors who afterwards obtained the specimens. It is also equally possible that the specimens in many col- lections labelled as from Middletown are also really from Portland. 82 B. B. Boltwood— Ultimate Disintegration Products ful analysis of which presents so many difficult problems. The writer had the good fortune to meet Professor Warren at the time that this analysis was in progress and the latter kindly consented to take special precautions in the determination of the lead and uranium. In Group IV the analyses of three samples of a mineral closely resembling samarskite give values for the ratio show- ing a good agreement, although the different specimens were, according to Hillebrand, quite different in general appearance. In Group V, the agreement is again very good, while in Group V,, including Nos. 34 and 35, the agreement is excel- lent, for the difference in the case of the xenotime from Naresté, near Arendal, is no more than is to be expected when the relatively small amounts of both uranium and lead are taken into consideration. In Group VI the ratios given by the two species from dif- ferent Swedish localities are of little value for the present purposes of comparison, and are significant only as indicating a ratio of the same general order as that found in Group V,,. It is unfortunate for the purpose of the present calculation that the analyses of thorianite from Ceylon by Dunstan and Blake and by Dunstan and Jones have been published in so incomplete a form. This interesting mineral, containing a relatively high proportion of both thorium and helium, affords an exceptional material for the study of radio-active changes, and an accurate knowledge of its general composition would be of much assistance in settling some of the doubtful ques- tions. The published analyses are defective however in the following particulars:—In analyses Nos. I and II* (Nos. 38 and 39 in Table I) the results as given indicate that all of the uranium is present in the form of uranous oxide (UO,), while in analysis No. III (Z.¢.) (No. 40 in Table I) a greater propor- tion of uranic oxide (UO,) than of uranous oxide is shown. Such an extreme variation in composition is not only highly improbable, but (in the light of a more recent analysis of thorianite of a similar variety} in which the uranium is given as UO,+UO, = 13°4 per cent) is probably quite misleading as to the actual composition. Out of the seven analyses given in the paper by Dunstan and. Jones, in only one (No. 43 in Table I) are the separate amounts of uranous and uranic oxides shown, while in the other six a number representing the sum of the percentages of the two oxides is inserted, which affords no reliable clue as to the amount of either oxide or the amount of uranium itself contained in the mineral. The following table containing the values given in the paper by Dunstan and Jones would not appear to be contradictory to * Proc. Roy. Soe. Lond., Ixxvi (A), 253, 1905. +Dunstan and Jones, 1. c. of the Radio-actwe Hlements. 83 the assumption that the lead and uranium are in a constant ratio to one another in the thorianite from the Galle district. TABLE IT. Sample No. U0O.+U0; PbO I 32°7 2°56 II 10°3 18°9 Deo) III 28°2 Dae) IV 28°7 2°50 V 270 299 VI 28°0 2°90 In the paper by Dunstan and Jones an analysis of a speci- men of thorianite from the Balangoda district, showing UO,+ UO, = 13:4 per cent and PbO = 2°54, suggests a close agree- ment of the ratio of lead to uranium in this mineral with the same ratio in the material from the Sabaragamuwa Province. The minerals given in the preceding table are all primary minerals, in the general sense in which this term is used. In the following table (Table IIT), the ratio of lead to uranium has been calculated for some secondary minerals from the same localities. TaB_eE III. Per Per Ratio No. Mineral Locality cent cent Pb Analysis by Wr) Eb U 1. Uranophane, ; MitchellCo.,N.C., 55 0°56 0°01 Genth, Am. Ch. J., i, 2. Uranophane, 88, 1879. Arendal, Nor., 40 1 0:04 Nordenskiéld, G. For. 3. Thorogummite, Forh., vii, 121, 1884. Llano Co., Tex., 19 2:0 0:10 Hidden and Mackintosh, this Journal, xxxviil, 480, 1889. These analyses all agree in giving a lower ratio for the secondary minerals than for the primary minerals from the same localities. The most common alteration product of uraninite known as gummite can be left out of present con- sideration since lead is apparently one of its natural, chemical constituents. The actual value of the ratio varies considerably for the primary minerals from different localities, the maximum value being about six times the minimum. It is beyond the writer’s province to discuss the data bearing on the geological ages of the different deposits, but he is indebted to Professor Joseph Barrell of Yale University for the statement that, so far as the knowledge of the latter extends, the relative values of the 84 B. B. Boltwood— Ultimate Disintegration Products ratios are not contradictory to the order of the ages attributed by geologists to the formations in which the different minerals occur. From the data which have been presented in the preceding tables it is apparent that the requirements for a disintegration product of uranium are fulfilled by lead within the limits of probable experimental error. On the basis of this evidence the assumption would appear to be justified that lead is the final product of uranium. Helium. Few experimental determinations of the relative quantities of helium in minerals of known composition are to be found in the literature. A careful search has brought to light only the following: Twelve determinations by Hillebrand® of the “nitrogen ” present in an equal number of samples of urani- nites of known composition; the determination by Ramsay and Traverst of the per cent of helium in a sample of fergu- sonite, the analysis but not the locality of which is given ; the determinations by Strutt{ of the amounts of helium in a num- ber of minerals which had been analyzed for uranium only; a determination by Dunstan and Blake§$ of the helium in an analyzed sample of thorianite from the Sabaragamuwa province, Ceylon; and the determination of helium in another specimen of the same mineral by Biichner.| ee the great exactness of all the analytical work carried out by Hillebrand, and the general method which he followed in his determinations of “ nitrogen,” it is highly probable that by dividing the values which he gives in his paper by seven (N, : He = 28:4) a very reliable number for the percentage of helium is obtained. It has been shown conclusively by a number of different experimenters that the disintegration of radium is accompanied by the production of helium, and it is further stated by De- bierne™| that the disintegration of actinium furnishes helium also. If the assumption is made on the basis of analogy that the entire change from uranium to lead is accompanied by the production of helium,.then the quantities of matter involved in this change can be represented. by the equation Uranium (238°5) = lead (206°9) + helium (31°6), in other words, that for every 207 parts of lead there will be formed 32 parts of helium. From a knowledge of the amount of lead present in the min- erals it is, therefore, possible to caleulate the amount of helium * This Journal, xl, 384, 1890 ; ibid., xlii, 390, 1891. +Proc. Roy. Soe. Lond., lii, 316, 1898. +Tbid., Lond., Ixxvi (A), 88, 1905. Sl. e. || Nature, ixxv, 165, 1906. q C. R., exli, 388, 1905. of the Radio-active Elements. 85 which would be formed according to this hypothesis, and to compare this amount with the amount actually present in the minerals. Calculations and comparisons of this sort have been made for a number of minerals and the results are given in the fol- lowing table (Table IV). TaBLeE IV. Per cent Percent Helium Percent Helium ealcu- No. Mineral Lead present lated R 1, Uraninite, Glastonbury, Conn., 2°9 0:34 §=0°43 79 2. Uraninite, Branchville, Conn., 4°) 0°39 0°60 65 3. Uraninite, Elvestad, Nor., 9°3 O:18y 1-40 1g 4. Uraninite, North Carolina, 3°9 0:05) 0:58 9 5. Uraninite, Skaartorp, Nor., 8°8 Owls eo lado ll 6. Uraninite, Huggeniskilen, Nor., 8:8 O15, N32 11 7. Uraninite, Anneréd, Nor., Oye ee Olin 26 13 8. Uraninite, Elvestad, Nor., 8:0 Opou ele 2i 12 9. Uraninite, Llano Co., Tex., 9°4 0:08 1:40 6 10. Uraninite, Colorado, 0°6 OO OPLO 20 11. Uraninite, Arendal, Nor., 10°2 Orl6 7. 1:53 10 12. Thorianite, Ceylon, (2°6) 0°16 0°40 40 13. Aeschynite, Hitteroe, Nor., (1°2) 0:02 «0°18 iat 14. Samarskite, North Carolina, (0-42) 0:08 0:06 50 15. Gadolinite (?), Ytterby, Sweden, (0°25) 004 0°04 100 16. Cyrtolite, Texas, (0°53) 0:02 0°08 25 17. Enxenite, Arendal, Nor. (0°41) 0-013 0°06 20 18. Uraninite, Canada, 10°5 On 2a al 8 19. Thorianite, Ceylon, 2°40 0°19* 0°36 53 20. Thorianite, Ceylon, 2°95 Ons 10:34 44 Nos. 1 to 11 and No. 18 are from analyses by Hillebrand, Nos. 12 to 17 from determinations by Strutt (the per cent of lead being calculated from the ratios in Table I), No. 19 from the analysis of Dunstan and Blake, and No. 20 from that of Biichner. In the last column under the heading 7? is given the ratio of the amount of helium actuaily present to the amount formed according to the-hypothesis multiplied by 100, or in other words, the percentage of the total helium formed which has been retained by the mineral. It will be noted that the values obtained in this manner for f? are very reasonable numbers and are not unlike what might be expected from general considerations. This relation is the more evident when the density of the minerals is also exam- * Tn the analysis of Dunstan and Blake an error is made in calculating the per cent of helium in this mineral, which is given as 0:39 per cent of helium. It is stated that the mineral contained 10°5° of helium per gram which is equal to 0'19 per cent of helium. 86 B. B. Boltwood— Ultimate Disintegration Products ined. The densities of only the first ten minerals are known, and these densities with the corresponding values for # are given in the table which follows. TABLE V No. Sp. gr. R No. Sp. gr. R Ie 9°62 79 6. 8°93 11 2. 9°35 65 Be 8°89 133 3s 9°14 ie} 8. 8°32 12 4, 9°08 9 9. 8°29 6 Oe 8°96 al 10. 8°07 20* None of the minerals listed in Table IV contains more helium than is to be expected from the assumption that helium is produced by the disintegration of uranium only, and in gen- eral with greater density of the mineral a greater proportion of the total helinm formed has been retained within it. Age of Minerals. If the quantity of the final product occurring with a known amount of its radio-active parent and the rate of disintegra- tion of the parent substance are known, it becomes possible to calculate the length of time which would be required for the production of the former. Thus, knowing the rate of disinte- gration of uranium, it would be possible to calculate the time required for the production of the proportions of lead found in the different uranium minerals, or in other words the ages of the minerals. The rate of disintegration of uranium has not as yet been determined by direct experiment, but the rate of disintegration of radium, its radio-active successor, has been calculated by Rutherford+ from various data. Rutherford’s calculations give 2600 years as the time required for half of a given quantity of radium to be transformed into final products. The fraction of radium undergoing transformation per year is accordingly 2°7x10-*, and preliminary experiments by the writer on the rate of production of radium by actinium have given a value which is in good agreement with this number. The quantity of radium associated with one gram of uranium in a radio-active mineral has also been determined$ and was found to be 8°8X107" gram. On the basis of the disintegra- tion theory, when radium and uranium are in radio-active equilibrium, an equal number of molecules of each disin- * Tt should be exnlained that No. 10 is really a secondary uraninite and is, therefore, not directly comparable with the others. + Phil. Mag. (6), xii, 367, 1906. t This Journal, xxii, 537, 1906. § Rutherford and Boltwood, this Journal, xxii, 1, 1906. of the Radio-actwe Elements. 87 tegrate per second, and, for our present purposes, we can neglect the difference in atomic weight and simply assume that in any time the weights of radium and uranium which undergo transformation are the same. In one gram of uranium the weight of uranium which would be transformed in one year would therefore be 2°7:10-*X3°8:10-’= 10-" gram, and the fraction of uranium transformed per year would be 107". In the table which follows (Table VI) the ages of the min- erals included under Table I have been roughly calculated in accordance with the method outlined above. The ages of the minerals in years are obtained by multiplying the average value of the ratio 10°. The general plan of calculating the ages of the minerals in this manner was first suggested to the writer by Prof. Rutherford. TaBLE VI. : inerals. gest nee ation vont Glastonbury (Portland), Conn. .-.-.-.---.--- 410 rane wales @onn ry ete ses Ney ies Conn SUN 535 DEUCE strIme taNi. Cie en tey: WEN a hese ie io 510 NVI bay So Cine vee SOUL he Maakv a Mowe ty UN Snes 460 Elano.and, Burnet} Cor Texas. 2.2502 652 e. 1800 DouclasiConiColorado.siss2552 eel) eh ee 1900 Moss District, Norway oi. Neue ee 1300 ATIMELO GSN OLW AVe le cette aay WS noe SO 1700 Sabaracamuwa brov., Ceylon 96% 2s) s ln) 2200 Galles District: Ceylon nee 2h 2 860 The actual values obtained for these ages are, of course, dependent on the value taken for the rate of disintegr ation of radium. When the latter has been determined with certainty, the ages as calculated in this manner will receive a greater significance, and may perhaps be of considerable value for determining the actual ages of certain geological formations. Disintegration Products of Thorium. The available data on the composition of the radio-active minerals serve to throw some lght on the nature of the dis- integration products of thorium as well as uranium. The rela- tive proportions of uranium and thorium may show large variations in minerals from the same locality without exercis- ing a noticeable effect on the value of the lead-uranium ratio for that locality. It can therefore be concluded with certainty that lead is not a disintegration product of thorium. This fact is particularly emphasized by the composition of the thorite found with the thorianite in the Sabaragamuwa proy- ince of Ceylon and in all probability of contemporaneous 88 BL. B. Boltwood— Ultimate Disintegration Products, ete. formation. The constituents of this mineral* are in part as follows: ThO,, 66°26 per cent ; CeO,, 7°18 per cent ; ZrO,, 2°23 per cent; UO,, 0-46 per cent. No lead at all is indicated as present, and the amount to be expected from the uranium is only 0:08 per cent, which was probably overlooked in making the analysis. A similar result was obtained in an examination by the writer of a specimen of thorite from Norway, which con- tained only 0°40 per cent of uranium, 52°0 per cent of ThO, and less than 0°10 per cent of lead. No mention is made of the presence of helium in the former of these thorites and in the specimen examined by the writer no indications of the presence of helium in measurable quantities were obtained. Although it has been stated by Ramsayt that the relatively large amount of helium contained in the thorianite from the Sabaragamuwa province is conclusive evidence of the produc- tion of helium by thorium, it seems quite probable that the evidence furnished by this mineral is quite the contrary, since it appears to contain only half of the amount of helium which would be produced by the disintegration of the uranium alone. Summary. Evidence has been presented to show that in unaltered, pri- mary minerals from the same locality the amount of lead is proportional to the amount of uranium in the mineral, and in unaltered primary minerals from different localities the amount of lead relative to uranium is greatest in minerals from the locality which, on the basis of geological data, is the oldest. This is considered as proof that lead is the final disintegration product of uranium. It has also been shown that, on the basis of the experimental data at present available, the amounts of helium found in radio-active minerals are of about the order, and are not in excess of the quantities, to be expected from the assum ption that helium is produced by the disintegration of uranium and its products only. The improbability that either lead or helium are disintegra- tion products of thorium has been pointed out. December 27, 1906. * Dunstan and Blake, l. e. + Jour. Chem. Phys., iii, 617, 1905. Watson— Dike of Diabase in the Potsdam Sandstone. 89 Arr. VIII.—On a Dike of Diabase in the Potsdam Sand- stone in the Valley of Virginia; by Tuomas Lronarp Watson. Tue occurrence of igneous rocks in the Paleozoic sediments of the Appalachian region is unusual. In 1883 Professor Fontaine* made record of basic igneous material intersecting the Virginia Appalachian Paleozoic sediments. This record was of a dike of igneous rock penetrating the Valley (She- nandoah) limestone of Cambro-Ordovician age, and located two and a half miles northwest of Waynesboro, in Augusta county, Virginia. He says: “A heavy dike of trap penetrates the limestone on 'Mr. Steele’s place, running in a N.W. and S.E. direction, and passing a considerable distance in the Valley.” In 1890, Mr. Dartont+ described the occurrence of a small group of basalt dikes in the Upper Silurian and Lower Devon- ian beds in Highland county, lying west of Staunton, Virginia. Mr. Darton’s paper was accompanied by descriptive notes on the petrography of the basalt dikes by Mr. Diller. In 1896, Mr. Dartont extended his observations farther west, which resulted in the discovery of additional basalt dikes, and a very interesting series of acid dikes, classified by Mr. Keith as “‘felsophyre.” The acid and basic igneous material col- lected by Mr. Darton was studied mier oscopieally by Mr. Keith and his results were incorporated in the former’s paper. Two of the dikes described were found in the dljounulns portion of Pendleton county, West Virginia. Keith recognized three distinct types of texture in the basic rocks, which were the basaltic, the diabasic, and the porphy- ritic. Considerable variations of texture characterized the acid rocks. According to Mr. Darton, the dikes penetrate lime- stones, shales, sandstones, and quartzites, which range in age from Cambro-Ordovician to Lower Devonian, inclusive. While studying the manganese deposits along the western base of the Blue Ridge during the summer of 1906, I was attracted by the occurrence of a small isolated exposure of basic igneous rock in the Valley Paleozoic sediments. A care- ful examination showed the exposure of igneous rock to be in tne so-called Potsdam sandstone (Cambrian) and very near its contact on the west with the Valley (Shenandoah) limestone. This exposure is in Augusta county and about one mile north of Basic, and about fifty paces from and on the east side of the Shenandoah Valley division of the Norfolk and Western Rail- way, near the crossing of the railroad by the wagon road. * The Virginias, iv, 45, 1883. +This Journal, vol. xxxix, 269-271, 1890. +{Ibid., vol. vi, 305-315, 1898. 90 Watson—Dike of Diabase in the Potsdam Sandstone. The igneous rock was readily traceable for a distance of 100 feet or more in a nearly north-south direction, by large and small bowlders on both sides of the wagon road, and by partially decayed rock im place in the wagon road. See ee A Mech eve pei gal EC HAMS) ie hk: wk Lhe I Me ea Spauuclatypica Wall eis eer ee ase SV ROGCDOWIS eee Seer RS a eo hs OSUCOMOTUY OSD === 4 Serna Se eee Syningocwuynes cartier’ \(Elall) <2 22 22 eee eee Spirifer disjunctus Sowerby .------------- Three Forks | Logan 1/213)4]5/4]5 | ¢ r c | c le |e Cc re (pe if 7 c |¢ G@ |) @ || ze r © xe lelelcle r i re {ve 5p | r c | Cc | r r r | c r r r Yr | r r | ig c | r c|e c c r 2 c r r c ie o r Cc 1P r ‘p z 1p |e “p r c c r ¢ c|e¢ r|¢ Gl Gl-e Raymond— Upper Devonian Fauna with Clymenia. 121 Species Three Forks |Logan 1|2)3)4|5)4] 5 S. disjunctus animasensis Girty: ..--------- C c ASG, JDOMOTUGTISOS AMICI A EAs ee eh eee e YG C c [SOOPOEPs DENSA US 5 6S AN eee Soe bose eee e r AG OOPPOS Gj a at Oa ee Be re se TI r 15 r CULIDE TEES Oe Eres SES nae oA Ais CPE CONG e/ ele Ambocelia gregarva Wall _--.4.-----.---- rjc e| cle pPugnas pugmus (Martin) 2222 )22 22 S522) iG ir Cle|r Camarotechia contracta ? Hall ..------.---- r/c iP r QOH ROUZA XS Ws SEE EL e Sela ee Gi c|ce|e¢ ECVORDUNChUS alee TOT yas 5871s sees see r Leiorhynchus mesicostale? Hall .....------ c|¢ e| cle MECVONIVUICCILUS Sa. 25 5 ois eal w aye te ns c c TE OOMCCUSIS Die See ae eas Sete es aut A eee en vg (hae pak Productella subaculeata Walcott. -.--------- c c c (Not P. spinulicosta Hall) aINO OLECLELL OS rte iene ae Seat E ON ey Sut c c c Strophalosia cf. 8. truncata (Hall). ----.---- r r Chonetes jilusirvatus ? Walcott 222222) 2222" r Woncteswlar ee strice ssa) eas Eee eoe tay ve r GQHOMELCS SDI tee ee se, Sure UST OA liek a ip Schuchertella chemungensis (Conrad) - ----- c r Saczjata NVehite and Whitt =e=22)2 25. a: r Schizophoria cf. S. striatula Schlotheim. - - - c c c SORIZOPLOTUDESD io -ersaser= ee ae eee ese r c c J SOUKRO DS TOP PR IES Nine Eee NC eee eae r OGCULOVACH IS Ds as re et eae ee ae aler 1 I MEY VOUUAES Din ope ie pe on pa ie tie iy Cie 10) 10) fae VO RCOU OG. VALS: LOGI! = a Bae ere eae c c ¢ Honotropas small forms.) ser elas ana c TMCIVESCCIL) PSY.) 22 a= = SLE RSS Naan r r WGEUECTURUSHS De a sae sans ai. ay ae r Cimmoidestems)s so Ses L ee A ae ea C c r ISURCILELO SIGS De. yeas Sis) ke Se eae a r Correlation. Clymenia has been previously represented in America only by Clymenia (Acanthoclymenia) neapolitana (Clarke) from the Cashaqua shales of western New York. With that species occur the numerous goniatites and other fossils of the J/an- ticoceras intumescens fauna, so well described by Dr. Clarke. The fauna of the Three Forks shales agrees with that of New York in the presence of Clymenia, Cheiloceras, Bactrites, Entomis, and Loxopteria, but the species are in all cases dis- tinct ; the associated fauna is very different and the guide fos- sil, Manticoceras intumescens, appears to be absent from the Three Forks shales.’ The fauna here listed seems to be much more like that of 122 Raymond— Upper Devonian Fauna with Clymenia. the Upper Devonian of South Devon, the Rheinland, and other localities in Europe and Asia, where the top of the Devonian is indicated by one containing humerous species of Clymenia and goniatites. It is to be noticed, however, that the clymenias and goniatites of this American fauna. are accompanied by indigenous forms suggestive of the typical Chemung of the eastern sections. The Three Forks shale fauna cannot be directly correlated with any of those now known in the Rocky Mountains. It has a few species in common with the Devonian of the Eureka District, but these seem to be forms which have a long range in the Nevada section and are of little diagnostic value. With the fauna of the Devonian along the Mackenzie River this has little in common, as the fauna described by Whiteaves contains an abundance of corals, while these organisms are almost entirely lacking in the Three Forks shales. The Ouray limestone of Colorado, described by Girty, con- tains one or two species found in the present fauna. Spzrifer disjunctus animasensis is rather common in both. In the uppermost zone of the Three Forks section the presence of Syringothyris and Spirifer disjunctus may prove to be of considerable interest in the correlation of these beds with Eastern sections. Williams* has noted the presence of Syringothyris and Spirifer disjunctus in beds overlying the typical Chemung and underlying the Waverly in southwestern New York. On account of the presence of Syringothyris these beds have been referred to the Mississippian. Dr. Girty, who has devoted a considerable time to the study of these strata and their enclosed fossils, has shownt that the fauna. indicates a separate time interval, which he calls the Brad- fordian. In this he includes the Cattaraugus, Oswego, and Knapp formations of the New York section, and considers these beds to represent the latest Devonian deposition in their province. The fauna of the upper zone of the Three Forks section may, therefore, indicate the occurrence of the Bradfordian in the Rocky Mountains, and serves to confirm the reference of the Clymenia americana fauna to a very high Devonian horizon. It is the intention of the writer to continue the study of this fauna, both in the field and in the laboratory, and further work may make possible more definite correlations. Acknowledgment is here made to Dr. Holzapfel, of Aachen, in appr eciation of his kindness in identifying a suite of fossils from the red shale zone, and to Mr. Douglass, the discoverer of the goniatites, for bringing the locality to the attention of the writer. Carnegie Museum, Pittsburg, Pa., September 4, 1906. * Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. xiv, p. 184, 1908. + Science, vol. xix, No. 470, Jan. 1, 1904, pp. 24-25. F. B. Loomis— Wasatch and Wind River Rodents. 123 Art. XII.— Wasatch and Wind River Rodents; by F. B. Loomis. Mosr of the rodents from the Wasatch and Wind River beds have been loosely associated with the species of the Bridger formation, largely, it would seem, in accordance to size. A considerable number of specimens occurring in the Amherst col- lection of 1904 from the Wasatch and Wind River beds show at once that there was probably the same wealth of species in these beds as in the Bridger beds, and further very casual comparison developed that the species are characteristic in each horizon. While the Amherst collection seems to contain far more specimens from the lower beds than other collections, for purposes of comparison the Bridger material of Yale Museum was studied through and all the Ter tiary rodent material of the American Museum of Natural History was generously loaned for generic and comparative study. ‘It has become clear that a revision of the Bridger species is desir- able, but in this paper that material is used only for generic characters. Two genera are involved, Paramys of Leidy and Sciuravus of Marsh. The former has been well-defined and illustrated, but of the latter, though the material is abundant, there is not even a figure. Paramys was founded by Leidy in 1871.* The genus has many sciurine features, being probably ances- tral to this family. The skull is long and narrow, especially so between the orbits, the width there being about } the length. The brain case is moderately swollen and has a trace of a longitudinal crest along the dorsal median line. The ex- ternal infraorbital foramen is not compressed as in squir- rels, but broadly oval and opens almost directly above premolar 3. On the lower jaw the broad area for the attachment of the masseter muscle ends in front under the interval between molar 2 and molar 3. Otherwise the lower jaw is Sciurus-like. The dental formula is 4% 2 3. The molars are characterized by a strong protocone on the inner side, and the hypocone either lacking or merely indicated.+ On the outer side the paracone and metacone are strong cusps, with a small parastyle and tiny mesostyle also developed. Intermediates (paraconule and metaconule) are also present and usually more or less completely yoked to the paracone and metacone. An extra marginal ridge is developed ron) front and rear. The lower molars are low crowned, the four * Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., p. 231. + For convenience Osborn’s tritubercular terms are used without commit- ment to the theory. 124 F. B. Loomis— Wasatch and Wind River Rodents. plump cusps being marginal and leaving a large interior basin. Between the two outer cusps a small mesostylid is developed. The anterior inner cusp (paraconid) is considerably higher than the others. The limbs are shorter and much heavier than those of a squirrel of the same length of body, this being especially the case with the hind limb; so that Paramys would have approximated the appearance of a woodehuck or marmot. As the limb bones are much heavier and the tuberosities well developed, and as the distal end of the humerus is expanded, it seems probable that these forms were terrestrial, not to say burrowing forms.. The astragulus of Paramys is especially broad and the articulating surface flattened, with the head directed obliquely backward ; while the same bone of squirrels is narrow with a deeply grooved articulating surface and the head directed straight back. Sciuravus was founded in 1871 by Marsh* for a group of tiny rodents closely related to the foregoing but clearly separated by dental characteristics. » Like that of Paramys, the skull is long and narrow especially between the orbits, being there about | 4+ the length. There is no longitudinal crest. While the general characteristics of the skull are similar to Paramys, the upper molars are distinguished by having fonr subequal cusps, the hypocone being fully developed. There is no parastyle but the mesostyle is weakly developed. The ‘intermediate cusps are weak or wanting. The lower molars are very low crowned, and the cusps all unusually low and small, making the upper surface less irregular than in Paramys. Following (p. 125) is a table to compare the three genera Sciurus, Paramys and Scinravus. The species of Paramys begin in the Wasatch and increase in abundance to their height in the Bridger, the last of them. occurring in the Uinta. “To facilitate the use of terms an upper and a lower molar is labeled in figure 1. Paranys primaevus sp. nov. Type No. 248, consisting of two upper. jaws and parts of both lower jaws together with fragments of the incisors, found in the Wasatch beds of Buffalo Basin near Meeteetse, Wyo. Of the upper teeth premolar 4 is without an anterior,- marginal ridge, but the ridge from the paracone extends to © the protocone, the anterior intermediate being indistinguish- able. The molars have the anterior marginal ridge, while that from the paracone includes the anterior intermediate, but does not reach to the protocone. The hypocone is merely indicated. The posterior intermediate cusp is distinct though * This Journal (8), ii, p. 122 F.. B. Loomis— Wasatch ana Wind River Rodents. 125 peasy Paramys copei |Sciuravus nitidus. Length of skull Gon sonm A ee Width between 9omm 1omm gmm orbits Ratio 13:4 Sen Seal Crest none weak none Interval between lower [4mm y5™m gmm incisor and premolar Masseter _intervalbetween interval between interval between muscle ends premolar 4 molar 2 and molar 2 and under and molar 1 molar 3 molar 3 Tete Sie ore ae ee oval and wide | oval and wide es, ea: y a "nearly over nearly over snipes premolar 3 premolar 3 3 cusps srcusps wan 4 cusps, no Upper molars id trace of hypo- ? parastyle cone, parastyle parastyle H : 60™™ long x 8 | 58™™ long x15 We ae wide distally | wide distally ila 61™™ long 38™™ long slender heavy Metacarpalic 38™™ long 28™™ long Pelvis pam long TAD long, 602™ long x 13 ell F S Sena wide at head | wide at head ee Zou lons < 9) \/-a Lommnlone:< Celleaaeinian wide 10™ wide Dine long <5.) l2ee > lone Gs Astragulus wide, head wide, head straight oblique partly merged into the ridge from the metacone. mesostyle is simple. The lower molars are characterized by The tiny the cusps being rather low and entirely marginal, leaving a _ Am. Jour. Sct.—Fourtu Series, Vou. XXIII, No. 134.—Frprvuary, 1907. al 126 FE. B. Loomis— Wasatch and Wind River Rodents. large interior basin. There is the beginning of a ridge inward from the protocone. The incisors are much compressed, measuring on the broken section 53™™ deep by 22™" wide. The series of four lower molariform teeth occupy 150", 1 4 X " / aaa f i 3 ! ; ~o2 > RaQ 06 ~~ ‘ Ss | i] i 1 I 1 ; { / deem hte ! Di S RX pod -- Fic. 1. Paramys primaevus, x4; A, upper series of the right side; B, lower premolar 4 and molar 1 of the left side; ai, anterior intermediate or paraconule; c, anterior marginal ridge; h, hypocone ; hd, hypoconid ; m, metacone ; md, metaconid ; ms, mesostyle; msd, mesostylid ; p, proto- cone ; pa, paracone; pad, paraconid; pd, protoconid; ps, parastyle; pi, posterior intermediate or metaconule. Paramys quadratus sp. nov. ce Type No. 226a, a lower jaw of the right side, with three teeth (molar 1 lacking), found in Buffalo Basin near Meeteetse, Wyo. The jaw is the largest of those known from the Wasnteh, Fie. 2. Paramys quadratus, x4; lower jaw of the right side. the lower teeth being distinguished by being nearly as wide as they are long, the cusps being plump and marginal, “the interior basin being very large and fairly deep. Premolar 4 has the IE B. Loomis— Wasatch and Wind River Rodents. 127 two anterior cusps very close, the internal one being much higher than the external cusp. The wide molars have the two posterior cusps united by the posterior marginal ridge. The two anterior cusps on the other hand are not yoked, though an anterior marginal ridge starts from either one but dies down about midway. The mesostylid is very small. An incisor is of medium thickness, measuring on a broken surface 5$™™ deep by 24"" wide. The length of the four lower molariform teeth is 18™™. Paramys atwateri sp. nov. Type No. 180, a lower jaw of the left side containing molars 1 and 2 and the roots of the other teeth, and found at the foot iY ( ) Fie. 38. Paramys atwateri, x 4; lower jaw of the left side. of Tatman Mt. near Otto, Wyo. The species is named after Mr. W. C. Atwater, a patron of the expedition. This is the smallest of the Wasatch species, and character- ized by the very plump cusps which are placed further in Fie. 4. Paramys bicuspis, x4; A, molars of the right lower jaw; B, premolar 4 and molars 1 and 2 of the left upper jaw. from the margin than in other species, in consequence of which the interior basin is much reduced in extent. The two anterior cusps are united by a marginal ridge, as are also the two posterior cusps. The mesostylid is relatively large. The face of a broken incisor measures 38$"™” deep by 2™™ wide. The length of the series of lower molariform teeth is 124". 128 #F. B. Loomis— Wasatch and Wind River Rodents. Paramys bicuspis sp. nov. Type No. 451, an upper jaw of the left side and a lower jaw from the right side, each with three teeth, and found in the Wind River beds on Bridger Creek near Lost Cabin, Wyo. In size the species is about the same as P. coper, ‘put’ is clearly distinguished by the mesostyle being double. On the fourth premolar and the first two molars of the upper jaw there is a strong anterior and a posterior marginal ridge. The protocone is well developed, the hypocone merely indicated. From the paracone a ridge (low in the middle) runs to the protocone, yoking them. From the metacone also a ridge runs inward to the metaconule. On premolar 4 and molar 1 the ridge appears a series of tiny cusps, but on molar 2 the ridge is less complete and the metaconule is distinct. The lower molars have low marginal cusps, the paraconid being very prominent. While shallow the interior basin is large. There is a posterior marginal ridge, and in front an anterior marginal ridge, incomplete in the middle. Then on the slopes of the protoconid and paraconid, facing each other, there is a trace of a fold. The posterior ridge of the last molar is a broad inrolled buttress very characteristic of the species. A broken face of the incisor is 4$™™ deep by 237" wide. The four molariform lower teeth measure 14™™. Paramys copet sp. nov. Type No. 4755 of the Cope collection in the Amer. Museum of Natural History, already figured and described by Cope as Plesiarctomys delicatissimus Leidy.* The custom of assigning Wind River specimens to Bridger species was here followed by Cope. This species is a trifle larger than P. delicatissimus. Lower premolar 4 of P. coper has a larger and smaller cusp ante- riorly; while P. delicatissimus has but a single cusp in the same position. The cusps of P. coped are less plump and the interior basin is larger. The upper molars can not be com- pared, as P. delicatissimus is founded on a lower jaw and is a rare species. The upper teeth of P. coped are marked by the ridges from the paracone and metacone being simple and including the paraconule and metaconule respectively. The mesostyle is simple. The known specimens are found in the Wind River beds along the Wind River in Wyoming. Paramys major sp. nov. Type No. 327a, a lower jaw found in the Wind River beds on Bridger Creek near Lost Cabin, Wyo.; and the same form * Rep. U.S. Geol. Surv. Terri., vol. iii, p. 182 ; and pl. 24a, fig. 1-10. EF’. B. Loomis— Wasatch and Wind River Rodents. 129 as was described and attributed to Plestarctomys delicatior Leidy by Cope.* The species is characterized by its considerable size, the plump marginal cusps, and large interior basin. The two anterior cusps are united by a paralophid ridge, in front of which is the beginning of a cingulum or anterior marginal ridge. The two rear cusps are connected by a posterior mar- ginal ridge. The mesostyle is very small. On molar 3 the posterior margin is considerably widened. From P. delica- tior this species is distinguished by the general slenderer build, Fie. 5. Paramys major, x4; lower jaw of the left side. especially in the cusps being less plump, the interior basin larger, and the mesostylid less developed. The lower molar series measures 163™™. Paramys excavatus sp. nov. Type No. 327, a lower jaw of the right side from the Wind River beds on Bridger Creek near Lost Cabin, Wyo. This delicate species is distinguished by its slender jaw and low crowned teeth with tiny marginal cusps. The interior basin is large and fairly deep. The anterior cusps are not united by a marginal ridge, though from the protoconid two tiny ridges rise and start inward, soon however fading out. Fic. 6. Paramys excavatus, x4; lower jaw of the right side. The two posterior cusps are connected by a marginal ridge which on the last molar is a wide inrolling buttress. This last molar is distinguished from other species by the rear being botched medianly. The mesostylid is tiny. The incisors are rather wide, a broken face measuring 3™" deep by 2™™ wide. The length of the lower molariform series is 12™™. * Tbid., vol. iii, 1884, pl. 24a, fig. 11-13. 130 F. B. Loomis— Wasatch and Wind River Rodents. Sciuravus depressus sp. nov. Type No. 482, three upper molars of the right side from the Wind River beds on Bridger Creek near Lost Cabin, Wyo. Cotype No. 458, molar 1 of the left lower jaw, from the same locality. This rodent is characterized by its tiny size. The upper molars are rectangular, slightly longer than wide, haying the hypocone equally “developed with the other cusps. There is a front and rear marginal ridge. From each of the cusps a ridge runs inward, but these do not unite to make yokes. Neither protoconule or metaconule is visible in this species. There is a tiny mesostyle. The lower teeth have very low 6 ‘ Fie. 7. Sciuravus depressus, x 6; A, type, molars of the right upper jaw ; B, cotype, molar 1 of the left lower jaw. crowns with low isolated cusps. There is no anterior mar- ginal ridge, but two low folds run a short distance from the protoconid, soon dying out. The inconspicuous mesostyle is more isolated than usual. The lower series of molariform teeth measure 8™™. Plesiarctomys ? buccatus Cope. U.S. Geog. Surv. West of the 100th Meridian, 1877, p. 171. This species, from the New Mexico Wasatch, I have not seen; but it is described and figured as having four cusps developed on the upper molars, which together with its small size leads me to consider it a Sciuravus. Amberst College, Amherst, Mass. K. J. Bush—Two genera of tubicolous Annelids. 131 Arr. XIII.— Descriptions of the two genera of tubicolous Annelids, Paravermilia and Pseudovermilia, with species Srom Bermuda referable to them ; by K. J. Busn, Ph.D. [Brief Contributions to Zoology from Museum of Yale Univ., No. LXVIII. | TuesE two genera, Paravermilia and Pseudovermilia, are most readily recognized by the greater or less development of the thoracie membrane and by the form of the terminal tooth on the uncini. Both have bulbous opercula with horn-colored chitinous caps; both have simple, regularly tapered setze on the thorax, becoming more or less angular and bent on the abdomen ; both have somewhat similar shaped uncini. ParavermitiA Bush 1905. Harriman Alaska Expedition, XII, pp. 221 and 223, 1905; this Journal, p. 54, 1907. Species of good size are found at Bermuda, usually in dead coral, which agree in having a good sized bulbous four-sided operculum protected by a horn-colored chitinous end varying in form and composed of a number of pieces fitting closely one above the other ; the peduncle attached to one side of the base on a line with the front wall is rounded, much annulated, and often curved in contraction. Branchial lobes in the form of rather stout, more or less elongated, rounded stems, bear rather stout, about equal branchize arranged in a semi-circle; crowded pinnee abruptly decrease in length near the end of the rachis leaving a con- spicuous oblanceolate or somewhat club-shaped terminal por- tion varying in length in preservation, probably extensile in life, the cells on the inner surface of the shorter ones being much crowded. Thoracic membrane conspicuously developed, forming a deep, much ruftled, 3-lobed collar, deepest in the middle, with _very large angular side lobes often overlapping medially, eX- tending backward along the sides as a conspicuous border dimin- ishing more or less abruptly between the 5th and 6th fascicles of setze, not produced posteriorly. Seven fascicles of setze at the end of six tori on the thorax. Setze long tapered blades with slen- der lash-like ends, in the posterior bundles a few with broader more curved blades with broader serrate ends, on the collar a few inferior capillary ones resembling the slender ends of the superior ones. The uncini form a single series along the poste- rior border of separate rectangular membranous areas succes- sively increasing in size. They arenarrow or thin in front view with one series of striated teeth which in profile are sharp, 1382 K. J. Bush—Two genera of tubicolous Annelids. appressed, above one large truncated, more prominent, termi- nal one; abdominal uncini much smaller. Abdominal sete more or less curved or bent, with elongated, regularly tapered, somewhat angular blades ; hair-like along caudal region. The rounded, more or less thickened tubes taken from dead coral seldom show any distinguishing characters. toughened by irregular lines,of growth and occasional resting stages, a few show a var ying number of longitudinal lines or carine. Each species, however, can be readily identified by the form of the horn-colored cap on its operculum, the other characters appearing to differ only relatively. The generic name Paravermilia was proposed for this group of species, with P. bermudensis as type. PARAVERMILIA BERMUDENSIS Bush 1905. Nine tubes of moderate size were found in 1898 and 1901, dredged in 30-40 feet in Great Harbor and other localities at Bermuda. They were taken usually from dead coral but occasionally were attached to mollusks, forming an irregularly twisted mass. The surface is sometimes ornamented with five conspicuous, longitudinal carinee, the two outer ones usually the largest. The species can be readily recognized by the good-sized bulbous operculum on its long, rounded, much annulated pe- duncle, capped by an elongated horn- colored chitinous cone which is asymmetrical and usually much curved, a few only having the cone erect. This cone, resembling a tiny spiral shell, is made up of numerous saucer-shaped pieces diminish- ing in size to the minute rounded tip, and are defined by darker rings sometimes numbering twelve; some are occasion- ally wanting on the end. The erect cone is shorter, made up of longer fewer pieces shown by a less number of vings ; these may be designated as variety minor. The branchize, about 12 in each lobe, are usually too much curled to determine their length; those of one animal are extended and appear equal to about the length of the thorax and are folded closely around the peduncle with the entire operculum exposed. Thoracic membrane very delicate, excessively developed, the angular side lobes folding over each other enwr apping the body. Teeth on uncini sometimes numbering 18; caudal, hair-like setee exceedingly long. PARAVERMILIA INTERMEDIA Sp. Nov. Three animals, smaller than P. bermudensis, often light olive-green in color, have from 10-12 branchize in each lobe and about 16 teeth on the largest thoracic uncini. K. J. Bush—Two genera of tubicolous Annelids. 133 The operculum has the asymmetrical horn-colored cap, shorter and broadly rounded at tip, made up of but three unequal saucer-shaped pieces below the good-sized bulbous end-piece. The small tube has five, unequal, rather fine, rounded longi- tudinal threads. PARAVERMILIA AMBLIA Sp. NOV. Five specimens about the size of P. bermudensis have 14-16 branchiz in each lobe and the thoracic membrane very excessively developed. The large, sometimes cylindrical, oper- culum has a comparatively short, broadly rounded, symmetri- eal, light horn-colored cap of one or two convex or dome- shaped pieces covered by a very large, elongated, broadly- rounded end-piece. Occasionally one occurs in which the pieces decrease in diameter ; the cap tapered. PaRAVERMILIA ANNULATA (Schmarda). Vermilia annulata Schmarda, Neue Wirbellose Thiere, II. p. 28, text figure and pl. XXI, fig. 176, 1861 ; non Ehlers, Blake annelids, p. 308, pl. 58, . figs. 12-16; pl. 59, figs. 1-3, 1887; ? non Augener, Westindische Polycheten, p. 184, 1906. Placostegus annulatus Morch, Revisio Serpulidarum, p. 422, 1863. 2 Vermilia annulituba Augener, op. cit., p. 185, pl. 8, figs. 153-161. Seven specimens taken from dead coral from Castle Har- bor, Bermuda, are larger than any of the preceding forms, the largest one with much curled branchiz measuring about 22™™. There are from 12-14 branchize in each lobe and 16 teeth on the largest uncinus. The horn-colored chitinous cap of the operculum is concave on the end, being composed of two or three saucer-shaped pieces, destitute of an additional convex end-piece found in the other species. It is very like Schmarda’s figure and descrip- tion and also the figure given by Augener as Vermilia annuli- tuba found north of Martinique in 210 fathoms. The thoracic membrane in this very much larger species is not clearly defined, especially in the figure, and the terminal tooth on the uncinus is represented as bluntly rounded. Schmarda’s figure also is not sufficiently clear for definite com- parison. The two animals found off Cuba in 292 and 310 fathoms, described and figured by Ehlers under Schmarda’s name, on comparison were found to differ not only from this species but also from each other. Through the courtesy of Dr. Wood- worth of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, these speci- mens have recently been examined and found to be two distinct species referable to two different genera. 134. K. J. Bush—Two genera of tubicolous Annelids. One (No. 809), from 292 fathoms, described and represented in figure 13, plate 58, has an asymmetrical tapered segmented cone on the oper culum, the end broken off, very closely related to, if not identical with, P. intermedia from Bermuda. The branchize are described as numbering 20 or 21 in each lobe but are represented as about half that number. The opercu- lum of the other (No. 1,223) from 310 fathoms is not quite accurately shown in figure 14, an important line through the middle being omitted. The chitinous end is composed of two parts; a lower saucer-shaped piece with raised center on which rests a second cup-shaped piece with slightly convex top and upright flarmg rim. This bears some resemblance to the chitinous opercular end found in species of /omatostegus, but the peduncle shows no trace of side appendages characteristic of that genus. Unfortunately the specimen has become much dried so that important characters cannot at present be deter- mined with sufficient accuracy to reveal its generic position. PsEuDOVERMILIA Bush 1907. This Journal, p. 54. Three species. two from Bermuda (Spirobranchus occidenta- lis McIntosh, 1885, and an undescribed one) and one from the southern coast of Patagonia (Vermilia nigropileata Ehlers, 190001), have a small, more or less elongated bulbous opercu- lum gr adually expanding from a long, slender, rounded pedun- cle becoming flattened and broadened distally, protected by a dark horn-colored (appearing as black) chitinous end differing in form; no thoracic membrane, i. e., no free border along the sides and posteriorly, but a well- dev eloped 3-lobed collar; 7 fascicles of setae and 6 short tori in straight series on the thorax ; simple regularly tapered sete, those on the abdomen bent and broadly angular at base, hair Jike along caudal region ; uncini with numerous appressed teeth, the terminal one large with notched or bifid end. No genus being known which includes all of these characters, the name Pseudovermilia was proposed with occidentalis McIntosh as type. Branchial lobes more or less elongated, free, slightly spiral in retraction, rachis-like with few branchiz on one side, not extending the entire length, leaving a small tapered end. Collar of about uniform depth, full, sometimes rolling, rounds abruptly on a line with the first. torus, meeting along the median line of the thorax, with an incision or cleft on each side dividing it into three about equal parts or lobes with rounded ends. Sete nearly colorless, rather stiff, with com- paratively short abruptly tapered blades, those in the collar fascicle the shortest with a few capillary inferior ones. Un- K. J. Bush—Two genera of tubicolous Annelids. 135 eini irregularly trapisiform with a number of sharp appressed teeth, the last one long, blunt and notched (bifid) on the end, those on the abdomen smaller and thicker, the notch on the end tooth not always discernible. Tube conspicuously ornamented or sculptured when mature and perfectly developed, often marred by erosion, more or less spreading along the sides and attached the entire length (rarely lifted), the high median keel often prolonged as a spine-like projection at the aperture. PSEUDOVERMILIA OCCIDENTALIS (McIntosh) Bush. Spirobranchus occidentalis McIntosh, Challenger Report, XII, p. 429, pl. ly, fig. 10, pl. xxix a, figs. 31-2, 1885. Pseudovermilia occidentalis Bush, this Journal, p. 54, 1907. This species, recorded by McIntosh from off Bermuda in 435 fathoms attached to an echinoderm, is also found along the shores of Bermuda on the underside of the hat-coral (Agaricea fragilis) and other hosts. It forms highly ornamented tapered tubes, usually isolated, variously curved and twisted, usually attached their entire length, thickened when mature and spreading along the sides with a high, conspicuous, dorsal keel often forming a spine- like projection at the aperture ; conspicuously elevated trans- verse lines radiate from this ridge, arranged at first in herring- bone fashion beyond which they become irregularly curved; a small rounded thread rendered nodulose by the tranverse ornamentations, separates the two series and a similar but less developed one sometimes appears just below the dorsal keel. This characteristic sculpture is often obliterated by erosion and the young seldom show any trace of the transverse lines, so that as a determining specific factor the tubes are of little use. Animal is slender, rounded, the forty (40) or more segments defined only by series of uncini on the abdomen widely sepa- rated along the median portion, becoming crowded posteriorly. Branchive long with very long slender crowded pinnee abruptly decreasing in length, forming a broad truncated tip, 6 in each lobe. Opercuium with a somewhat thickened slightly concave disc-like dark brownish horn-colored (appear- ing as black) chitinous end, having a long, sharp, thorn-like spine near one side, often irreoularly bent. One operculum shows the end in the act of slipping off, revealing another disk beneath. Uneini with about 13 teeth, the last large and notched on the end; well figured by McIntosh. The genus Spzrobranchus to which McIntosh referred his species differs not only in having a caleareous end on, the 136 K. J. Bush—Two genera of tubicolous Annelids. . operculum ornamented with antler-like spines, but has very strongly marked collar sete. The species described by Marion and Bobretzky from Mar- seilles and by Saint-Joseph from Cannes (see this Journal, p. 57) have a similar thorn-like projection on the operculum cap but the cap itself is elongated and composed of several pieces. PSEUDOVERMILIA PILEUM Sp. Nov. This species is very common along the shores of Bermuda. The tubes, similar to P. occidentalis, are found also on the hat-coral and on various shells (Arca Adamsu, Turbo (Livona) picta, Astralium longispinum, Chama bermudensis and others). When uninterrupted in its development it has three prominent nodulose carinze on top (one large keel-like median and two smaller lateral ones) separated by two deep grooves below which are conspicuous curved tranverse lines. Young tubes invariably have three carine but seldom show any indications of the transverse sculpture. The species is readily distinguished by its larger, more elongated operculum, having an _ elongated, asymmetrical, irregular, dark horn-colored (blackish) chitinous cone-like end, resembling a liberty-cap. The branchiz number 7 in each lobe and the setee appear broader and more abunnely tapered and the teeth on the uncini more numerous than in the pre- ceding species. One smaller animal without an operculum has 9 branchize in each lobe. The P. nigropileata Ehlers* is a closely related species with the opercular cone more symmetrical and larger. Zoological Laboratory, January 14th, 1907. * Magellanische Anneliden, p. 222, 1900; Die Polycheten des Magellan- ischen und Chilenischen Strandes, p. 219, pl. xxv, figs. 14-23, 1901. D. L. Randall—Titration of Mercurous Salts. 137 Arr. XIV.—The Titration of Mercurous Salts with Potas- sium Permanganate ; by D. L. Ranpaut. [Contributions from the Kent Chemical Laboratory of Yale University—cliii. | Ir a solution of a mercurous salt, such as mercurous sulphate in dilute sulphuric acid, is titrated with potassium permanga- nate in the usual manner the bleaching of the color is rapid at first, but long before the oxidation is complete the solution assumes a golden yellow color and on standing the brown oxides of manganese are precipitated. For this reason no defi- nite end reaction is obtainable. This difficulty is, however, avoided if the permanganate solution is added in excess, the color then bleached with a standard ferrous sulphate solution, and the end point finally reached by a few drops of permanga- nate. Under these conditions the end reaction is perfectly sharp and the oxidation of the mercurous salt complete, as may be proved by adding hydrochlori¢ acid to the solution. In the preliminary experiments this process was tested upon weighed portions of commercial chemically pure mercurous sulphate, which was dissolved in dilute sulphuric acid. So much difficulty was experienced in dissolving the salt in quan- tities suitable for experiment that recourse was taken to the very doubtful procedure of heating the liquid (boiling or pro- longed heating on the steam bath) to hasten the solution. Although the end reaction was in ever y case as sharp as could be desired, and the oxidation complete, the results were low and variable, indicating from 90-93 per cent of mercurous sul- phate in the sample used. This was probably due to the partial oxidation of the mercurous salt during the process of solution. A few experiments in which the salt was dissolved in hot concentrated phosphoric acid, and the solution then diluted and titrated without further addition of acid, gave results much nearer the theory but still very variable. For the final experiments a large quantity of a mercurous sulphate solution was prepared by shaking up an excess of the salt in water acidified with sulphuric acid, allowing the whole to stand for twenty-four hours, and finally filtering through asbestos. Portions of this solution for standardization or titra- tion were measured out in a 100° burette or weighed out in a dry counterposed beaker. The standard of this solution was obtained by precipitating the measured or weighed por- tions in the cold with a slight excess of sodium “chloride. After twelve hours standing, the precipitated mercurous chlor- ide was collected upon asbestos in a platinum crucible and dried to a constant weight at the ordinary temperature in a 138) =D. L. Randall—Titration of Mereurous Salts. vacuum desiccator over sulphuric acid. The method of drying in a vacuum is recommended by Hulett* as much more trust- worthy than the usual one of drying in the air bath at 105° 110° C. where there is danger of volatilizationt, a statement which the experience of the “present writer has fully borne out. In every case the standard of the mercurous solution used was fixed by two or more gravimetric determinations made on the same day as the corresponding series of titrations. The solutions of permanganate and of ferrous sulphate used were both approximately twentieth normal. The reason why it is desirable to use solutions more dilute than the usual tenth normal strength is obvious when we note that 0-1™ of the above twentieth normal permanganate is equivalent to about one milligram of mercury. For the same reason the titrations must be ‘performed with all possible care and accuracy. All the burettes used in the present investigation had been standard- ized by the Berlin Reichsanstalt. As the oxidation of mercurous salt by an excess of perman- ganate is very rapid, no great care is necessary in regulating the amount of the excess. It is sufficient in practice to con- tinue the addition of permanganate until the solution, colored brown by the oxides of manganese, takes on a distinctly red tint. Under these circumstances the ferrous sulphate can be added immediately and the titration completed. Table I gives the results obtained with mercurous sulphate. TABLE I. A Dilu- tion at KMnO, Hg,SO, titra- H,SO, approx. KMnO, Hg Hg sol. tion 1:1 N/20 Oe aie final found theory Error em’, cm3. cm, ems. ems. 3, ems. grm. grm. grm. LOOM OOM Smee la iO. lO: ie. 90 3°80 :0846 °03854 —:0008 OOS elo Oar. 14°72 10°. 10°90 8°82 :0347 :03854 —-°0007 LOO 150% oe ol 47.0 10°. 10°90 38°80 +0346 °03854 —-:0008 OOM LOOM ro 14°71 10°. 10°90 3°81 :03846 °0354 ~—~:0008 B Hg.S0,4 sol. grm. 505°8 500 5 29:20 10° 10°90 18°30 -1668 °1666 +:0002 500°2 500 = 5 32°16 13° 14:17 17°99 -°1639, °-1648 —-0009 §10°1 500 =5 29°29 10°: 10°90 18°39 °1676 °1680 —-0004 499°2 500 5 28°95 10° 10°90 18°05 °1645 1644 +:0001 * Zeitschr. f. phys. Chem., xlix, 500 (1904). Hulett, however, employed cal- cium chloride instead of sulphuric acid as the drying agent. + Treadwell (Lehrbuch der anal. Chemie, vol. ii, p. 114), states that when the drying is carried out at 105° the results are always about 0-4 per cent too low. D. L. Randall— Titration of Mercurous Salts. 139 For practical purposes the application of the method to mer- eurous nitrate is of much greater importance. In Schneider’s* method for the determination of manganese, permanganic acid is titrated with hydrogen peroxide in the presence of nitric acid. Ibbotsont and Brearley in their modification of this process recommend the use of standard ferrous ammonium sulphate instead of hydrogen peroxide. Blairt also studied this process and recommends the use of ferrous ammonium sulphate. In the absence of any data concerning the quantity of nitric acid that can safely be present in the titrations of ferrous sulphate the determinations in Table II were made. The nitric acid used was rendered free from the lower oxides of nitrogen by the prolonged passage of a current of air. The acid used in all the subsequent experiments was purified in a similar man- ner. TABLE II. H.SO,4 Approx. FeSO, Dil. Ales HNO; N/10 KMnO, cm’, em?, em?, cm’, cem?, 25 200 5 0) 13°37 25 200 5 O 13°39 25 200 5 O 13°41 25 200 3) 0) 13°38 25 200 5 O 13°38 25) 200 0) 3 13°38 25 200 0 5 13°40 25 200 0 5 13°41 25 200 0) 5 13°40 25 200 0) 5 13°38 258 200 5 (0) 13°47 25 200 5 0 13°50 25 200 5 0) 13°49 25 200 0) 5 13°53 25 200 (0) 10 13°50 25 200 0 20 13°51 20 200 0) 30 13°00 When more than 10 per cent by volume (20° in 200°™*) of the concentrated acid was present the oxidation of the ferrous salt by the nitric acid was evident in the change of color of the solution, low results,| and uncertain end reaction. This * Ding. Pol. Jour., cclxix, 224. +Chem. News, Ixxxiv, 247. t Blair, Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc., xxvi, 793. Also, Chemical Analysis of Tron, vi, Ed., p. 121. § Changed FeSO, solution. || As nitrous acid is at least in part oxidized by direct titration with potas- sium permanganate, and completely when an excess is used (method of Kin- necut and Nef, Amer. Chem. Jour., 5, 388), only a part of the loss due to oxidation of the ferrous salt by the nitrous acid would appear in the result. 140) DD. L. Randall—Titration of Mercurous Salts. table shows that when the titration is made without unneces- sary delay after adding the acid, as was the case here, three per cent of pure nitric acid, the amount used in the subsequent experiments, has no appreciable effect on the estimation of ferrous iron. In Table III are given the results of a series of determina- tions of mercurous nitrate by the method described above. A solution was prepared by dissolving the crystallized salt in water containing enough pure nitric acid to present the formation of basic salts. As an additional precaution a current of hydro- gen, washed by alkaline permanganate and alkaline pyrogallol, was passed for twelve hours through the solution to remove nitrous acid. Measured portions of this solution, which was standardized gravimetrically as given above, were diluted to 200°"*, further acidified with pure nitric acid, and titrated in the manner already described. TABLE ITI. ADDEOR: Hg.(NO3)o N/20 See agar Eo; Hg sol. Dil. HNO, KMn0, Tes Oe MnO. grm. grm. Error ems, ems. ems, ems. em3 faal found theory grm. 25 200 5 49:99 9°76 10°64 39°35 °3586 ‘3594 —:0008 25 200 5 49°68 9°50 10°36 39°32 +3583 °3594 70011 25 200 5 49°73 9:50 10°36 39°37 °3588 °3594 —-0006 25 200 5 49°89 9:67 10°54 39°35 °3586 °3594 —-:0008 25 200 5 49°70 9:50 10°36 39°34 °3585 °3594 —-0009 H.SO,4 IGS aL 25 200 5 50°29 10°00 10°90 39°39 °3589 °3594 —-0005 In the last experiment sulphuric acid was added instead of nitric acid, yet as the table indicates, without apparent effect on the result. This investigation has shown: 1. That mercurous sulphate and mercurous nitrate can be readily estimated by potassium permanganate with a very fair degree of accuracy. 2. That ferrous salts can be successfully titrated in the pres- ence of at least three per cent of nitric acid. In closing the writer gratefully acknowledges the sugges- tions of Dr. R. G. Van Name which led to this investigation. Chemistry and Physics. 141 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. I. CHEMISTRY AND PHYSICS. 1. Occurrence of Argon with Helium in a Mineral.—KircuEn and WinTERSON have found that the mineral malacone is radio- active, and that it gives off argon as well as helium when heated. The origin of the material used for their experiments is not given, but it is stated that crystallized specimens were employed. An analysis indicated the presence of 0.33 per cent of uranium, an amount which was sufficient to account for only a small portion of the radio-activity, and it is suggested, but not shown, that the mineral may have contained some radium. A portion of the mineral was subjected to fusion with potassium acid sulphate, and the evolved gases were collected and analyzed. Disregard- ing the sulphur dioxide and oxygen resulting from the acid sul- phate, the gases collected per hundred grams of mineral were : Carbon dioxide uae soi: hae ahe 33°24°° iv dnocene siete eas eerie ces 0°57 ING ETO Oye Tale ee are Oe Tae Ae 0°34 Ja CROHNS AS ele Ses a a tla an 2282 Velitamage eee, ees coe ere OnOe Although the argon found amounts to only 0:005 per cent of the mineral by weight, its detection is interesting as being the first instance of such an occurrence. The authors say that this fact has been demonstrated by three experiments, so that it is beyond doubt, but they give no description of the analysis of the gase- ous mixture, or of the method used for identifying the argon. The authors have made a further analysis of the mineral with the following results : VEO! SiO. ZrO. Fe,.0; MgO CaO U:0s Ce20s, ete. HO 22°53 67°78 4:93 0°70 0-41 0°33 0:09 1°84 = 98°57 From this they derive the formula Zr,Si,O,,, but this conclusion is not convincing in view of the closely agreeing results on the composition of this mineral by several previous investigators, leading to the formula ZrSiO, with some water.—J/our. Chem. Soc., 1xxxix, 1568. H. L. W. 2. Researches on High Percentage Ozone Gas.—In a paper read before the British Association at the York Meeting, 1906, E. LapEenBurG has described some observations which point to the existence of an allotropic modification of oxygen similar to ozone, but differing from it in containing a greater number of atoms in the molecule. The object of the research was the Am. Jour. Sci1.—Fourta Series, VoL, XXIII, No. 134.—Frpruary, 1907. 142 Scientific Intelligence. spectroscopic examination of very pure ozone gas. Liquid ozone was formed in the first place by Goldstein’s method, which con- sists in condensing it by cooling with liquid air. By allowing this liquid ozone to vaporize into a vacuum tube, nearly pure ozone gas was obtained, having a very dark blue color. In examining the absorption spectra “of the gas, five new bands were observed in the visible red part at 670-667, 638, 628, 622 and 610 pp. These bands appeared only after the oreater part of the liquid ozone had vaporized, and they disappeared very soon. It was possible by collecting the gas from the last part of the liquid separately to obtain a spectrum containing the new bands with- out the ozone bands. Since it was found that when the new bands disappeared the pressure of the gas increased, the conclu- sion was reached that a new body was present possessing more atoms than ozone. This conclusion was confirmed by finding that the gas had a higher specific gravity than ozone, several results giving an average of 1:774, while ozone would be 1°661. It was not easy to work with ozone, and especially with the new body, since they are very explosive, and the conditions of the explosions could not be determined. However, the following points were determined in regard to the new body: It has a higher boiling-point than ozone, it has more atoms in its molecule, it is of a dark blue color, whether liquid or gaseous, and it is not very stable at ordinary temperatures.— Chem. News, xciv, 137. H. L.. We 3. The Determinatian of Halogens in Organic Compounds.— A very simple and rapid method for making the determination under consideration has been devised by Srepanow. ‘The weighed substance in a small tube is placed in an Erlenmeyer flask containing 20 to 40° of ethyl alcohol of 98 per cent strength. The flask is connected with a long inverted condenser and placed upon a water-bath. Metallic sodium is dropped through the condenser tube, which is kept perpendicular during the violent reaction. The amount of sodium should correspond to about 25 times the theoretical amount required to form sodium halide and sodium alcoholate according to the reaction, R.H1+C,H,OH + Na, = R.H+NaH1+C,H,ONa. After the sodium has dissolved the contents of the flask are diluted with 20 to 40° of water and the alcohol is distilled off. The liquid, after cooling, is acidified with dilute nitric acid, and the halogen is determined by Volhard’s volumetric method. Test analyses made by the author with chlorbenzol, brombenzol, hexachlorbenzol, p-chlortoluol, p-chlornitrobenzol and a-brom- naphthaline gave very satisfactory results, showing that the halo- gens are readily removed from the benzene nucleus by this means. It is known that sodium amalgam and water do not give this result.— Berichte, xxxix, 4056. Hs La We 4, The Cause of the Phosphorescence of Chlorophane. — G. Urparin has made a study of the phosphorescences that maybe Chemistry and Physics. 143 observed when the cathode rays act upon mixtures of pure lime with pure rare earths. He has shown that this method. of obser- vation is capable of remarkable delicacy, so that it is possible with the aid of the spectroscope to detect and identify in this way traces of substances which would be overlooked by all other means of investigation. He has now turned his attention to the study of the cause of the phosphorescence of certain varieties of fluorspar which show this phenomenon to a high degree, and has found in the case of a chlorophane giving a beautiful greenish-white light that the phosphorescence is caused by the presence of various rare earths. By means of spectro- scopic analysis he has identified in it the presence of gadolinium, terbium, dysprosium, and samarium. In order to fully establish these conclusions he then prepared chlorophane synthetically by fusing together the amorphous precipitated fluorides, and thus obtained products which fluoresced in the cathode ray tube much more brilliantly than the natural products, and gave identical spectral bands.— Comptes Rendus, exliii, 825. H: L. W. 5. A Comparison of the Optical Temperature Scale with the Nitrogen Thermometer up to 1600°.—The Physikalisch-Technische Reichsanstalt reports contain a valuable article by L. Ho t- BoRN and 8S. VAaLENTINER on this subject. They conclude that the melting point of palladium, determined by the nitrogen ther- mometer, is 1575°. The optical method gave 1570° and 1582° according as the black body was observed at stationary tempera- ture with a thermoelement or with changing temperature with- out the thermoelement. The melting point of platinum was found to be'1790°. The errors arising from the employment of the nitrogen thermometer arise principally from irregular distribution of temperature of the vessel. These need not exceed even at the highest temperature 10°.—Ann. der Physik, No. 1, 1907, pp. 1-48. a, i 6. Light Impressions on Photographic Plates.—The authors, P. H. Eyxman and A. P. H. Trivets, discuss the influence of thin and thick sensitive films in regard to the character of the image pro- duced. They find that while the photographic images prodaced by ordinary daylight are much influenced by the depth of the sensitive film, the images produced by the Réntgen rays are not affected by the thickness of such films ; moreover, wetting with water a sensitive film does not modify in any way its sensitive- ness to the Rontgen rays, while this process makes such a film less sensitive to daylight. Many experiments were made in regard to the effect of character of surface and thickness of film on light impressions.—Ann. der Physik, No. 1, 1907, pp. 199-203. Jak: 7. Ratio of the Energy of the Réntgen Rays to the Energy of the exciting Cathode Rays.—Epna Carter reviews the contradic- tory results obtained by various observers in measuring the energy of the Réntgen rays and makes a new determination, using a bolometer. With a difference of potential of 59 kilovolt, 144 Scientific Intelligence. a deflection of the galvanometer of 32 scale divisions, and the value of the cathode energy Ex, = 4'8 g. cal per second, assum- ing that 42 per cent of the energy is absorbed in the walls of the tube and that as much energy of the Réntgen rays goes into the anticathode as comes out, the following results were obtained for the case of absorption in platinum: EK, = 5:14.10 g. cal per see. EK, Ex =e OO: —Ann. der Physik, No. 15, 1906, pp. 955-971. iy tl 8. The Scientific Papers of J. Willard Gibbs. With Preface by H. A. BumstEan and R. G. Van Name. Vol. I. Thermody- namics. Pp. xxviii, 434. Vol. If. Vector Analysis and Multi- ple Algebra, Electromagnetic Theory of Light, ete. Pp. viii, 284. London and New York, 1906 (Longmans, Green & Co.).— The publication of the collected works of an eminent scientist serves the double purpose of forming a memorial to the genius of the writer and of increasing the usefulness of his labors by making his writings more accessible to other workers. It is in connection with the second of these purposes rather than the first that one is inclined to consider the present volumes. They form, it is true, a memorial, and a fitting memorial, to the great- ness of Professor Gibbs’ scientific work, but we feel that a me- morial was hardly needed—his greatness is too well established and his work too well known for either to be enhanced at this stage by the publication of volumes of paper and ink. We welcome the collected papers mainly because they make his writings acces- sible and enable us to see directly for ourselves the basis on which his reputation is founded. It is hardly too much to say that notwithstanding his tremen- dous reputation there has hardly been a scientist in the front rank whose work has been as little studied at first hand, as Professor Gibbs. In his earlier years the importance of his papers was not understood at all ; afterwards it was known only to afew from a first hand study of the papers. The majority of workers have realized his greatness solely by the far-reaching importance of the results associated with his name: they have regarded him as working in a world of his own creation, as “voyaging through strange seas of thought, alone,”—and they have not read his papers. One cannot of course bring an indict- ment against the whole scientific world ; if Gibbs’ papers have been generally regarded as unapproachable, the cause must be looked for in the papers themselves. A large part of this cause is undoubtedly to be found in the somewhat repellant notation and terminology adopted by Gibbs, and in the absence of concrete ideas and ‘illustrations connecting his abstruse mathe- matical processes with the particular world of thought in which physicists are accustomed to move. For these and other reasons, the papers are to many an unexplored mine of wealth : it is for Chemistry and Physves. 145 making this mine of wealth more easily accessible that the edi- tors are to be specially congratulated. The first, and more important, volume contains all the thermo- dynamical papers, the principal of these, the famous paper on “The Equilibrium of Heterogeneous Substances,” occupying three hundred out of the four hundred and thirty pages of the volume. A very welcome feature in this first volume is the inclusion of a biographical sketch by Professor H. A. Bumstead. Those who, like the present writer, had not the honor of meeting Gibbs, will welcome this opportunity of obtaining some slight understanding of the personality of the great scientist : we wish the biography had been more ample. : The second volume contains all the non-thermodynamical papers. An especially interesting part of this volume consists of eighty papers devoted to a reprint of a pamphlet on vector algebra, originally printed privately for Yale students of physics. Those who possess the volumes will have nothing but praise for the way in which the editors and publishers have done their work : the former are to be congratulated on the arrangement of the papers : the latter on the printing and appearance of the vol- umes. Both are to be thanked for their service to science. J. H. JEANS. 9. The Electron Theory ; by E. EH. Fournrer v’Atse. Pp. xxiv+311. New York and London, 1906 (Longmans, Green & Co.).—The electron, or indivisible atom of negative electricity, has become within the last ten years the most trusted and useful conception which the physicist has at his command for dealing theoretically with the new and startling experimental discoveries of which this decade has been so prolific. In addition to this, it has in many cases helped to correlate and “explain” experi- mental facts and laws which had been known for a long time but had not previously found a place in any connected theory. The present book is a popular introduction to this new theory. It adopts the electron as a fundamental postulate and ascribes to it the properties which experiment and speculation have shown to be necessary; from these hypotheses are deduced, in successive chapters, the facts of electrostatics, the electric discharge, thermo-electricity, voltaic electricity, magnetism, radiation, elec- tro-optic and magneto-optic phenomena and the relation between conductivities for heat and electricity. As is perhaps inevitable in a popular presentation, there are portions of the book where the triumphs of the theory are stated with a confidence which is probably not shared even by the men who have been most active in its development. But even when allowance is made for this, the results collected in this book make a very impressive demon- stration of the service which this theory has done and a promise of what may be expected of its further developments. The work is written with admirable clearness and in an attractive and interesting manner ; it is the best popular presentation of this important.theory which the present reviewer has seen. H. A. B. 146 Scientific Intelligence. 10. Lehrbuch der Optik ; von Dr. Paut Drupr. Zweite erweiterte Auflage. Pp. xvi+538. Leipzig, 1906 (S. Hirzel).— The preface of this second edition of Drude’s Optics was written only eight days before the lamented death of the author and the work was carried through the press by Dr. Kiebitz. The princi- pal changes and additions to the first edition (see this Journal, vol. xiv. p. 68, 1902) are in those portions of the subject to which the recently developed electron theory is especially applicable. The additional material makes about thirty pages; and a subject index is added. H. A. B. Il. Grotogy AND MINERALOGY. 1. Maryland Geological Survey: Pliocene and Pleistocene ; Wm. Buitock Cxiarg, State Geologist. Pp. 291, pls. 75, figs: 10. Baltimore, 1906 (The Johns Hopkins Press).—The present volume is the third of a series of reports dealing with the systematic geology and paleontology of Maryland and completes the geo- logical history of the Cenozoic, Reports on certain of the earlier periods are well under way. The descriptive portion of the report, pp. 23-138, is by Geo. B. Shattuck. The succeeding chapters are by W. B. Clark, F. A. Lucas, Arthur Hollick and others. The work throughout, as in the previous volumes of this survey, is marked by its scientific accuracy and readable nature. ‘The illustrations are well chosen and well executed. Under the general descriptive portion is to be noted the geo- logical map of the four formations of the Pliocene and Pleisto- cene on a scale of eight miles to an inch and the accompanying maps showing the relations of land and water at the time of the making of each formation. The oldest of these four is the Lafayette, believed by Shattuck to be late Pliocene and to repre- sent a subsidence of the Maryland coast to the extent of 500 feet. No cliff scarp corresponding to this stage has been detected. Following the Lafayette, repeated oscillations of the strand line have occurred, elevation and erosion separating the epochs of submergence, each of which was less than the preced- ing in vertical range. These movements may be tabulated as follows : Probably late Pliocene. Lafayette subsidence to 500 feet. Elevation and erosion. Probably early Glacial. Sunderland subsidence to 220 feet. Elevation and erosion. Probably middle Glacial. Wicomico subsidence to about 100 feet. Elevation and erosion. Probably close of Glacial. Talbot subsidence to 45 or 50 feet. Elevation and erosion. Subsidence now in progress. Geology and Mineralogy. 147 Progressive tilting with uplift toward the west has disturbed to some extent the simplicity of these relations. It is also seen that the Champlain epoch as a single stage of submergence accompanying the close of the ice age is a conception simpler than the facts due to an earlier and necessarily imperfect state of knowledge. The accurate distinction and delimitation of these closely simi- lar but distinct formations calls for great observational keenness and is of the first importance for the understanding of earth movements now in progress. Dr. Shattuck is consequently to be congratulated upon this piece of work. The latter half of the volume is devoted to an excellent account of the fossils of the Middle or Late Pleistocene, none having been found in the Pliocene. The fossils are described by Clark, Lucas, Hay, Ulrich, Hollick, and Sellards, and are derived from marine (about 46 species) and land deposits ; they include land plants (about 40 species), fresh-water shells (1 Unio) and vertebrates (4 Proboscidia, 2 turtles). An interesting map is given by F. A. Lucas, showing the American distribution of the elephants /. primigenius, E. columbi, and EF. imperator. An account is also given of the American mastodon Mammut americanum. J. B., ©. S. 2. Fifth Report of the Vermont State Geologist; 1906. Pp. viii and 351, 58 pls.—The opening chapter treats of the building and ornamental stones, and is by the State Geologist, Professor G. H. Perxins. Considerable space is devoted to the occurrence of asbestus and its origin. Professor Richardson describes the areal and economic geology of northeastern Vermont, and gives an extensive bibliography treating of the region. G. E. Edson furnishes an historical sketch of the Cambrian age as related to Vermont geology, followed by the geology of St. Albans and vicinity. The Cambrian is represented by the Winooski or Swanton marble and the Noah Parker shale, and the Ordovician by the Chazy (only fossil mentioned is Maclurea magna), Tren- ton (a list of 24 species is given); and an “ intraformational con- glomerate ” holding a mixture of Lower and Upper Cambrian fossils. Professor Seely has an account of the Cryptozoa of the early Champlain sea, and while considerable space and many illustra- tions are devoted to their elucidation, these objects remain in as‘ great darkness as before. A second article by the same writer is on the Beekmantown and Chazy formations in the Champlain valley. Professor Perkins continues his studies on the lignite or brown coal of Brandon. This coal has now furnished a flora of nearly 150 species, consisting essentially of fruits with some woods. The remaining papers are the ‘‘ Superficial Geology of the Region about Burlington,” and “The Champlain Deposits of Northern Vermont,” both by C. H. Hitchcock ; and “The Drinking Waters of Vermont,” by G. H. Perkins. Cc. S. 148 ; Scientific Intelligence. & Beitriige zur Geologie und Palaeontologie von Ostasien, ; by Tu. Lorenz. Zeitschr. d. Deutsch. Geol. Ges., 1906, See 108, pls. iv—vi. —The author describes the fossils collected by him in Schantung, China, essentially Cambrian trilobites. The new genera are Liopari ta, Trachyostracus, Macrotoxus, Alokistocare, Megalophthalmus, Anyphoton, Chondroparia, Schantungia, and another said to be an Ordovician gastropod Polydesmia. The author complains much about the poorly defined trilobite genera and then attempts to place some of them on a better foot- ing. As he nowhere deals with entire trilobites and in most cases does not consider the pygidia, one easily becomes very skeptical about his revision. This is further accentuated by noting that in addition he fails to follow the rules of nomenclature and undoubt- edly has made an admittedly difficult subject still harder for sub- sequent workers to unravel. His primary basis for classification he states as follows: “i have attempted to set up a system in which the different forms can be easily classified. .... As prin- ciples for distinctions I have adopted the size and position of the eyes, the presence or absence of a dorsal furrow [deep groove surrounding glabella], or the direction of the facial suture. .. . There are porous and non-porous shells. . . . These two types of shell structure—non-porous and porous — are constantly asso- ciated without transitional forms.’ On the basis of shell structure he erects two groups—“ Stem Stereokelipha” haying a compact shell with various types of sur- face granulation, and “Stem Porokelipha” having a finely porous shell. Cc. 8. 4. Guide to the Geology and Paleontology of the Schoharie Valley in Eastern New York ; by AMApEus W. Graxpav. Bull. 92, N. Y. State Museum, pp. 76-386, plates, many text-figures, and map in pocket. —Schoharie valley has long been famous as a locality in which nearly the entire Devonian strata can be studied, but more particularly the Lower Devonian. The section in its entirety, however, extends from the Upper Ordovician well into the Upper Devonian. With the State Geologist we are in agree- ment in stating that the book “will aid and stimulate students, clarify the geologic problems which the region presents and, as it is the outcome of a careful resurvey of the region, advance our knowledge.” Chapters 1-4 take up the various formations in detail, with illustrations of the more typical fossils found in each. In chap- ter 5 the characteristic sections in the Schoharie region are described and the fossils listed. Many other sections of the Helderberg mountains and elsewhere are added for comparison. Chapter 8 treats of the Physiography of the Schoharie region in its relation to man. C. S. 5. Cephalopoda of the Beekmantown and Chazy Formations of the Champlain Basin ; by Rupotr RuEpemMaAnn. Bull. 90, N. Y. State Museum, pp. 393-604, pls. 1-38.—As the title indi- Geology and Mineralogy. 149 eates, the Cephalopoda of the Lower Ordovician are here described. These number 71 species, of which 24 are new. One new genus is also described— Orygoceras. Of these 71 species, 46 are restricted to the Beekmantown, the remainder to the Chazy. In other words, not a single species is common to the two formations. The derivation of these cephalopods seems in the main to have been from the southwest, i. e., the Pacific-American region. South Europe (Atlantic-Bohemian) and North Europe (Baltic) appear to have furnished little, if anything. The author has done his work well in a difficult subject, all the harder to unravel because of the fragmentary nature of the material. Cais: 6. Geology of the Penn Yan-Hammondsport Quadrangles ; by D. D. Lurnurr. Bull. 101, N. Y. State Museum, pp. 37-58, two maps in pocket.—Describes and maps the areal distribution of the fourteen formations of the Middle and Upper Devonian occur ring within these two quadrangles. A Monograph of the Carboniferous and Permo- Carbon- ‘foros Invertebrata of New South Wales. Vol. Lf. Pelecypoda. Part I. The Paleopectens ; by EK. Erurriper, Jr., and W.S. Dus. Mem. Geol. Surv. N.S. Wales, 1906, pp. 1- 39, pls. 1-16. —The aviculopectens of the Carboniferous of New South Wales are rare, small, and closely allied to European and American forms. Those of the Permo-Carboniferous marine beds are, however, of large size, great variety, and limited to eastern Aus- tralia. The species are of three genera: Aviculopecten (10 species), Deltopecten (9 species), and Entolium aviculatum. C. $s. 8. Geology and Underground Waters of the Arkansas Val- ley in Eastern Colorado ; by N. H. Darton. Pp. 90, pls. xxviii, figs. 2. Professional Paper No. 52. U.S. Geol. Survey, Wash- ington, D. C. 1906.—This report is similar in form to other pro- fessional papers by the same author upon districts within the Great Plains and Rocky Mountain provinces of the United States. The areal geology is represented by large geological maps and the descriptions supplemented by numerous well-chosen photographs. One of the chief values of this report is in the information which it gives to well-drillers as to the occurrence and depth of the water-bearing strata, a matter of great import- ance in the semi-arid region of eastern Colorado, J.B. 9. The Geological History of Mount Greylock ; by T. Nut- son Date. Pp. 17, pl. 1, fig. 4. Berkshire Historical and Scien- tific Society. 1906.-—In ‘this paper the author reviews in an interesting and somewhat popular manner the periods in the his- tory of Mount Greylock from the time of the Cambrian trans- gression. J. B. 10. A Treatise on Rocks, Rock-weathering and Soils; by GrorcEe P. Merritt. Pp. xv+400, pls. 31, figs. 42. "New York, 1906 (The Macmillan Company). —The ‘geological public is already familiar with this work which, since its first appear- 150 Scventifie Intelligence. ance in 1897, has filled a unique place, in presenting the relation of surface processes to the destruction and origin of rocks. In this new edition the book has undergone some revision, resulting in the addition of several plates and the cutting down of eleven pages of text. J. B. 11. Fucetted Pebbles.—The article by Lissoa in the January Journal on “The occurrence of facetted pebbles on the central plateau of Brazil” suggests that there may be a considerable difficulty in discriminating between pebbles facetted by natural sand blast and by glacial action. My experience is that charac- teristic examples of each kind of pebbles may be distinguished without doubt or difficulty. Sand-blast facets usually occur only on one side of a pebble ; in stones of fine grain the facets are ordinarily better made than the facets of glaciated pebbles ; while in stones of coarse grain, such as granites and schists, the facetting often shows a delicate regard for differences of mineral hardness, by which the weaker minerals are slightly excavated or fluted and the harder minerals are left somewhat in relief, in a manner not found on glaciated pebbles. Glaciated facets usually meet in more obtuse angles than those between sand-blasted facets ; and the facets nearly always show striations in sympathy with the longer diameter of the stone ; while stria- tions are characteristically absent on sand-blasted pebbles. Individual specimens of facetted pebbles might sometimes be difficult of identification as to origin ; but a collection of a score or two of pebbles, one set from a district of wind-work, the other set from a bed of till or of tillite (consolidated till), would be easily distinguished. Those shown in Lisboa’s paper have decidedly the appearance of sand-blast facets. It may be noted that sand-blast facets may be plentifully pro- duced in a district of moist climate, such as the New England coast, provided only that a bed of pebbles is exposed to strong sand-bearing wind. This has happened at various points on the coast of Cape Cod, where facetting of fine quality has been done during the later phases of the glacial period and in the present epoch as well. The occurrence of facetted pebbles in Brazil is of especial interest just at present, in view of Prof. I. C. White’s recent account of the extraordinary correspondence between the Permian deposits of that country and those of South Africa, both of which include near the base a sheet of indurated glacial deposits or tillite ; but the pebbles described by Lisboa do not appear to belong to this formation. W. M. D. 12. Die Kristallinen Schiefer. II Specieller Teil; von V. GRUBENMANN. 8°, 175 pp. pls. 12x; Berlin 1907 (Gebriider Borntraeger).—The first part of this work, in which the subject matter is treated from the general standpoint, has been already noticed in this Journal (xix, p. 202.) In this, the descriptive por- tion, the individual kinds of rocks based on the method of classifi- cation adopted, are presented. The chief interest lies in the work- ing out of the method of classification. For purposes of consider- Geology and Mineralogy. 151 ing metamorphism and its products the author divides the crust of the earth into three zones whose relations to the various factors of metamorphism are shown in this table. Temperature Hydrostatic Stress Chief effect pressure of pressure Upper zone moderate small strong mechanical Middle zone higher stronger very strong chemical Lowest zone very high very great small chemical Each zone is characterized by certain minerals; thus the upper by chlorite, sericite and chloritoid; the middle zone by horn- blende, staurolite and muscovite, and the lower by pyroxene, feldspars, ete. ; the minerals of the last division are more nearly like those of the igneous rocks. Some minerals, like biotite, are found in all three zones, others appear in two only. Now if a given kind of material, and it makes no difference what its origin, whether igneous or sedimentary, be subjected to metamorphism, while its chemical composition in mass remains the same, it will yield rocks quite different in mineral composition and texture in each of the three zones. Thus a diabase becomes a greenstone schist, an amphibolite or an eclogite in descending order, and in the same way a clay shale becomes a phyllite, a mica-schist or a gneiss. The gneisses are of course mostly in the lowest zone. The first step in the classification is a purely chemical one; all the material, whatever may be its origin, which can be subjected to metamorphism, is considered and divided into twelve groups based on chemical composition. This grouping is accomplished by following essentially the same methods proposed by Osann for the igneous rocks, and his projection of the analyses is also followed for illustration. This demands that a chemical analysis of the rock must be made in order to definitely place it, though of course comparisons with well-studied types will often answer. To carry out his plan the author has had made under his direc- tion a large number of analyses of selected specimens, the results of which are given. Each of the groups thus made is then divided into three orders, according as the rock belongs to one of the three zones mentioned above. Thus the crystalline schists are divided into thirty-six orders belonging to twelve groups, each group charac- terized by a certain general chemical composition and each order by characteristic minerals, textures, etc. The whole scheme has been most carefully thought out and developed and is very clearly presented. Criticism of it will probably be directed to two features. The first is the initial difficulty encountered in requir- ing a chemical analysis for every rock te be classified, though much of course can be done by comparison with well investi- gated types. It can be suggested also that the method of micro- scopic analysis, introduced by Rosiwal and nowadays being so much developed in the study of igneous rocks, will prove just as serviceable in the study of the crystalline schists. 152 Scientific Intelligence. The second objection that will be advanced is the difficulty of telling in a great number of cases to which one of the three zones, or orders, the rock of a certain group belongs to. This is only another instance of the general difficulty of attempting to draw arbitrary lines between rocks, which grade into one another in various directions, and only time and experience can show whether it is too great, in the way proposed, to cause its general acceptance. The author modestly states that his work is not considered final, but as an attempt to introduce a rational and definite method of classification, based on consistent principles, into the crystalline schists. For this he is certainly to be com- mended and his work should be carefully read and considered by every petrographer. BEN IP 138. Rock Minerals: Their Chemical and Physical Characters and their Determination in Thin Sections; by Josurpu P. Ippines. Pp. xii, 548. New York, 1906 (John Wiley & Sons). —It is now nearly twenty years since the volume of Rosenbusch on the characters of minerals important in petrography was pre- sented in English form by Professor Iddings. This translation has served a most useful purpose in making the work of Rosen- busch accessible to English readers, and has done much to stimu- late study in this department. Since that time, the original work has been revised and enlarged until now its scope is so extensive as to put it beyond the use of the ordinary student. Professor Iddings has done well, therefore, in preparing an inde- pendent work of his own on the subject, which while giving all the data required, presents them in a form which is most con- venient for the special object in view. The result of his labors is now given to the public in this volume of 550 pages, divided almost equally between the general theoretic portion and the description of species. Part I begins with the chemical characters, discussing briefly the relation of mineral compounds on this side, and giving some- what more fully the special chemical tests which can be applied to the study of rocks in thin sections. Then follows a chapter upon the general physical properties and crystallography treated quite concisely. The third chapter, occupying about one hun- dred pages of the work, is given to the optical properties. This the author has elaborated with a great deal of care and with the result of giving an admirable summary for the use of the student. He starts with the fundamental conceptions of wave motion, and the simpler light phenomena, and develops the properties of doubly refracting crystals very clearly and in all necessary detail. This portion of the work is particularly valuable to those studying rocks under the microscope, since the phenomena involved in the determination of species are more or less intricate, and unless the principles upon which they are based are thoroughly understood, the results reached are not likely to be of great value. The rock minerals are taken up in succession, commencing with the feld- spars, and are treated as fully as is necessary for the special Geology and Mineralogy. 153 object in view. The list of species included is long, since, out- side of those which are involved as primary rock constituents, many others are important either as accessories, as special devel- opments in particular cases, or as due to alteration and secondary action. The work as a whole can be very highly commended and will doubtless be appreciated at its full value. 14. Das Salz: Dessen Vorkommen und Verwertung in. Simt- lichen Staaten der Erde ; verfasst von J. Orrokar FREIHERRN von BuscomMan. II Band. Asien, Afrika, Amerika und Austra- lien mit Ozeanien. Pp. 506. Leipzig; 1906 (W. Engelmann), Herausgegeben mit Untersttitzung der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften in Wien aus der Treitl-Stiftung.—The first volume of this extensive work, which is devoted to occurrences of salt in Europe, is stated to be in press ; the second volume, now issued, covers the remainder of the world. It gives a very full statement of the occurrence of salt at the different localities from which it is obtained in quantity, with data in regard to the amounts and values. The first two hundred pages are devoted to Asia, beginning with China and going on through India, Japan, etc., to Arabia. Then follows Africa and finally America, with a brief treatment of Australia and Oceanica. Under each the special localities of salt are first discussed, then follow statements as to the amount of import and export with their values, and finally the amount consumed in the country. _ A concise bibliography is introduced before each general division, adding completeness to a work which is already full of detail. 15. Chemische Krystallographie ; von P. Grorn. Erster Teil. Pp. v, 626, with 389 figures. Leipzig, 1906 (Wilhelm Engel- mann).—The long promised Chemical Crystallography by Pro- fessor Groth has finally taken material form,—a fact which is of the greatest interest alike to chemists as well as to mineralogists _and erystallographers. For many years the works of Rammels- berg were the ones which were constantly referred to for data in regard to the crystallization of chemical compounds. Since they appeared, however, a quarter-century has passed, and a vast series of new facts and observations have accumulated ; what is more important, also, the whole standpoint in regard to the theory of crystalline structure, and the relation between the chemical composition of compounds and their physical proper- ties, has been developed. It is to this latter part of the subject that the author of the present work has made the most impor- tant contributions, and his works have done much to broaden the point of view of all the workers in this line. His Chemical Crystallography, therefore, while giving an almost bewildering amount of information in regard to chemical compounds, is much more than a mere compilation of crystallographic and physical data. The fundamental principles alluded to above form the basis of the whole, and the discussions which introduce each group of compounds are most illuminating. This first part, now issued, includes the elements and the inor- ganic compounds outside of the salts, the simple and complex 154 Scientific Intelligence. halogen compounds, the eyanides and oxides of the metals and the corresponding alcohol compounds. The second part will be devoted:to the inorganic oxy- and sulpho- salts, and is promised towards the end of 1907. The organic compounds follow and are to fill parts III and IV, which it is hoped will be brought out m the spring of the successive years following. It is certainly remarkable that one whose activity has extended into so wide a field, and who has carried, in other directions, so. heavy a burden of work, has found it possible to marshal into order the immense array of crystallographic and physical data here presented to the public. Few men have been able to publish so much as Professor Groth and to exert so strong an influence upon the development of the science in which they were interested. Ill. Botany anp Zoo.woey. 1. Sinnesorgane im Pflanzenreich zur Perzeption mechanischer Reize ; von G. Haspertanpt, Professor an der Universitat Graz ; second edition (enlarged), pp. vili+ 207; 9 double plates. Leip- zig, 1906 (W. Engelmann).—The first edition of this work was published only five years ago, and the demand for a second edition within so short a time is especially remarkable, because the subject treated falls wholly within the domain of pure science. According to the author the higher plants develop dif- ferentiated sense-organs which are quite comparable with those found in animals. These organs differ according to the stimulus which it is their function to perceive, but the present volume confines its attention to organs of touch, those which perceive pressure, friction or mere contact, and which bring about definite movements in the plant as reactions to such stimuli. In organs of this character, which usually consist of individual cells or of. groups of cells, anatomical peculiarities are found which lead to a sudden alteration in the form of the enclosed protoplasm when the stimulus is applied. The organs are epidermal in nature, and among the most characteristic are those in the form of papille, which consist of projecting epidermal cells. In these papille thin places in the wall can be detected, beneath which the sensi- tive protoplasm is situated. The organs may, however, be either simpler or much more complicated than papille, and Haberlandt devotes the greater part of his book to the detailed description of the various types which he has observed, selecting his exam- ples from stamens, from pistils, from petals, from foliage leaves, from the digesting leaves of insectivorous plants, and from ten- drils. The concluding chapter is of a general nature and dis- cusses, among other topics, the phylogeny of the sense-organs in plants, the transmission of the stimulus, and the similarity between the organs of touch in plants and those in animals. The plates, three of which are new to this edition, figure the various types of organs described. A. W. E. Botany and Zoology. BB 2. Principles of Botany ; by Josepu Y. BrerGEN and Brap- LEY M. Davis. Pp. ix+555; 394 text-figures. Boston and New York, 1906 (Ginn & Company).—Bergen’s “ Foundations of Botany,” published in 1901, has been one of the most widely used botanical text-books for secondary schools. The present volume includes the best features of the earlier work, but is enlarged in scope so as to become available for more mature pupils. At the same time, by confining the attention of the student to certain selected chapters, the book may still be used in an elementary course. It is divided into three parts :—I. The Structure and Physiology of Seed Plants ; If. The Mor- phology, Evolution and Classification of Plants ; III. Ecology and Economic Botany. The first and third were written by Mr. Bergen, the second by Dr. Davis. The first part is taken almost directly from the “ Foundations,” although there are several changes in arrangement. The second part, which contains the most new matter, not only describes a series of instructive types from the Algae to the Angiosperms, but discusses a number of topics of general botanical interest, such as the evolution of sex, the alternation of generations, the development of heterospory, and the origin of the seed-habit. The whole is treated with the utmost clearness, but it is possible that some of the subjects introduced may be too abstruse for the average student. In the third part the chapters on ecology have been largely rewritten, and a brief account has been added of the phenomena of muta- tion and variation, together with the methods of plant breeding. The part concludes with a description of the most important economic plants of both temperate and tropical regions. A. W. E. 3. Second Report of the Wellcome Research Laboratories at the Gordon Memorial College, Khartoum ; by ANDREW Bat- Four, Director. Department of Education, Sudan Government, Khartoum. 1906. Pp. 255, with 16 colored plates and 106 figures and maps.—This volume embraces the results of the work of the staff and collaborators of the laboratories during the past two years. This work has been of the greatest practical import- ance as well as of scientific value, embracing as’ it does the study of the conditions which render the Sudan somewhat unfavorable for the habitation of civilized races. The interesting account of the work of the mosquito brigade and the regulations to prevent steamers and other boats bringing mosquitoes into Khartoum, indicates what a comparatively simple matter it would be for sec- tions of the United States which are now afflicted with malaria, to eliminate at once the anopheline mosquito and the parasitic disease which it may convey. The chapter on biting and noxious insects other than mosqui- toes deals with the species of tsetse fly which carries the parasite which causes the fatal trypanosomaisis of animals and the one which is the agent of transference of the human trypanosome, supposed to be the cause of the dreaded “sleeping sickness.” Bot 156 Scientific Intelligence. flies, jiggers, ticks, aphides, plant bugs, and locusts are some of the other insects which affect the human interests of the region. Dr. Balfour describes and figures a blood parasite of the rat and Jerboa rat, with its probable life cycle in the flea. The prevalence and distribution in the Sudan of the trypanosome dis- ease of cattle and mules are discussed and a large amount of experimental work described. Various animal, human, and vege- table pests are described by F. V. Theobald, who also presents a second report on the mosquitoes, describing new genera, species and localities. The report of the traveling pathologist and natur- alist, Dr. Sheffield Neave, contains an account of blood examina- tions and pathological conditions observed in regions difficult of access. The final paper of the report, by Dr. William Bean, gives analyses of certain articles of food and commerce of the region, and describes the chemical nature of certain products used or manufactured by the natives. That so high a class of work can be prosecuted in spite of the heat and dust and other unfavorable conditions of the region is a striking proof of the persistent energy of the laboratory staff. W.. BecG, 4. Animal Micrology ; Practical Exercises in Microscopical Methods ; by Micuar.t F. Guyer, Ph.D. Pp.ix+240. Chicago, 1906 (University of Chicago Press).—This little book contains practical directions for the preparation of material for micro- scopical study. The methods usually employed in making his- tological preparations are described, with important suggestions as to the selection of particular reagents for certain special tissues. The technique of decalcification, maceration, injection, and the mounting of objects of general interest, is followed by an account of special embryological methods. The optical proper- ties of the microscope and the preparation of standard reagents are described in appendices, which also supply many suggestive hints for obtaining microscopic material for zoological courses. This will undoubtedly prove to be a most convenient addition to the few really helpful handbooks for the zoologist or embryolo- gist, and should be accessible for every student in the laboratory where the microscope is used in the study of biology. W. BR. C. ITV. Miscettanzous Screntiric INTELLIGENCE. 1. Carnegie Institution of Washington, Year Book No. 4, 1906. Pp. 266, with 13 plates. Washington, 1907.—The Year Book of the Carnegie Institution is always of much interest, since the work that the institution is doing is so important, and at the same time yet so novel, that many new problems are pre- sented for consideration. The change of policy announced a year since, in accordance with which the strength of the Institu- tion was devoted more to the supporting of larger scientific Miscellaneous Intelligence. 157 enterprises than to the smaller lines of work, has been continued. During the past year, for example, about $460,000 were devoted to the former end, and less than $100,000 to the latter. The appropriations for the coming year, aggregating $661,300, are divided in about the same ratio between these departments with also $50,000 for administration and $70,000 for publication. It is a matter of interest to note what these larger projects are to which the support of the Institution is so largely given. They may be briefly enumerated as follows: Botanical Research, directed by Dr. D. T. MacDougal at the Desert Laboratory at Tueson, Arizona; Economics and Sociology, Dr. Carroll D. Wright, Director; Experimental E: olution, Professor Charles B. Davenport, Director, carried on at the laboratory established at Cold Spring Harbor, Long Island; Historical Research, Pro- fessor J. F. Jameson, Director ; Horticultural work, carried on by Mr. Luther Burbank at Santa Rosa, California; Marine Biology, directed by Dr. A. G. Mayer at the laboratory at Dry Tortugas, Florida; Meridian Astronomy, a new department placed in charge of Professor Louis Boss of the Dudley Obser- vatory, the special object of which is mentioned below ; Work on Nutrition, carried on under Professors F. G. Benedict, R. H. Chittenden, L. B. Mendel, T. B. Osborne ; Solar Physics, under the direction of Professor George HE. Hale, on Mt. Wilson and at Pasadena, California ; Terrestrial Magnetism, directed by Dr. L. A. Bauer, covering land observations at many stations in the United States, Canada, the Pacific, and China, in addition to the work of the ship “Galilee” ; and finally, work in Geophysics, carried on by Professor F. D. Adams and Drs. G. F. Becker and A. L. Day, the last mentioned in charge of the Geophysical Laboratory recently established near Washington. The department of Meridian Astronomy is a new one, estab- lished by the Trustees at their meeting on December 12, 1905, and having as its object the measurements of the positions and motions of the so-called fixed stars. It contemplates also as an essential part of its program the establishment of an observatory in the southern hemisphere. In connection with the department of Terrestrial Magnetism, the ship “Galilee,” between August 5, 1905, and October 138, 1906, accomplished two voyages, aggregating 11,000 and 15,000 nautical miles respectively, and adding a large amount to our present knowledge of the magnetic elements in the Pacific. A third voyage (as stated elsewhere) began on Dec. 22 and is expected to extend to the end of 1907, covering from 25,000 to 30,000 miles. The new Geophysical Laboratory, for which an appropriation of $150,000 has been made, was begun in July, 1906, and it is expected that it will be ready for occupation not later than July 1, 1907. Some of the important work accomplished already has been published in the October and November numbers of this Journal. Am. Jour. Sct.—Fourra Series, Vou, XXIII, No. 134.—Frprvuary, 1907. 11 158 Scientific Intelligence. Professor Woodward gives a very interesting account of the careful means taken to arrive at the best conclusion in regard to the proper development of the Institution, with the aid of advice from many scientific men in the country. The decision reached that the Institution should not attempt to enter the fields occu- pied by existing colleges and universities is certainly wise, as also that it should strive not to seatter its resources too Tare 3 in the many possible fields of research. He adds, that ‘ while it appears desirable to limit the range of activity of the Institution at any epoch, it appears still more desirable to insist upon a high standard of efficiency, determined by the quality and quantity jointly of the results obtained. ‘To secure this end, the Institu- tion must not only seek to aid mainly eminent investigator s, but it must seek to aid them for such periods and to such an extent that their best efforts may be enlisted.” Following the reports of the President and of the Executive Committee, “this volume contains a Summary of the work accom- plished during the past year both by the larger departments enumerated above and also in connection with the numerous minor investigations. Report of the Librarian of Congress and Report of the Superintendent of the Library Building and Grounds for the fiscal Year ending June 30, 1906. Pp. 175, with 6 illustrations. Washington, 1906.—This report by Mr. Herbert Putnam in regard to the Library of Congress will be read with especial interest by all concerned with this line of work. The total num- ber of books and pamphlets at the end of 1906 (inclusive of the Law Library) was 1,379,244, a gain for the year of 34,626 ; the total expenditures for the year 1906 amounted to 587, 415 dollars. 3. Physikalische Chemie der Zelle und der Gewebe ; von Ruvotr Horser. Zweite, neubearbeitete Auflage. Pp. 460, mit 38 Textfiguren. Leipzig, 1906 (Wilhelm Engelmann).—This book is intended for those who desire to gain some insight into the aims and tentative results of modern physico-chemical inves- tigation in its application in the domain of biology and medicine. For those to whom the introduction to physical chemistry through the larger works, like those of Nernst and Ostwald, is too difficult or unattractive, the smaller book of Dr. Hoéber, in its second, revised edition, will be found helpful. The subject of osmotic pressure, the theory of solutions, the ionic theory, equilibrium in solutions, colloids, the action of electrolytes and ferments, among other topics, are succinctly presented. A large number of biological phenomena and processes are discussed in terms of the physico-chemical hypotheses. It must be admitted that in many instances these attempts at interpretation are merely a paraphrase of older explanations. Thus in the chapter on the permeability of membranes various phenomena of mus- cles, blood corpuscles and other cells are described. The difficult subject of colloids is presented in some detail. As examples of the action of electrolytes the behavior of protoplasm towards ions is Miscellaneous Intelligence. 159 illustrated in such experiences as the responses of muscle and nerve in various inorganic media and the physiological réle of inorganic salts in general. The problems of absorption, lymph formation, secretion and excretion are considered in connection with the permeability of the tissues. In throwing light upon the dynamics of living matter, compila- tions like the foregoing are helpful ; but the more purely meta- bolic phenomena are as yet scarcely elucidated by them. Dr. Hober admits the limitations of his science. His book is planned to encourage those who are making their first acquaintance with the modern aspects of the subject. L. B. M. 4. A Short Course on Differential Equations ; by Donaxp Francis CaMpBeLt. Pp. vill, 96. New York, 1906 (The Mac- “millan Company).—An excellent text-book for use after an ele- mentary course in calculus, giving in compact and clear statement the essentials of the subject with copious well-selected examples and practical apparatus in engineering. Easily the best text- book for an elementary course of thirty lessons that has yet been published. . Ww. B. 5. Seismological Committee.—At the recent New York meet- ing of the American Association for the Advancement of Science a standing committee in the sections of Geology and Physics was established, to be known as a Seismological Committee. The following gentlemen were named as members: G. K. Gilbert, U. 8. Geological Survey ; Cleveland Abbe, U. 8. Weather Bureau; C. E. Dutton, U. 8. Army ; Otto Klotz, Observatory, Ottawa; L. A. Bauer, Carnegie Institution; John F. Hayford, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey ; W. W. Campbell, Director of Lick Observatory ; A. C. Lawson, Chairman California State Committee on Earthquake Investigation; H. F. Reid, Johns Hopkins University ; Ralph 8. Tarr, Cornell University ; C. G. Rockwood, Jr., Princeton University ; W. J. McGee, St. Louis Public Museum; Wm. H. Hobbs, University of Michigan ; L. M. Hoskins, Stanford University ; T. A. Jaggar, Institute of Tech- nology, Boston. The functions of the Committee are expected to be, in the main, advisory and its greatest object to disseminate informa- tion and bring different institutions having similar objects into harmonious relations. Special objects which it may accomplish are the following: (1) To be available for and to initiate counsel in connection with legislation which provides for investigation of earthquakes or the means for mitigating their dangers. (2) To bring into harmony all American and Canadian institu- tions doing seismological work and to guard against unnecessary duplications of studies. (3) To organize, if thought best, a correlated system of earth- quake stations which should include the outlying possessions and protectorates, (4) To advise regarding the best type or types of seismometers for the correlated stations. 160 Scientifie Intelligence. (5) To disseminate information regarding construction suited to earthquake districts. (6) To collect data regarding the light as well as the heavy shocks and to put the results upon record. (7) To start investigations upon large problems of seismology. (8) To advise with some weight of authority when catastrophic earthquakes have wrought national calamity. 6. Smithsonian Institution.—It is announced that Dr. Charles D. Walcott, Director of the United States Geological Survey since 1902, was elected Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution at the meeting of the Regents held on January 23. 7. American Forestry Association.—The annual meeting of the American Forestry Association was held in Washington on January 9. Addresses were delivered by the President, Hon. James Wilson, by Dr. E. E. Hale, Mr. Gifford Pinchot and others. The annual report showed that gratifying progress was being made in forestry in the country and a series of resolutions to further this end were adopted. 8. The Record of the Celebration of the Two Hundredth Anniversary of the Birth of Benjamin Franklin. Pp. xix, 321, with portraits. Philadelphia, 1906 (The American Philosophical Society). — This sumptuous volume presents an interesting account of a unique occasion, namely, the celebration of the ~ two-hundredth anniversary of the birth of Benjamin Franklin. This was held in Philadelphia in April, 1906, under the auspices of the American Philosophical Society, whose existence was due to Franklin’s initiative, and to which he devoted much of his energy for many years. The report of the proceedings contains the addresses delivered at the time, bearing on the different phases of Franklin’s activity, together with the documents re- ceived from Societies and Academies abroad, many of whom were represented by delegates. Several portraits of Franklin are introduced and also a representation of the Franklin medal oe by Louis and Augustus St. Gaudens. 9. American Philosophical Society.—The general meeting of 1907 at Philadelphia will be held on April 18th, 19th, and 20th, beginning at 2 p. M. on Thursday, April 18th. The Science Year Book, with Astronomical, Physical and Chemical Tables, Summary of Progress in Science, Directory, Biographies and Diary for 1907. (Third Year of Issue ) Edited by Major B. F. S. Baprn-Poweti. Pp. 152 (Diary pp. 365), vi. London (King. Sell, & Olding).—This Year Book gives a large amount of valuable and useful information, both scientific and gen- eral. There are astronomical, physical and chemical tables ; a summary of the progress in science for 1906 ; a biographical directory ; lists of scientific societies, ete. RARE MINERALS. = We have just received from Styria, Austria, a consignment of over two thousand fine specimens. Among other things we offer Aragonites of different kinds, including magnificent pieces of Flos Ferri, a beautiful lot of Asbestus in various forms, Tale in many colors, Halloysite, Kammererite, Wavel- lite, fancy specimens of Ihléite, Hyalite, Evansité, Schrotter- ite, Essonite, Orpiment, Realgar, Wad, etc., ete. BIOLOGICAL SPECIMENS. A special list of Biological material from the Mediterranean will be sent on request. We have for sale another lot of fine Peripatus. WARD'S NATURAL SCIENCE ESTABLISHMENT, ROCHESTER, N. Y. Warps Natura Science EstaBlisHMent A Supply-House for Scientific Material. Founded 1862. Incorporated 1890. DEPARTMENTS: Geology, including Phenomenal and Physiographice. Mineralogy, including also Rocks, Meteorites, etc. Palaeontology. Archaeology and Hthnology. Invertebrates, including Biology, Conchology, ete. Zoology, including Osteology and Taxidermy. Human Anatomy, including Craniology, Odontology, etc. Models, Plaster Casts and Wall-Charts in all departments. Circulars in any department free on request; address Ward's Natural Science Establishment, 76-104 College Ave., Rochester, New York, U.S. A. : CONTENTS, ~* Page Arr. VII.—Ultimate Disintegration Products of the Radio- active Elements. Part II. Disintegration Products of Uranium ; by.B.B. Borawo0n 22) oe ee ee 78 VIII.—Dike of Diabase in the Potsdam Sandstone in the Valley-of: Virginia; by. 1: EW atson 2 s-suee oe 89 IX.—A Spectrum of the Réntgen Rays from a Focus Tube, and the Relative Selective Absorption of Rontgen Rays in Certain Metals. A preliminary note; by J. M. Apams,: “CWith: PlateL): 22) e2 28 322 igo) eee 81 X.—Limeless Ocean of Pre-Cambrian Time; by R. A. Daty 93 XI.—Occurrence, in the Rocky Mountains, of an Upper Devonian Fauna with Clymenia; by P. E. Raymonp -- 116 XII.—Wasatch and Wind River Rodents; by F. B. Loomis 128 XIII.—Descriptions of the two genera of tubicolous Anne- lids, Paravermilia and Psendovermilia, with species from - Bermuda referable to them; by K. J. Busa_..-.._.--- 181 XIV.—Titration of Mercurous Salts with Potassium Per- mangcanates by ID: baa NDAGE 2s. Sees 9 ees 137 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. Chemistry and Physics—Oceurrence of Argon with Helium in a Mineral, KitcHEN and WINTERSON: Researches on High Percentage Ozone Gas, E. LapEnBuRG, 141.—Determination of Halogens in Organic Compounds, STtgepAnow: Cause of the Phosphorescence of Chlorophane, G. URBAtn, 142.—Comparison of the Optical Temperature Seale with the Nitrogen Thermometer up to 1600°, L. Hotgorn and 8. VALENnTINER: Light Im- pressions on Photographic Plates, P. H. Eykman and A. P. H. TRIVELLI: Ratio of the Energy of the Réntgen Rays to the Energy of the exciting Cathode Rays, E. Carter, 143.—Scientific Papers of J. Willard Gibbs, with Preface by H. A. Bumsteap and R. G. Van Namg, 144.—Electron Theory, E. EK. Fournigr p’AuBE, 140.—Lehrbuch der Optik, P. DRups. Geology and Mineralogy—Maryland Geological Survey, W. B. CuarxK, 146.— Fifth Report of the Vermont State Geologist, 148. —Geologie und Palzeon- tologie von Ostasien, etc., T. Lorenz: Geology and Paleontology of the Schoharie Valley, A. W. GraBau: Cephalopoda of the Beekmantown and Chazy Formations, R. Runppremann, 148.—Geology of the Penn Yan-Ham- mondsport Quadrangles, D. D. Lutam=r: Carboniferous and Permo-Carbon- iferous Invertebrata of New South Wales, EK. HTHEREDGE and W. S. Dun: Geology and Underground Waters of the Arkansas Valley, Colo., N. H. Darton: Geol. History of Mt. Greylock, T. N. Date: Treatise on Rocks, Rock-weathering and Soils, G. P. Mrrrizy, 149.—Facetted Pebbles, Lis- BOA: Die Kristallinen Schiefer, V. GRUBENMANN, 150.—Rock Minerals: their Chemical and Physical Characters, etc., J. P. Ippines, 152.—Das Salz: dessen Vorkommen und Verwertung, J. O. F. von BuscHMan: Chemische Krystallographie, P. Grotu, 153. Botany and Zoology—Sinnesorgane im Pflanzenreich, G. HABERLANDT, 154: Principles of Botany, J. Y. Bercren and B. M. Davis: Second Report of Wellcome Research Laboratories, Khartoum, A. BaLrour, 106.—Animal Micrology; Practical Exercises in Microscopical Methods, M. F. Guyur, 156. Miscellaneous Scientific Intelligence—Carnegie Institution of Washington, Year Book No. 5, 1906, 156.—Report of the Librarian of Congress, etc., 1906: Physikalische Chemie der Zelle, R. Horper, 158.—Differential Kqua- tions, D. F. CAMPBELL : Seismological Committee, 159. —Smithsonian Insti- tution: American Forestry Association : Celebration of the 200th Anniver- sary of the Birth of Benjamin Franklin: Amer, Philosophical Society, 160. Dr.. Cyrus Adler, Librarian U. S. Nat. Museum. MONG LIN a MARCH, 1907. Established by BENJAMIN SILLIMAN in 1818. THE AMERICAN JOURNAL OF SCIENCE. Epiton: EDWARD S. DANA. ASSOCIATE EDITORS Prorressors GEORGE L. GOODALE, JOHN TROWBRIDGE, W. G. FARLOW anp WM. M. DAVIS, or Camprivce, Proressors ADDISON E. VERRILL, HORACE L. WELLS, L. V. PIRSSON anp H. E. GREGORY, or New Haven, Proressor GEORGE F. BARKER, or PuHiapDELPH, Proressor HENRY S. WILLIAMS, or Iruaca, Proressor JOSEPH 8S. AMES, or Batriore, Mr. J. S. DILLER, oF Wasuineron. FOURTH SERIES VOL. XXUI—[WHOLE NUMBER, CLXXIII.] No. 135—MARCH, 1907. mis wae, ae Gee Se ~_wwsonan Instliyy Ss, | NEW HAVEN, connertéut. oS 1aor 4 MAR 2 1907 | F } ‘ he i ged" 3 33 _ rk mn cen . THE TUTTLE, MOREHOUSE & TAYLOR CO., PRINTERS, 193 TEMPLE STREET. Published monthly. Six dollars per year, in aflvance. $6.40 to countries in the Postal Union. Remittances should be made ether by money orders, registered letters, or bank checks (preferably on New Yorlf banks). A REMARKABLE NEW CRYSTALLIZED NATIVE COPPER. | We secured the entire out-put of these rare and beautiful specimens, (see illustration on auother page). We can add but little to the description given there, except to say that they have to be seen to be appreciated. As there are but ten of these specimens and no more can be secured, there will no doubt be great competition to secure one or more of them. One of these has already been sold to the American Museum of Natural History, New York City. This purchase shows the appreciation of these specimens when it is considered that this museum has one of the finest collections of min- erals in this country. They run in price from $10 to $70. HUNGARIAN MINERALS DIRECT FROM THE MINE. About 400 specimens. This shipment is one of the finest ever sent to this country. | John Day Miohippus Anchitherium 5 © 2) | White River Mesohippus © Uinta Epibippus ae Orohippus le, Helohippus 8 Wind River Protorohippus 2) 5 Wasatch Kohippus Eohippus : Hyracotherium Basal Horses Eocene unknown 170 &. 8. Lull—The Evolution of the Horse Family. glimmerings of life coming to us not as remains showing form and structure, but as graphite, limestones, and iron ores, which are the chemical effects of or ganic life. This period is of vast duration; then, almost suddenly, myriads of forms of lowly organization appear, out of which are slowly evolved animals and plants of higher and yet higher types. At length, when the plants had sufficiently spread over the land, there gradually emerged from the waters animals capable of breathing the air, among them creeping amphibians like the salamanders of today. From these arose the lowly reptiles, but during the long period known to geologists as the Paleo- Zoic zon no higher forms of life appear. Then followed the Mesozoic zon, when reptiles flourished, out of which arose the higher animals, both birds and mammals. Mammals lived during the Mesozoic, probably in abundance, but our record of them is very meager, doubtless owing to the conditions under which they existed. In the Cenozoic eon, the age of mammals, the geological record is rich and easily decipherable. In the basal strata of the Cenozoic age the mammals appear in great profusion, variety, and some of considerable size, indicating a migration from a region as yet unknown. Among these early mammals no horselike ancestors have been yet dis- covered, undoubted horses first appearing in the genus Hyraco- thertum from the London Clay of England, the ancestor of Lohippus. The sequence of genera is given in the table on p. 169. Part II. Synopsis of the Geological History of Horses. EOCENE PERIOD. During Eocene times North America was clad with forests in which grew both evergreen and deciduous trees distinctly modern in character. The moist climate gave rise to many streams and lakes, along the shores of which grew sedgy meadows that in turn gave rise to grassy plains. These were the conditions under which the horses made their first appearance, and the increasing development of grass lands gave the initial trend to their evolution. During the earlier ages of the Eocene period there was but little differentiation on the part of the various mammalian orders, and the ancestral horse is here unrecognized or undiscoy- ered. The earliest known horses appear in the rocks of the Wasatch age, and while they are found in both the Old and the New Worlds the more primitive are of the former, as shown in R. 8. Lull—The Evolution of the Horse Family. 171 the genus Hyracotherium from the London Clay, known only by the skull. The genus Hohippus has teeth of a very similar pattern, but more advanced in that the cross crests are somewhat more dis- tinct than in Hyracotheriwm and, unlike the latter, the fourth premolar is beginning to assume the form of a true molar. The hand bore four digits, with a vestige of the first (thumb) in the form of a splint bone probably entirely concealed within the skin. The more progressive hind foot had but three toes, with a remnant of the fifth. | Eohippus was a small animal about eleven inches in height at the shoulder and in general suggestive of the carnivores a II Fie. 7. a, Forefoot and b, hind foot of Hohippus pernix. One-half natural size. (After Marsh.) rather than of the ungulates of to-day. The back was arched, the head and neck were short, and the limbs of moderate length, showing uo especial adaptation for speed. This genus has a remarkable geographical range, having apparently originated in western Europe (England) and migrated by way of Asia and what is now Bering Strait as far southeast as New Mexico. This migration of Hohippus shifted the scene of the evolution- ary drama to our own country, for, while the remains of suc- ceeding genera are increasingly numerous in North American rocks from the Wasatch on, it is only from time to time that European representatives appear, in each case evidently derived from migratory North American types. The Yale Museum 172 R. S. Lull—The Evolution of the Horse Family. contains the type specimens of Hohippus pernia and EF. validus and numerous jaw, teeth, and limb bones referable to the genus. During the sneceeding Wind River age Protorohippus appears, representing the so-called third stage in the evolution of the horse. In stature somewhat larger than Hohippus, this animal reached the height of fourteen inches, and while the beginnings of speed are evident from the increasing length of limb, the bodily contour is still primitive. The hand seems to have lost the vestigial thumb and a shortening of the outer- 8 Fic. 8. a, Fore foot and 6, hind’ foot of Orohippus agilis. One-half natural size. (After Marsh.) most digit indicates that the tendency toward a three-toed con- dition is already strong. The foot is much like that of its predecessor with three functional toes. The dentition shows progress in the further perfection of the crests, in the fact that the fourth premolar is quite molariform, and that the third is beginning to assume the shape of a molar. Protoro- hippus had a very limited geographical range, being found thus far only in Wyoming and Colorado. In the Yale collec- tion the genus is represented by a cast of the skull of P. ven- tricolus from the mounted specimen in the American Museum of Natural History. R. S. Lull—The Evolution of the Horse Family. 173 In the rocks of the Bridger age two genera of horses are found, Helohippus and Orohippus, the former being known only by the teeth. The type specimen of //. pumilus Marsh is in the Yale collection. Orohippus, on the contrary, is well known, and represents the fourth stage in the evolutionary series. It is but little advanced over Protor ohippus, which it somewhat exceeds in size. The foot structure is much the same, but the teeth show the most notable improvement over those of its predecessor. The third premolar has assumed the full molar form and the second is beginning to do so. The space, or diastema, between the cropping and grinding teeth is rapidly increasing, owing to the lengthening of the jaws. The genus Orohippus includes a number of species from Wyoming and New Mexico, the Yale collection containing the type specimens of O. agilis, O. ballardi, O. major, O. pumilus, and O. uintanus, besides numerous other specimens. That of Orohippus aguis is especially fine, consisting of a skull, fore foot, and other parts of the skeleton, while a lower jaw and hind foot are probably also referable to this species. The final Eocene age, that of the Uinta, brings into view the fifth, or Epihippus, stage in the horse series, but unfortu- nately one not well known. Curiously enough, the average size of the species seems somewhat less than that of the pre- ceding genus, although the Yale collection contains a hind foot and other portions of an unnamed form of much larger size, rivaling that of Jesohippus of the Oligocene. Epihip- pus ‘has four toes in front and three behind, but the lateral ones are becoming shorter and bear less of the creature’s weight than formerly. The premolar teeth are ali molariform with the exception of the first, and the crests are almost com- pletely formed. But two species of this genus have been described, both by Professor Marsh, the types being in the Yale collection. They are Epihippus gracilis and EF. uinten- sis from Utah. © OLIGOCENE PERIOD. During Oligocene times, much the same conditions pre- yailed as in the Eocene. The drying up of streams and lakes, due to increasing aridity of climate, gave great impetus to the development of broad meadow lands and to the true prairie as well. Thus there were three conditions,—woodland, meadows, and dry prairie, which seem to have given rise to several parallel lines of evolution, some of which terminated, being overcome in the struggle for existence, while others flourished and gave rise to the horses of the Miocene. But two genera of Oligocene horses are recognized, J/eso- hippus and Miohippus, the former being the more pr imitive, 174 R.S. Lull—The Evolution of the Horse Family. though the differences between them are slight. Jesohippus from the White River beds, the sixth stage, is three-toed in both fore and hind feet, with a rather long splint bone repre- senting the fifth digit of the hand, while in the foot there is no trace of the outer one remaining. The entire series of cheek teeth except the small first premolar is molariform, 9 a Fic. 9. a, Fore foot and 6b, hind foot of Mesohippus celer. One-half natural size. (After Marsh.) while the crests are not only well developed but there is a tendency toward a further complication of the grinding sur- face. Mesohippus bairdi, the best known form, averaged about eighteen inches in height, a slender-limbed creature, very well adapted for speed. Jlesohippus intermedius was much larger and in some ways unprogressive, which, together with the con- R.S. Lull—The Evolution of the Horse Family. 175 ditions under which it is found, may be taken as indicative of a conservative forest-dwelling form in contrast with the pro- gressive plains-living type. Yale Museum contains a number of fine skulls and other parts of the skeleton of MWesohippus, including the smaller Oreodon-bed types as well as the larger species from the Protoceras beds. The former specimens include a nearly perfect skull of a new-born foal of pathetic interest. 10 Fie. 10. a, Fore foot and 6, hind foot of Miohippus anceps. One-third natural size. (After Marsh.) Miohippus of the John Day beds represents the seventh stage in the evolution of the horse. It is larger than J/zohip- pus, averaging at least twenty-four inches at the withers. Dis- tinctions between the two Oligocene genera are not easily found, the main differences, other than size, being the shorter splint of digit five in the hand, and a somewhat greater com- 176 = R. S. Lull—The Evolution of the Horse Family. plexity of the grinding teeth. dohippus, which may have existed into the Miocene, is contemporaneous with the Euro- pean Anchitheriwm, a similar genus, to which the species of Miohippus were formerly referred. The European genus is a derivative of the latter. MLiohippus anceps and IM. annec- tens were both described by Marsh, and the types are in the Yale Museum. In addition there is a perfect skull from the 11 Fie. 11. a, Fore foot and 6b, hind foot of Hypohippus equinus; drawn from casts from the American Museum of Natural History. One-fourth natural size. (Original.) Middle John Day (green beds), probably referable to JZ. anceps. The collection contains the fore and hind feet and numerous skeletal elements. The John Day types are confined to Oregon. R.S. Lull—The Evolution of the Horse Family. 177 MIOCENE PERIOD. This was a time of continental elevation and great expan- sion of our western prairies and a consequent diminution of the forest-clad areas. Many mammals otherwise well fitted for survival, such as the titanotheres whose remains are very numerous in the Oligocene beds, were unable to meet the new conditions because of their very perfect adaptation to softer herbage, and thus became extinct. This was also true of cer- tain horses, such as Hypohippus, but the great majority were more plastic and in consequence underwent a remarkable development, during this period reaching the culmination in numbers and kinds. Hypohippus has already been alluded to as one which became extinct during the Miocene, leaving no descendants. It is generally referred to as the “forest horse” from the broad low-crowned teeth fitted only for browsing upon succu- lent herbage, and from the character of the spreading three- toed feet in which the lateral digits still touch the ground. This would imply an animal fitted for soft ground rather than for speed over the dry prairie soil. The reindeer, whose home is on the mossy tundras, has a broad spreading foot with large lateral toes, while in the fleet-footed prong- -horn antelope of our western plains the lateral hoofs have entirely disappeared. In the hand of Hypohippus vestiges of digits one and five may still be seen as small nodules of bone at the back of the wrist. This would imply the descent of this genus from some undiscovered Oligocene ancestor, for in no known instance do we find traces of the first digit in a horse of that period. Hypohippus was a comparatively large horse for its time, being forty inches at the withers. It is an admirable exainple of arrested evolution. There are few specimens of this form in the Yale collection; hence it is represented in the series by a fore foot and lower jaw and by casts of the skull, jaws, and feet of a mounted specimen in the American Museum. Fypohippus has been found in the Loup Fork beds of Mon- tana and South Dakota.’ Merychippus is of especial interest and is in the direct line of descent, through some of its species giving rise to all sub- sequent Equide. It is three-toed, in some instances with ves- tiges of the outermost digits of the hand. Digits two and four vary somewhat in development in the different species, though never reaching the ground, so that the feet are func- tionally one-toed. It is in the teeth that the greatest interest lies, for herein Merychippus is midway in the course of evolution, in the young condition having the short-crowned uncemented teeth Am. Jour. Sci.—Fourta Series, VoL. XXIII, No. 135.—Marcu, 1907. 13 178 R.S. Lull—The Evolution of the Horse Family. of its ancestors, while in the adult state the teeth are long- crowned and cemented as in its successors. The adult teeth are not very long, but are of the columnar or prismatic type and in some instances show a fair degree of complexity in the enamel pattern. Jlerychippus is also the first horse to poupiels the hinder border of the orbit by sending down- ward a bony bar to join the ZY ZO- matic arch.. This bar is represented by a process in its predecessors. The genus ranged from Texas to Montana and Oregon, the Yale collection con- taining specimens from the Loup Fork “deposits along the Niobrara River in Nebraska. Fie. 12. a, Milk and 6, Protohippus. of the Loup Fork permanent premolar vecth Of beds is with, diticulty distimemehed Merychippus insignis. Two- thirds natural size. (Original.) from Mer ychippus, ‘but has gone farther in that both milk and per- manent teeth are fully cemented. The teeth are lengthened and are sharply curved, owing to the shallow depth “of the jaws. Protohippus was still three-toed, but as far as known the vestiges of digits one and five in ‘the hand have now entirely disappear ed. This animal was about tata six inches in height at the shoulder and its distribution is similar to that of Merychi ippus. Pliohippus is found in the Upper Loup Fork beds and ranges up into the Pliocene. It may have been a one-toed horse ; for this we have Professor Marsh’s authority, though later writers are not inclined to accept the evidence on this point as final. Certain it is that in the type specimen of Plio- hippus pernia at Yale the lateral toes must have been extremely small, as the splint bones are not much more developed than in the modern horse. Unfortunately the lower ends of all the splints are missing, so that one cannot be sure whether or not they bore an articular extremity. The teeth of Pliohippus were larger than those of Protohippus, and in some instances still more sharply curved, but the enamel pattern was simpler, with large cement areas. Pliohippus is the largest of the Loup Fork horses, being ‘forty-eight inches at the “withers as compared with sixty-four in a larve modern horse. It may be in the direct line of descent to Equus, but of this we cannot be sure, as all the links in the chain of descent have not yet been found. Its geo- graphical range covered the western United States, the Yale Musenm specimens including the types of Pliohippus pernia, P. robustus, and P. gracilis, coming from Nebraska and R. S. Lulli—The Evolution of the Horse Family. 179 Oregon. The reference of P. gracilis, the Oregon specimen, to this genus seems somewhat questionable, as the splint bones are large rather than slender as in the typical species. Contemporaneous with Protohippus and like it a descend- ant of Merychippus is Neohipparion, a three-toed horse with very complex teeth in which the anterior-internal column (pro- tocone) is isolated from the anterior cross crest (protoloph), not Fic. 13. a, Forefoot and 6, hind foot of Pliohippus pernix; drawn from the type specimen, No. 11376, Yale University Museum. One-fourth natural size. (Original.) connected with it as in all other horses. One can trace the evolution of this feature, for in -Merychippus insignis the pro- tocone, while attached, tends to become free, yet in Veohip- parion isonesum the reverse is true in that the protocone, though free, shows a strong reluctance to leave its old associa- tion with the anterior crest. In other species of /Veohip- parion this is not apparent, the protocone being oval in 180) &.S. Lull—The Evolution of the Horse Family. section and entirely free im all stages of wear. Weohipparion is abundantly represented in the Yale collections, was about forty inches m height at the shoulder, of deerlike aspect, and like the deer admirably adapted for speed. In the Old World this horse is represented by its descendant flipparion, ranging from the Pikermi beds, which are of 14 Fie. 14. a, Fore foot and 6. hind foot of Neohipparion whitneyi; drawn from casts from the American Museum of Natural History. Protohippus is in the same stage of evolution. -One-fourth natural size. (Original.) equivalent age with the Upper Loup Fork, to the Middle Pliocene. Hipparion gracile, found in Greece, is also a three-toed horse, though much larger than its American pro- genitors. This species is represented in the Yale collection by an admirable skull, jaw, and feet and limb bones, from the Museum of the University of Athens. R.S. Lull—The Evolution of the Horse Family. 181 PLIOCENE PERIOD. It is probable that the later species of Pliohippus were Plio- eene in distribution; certainly Hipparion of the Old World was, While during this period the true one-toed horses, Hyuws and the curious South American Hippidion, first appear. The latter is supposed by some to be a descendant of Pliohip- pus, but this is a matter of doubt. In the Siwalik beds of India is found a one-toed Tipparion, and it has been suggested that the modern zebras may be the living descendants of this genus. It is certainly not in the line to the common horse, Agwus caballus. Hippidion was extremely short-legged, with a large head and curiously elongated nasal bones, which together with the position of the eyes must have given the creature a very pecu- har cast of countenance. The teeth resembled 15 Gs ch pr Fie. 15. Up- per molar tooth of Neohipparion affine Leidy;: those of Pliohippus but were larger and of a pr, protocone. more intricate enamel pattern. Hippidion was evidently much specialized and does not seem to have survived the time of the deposition of the Two-thirds nat- ural size. (Orig- inal.) Pampas beds in Ecuador, Brazil, Bolivia, and Argentina, where it is found. 16 Fic. 16. a, Fore foot and 6, hind foot of Equus caballus. One-eighth - natural size. (After Marsh.) 182. #. S. Lull—The Evolution of the Horse Family. Equus, the modern horse, first appears in the Upper Plio- eene beds of Eurasia and North America, and represents the culmination of the race. The feet are one-toed but with well- developed splints of the second and fourth digits still remain- ing. These are sometimes fused with the adjoining canon bone ; sometimes they are free, but only in the rare cases of reversion do they bear any traces of the lateral toes. The teeth are long columnar structures of intricate enamel pattern, admirably suited to their owner's needs, while the animal has attained tLe maximum stature consistent with fleetness. Fossil members of this genus are very widespread, yet the existing species are entir ely confined to Asia and Africa. In North America many fossil species have been deseribed, though reduced to nine by Gidley ; in point of tooth structure, one of these, Lauus fraternus, resembles closely the modern horse, £. caballus. LE. gi ganteus from southwestern Texas was evidently of great size, “ the teeth exceeding those of the largest modern draveht horses by more than one-third the diameter of the latter (Gidley). In spite of perfection of see Shian the American horses became entirely extinct before the discovery of America by Europeans. This is all the more remarkable in view of the fact that conditions in our West are such that the few horses which escaped from the Spanish explorers have increased so marvelously in numbers, evidently finding these conditions much to their liking. Long before domestication the horse was hunted for food. Professor Osborn states that ‘one of the bone heaps of the Solutréen period is estimated to include the remains of over 80,000 horses.” Even this great slaughter would not be sufficient to cause extinction, for before the invention of fire-arms not one race of large mammals sue- cumbed to the lords of creation. Paleontological Laboratory, Yale University Museum, February 12, 1907. a E.G. Clapp—Clay of Probable Cretaceous Age. 188 Arr. XVI.—Clay of Probable Cretaceous Age at Boston, Massachusetts* ; by Frupmrtox G. Crap. Discovery of the deposit.irmDuring the past few years a great many deep borings have been made in Boston by the Boston Transit Commission. These have been studied in detail by Professor Crosby,t who has suggested the probable pre-Pleistocene age of clays in certain wells situated elsewhere in Boston. In 1906 the present writer had occasion to exam- ine some samples of recent borings in connection with his study of Pleistocene succession, and a number of samples of probable pre-Pleistocene deposits were seen. Generally the Transit Commission borings have not been sunk over 20 to 60 feet in depth; they penetrate various types of glacial drift, and commonly end in “hardpan’’, which is nearly always till. Sometimes they pass through a few feet of stratified blue clay, which, judging from its structure and relations, is Glacial or inter-Glacial in age. The underlying bed-rock of the region consists of Carboniferous slate and conglomerate, which are seldom reached by the Transit Commission borings, but when found are nearly everywhere overlain directly by till. Description of deposit.—N o deposits between Carboniferous and Pleistocene in age were found until July, 1905, when a boring made at the Ames Building, on Washington at the head of State street, started at an elevation of 33 feet above mean tide, and was sunk to the unusual depth of 228 feet. ‘ country. As the result of these, there is a much greater degree of accuracy in the isogonic lines; they thus show a much larger number of peculiar features, particularly as to the turns and twists, corresponding, in many cases, to the prominent physio- graphic features of coast lines, mountain ranges, rivers, etc. The completeness of the magnetic survey aS now conducted will be appreciated from the statement that the three magnetic elements have been determined on the average for one station to every nine hundred square miles, or thirty miles square, over the whole country. Considering the area involved, which is nearly equal to that of Europe, the United States possesses the most complete ‘magnetic survey of any country. A new feature of the present chart is the extension of the isogonic lines over the contiguous oceanic areas, these resting upon all available recent sea determi- nations, chiefly from the vessels of the Coast Survey, of the United States Navy and of the British Navy. 3. Carnegie Institution of Washington.—The titles of vol- umes recently issued by the Carnegie Institution are contained in the following list (continued from p. 75) : No. 44. Researches in Experimental Phonetics. The study of Speech Curves ; by E. W. Scriprurre. 4to. Pp. 204, with 13 plates and’ 138 figures. No.47. Rythmical Pulsation in Seyphomeduse ; by ALFRED G. Mayer. Pp. 62, with 36 figures and 6 tables. No. 48. In Investigation of Evolution in Chrysomelid Beetles of the genus Leptinotarsa ; by Wuitt1am Lawrence Tower. Pp. x, 320, with 30 plates and 31 figures. No. 56. Energy Changes involved in the Dilution of Zine and Cadmium Amalgams; by THroporr W. Ricuarps and GrorcE 8. Forsus. Pp. 68, with 10 figures. 244 Scientific Intelligence. No. 59. The Pawnee: Mythology, Part I. Collected under the auspices of the Carnegie Institution ; by Groner A. Dorsey. Pp. 546. No. 61. The Electromotive Force of Iron under varying con- ditions, and the Effect of Occluded Hydrogen ; by TuEODORE Wirttaa Ricuarps and Gusravus Epwarp Beur, Jr. Pp. 43 with 6 figures. / No. 65. Inv estigations of Infra-Red Spectra : Part II, Infra- Red Transmission Spectra. Part IV, Infra-Red Reflection Spectra ; by Wirtram W. CosLentz. Pp. 128, with 93 figures, 4. The Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teach- ing. Hirst Annual Report of the President and Treasurer. Pp. 84. 1906.—The President, Dr. Henry S. Pritchett, and the Treasurer, T. Morris Carnegie, of the Administration of the Carnegie Fund for providing pensions to retiring officers of universities and colleges in the United States, have recently made their first report. It gives a statement as to the general policy adopted, the educational standards defining the terms college and university, with the special application to the “prominent institutions affected, and the list of officers and widows on whom allowances are conferred. Fifty-two colleges and universities are included in the list of accepted institutions; of these one-half are in the New England states, New York and Pennsylvania. It is fully appreciated, at least by all those con- nected with the higher educational institutions, that this liberal endowment, with a continance of the wise administration it has at the outset, is sure to accomplish a great work for the cause of the higher learning in this country. 5. A New Meteorite from Selma, Alabama.—Dr. G. P. Mer- RILL gives an account, in the Proceedings of the United States National Museum, of a new meteorite stone found near Selma, in Dallas County, Alabama. Its fall is with considerable proba- ° bility identified with a fire ball observed on July 20, 1898, although the stone was not found until recently. The total weight is reported as 310 pounds, and it belongs to a class char- acterized by spherulitic chrondules. The stone has been pur- chased by the American Museum of Natural History in New York City. OBITUARY. Sir Micuart Foster, Professor of Physiology at Cambridge for twenty years, from 1883 to 1903, died on January 29, at the age of seventy-one years. “Professor D. I. Mendeléef, the eminent Russian chemist whose name will be always connected with the development of the Periodic Law of the Chemical Elements, died on February 2, at the age of seventy-three years. RARE MINERALS. We have just received from Styria, Austria, a consignment of over two thousand fine specimens. Among other things we offer Aragonites of different kinds, including magnificent pieces of Flos Ferri, a beautiful lot of Asbestus in various forms, Tale in many colors, Halloysite, Kimmererite, Wavel- lite, fancy specimens of Ihléite, Hyalite, Evansite, Schrotter- ite, Essonite, Orpiment, Realgar, Wad, etc., ete. BIOLOCICAL SPECIMENS. A special list of Biological material from the Mediterranean -will be sent on request. We have for sale another lot of fine Peripatus. WARD’S NATURAL SCIENCE ESTABLISHMENT, ROCHESTER, N. Y. Warps Natura Science EstaslisHMENT A Supply-House for Scientific Material. Founded 1862. Incorporated 1890. DEPARTMENTS: Geology, including Phenomenal and Physiographic. ° Mineralogy, including also Rocks, Meteorites, etc. Palaeontology. Archaeology and Ethnology. Invertebrates, including Biology, Conchology, ete. Zoology, including Osteology and Taxidermy. Human Anatomy, including Craniology, Odontology, etc. Models, Plaster Casts and Wall-Charts in all departments. Circulars in any department free on request; address Wards Natural Science Establishment, 76-104 College Ave., Rochester, New York, U.S. A. ae C:0 NE ESNes:: Pa Art. XV.—Evolution of the Horse Family, as illustrated in a the Yale’ Collections ;_ by it. 8, david. + 5) 2 os eee XVI.—Clay of Probable Cretaceous Age at Boston, Massa- chusetts'; by PG. Cirapp 2. 22 ie ee ee 183 XVII.—Lower Hnronian Ice Age; by A. P. Conmman. ._-- 187 XVIIT—New Species of Baptanodon from the Jurassic of Wyoming 5 by C.-W...GILMORE! "0 23.5 oe ee XIX.—Almost Complete Specimen of Strenuella strenua (Billings);“by “H.-W. -SaiMpRes 2-8) Se ee XX.—Changes of the Colloidal Nucleation of Dust-free Wet Air in the Lapse of Time ; by C. Barus..-_2_---2_-2- 202 XXI.—Use of Succinic Acid as a Standard in Alkalimetry and Acidimetry; by I. K. Puutes and J. L. Hupparp 211 XXII.—Divergence and Curl; by E: B. Witson2_-_-__=-- 214 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. Chemistry and Physics—Misconception of Critical Temperature, J. W. Grecory: New Determination of Free Sulphur, E. Bercer, 221.—Detec- tion of Traces of Zinc, BERTRAND and JAVILLIER: Compounds of Ferrous Salts with Nitric Oxide, Mancnot and ZecHENTMEYER, 222.—Chemiecal Abstracts of the American Chemical Society: Perception of Sound Direction, RaAYLeIcH, 224.—lonization of the Atmosphere over the Ocean, A. S. EvE: Diurnal Periodicity of the Ionization of Air, Woop and CAMPBELL, 224. Geology and Mineralogy—U.S8. Geological Survey, 27th Annual Report, C. D. Wa toort, 225.—Publications of U. 8. Geol. Survey : Rate of Recession of Niagara Falls, G, K. Ginpert, 226.—Geol. Report on Bay Co., Mich., W. F. Cooper: Illinois State Geol. Survey, H. F. Barn, 227.—Postglacial Faults of Kast. New York, J. B. WoopwortH: Lunar and Hawaiian Physical Features Compared, W. H. PickerRine, 228.—Origin of Laterites, M. Macraren, 229.—Roches alcalines de !Hst-Africain, ARSANDAUX, 230,— Theory of Glacial Motion, O. W. Wittcox: Decomposition of Feldspars, CusHMan and HuBBaRD, 231.—Minerals from Lyon Mt., N. Y., H. P. WHITLOCK: Synopsis of Wineral Characters for Laboratory and Field Use, R. W. Ricnarps: Native Copper from Bisbee, 282. Paleobotany and Zooloyy—Cretaceous Flora of Southern New York and New England, A. Houick, 263.—Life and Work of Bernard Renault, D. H. Scort, 284.—Present Position of Paleozoic Botany, D. H. Scorr: Lhe Seed, a Chapter in Evolution, F.W. OLivir, 230.—Araucariex, SEWARD and Forp: Florule Portlandienne, FLicH¥ and ZetLtLeR: Rhetic flora of Persia, ZerL- LER: Affinities of certain Cretaceous Plant Remains, A. Houuick and KH. C. JEFFREY, 236.—Paleobotany of the Cretaceous of Long Island, A. HoL- Lick: Tertiary Lignite of Brandon, Vt., G. H. PERKINS: Sutcliffia insignis, D. H. Scott: Cycadofilices, D. WHITE: Seeds of Aneimites, D. WHITE, 237.—Microsporangia of Pteridospermeéz, R. Kipston: Flora der unteren Kreide Quedlinburgs, P. B. Ricuter: Dictyopnyilum und Camptopteris spiaralis, A. G. NatHorst, 288.—Clathropteris meniscoides, A. G. Nat- HORST: Germinating Spores in Stauropteris oldhymia, D. H. Scort, 239.— Tubicaulis Sutcliftii, Marre C. Stopes: Structure of Sigillaria elegans, R. Kipston: Megaspore of Lepidostrobus foliaceus, Rina Scorr; Algue Oxfordienne, O. LignreR: Brillenkaimane, Brazil, F. SiEBENROCK, 240.— Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes, 241. Misceilaneous Scientific Intelliyence-—Annual Reports of the Smithsonian Institution, 242.—U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey: Carnegie Institution of Washington, 243.—Carnegie Foundation for the Advaiicement of Teach- ing; First Annual Report: Meteorite from Selma, Ala., 244. Obituary—Sir MicHa&L Foster: Prof. D. I. MenpsLeer, 244. pent iene oe Dr. Cyrus Adler, soo te Librarian U. S. Nat. Museum. 2 VOn X XII, APRIL, 1907. Established by BENJAMIN SILLIMAN in 1818. THE AMERICAN JOURNAL OF SCIENCE. Epitror: EDWARD S. DANA. ASSOCIATE EDITORS Proressors GEORGE L. GOODALE, JOHN TROWBRIDGE, W. G. FARLOW anp WM. M. DAVIS, or CamBrince, Proressorss ADDISON E. VERRILL, HORACE L. WELLS, L. V. PIRSSON anp H. E. GREGORY, or New Haven, ProressorR GEORGE F. BARKER, or PHILADELPHIA, Proressor HENRY S. WILLIAMS, or Irwaca, Prorressor JOSEPH S. AMES, or Battimore, Me. J. S. DILLER, or Wasuinerton. FOURTH SERIES oon XXUI—[WHOLE NUMBER, (OCLXXIIL | No. 136—APRIL, 1907. NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT. 50g THE TUTTLE, MOREHOUSE & TAYLOR CO., PRINTERS, 123 TEMPLE STREET. Published monthly. Six dollars per year, in advance. 6.40 to;countries in the Postal Union. Remittances should be made either\by m ney orders, : registered letters, or bank checks (preferably on New York banks). RARE NORWAY MINERALS. The shipment expected has just arrived. Some of these are extremely rare. Value of consignment, $2000. A few we name below: Leukophane, crystals in matrix, finest in the world, $100; Titaneisen, crystals in matrix, one specimen 8x7 in., $100; 5x4 in., $20; 4$x4, $15; Thorite, crystal, $25; 3 crystals, $5 each ; Xenotime crystal, 1x #, $10; Gadolinite crystal, 24x 2, $10; 6 crystals, S4 to 88 ; Polykrase, crystals in matrix, $10 ; Brog- cerite, 4 crystals, } to 2in., $7 to $15 ; Native Silver, group of rare crystals, $20; Hellandite, crystals in matrix, $4 to $10; Euxenite, crystal in matrix, $10; Katapleiite, crystals in matrix, $12 ; Astrophyllite, crystals in matrix, $7.50; Monazite, 20 crystals, from 50 cts. to $5; Monazite, 10 crystals in matrix, $1 to $5; Rutile crystal, 144 inch, $2. ‘50; Malakon, erystals in matrix, 3 specimens $1, each ; Apatite crystals, 10 specimens, 25 cts. to $1. THE NEW CRYSTALLIZED NATIVE COPPER which was advertised and illustrated in the March No. of this Journal met with the approval and admiration of our foremost Colleges and collectors. Of the 10 specimens which we had, one was sold to the American Museum of Nat- ural History, one to Harvard Univer sity, two to Yale University and one to a prominent collector. As these Colleges have the most extensive and valuable collections in this country, the purchase of these specimens shows their great beauty and rarity. Five specimens yet remain, price $i0 to $70. CALIFORNIA MINERALS. I still have left a fine lot from the last consignment, since which another fine shipment has been received. Pink Beryls, in matrix and loose xls, $8 to $100. Blue and white Topaz xls, Romona, $8 to $10. Colemanite, San Bernardino Co., $2 to $5. Cali- fornite, Pala, polished slabs, $1 to $5. Kunzite, Pala, $2 to $705. Cinnabar, in fine brilliant xls, $2 to $d. Tourmaline, Mesa Grande and Pala, xls and matrix specimens, all colors, $50 to $200. HUNGARIAN MINERALS. We still have on hand many fine specimens from this locality. Stibnite xls, and groups, 295¢. to we 50; with Barite, $1.50 to $7.50 ; with Quartz, $1.50 to $38: with Cervantite, $2. 250, to $4; with Stibnite on Plumosite, $3 to $5 ; Barite, different colors, $1 to $5. Realgar, $1 to $5. Orpiment, at. 50 to 33. innabar, $2 to $5. Sphalerite and Quartz, 50c. to $4. Bournonite, $1 to $3. Blue Chalcedony pseudomorphs, d0c. to $2. RECONSTUCTED RUBIES. We have just received another fine lot from Paris, in the raw and cut state. Do not fail to secure one of them. The majority of the Scientists and collec- tors of this country have secured some of them for their collection, or to make up into jewelry. These rubies are as good as the natural ones, if not better ; they have the same hardness, also the same true pigeon-blood color. We have them on hand, from 4 up to 23k. ; they cost $5 per k. Please write for further particulars. RARE MINERALS. Anatase, Binnenthal, and St. Gothard, Switz., $4 to $10. Slippery Beryls, new find, Brazil, $3 to $6. Huclase, Brazil, and Ural Mts. $5 to $10. Diop- tase, Congo, Africa, $7.50 to $15. Microlite, Va., $2.50 to $7.50. Phosgenite. Eng., $2 to $10. Zeophyllite, Radzein, Bohemia, $5 to $10. Argentite, Ger- many, $12 to$15. Bismuthinite, Eng.,$4 to$6. Hulytite, Saxony, $5 to $6. Rare Pseudomorph from Chalcedony, Germany, $3 to $10. Alexandrite, Ural Mts.; crystals cost from $3 to $5, and matrix specimens from $20 to $25. ALBERT H. PETEREIT, 81 & 83 Fulton Street, New York City. ett. {a ay =e parquet THE AMERICAN JOURNAL OF SCIENCE [FOURTH SERIES.] Arr. XXIII.— Some Topographic Features Formed at the Time of Earthquakes and the Origin of Mounds in the Gulf Plain ; by WM. H. Hopss. Agout two years ago a symposium seems to have been started upon the origin of the mounds of the Lower Missis- sippi and the Gulf Plain. To this discussion no less than nine persons have contributed in Science,* besides which there have appeared in other journals a number of special articles and references to the subject.+ The latest contributor, Mr. M. Rh. Campbell, seems disposed to class together low mounds from *A.C. Veatch, The question of the origin of the natural mounds of Louisiana, Science, N. S., vol. xxi, No. 531 (March, 1905), pp. 850-851 ; J. C. Branner, Natural mounds or ‘‘ Hog-wallows,” ibid., vol. xxi, No. 539 (March. 1905), pp. 514-516; E. W. Hilgard, The prairie mounds of Louisiana, ibid., No. 536 (April, 1905), pp. 551-552 ; W. J. Spillman, Natural mounds, ibid., No. 558 (April, 1905), p. 632; A. H. Purdue, Concerning the natural mounds, ibid., No. 543 (May, 1905), pp. 828-824; D. I. Bushnell, Jr., The small mounds of the United States, ibid., vol. xxii, No. 570 (Dec., 1905), pp. 712-714; A. C. Veatch, On the human origin of the small mounds of the Lower Mississippi Valley and Texas, ibid., vol. xxiii, No. 575 (Jan. 1906), pp. 34-36; E. J. Farnsworth, On the origin of the small mounds of the Lower Mississippi Valley and Texas, ibid., No. 589 (April, 1906), pp. 585-584 ; R. T. Hill, On the origin of the small mounds of the Lower Mississippi Valley and Texas, ibid., No. 592 (May, 1906), pp. 704-706; J. A. Udden, The origin of the small sand mounds in the Gulf Coast country, ibid., No. 596, pp. 849-851. + E. M. Shepard, The New Madrid earthquake, Jour. Geol., vol. xiii, 1905, pp. 51-60; N. M. Fenneman, Oil fields of the Texas-Louisiana Gulf Coastal Plain, Bul. No. 282, U.S. Geol. Surv. 1906, pp. 124; A. C. Veatch, Geology and underground water resources of northern Louisiana and southern Arkan- sas, Prof. Pap. No. 46, U.S. Geol., Surv., 1906, pp. 55-59; M. R. Campbell, Natural mounds, Jour. Geol., vol. xiv, 1906, pp. 708-717. Am. Jour. Sct.—FourtH Series, Vou. XXIII, No. 186.—Aprin, 1907. 18 246 LHobhs—Features Formed at the Time of Earthquakes. whatever district and adopt for all the same explanation. Arid all the variety of ingenious theory, it is a little surpris- ing that of those who have addressed themselves especially to the problem, one only has given weight to a possible birth of the mounds at the time of earthquakes i in the district. Mr. A. C. Veatch, the best recent authority upon the geology of the district, has considered the possibility of this origin for certain of the mounds, but believes the dune and ant-hill theories the best supported. Shepard has, however, been able to show conclusively that the low mounds of the “sunk country”. are “sand blows”—mounds three or four feet in height with diameters of 20 to 100 feet, fre equently slightly hollowed at the center—mounds which came into existence during the earthquake at New Madrid in 1811-12. Veatch has concisely stated the general characteristics of the so-called “natural mounds” of the Gulf Plain in the following “ words, the italics being the present author’s :* “They (the mounds—ed.) occur irregularly throughout the coastal plain in northern Louisiana, northeastern Texas, Arkansas, and southeastern Missouri, except in the present flood plains. They are best developed on the Port Hudson terraces, but extend also over the hill lands. They are not restricted to any geologic formation or any range of elevation. Zhe material of which they are composed is commonly a very fine loam, which is reported by the agriculturists to be coarser and quite distinc: from the sur- rounding soil, which is commonly clay. Oil-well drillers in southern Louisiana and southeastern Texas report the material in these mounds to be entirely different from the surrounding soil and exactly the same as the fine sand found beneath the 50 to 100 feet of surface clay. The apparent difference in composition is, however, not so great as it seems at first sight and is in part due to the greater elevation and consequent better drainage of the mounds. Careful mechanical analysis will be necessary to deter- mine the true character and degree of this difference.” Udden has shown* that of 59 mounds near Olivia, Texas, the greater number are less than 30 feet in diameter and 7 inches in height, and, further, that it is the larger mounds which show the distinct pittings at the center. The object of the present article is to draw attention to the fact that the region in question is one of notable seismicity, and to point out that sand and water fountains, as well as mud voleanoes, with their products, “sand” or “mud” cones and ‘“craterlets,’ are almost universally produced in connection with great earthquakes. The derangement of the ground * Professional Paper, U. S. Geological Survey, No. 46, p. 109. + Science, June 1, 1906, p. 850. Hobbs—Features Formed at the Time of Earthquakes. 247 water at such times results in: (1) local ejection of sand and water (sand blows and mud cones), (2) draining through verti- cal pipes of swamps or ponds (* funnels” and “ craterlets ”’), (8) in draining following upon an ejection of sand, mud and water (pitted cones), or (4) squeezing out following the sudden draining of the district. The best descriptions of such phe- nomena have perhaps been given in connection with the earth- ress of Calabria, 1783 ;* * New Madrid, 1811-12 ;+ Iceland, 1896 ;¢ India, 1897 s$ and Chemakha, Turkestan, 1902.| The mounds referred to in the above mentioned examples generally consisted of sand mixed with small quantities of various other substances (mica, lignite, ete.) generally foreign to the surface layers of the soil, and it reached tlie surface borne by large volumes of water which left the material so charged with water as to resemble a quicksand. During the 1 Fic. 1. ‘‘ Mud volcano” formed at Chemakha during the earthquake of February 15, 1902. (After Weber.) Indian earthquake of 1897 material of this nature spread out from many openings and blanketed large tracts of country with quicksand. In other instances, as near New Madrid, in 1811, the water and sand welled out ‘throughout the length ot extended fissures and the arrangement of ‘sand-blows,” like the newly developed springs, appears to have been upon fissure lines. During the Chemakha earthquake, and in some other * Lyell, Principles of Geology, vol. ii, pp. 113-144. +E. M. Shepard, The New Madrid Earthquake, Jour. Geol., vol. xiii, pp. 45-62, 1905. : {Th. Thoroddsen, Das Erdbeben in Island im Jahre 1896, Pet. Mitth., vol, xlvii, pp. 58-56, 1901. S$ R. D. Oldham, Report on the great earthquake of 12th June, 1897, Mem. Geol. Surv. India, vol. xxix, 1899. | V. Weber, The earthquake of Chemakha of Jan. 31 (Feb, 13), 1902. Mem. du Comité Géol., N. S., No. 9, 1903 (in Russian). 248 Hobbs—FKeatures Formed at the Time of Earthquakes. instances, the material ejected was a salty mud, which upon desiccation yielded hard mud cones ranged upon fissure lines (tig. 1). At Chemakha, moreover, a second displacement upon the line of the fissure produced a distinct fault wall a meter in height which cut the dried mud cones. In Italy, a notable earthquake country, gas and water yield mud volcanoes in the period between earthquakes, but the action in them is usually either more or less vigorous during seismic shocks in the neighborhood. A series “of such mud volcanoes runs in a nearly straight line entirely across Sicily from Siculiana upon the south coast to Paterné upon the flanks of Aitna. Mud volcanoes are also numerous in the Apen- nines, though no attempt has yet been made to determine their arrangement or their relation to structural lines. This is, therefore, a most promising field for future studies in struc- tural geology. The whole subject of the extensive derangement of the ground water during earthquakes has been difficult of explana- tion by the centrum theory, and has not received the attention which it deserves or which it is likely in the near future to attract. The introduction of the crustal block or compartment theory of earthquakes affords an explanation, both simple and natural, of these derangements. If the elastic waves which we describe as earthquakes arise from the mutual friction upon the edges of earth blocks, which through an abrupt jolting movement seek to readjust themselves to the stress system, looked for consequences are: (1) the squeezing out of water from the trunk channels of circulation within those districts where blocks are depressed, (2) a sucking down of the water of swamps and ponds wherever blocks are elevated, (3) a suck- ing down following upon a squeezing out of water (often actually observed with the formation of cratered sand cones) when the slight elevation of a block succeeds to its depression, and (4+) a squeezing out of water following a sudden draining of a district when a slight settling follows the elevation of a block. = s@uite analogous appears to be the forcing of fire damp into the galleries of Belgian coal mines, which, from quite recent stu dies of Van den Broeck, appears to take place chiefly when the J/istpoeffers are heard and when there are earthquakes i in moderately distant districts.+ It is a fact of much significance that in the “sunk country of the Lower Mississippi the springs are often surrounded . little cones of sand admixed with lignite, and that the inhabit- * Gerland’s Beitraege zur Geophysik, vol. viii, Hert 2, 1907. +E. Van den Broeck, 5th Int. Congress of Hydrology, Climatology and Geology, Liege, 1898, pp. 1-13. Hobbs—Features Formed at the Time of Harthquakes. 249 ants of the district claim that the better quality of water is found by boring in the mounds of the valley. In the words of Shepard :* “Further, we find today that large volumes of water are con- stantly coming to the surface as springs in this district ; that these springs are numerous along the lines of fissure: that deep artesian wells around this region bring up this same variety of sand with lignite, some, as at Memphis, wheu first sunk, ejecting large chunks of the lignite ; that the sand and lignite brought up in the deep wells are similar to the same substances brought up by the innumerable springs that feed the lakes and streams of this district, and that they are apparently the same as that which sur- rounds the blow holes and fault ser aps, and which covers, as with a vast sheet, the considerable areas in the sunken district.” The association of oil with the mounds of the Gulf Plain is further of interest, and especially because it is the low mounds of the spindle-top type in which the petroleum is found. Fen- neman states that the chance of finding oil under the elevated spots in the plain is vastly greater than elsewhere. He fur- ther says :+ “There is some reason for thinking that such structures are ranged along lines of slight crustal deformation or disturbance. If such lines exist they probably trend northeast and southwest. ae probability may well be recognized in prospecting for new elds.” The northeast-southwest direction is the one which, accord- ing to Lyeil, was by far the most common direction of the fis- sures produced at the time of the New Madrid earthquake. In view of the vast deposits of sulphur which have been found to underlie portions of the Gulf Plain, it is worthy of men- tion that the earthquake of New "Madrid was possibly unique in the respect that the shocks were accompanied by emissions of sulphurous vapors (probably sulphureted hydro- gen) causing great discomfort and rendering the river water for days unfit for eee purposes. Sand blows, mud volcanoes, craterlets, etc. are clearly closely related phenomena and are to be ascribed to the verti- cal movement of water, gas, sand, ete. along the widened por- tions of earth fissures. Their connection with lar ger tectonic movements as the resulting derangement of the ground water system, is only beginning to be appreciated. Perhaps the most striking and significant single characteristic of the mounds WIL; Cop 1s Wer ¢ L. ¢., p. 124. 250 Hobbs—FKeatures Forined at the Time of Harthjuakes. thus produced is that they have a composition essentially dif- ferent from that of the layers of soil underlying their margins and that the materials are 3 derived from a lower horizon (see extract from Veatch above). The re- port of the Naples Acad- emy of Science upon the great earthquake of Ca- labria (1783) states that some plains, like that of Rosarno, were covered with circular hollows ae generally filled with sand FIG. 2. Funnel-shaped pipe of sand formed but sometimes with a con- during earthquakes of Calabria in 1785 (after Lyell): cave surface. At other times, the surface was convex. Upon digging down in them it was found that they were funnel-shaped pipes, and that the moist, loose, micace- ous sand in the center marked the tube up which the water had spouted (see fig. 2). At other places in the same district, cones of sand were built up, and the localization of cones.and funnels upon fissure lines was recognized.* According to Veatch and Fenneman, the Gulf mounds differ in composition from the material of the surrounding plain, and they appear, further, to be often pitted at their summits. Attention should therefore be directed more particularly to the composition of the mounds, taking account also of their less common ingredients, and their relation to underlying formations should be discussed. Apparently also there is a possibility of determining the underground structure of such mounds where they have been dissected. Especial interest attaches, in this connection, to the sandstone pipes which occur in the Carboniferous limestone of the eastern coast of Anglesey, for which as yet no explanation has been offered. The surface of the limestone is here pierced by a large num- ber of circular pits opening out in trumpet form and from 1 to 7 feet in diameter. Each can be seen to be, or to have Been filled with a plug of fine white sandstone, descending into the limestone at right angles to its bedding.+ “These plugs can be seen in various stages of denudation. Some have been worn flush with the surrounding limestone, and some of the smaller ones have been excavated so as to leave an almost empty pit or pothole with a little sandy matter in the * Lyell, Principles of Geology, vol. ii, pp. 127-128. + Edward Greenly, On sandstone pipes in the Carboniferous limestone at Dwlban Point, East Anglesey, Geol. Mag., Dec. IV, vol. vii, pp. 20-24, 1900. Hobbs—Features Formed at the Time of Harthquakes. 251 bottom. In one part of the shore, however, the plugs have been left standing, each in its circular pit, some -4 or 5 feet above the level of the surrounding rock ; and the foreshore here presents a most extraordinary appearance, great masses suggestive of gigan- tic fossil corals, or of the Paramoudras of the Chalk, standing up from the rocky ledges, while others, torn out by the sea, lie pros- trate in all directions.” (See fig. 5.) The limestone at the locality is overlaid by about two feet of sandstone with which the sandstone material of the pipes is continuous though with no sign of collapse in the bed of sand- stone (figs. 3,4). In fact, in most instances the surface of the sand- stone is gently domed upward above the pipes and occasionally has also a domed crack as well. Within the pipe the bedding of the sandstone sags downward and a concentric structure is clearly revealed by the brown weathering. There is, moreover, a tendency to radial jointing within the plugs. The enclosing limestone of the plugs is full of cracks at its upper . wel 3 Sandstone pipes in surface and these cracks are filled Carboniferous limestone, East with sandstone. The pipes belong oe Ba een @ to three different horizons within : Shere cerane! , , the same formation, and with much °’ probability represent fossil sand-blows like those described from near New Madrid. Structures of a similar character, the writer is informed by Professor A. H. Purdue, are found in the Ozark mountains of Arkansas. Whereas during the New Madrid earthquake certain of on fissures opened spouted the sand and water only locally t build up cones; from others the same materials welled Be throughout the entire length of the fissures so as to produce broad blankets of quicksand. Just as the sandstone pipes of Anglesey illustrate the indurated relic of the one phenomenon, so do the sandstone dikes described by Diller,* Hay,t Crosby,¢ . and OCase$ the other. Without exception these authors have *J.S. Diller, Sandstone dikes, Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. i, pp. 411-442, pls. 6-8. 1889. + Robert Hay, Sandstone dikes in northwestern Nebraska, ibid., vol. iii, pp. 90-55, 1892. {W. O. Crosby, Sandstone dikes accompanying the Great Fault of Ute Pass, Colorado, Bull. Essex Inst., vol. xxvii, pp. 113-147, 1890. S$ E. C. Case, On the mud and gand dikes of the White River Miocene, Am. Geol., vol. xv, pp. 248-254, 1895. >t (3) 252 Hobbs—FKeatures Formed at the Time of Earthquakes. explained the dikes by the upward movement of sand in fis- sures generally at the time of earthquakes. Any consideration of the mounds found within the Gulf Plain should take account of the “mud lumps” which are constantly forming in the Mississippi delta. These hillocks make their appearance as small isolated cones of mud which often appear above tide and have craters at their summits 4 Fie. 4. Large sandstone pipe shown in cliff in limestone, Anglesea. (Photograph by Edward Greenly, Esq.} from which a spring of dirty water issues. Later in their his- tory their conical form is lost and the water issues from their epee This water is often loaded with salt, oxide of iron, or lime carbonate, and carries mud and sand. "Marsh gas, carbon dioxide, and nitrogen are also given off from them in quantity. Lyell states* that the tubular cavities up which the springs * Lyell, Principles of Geology, vol. i, pp. 443-449. E. Reclus, New Phys- ical Geography, vol. i, pp. 211-212, 1894. Hobbs— Features Formed at the Time of Harthquakes. 256 rise are about 6 inches in diameter, vertical, and as regular in form as though bored with an auger.” A most important con- tribution to our knowledge of “these unique phenomena, in which it has clearly been shown that the material of the mud lumps is of a different nature from that surrounding them, has been very recently made by Hilgard.* He has shown that the sticky mud is the “blue delta clay ” or * blue clay bottom” derived from a much lower layer of Coast Pliocene, or Port Hudson age, above which the delta deposits are laid down. As 5 Fic. 5. Principal sandstone pipe where weathered out upon shore, Anglesea. (Photograph by Edward Greenly, Esq.) the latter are deposited they imprison a thin overlying stratum of very thin mud which results from the clarifying of the river-water when it meets the sea-water outside the bar. The settlement of the delta region under its increasing burden of sediment is the plausible cause to which Hilgard appeals for the forcing up of the mud lump clay, and its associated thinner mud. The lumps are thus in reality true “mud volcanoes.” The very stickiness of this blue clay, upon which the river’s scour makes little impression, in the opinion of the writer, makes it necessary to assume that a current either of water or of gas, or both, is forced up from beneath the ‘“ blue clay bot- *H. W. Hilgard, The exceptional TERS aud genesis of the Mississippi delta, Science, vol. xxiv, pp. 861-866, Dec. 28, 1906. 254 Hobbs—Features Formed at the Time of Eurthquakes. tom.” The gas which is emitted from the lumps is, as Hilgard believes, in olmane quite insufficient to alone carry on the action. Fissure springs are best suited to explain all the con- ditions, and the known existence of strong fresh-water springs at numerous off-shore points beneath the Gulf, and especially off the mouth of the Mississippi,* indicate the continuation beneath the Gulf of the artesian water stratum characteristic of the lower flood plain. Moreover, there is other evidence that such fissure springs are in definite alignment. A fact which Lyell considered so important as to print in his rare italics is, “ they (the lumps—ed.) were always situated off some one or he monene of the river.t To this Hilgard has given support by a statement, also in nigMhiess, Mudlump for mation is at present the nor mal mode of progression of the visible delta into the qulf’+ It would thus appear that as the mud lumps become clogwed, new ones develop along the extension of the same fissure through a steady migration seaward of the process. The peculiarly straight but divergent channels of the unique “ birdfoot ” por- tion of the delta su pport this hypothesis. While the mud lumps are perhaps not developed at the time of sensible earthquakes, it is a question whether the settlement of the Mississippi delta takes place gradually or per saltwm. The tendency at the present time is to look upon such brady- seismic movements as different in degree rather than in kind from those accompanied by earthquakes—a tendency which the increasing knowledge of subterranean sounds (bronted?) is strengthening. Many mud volcanoes owe their activity to the high tempera- ture of the subsurface layers of the earth’s crust, which sup- plies steam to raise the mud and Ejeet alt with violence.$ The Minbu mud volcanoes of India are of a different type and have a special interest for the present study because they indicate that the petroleum beneath the mounds of the Gulf Plain may well have played a part in their formation. Accord- ing to Cadel;| “The Mine salses, for such they are in reality, are due to the escape of carbureted hydrogen from the oil-bearing strata on the top of the anticline, which rises through the clay beds mixed with a little water and oil and slowly bubbles up at certain spots. *C. H. Hitchcock, Fresh-water springs in the ocean. Pop. Sci. Month., pp. 682, 685. +L. c¢., p. 446. a6 I Coq 196 tehOo. SSee, for example, D. P. Barrows, The Colorado Desert, Nat. Geog. Mag., vol. xi, p. 840, 1900. Also D. T. Macdougal, The delta of the Rio Colorado, Bull. Am. Geog. Soc., vol. xxxviii, p. 10, 1906. | Henry M. Cadel, A Sail down the Irrawaddy, Scot. Geog. Mag., vol. xvii, p. 268, 1901. Hobbs—Features Formed at the Time of Harthquakes. 255 As the gas and water rises, it brings up a little gray mud, which, on exposure to the air, dries and hardens while the water evapo- rates, producing first a low crater basin with a dry rim of mud, then a cone with a crater on the top, in the center of which the gas finds vent.’ It will be noted that we have here an evolution of topogra- phic forms identical with those illustrated by the sand phe- nomena of earthquakes as above outlined. Other petroleum mud cones occur upon the Apennines at Sassuolo and San Venanzio, at Tanan and Baku in the Caucasus, and upon the Island of Trinidad, while Macaluba in Sicily rests wpon beds of clay containing gypsum, salt, sulphur, bituminous matter, ete. or much the same mixture as that to be found beneath the gulf mounds. The smell of sulphur which accompanies the eruptions of Macaluba is of interest because it offers a pos- sible explanation of the sulphurous odors with which the air was charged during the great New Madrid earthquake of 1811-12. The small amount of attention which “ mud volcanoes” have attracted we owe perhaps to their name, which classifies them with volcanic phenomena, but with which they have little in common. Generally born at the time of earthquakes, they show a sympathetic response to seismic shocks within their neighborhood, and are properly classed as phenomena conse- quent upon the derangements of the ground water and gas systems by earthquakes. Our knowledge of the brontidi now makes it possible within a seismic province where mud vol- canoes are frequent (Italy, for example), to determine what relation exists between their periods of activity and the per- ception of subterranean rumbling. It seems certain that where mud or sand cones are now forming, orographic blocks are being depressed, which accounts for their common occurrence within delta regions. The study of bradysisms has clearly shown that nearly all coast lines of the continents are today rising, the marked exceptions being the deltus of the great rivers.* The whole Mississippi flood plain, with the excep- tion of Lake County, Tenn., and the opposite shore of the river, would appear to be included within the area which in the isostatic adjustment about the Schaller—Chemical Composition of Molybdic Ocher. 299 into the combined ammoniacal filtrates until the characteristic red color was produced. The solution was then acidified with H,SO, and after heating on the steam bath, to allow the molybdenum sulphide to settle, it was filtered through a Gooch crucible. This was then dried, and the sulphide changed into the trioxide at a low heat and weighed to constant weight. The filtrate from the molybdenum sulphide was made alka- line with ammonia, hydrogen sulphide again passed into the solution, which was then re-aciditied with H,SO, and a small amount of molybdenum which had escaped precipitation in the first case recovered. The filtrate, on testing, showed no more molybdenum. Neither was any residue found on evaporating it to dryness and tests that were made showed the absence of calcium and magnesium. The weighed iron oxide was fused with sodium bisulphate and determined volumetricaily with a result that agreed with the gravimetric determination. The results obtained are as follows: ’ 1 2 3 AV. Ratio 15L©) 2s NGOS 17°95 17°93 17°62 TAS UTE Onze) 22-08 21-07 eis 21°08 LOO) sol MiG OF | 5502 57°49 58°55 57°69 3°04 3 Insol.... 4°66 eye Bagel 4°66 101°05 The average analysis, with the insoluble matter deducted and reduced to 100 per cent, is compared with the figures caleu- lated for Fe,O,.3 MoO,.74H,O. Analysis Calculated 15 0k Ye sees Ayer oes 18°28 18°57 SEES OG seats eae eee 21°87 22°01 MOO ioe ye eee Nese 59°85 59°42 100°00 100°00 Partial water determinations were made on two samples as follows, the amount of water being represented by the loss in weight, the crucible being heated at the temperature given till six hours further heating produced no difference in weight. Total loss up to 110° = 14:04% 66 66 (15 66 125° — 15°50 66 66 66 (%5 185° — 17°64 66 6¢ 66 (74 900° — 17:93 This shows that of the total seven and a half parts of water, 5°92, or six parts, are given off ata little above 100°, while a higher temperature is required to drive off the remainder. 300 Schaller— Chemical Composition of Molybdic Ocher. For the material from the other localities,* the quantity was so small that exact values cannot be expected, but the analyses all show a general agreement with the calculated values. The samples analyzed are as follows : No. 1 is from Telluride, Colorado, and is from the sample furnished by the Foote Mineraf Company, of Philadelphia. No. 2 was very kindly furnished by Prof. A. J.’ Moses, of Columbia University, who states that the sample is probably from California, though the locality is not known for certain. Two samples were sent, one yellow, which was seen to be pure, and one brown, which was seen under the microscope to consist of a mixture of the pure yellow mineral and limonite. This sample at once suggested that it was similar to that analyzed by Owen, who obtained 35 per cent Fe,O,. It also showed the ease with which a mechanical mixture of molybdite and limonite could be detected under the microscope. The opaque brown limonite was scattered through some of the yellow molybdite, and caused it to appear almost opaque, besides which there were numerous patches of earthy limonite. The brown sam- ple was not analyzed. No. 3 is from Renfrew, Ontario, and was very kindly fur- nished by Prof. C. Palache, of Harvard University. Most of the material is massive and earthy appearing, though seen under the microscope to consist of minute fibrous crystals. The material did not look promising, but analysis showed values agreeing well with the other. Owing to an accident, only the iron and molybdenum could be determined. These values are not given. On one of the specimens sent by Prof. Palache, there was a small amount of the finely crystallized fibrous ma- terial which seemed to be very pure. This was scraped off and analyzed, and though only about fifty milligrams were available, the results given under No. 3 were obtained. The methods of analyses were like those mentioned with the analyses of the New Hampshire material. By heating in a closed tube, to obtain the water, some of the molybdenite which was usually mixed with the mineral doubtless oxidized to the oxide, thus increasing the amount of molybdenum present. The results obtained are: No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 Colorado California Ontario JEL) cium ic AS a aReeN x 15°8 15:4 15°5 Fe, 0), Pere pelonipy ov Nya gE Sale 19:0 15°8 W733 MoO, ees NU ee yt 59°3 AVG Ba Tage i ee [5-9] 24-0 9°4 100°0 102°9 97-9 *The characteristic optical properties of the ferric molybdate were also determined on specimens from Stanhope, New Jersey ; Gold Creek, Deer Lodge Co., Montana; Aldfield Township, Pontiac Co , Quebec. Schaller— Chemical Composition of Molybdic Ocher. 301 Deducting the insoluble matter and reducing the analyses to 100 per cent, we obtain: MG, WN NO No. 3 Cale. EIB) Byes dope ss) 16°8 19°5 aL 7/5) 18°6 NOMA See tak a OOD 20°0 19°6 22-0 Wig. Sagat eee 63-0 60°5 62:9 59°4 100°0 100°0 100°0 100:0 The ratios give : erOr © : MoO,. PA ail cto ee es 1:0 ; Te3 : 3°4 Nunaller eee ee 1:0 8°6 3°3 INN Beak 1:0 7:8 3°5 The anaiyses agree sufficiently well to show that the mineral is uniform in composition and the analysis of the material from New Hampshire serves to establish its formula. In considering the mode of formation of the hydrous ferric molybdate, it may be well to call attention to the fact that the interaction of molybdic acid, H,MoO,. H,O, on limonite may be written so as to yielda product with a formula that is iden- tical with the new formula and exactly balances the equation : 2¥Fe,O,.3H,0+ 6(H,MoO,.H,O) = 2(Fe,O0,.3Mo0,.74H,0). Pyrognostic Properties.—On heating the mineral in a closed tube abundant water is easily given off and the mineral be- comes a dark olive color which on further heating again becomes lighter in color. On heating the mineral in a crucible, the color ‘changes are very marked. At first, the yellow mineral darkens and becomes a dark gray, appearing almost black and with a slight olive tint, then it becomes a light yellow again, and on fur ther heating changes to a deep orange color. If the mineral now be allowed to cool, the orange changes to yellow and back to orange again on reheating, If the dark colored material be allowed ‘to cool, it retains its dark gray color and on reheating passes through. yellow to the orange. On heating for some time ata higher temperature, the mineral, on cooling, becomes a permanent bright green. By further heating all of the molybdenum is volatilized and the dark red ferric oxide remains. The mineral is readily soluble in hydrochloric acid, and dissolves slowly in ammonia, taking on a brown color (probably due to the separating ferric hydrox- ide). After a while, all the molybdenum of the mineral goes into solution, leaving the msoluble ferric hydroxide. Artificial ferric molybdate.—Chemical dictionaries mention but two hydrous ferric molybdates, neither of which is erystal- line, and which approximate in formula to Fe,O,.4MoO,.7H,O, and Fe,O,.5MoO,.16H,O. On adding a solution of ammonium 302 Schaller-—Chemical Composition of Molybdic Ocher. molybdate to an excess of a solution of a ferric salt, no precipi- tate is formed, but on reversing the process and adding the ferric salt to the ammoniunr moly bdate, a voluminous yellow precipitate appears. A precipitate thus prepared was air-dried for about a week and analyzed with the following result : Ratio Bet@ eta os cae 15°9 1:0 MoO, hh SE Fv DYES Se 61°6 4°3 H,O ‘(by Citi) eae 22°5 12°5 100°0 These results are between those of the two salts above quoted. It was found, however, that a large amount of free molybdic acid contaminated the material and the impossibility of air- drying the non-crystalline mass sufficiently accounts for the high water content. It is therefore believed that neither of the two salts above mentioned and described in chemical diction- aries has any existence, but that they are mixtures of a salt of the formuia Fe,O, 3MoO ,+n(8H,O) with molybdic acid and water. A preliminary experiment of heating precipitated ferric hydroxide and molybdie acid in the correct molecular propor- tions with an excess of water in a glass bomb failed to give any result. After heating to about 150° for several hours, there was no indication of. any reaction and on higher heating the bomb exploded. An attempt was next made to crystallize the yellow amor- phous precipitate. The precipitate was heated with water in a glass bomb up to 180°-200° for several days, and when examined, was found to consist of a mass of fine yellow crystals and a ereenish amorphous mass. By shaking up the tube, the green part settled very quickly, while the minute yellow erystals settled so slowly that a nearly perfect separation of the two products could be made. The yellow. crystalline part was examined under the microscope and found to consist of three products, all crystallized. The most abundant salt occurs in minute pale yellow tablets of quadratic outline and sometimes with an octagonal shape suggesting combina- tions of the cube and octahedron, and which seem to be isotropic. They were too small to test for interference figures. The second most abundant salt occurs in pale yellow fibrous prisms and also in radiated fan-shaped masses that show the characteristic absorption of the natural mineral, and are probably to be identified with it. The third salt also occurs in prisms which, however, are not fibrous, do not show any absorption, and seem to be colorless. They may be molybdie Schaller— Chemical Composition of Molybdic Ocher. 303 acid, but the first two salts are probably hydrated ferric molyb- dates. It is the writer’s intention to continue the study of the artificial formation of these salts, especially to obtain, in a state of purity, that one which corresponds in composition to the natural mineral. Occurrence of natural MoO,.--.The existence of the trioxide of molybdenum as a natural mineral has not been demonstrated, and what is commonly believed to be MoO, is shown to be a hydrated ferric molybdate, Fe,O,.3MoO,.7$H,O. There is also the possibility that the hydrous oxide MoO,.2H,O, or molybdie acid, has a natural occurrence. If either of these should be shown to exist, the name molybdite should be applied to the species and the salt Fe,O,.3Mo0,.74H,O should receive a different name ; but until it is shown conclusively that an oxide of molybdenum does exist in nature, the name molybdite must be retained for the hydrated ferric molybdate. 304 Scientific Intelligence. S Cle NTE CNET el Gen Nears I. CHEMISTRY AND PHYSICS. 1. The Preparation of Pure Heliwm.—Several years ago JACQUEROD and Perrot called attention to the fact that helium diffuses through the walls of tubes or bulbs of fused silica at high temperatures. These investigators have now made use of this remarkable phenomenon in purifying the crude gas obtained by heating the mineral cleveite. They found, in the first place, that silica is perfectly impermeable to other gases, with the excep- tion of hydrogen and perhaps carbon monoxide, up to the tem- perature of 1067°. The apparatus used for the operation consisted of a bulb of silica provided with a capillary tube of the same material. The bulb was surrounded by a cylindrical vessel of platinum, from which the quartz capillary passed by a gas-tight joint. The space between the bulb and the walls of the platinum vessel was exhausted, and then crude helium was placed in this space at a pressure a little above that of the atmosphere in order to hasten the diffusion. To this helium was added 5 to 10 per cent of oxygen in order that any hydrogen and carbon monoxide present might be changed to water vapor and carbon dioxide. At the same time the quartz bulb was exhausted by means of the mercury pump. The apparatus was heated by means of an electric furnace to about 1100°. Under the condi- tions employed, with a bulb of 42° capacity the diffusion was quite slow, amounting to about 1° of helium per hour. On the other hand, when the apparatus had been once set up the method worked very simply, and the purification appeared to be perfect. A spectroscopic examination of the gas showed only the charac- teristic lines of helium, extremely brilliant. The nitrogen bands, which are so easily seen, were entirely absent. Only the red hydrogen line, extremely faint, was observed, and this probably came from traces of hydrogen held by the aluminium electrodes of the Pliicker tube employed.— Comptes Rendus, cxliv, 135. H. L. W. 2. Calcium as an Absorbent of Gases.—By means of a special arrangement with an electric furnace, Soppy has found it possible to heat reagents 7 vacuo, in sealed soft-glass apparatus, to a far higher temperature than the softening point of glass. Calcium heated in this manner is an absorbent for all the known gases with the exception of those of the argon group. If the initial gas pressure does not exceed a few millimeters, all the common gases are rapidly and completely absorbed by calcium at tem- peratures between 700 and 800°. Barium and strontium behave in a similar way. By admitting known volumes of air and absorbing all but the argon, the interesting observation was Chemistry and Physics. 305 made that it was not possible to force a discharge through argon at a pressure of less than ,"". Helium was found to be non- conducting at a pressure of ,4,7™ when pure, but in the presence of any common gas, such as hydrogen or oxygen, one-hundredth of this amount serves to reveal the D, line. This behavior of the inert gases explains why they appear to “run out” in spec- trum tubes so quickly, for when the traces of common gases always present are absorbed by the electrodes, the inert gases are left in the pure and non-conducting state-— Chem. News, xciv, 305. H. L. W. 3. New Method for Determining Halogens in Organic Com- pounds.—K. Cuasray has described a simple method, based upon anew principle, for making these determinations. The appara- tus is a tube similar to a large test-tube. If the substance is a liquid, from 0:1 to 0°5§ of it is weighed in a bulb of thin glass and this is placed in the bottom of the tube and broken. The tube is then plunged into a freezing-mixture of solid CO, and acetone, then ammonia gas is passed in until 5 or 6° have been liquefied. A fragment of clean metallic sodium is then added, the liquid is agitated, the reaction being moderated by plunging the tube into the refrigerating mixture if necessary. Further additions of sodium are made until the blue color of the sodam- monium is permanent. This usually requires only one or two minutes. The excess of ammonia is allowed to evaporate, moist air is passed into the tube to decompose the remaining sodium, the residue is dissolved in water and the halogen determined by Volhardt’s volumetric method. If the substance is solid and soluble in liquid ammonia, the same method of treatment is employed ; if insoluble in the ammonia, it is dissolved in 2 or 3° of ether, benzol, or toluene and the solution is allowed to drop very slowly from a funnel into the sodammonium liquid. The author has applied the method to a large variety of pure organic substances with very satisfactory results.—Comptes Rendus, exliv, 203. H. L. W. 4. Hydrates in Aqueous Solution ; by Harry C. Jones. 8vo, pp. 264. Published by the Carnegie Institution of Washing- ton, February, 1907.—This is a monograph on the evidence of the existence of hydrates in solution, their approximate com- position, and certain spectroscopic investigations bearing upon the hydrate problem. Professor Jones has been assisted in this work by F. H. Getman, H. P. Bassett, L. McMaster, and H. 8. Uhler. The investigations are the outcome of observations, made in the Johns Hopkins laboratory, that very concentrated solutions of certain salts showed abnormally low freezing points. As these facts were not explained by the then existing theories of solution, Professor Jones advanced the explanation, that in . these concentrated solutions a part of the solvent is combined with the dissolved substance, and no longer plays the réle of sol- vent. No less than four distinct lines of evidence have been furnished experimentally, all of which point to the correctness of 306 Scientifie Intelligence. the theory. The arguments in favor of the theory appear very. strong, and whatever may be the outcome in regard to its general acceptance, it is certain that a valuable and important mass of facts has been accumulated in these extensive investigations. I. L. W. 5. Die Entwicklungsgeschichte der Chemie; von A. LapEn- BURG. 8vo, pp. 417. Braunschweig, 1907 (Friedrich Vieweg und Sohn).—This is the fourth edition of the well-known lectures on the history of the development of chemistry from the time of Lavoisier to the present. The first edition appeared thirty-eight years ago, in 1869. At that time the great chemists Liebig, ‘W ohler, Bunsen, Kolbe, Kekulé, Dumas, Wurtz, Frankland, and Williamson were living, some of whom had been the author’s teachers, and all of whom he knew personally. This cireum- stance gives to the book a great degree of authority in regard to the early history of chemistry. ‘To the original fourteen lectures anew one has been added with each new edition, to bring the history up to the time of writing, so that the present enlarged and improved edition comprises seventeen lectures or chapters. The book deals largely with the development of chemical theo- ries. ‘The copious references to the literature are an important and useful feature of the work. H. L. W. II. GEoLoGcy AND MINERALOGY. 1. Geological Survey of Canada; Roserr Bety, Acting Deputy Head and Director. Summary Report for the Calendar Year 1905. Pp. 144, with 3 colored maps. Summary Report for the Calendar Year 1906. Pp. 206. Section of Mines: Annual Report for 1904. Pp. 162.—The Summary Reports for 1905 and 1906 have been recently received with also the Report of the Section of Mines for 1904. The reports are very largely given to economic developments, for which the demand is now greater than ever. The Director calls attention to the fact that during the twenty years since 1886 the mineral production of Canada has increased about seven times, or from $10,000,000 to nearly $79,000,000. At the same time the appropriations, both for the Geological Survey and the Mines Branch of the Depart- ment of the Interior, have only increased from $115,000 to $174,000. Considering the very wide extent of country to be examined from the Provinces on the Atlantic to British Colum- bia and Alaska on the Pacific, it is evident that any adequate development, such as the best interests of the country call for, demands a much larger force than is possible with the present limited -support. It is also obvious that the economic work, important as it is, should not. crowd out that more strictly belonging to pure geology. Geology and Mineralogy. 307 It is stated that in 1905 some thirty-seven parties were at work in the field, and in 1906 a somewhat smaller number. ‘The lead- ers,of the different parties give in brief their individual reports, and asurvey of them serves to show the great variety of work in progress. Among these may be mentioned one by Dr. Robert Bell on the Cobalt Mining District, giving a brief account of the geology of the region, accompanied by striking illustrations of the silver nuggets which have been produced. The Survey has also issued sheets Nos. 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 74, 75, 76, 82, 83 of the Nova Scotia geological map. Fur- ther, the following special reports have appeared : Report on the Chibougamau Mining Region in the Northern Part of the Province of Quebec; by A. P. Low. Pp. 61, with one colored map. Preliminary Report on the Rossland, B. C., Mining District ; by R. W. Brock. Pp. 40. 2. The Cruise of the Neptune. Report on the Dominion Government Expedition to Hudson Bay and the Arctic Islands. 1903-1904 ; by A. P. Low. Pp. xvii, 355. Ottawa, 1906.—This report contains a narrative of the voyage of the Meptune during 1903-04, to the northern parts of Hudson’s Bay and the north- eastern Arctic islands, extending as far as Cape Sabine in Smith Sound, in latitude 79°. The scientific staff was led by Dr. A. P. Low, who was commander and geologist. The general account of the voyage, illustrated by numerous excellent reproductions from photographs, is most interesting. To this are added chap- ters discussing the Esquimos, the geology, the whaling, and the navigation of Hudson’s Bay. The lists of scientific collections are given in appendixes and a large pocket map is also added. The two chapters devoted to a summary of the geology of the northeastern coast of America and the Arctic islands deserve careful reading. ‘The account given is based chiefly upon the observations made by the Neptune, although full credit is given to the necessarily fragmentary and imperfect observations of the earlier explorers. The region covered is remarkable as giving a nearly continuous series from the Archean to the Tertiary, while various phases of the glacial age are represented as well as Post- glacial deposits. It is stated that : “The Paleozoic rocks are well represented on the islands by thick deposits extending upwards in a continuous series from the Cambro-Silurian to the upper beds of the Carboniferous. Rocks older than the Galena-Trenton are only found in the northern part of Ellesmere island, where a series of beds appears to con- nect the Upper Huronian formations with the lower members of the Cambro-Silurian. Mesozoic rocks are found on the northern Parry islands, on the Sverdrup group and on the western and northern sides of Ellesmere island. Tertiary formations occur on the northwestern islands, on the northern part of Ellesmere, as well as on the northern and eastern parts of Baftin island. The former presence of a continental ice-cap is attested along 308 Scientific Intelligence. the northwestern shores of Hudson bay and in the southern part _ of Baffin island, by the rounded and polished rock surfaces, which are everywhere well marked by the ice striae, often in several sets showing changes in the direction of the ice move- ment. On the east side of Baffin the rock surfaces show signs of rounding and smoothing by ice, but the striae are not well marked, and the glaciation does not appear to have been nearly so intense as to the south and westward. Passing northward up the western side of Davis strait and Baffin bay, the evidence of intense glaciation becomes less and less, that on Ellesmere the present condition of the local ice-covering would appear to repre- sent nearly as great an amount of glaciation as ever occurred there.” 3. Geological Survey of Brazil_—A Geological Survey of Brazil has recently been established and placed under the charge of Dr. OrviitE A. Derpy, well known for his valuable con- tributions to the geology and mineralogy of the country. This important enterprise is due immediately to the wise foresight of the new President, Dr. Affonso Augusto Moreira Penna, inaugurated on the 15th of November last, and Dr. Miguel Colman du Pine Almeida, appointed by the President to the portfolio of Indus- try, Highways and Public Works. Dr. Colman was formerly Secretary of Agriculture of the state of Bahia, where he proved himself one of the most able and far-sighted of the younger gen- eration of Brazilian engineers and administrators. The new department, denominated Servico Geologico e Mineralogico do Brazil, will be located in Rio de Janeiro. The leading feature of its program is the rapid reconnaissance of the general geology of the country with detailed investigation of the districts, that on account of their mineral wealth, deficiencies of water supply or other reasons, offer special scientific and economic interest for investigation. Owing to the lack of proper topographic maps no systematic map work will for the present be attempted. Dr. Derby is remarkably well fitted for the post to which he has been appointed, since he has been active in scientific work in Brazil for many years and is well acquainted with all the local conditions. He organized and long directed the geographical and geological survey of the state of Sio Paulo. Dr. Derby, it is stated, will be assisted by such native and foreign resident geolo- gists as have made valuable contributions to the geology of Brazil. 4. Geological Commission, Cape of Good Hope; by A. W. Rocers, Director of Survey. Tenth Annual Report, 1905. Pp. 296, 31 illustrations.—The work done by the survey during 1905 is well shown by the following list of papers : Geological Survey of parts of the Divisions of Uitenhage and Alexandria, by A. W. Rogers ; Geological Survey of the Coastal Plateau in the Divisions of George, Knysna, Uniondale and Humansdorp, by E. H. L. Schwartz; Geological Survey of Glen Grey and parts of Queenstown and Wodehouse, including the Indwe Area, by A. L. Du Toit; Geological Survey of parts of Geology and Mineralogy. 309 Hay and Prieska, with some notes on Herbert and Barkly West, by A. W. Rogers ; Geological Survey of portions of the Divisions of Vryburg and Mafeking, by A. L. Du Toit ; Geologi- cal Survey of the.Divisions of Tulbagh, Ceres and Worcester, by E. H. L. Schwartz; A Raised Beach Deposit near Klein Brak River, by A. W. Rogers. These papers are accompanied by illustrations and geological maps, which add much to their effectiveness. While the work is all of the nature of detailed reconnaissance, the survey deserves great credit for the large amount of high grade work done on an appropriation of less than $10,000. New facts are given regard- ing the interesting line of volcanic rocks, both lavas and breccias, which accompany the fault separating the Uitenhage beds from the Zuurberg. Further evidence of glaciation is presented, show- ing a cold climate during the deposition of the Griqua Town beds. From the standpoint of the physiographer, the work of Mr. Schwartz on the coastal plateau is of particular interest. Origin of topographical features is discussed somewhat in detail, and the terraces, one submerged, two others at elevations of 700 and 1500 feet, respectively, are described. The 700 ft. ‘uplands coastal plateau,” which has been previously described as a peneplain, is now considered to be a plain of marine denudation, and is compared with the similar plains of marine erosion in Europe. Hep Es Ge 5. Seismic Geology.—Recent geological work on areas of complicated rock structure, taken in connection with a detailed study of earthquake regions, seems likely to result in a change of mental attitude toward dynamic forces. It seems as if the effort to escape the theories of catastrophism in geology had carried us so far in the opposite direction that little room is left in geologi- _ cal thinking for the undoubted occurrences of sudden dislocations and for the production of topographic forms, other than by the normal processes of erosion. In a recent work on Seismic Geol- ogy by Wo. H. Hosss,* the necessity for this new view is clearly brought out. The centrum theory for earthquakes seems now to be generally abandoned because only of limited application, and the ordinary cause for earthquakes 1s to be found in movements of orographic blocks. Professor Hobbs has brought together a number of instances of dislocations of the earth’s surface as the result of macroseisms, beginning with the Calabrian earthquake of 1783 and ending with the California earthquake of April 18, 1906,—a list which in itself is imposing, but which, undoubtedly, would be much extended if scientific observations had been more generally made. The following generalizations are announced concerning surface dislocations at the time of earthquakes. * Some Principles of Seismic Geology, by William Herbert Hobbs, with an Introduction by Eduard Suess. From Gerlands Beitriige zur Geophysik, vili, pp. 219-292, 1 pl. and 10 figs. Leipzig, 1907 (Wilhelm Engelmann). Am. Jour. Sct.—Fourts Series, Vou. XXIII, No. 186.—Aprix, 1907. 22 310 Scientific Intelligence. “1, Appreciable surface dislocations appear to be formed only at the time of macroseisms, and the throws upon these plains stand in some relation to the magnitude of the disturbance.” ““o. The evident dislocations produced are, generally of two orders of magnitude, those of the higher order being very limited in number, while those of the lower order are often quite numerous.” “3. Earthquake dislocations are normal faults with hades approaching the vertical.” “4. A considerable lateral shift along the larger planes of dis- location has sometimes been observed, and is probable in other instances.” “5. The crustal movements indicated at the surface at the time of earthquakes appear to be due to an adjustment in position of individual blocks.” So closely connected are fractures and seismic phenomena that the fracture system suggests earthquake activity, while, on the other hand, seismic methods may be used for locating fracture systems. Hobbs has called attention to a number of regions where this intimate correlation is brought out by observed facts. In the chapter on Seismic Geography of the Eastern United States and Canada, attention is called to the correspondence between a map of the lineaments of the Atlantic Border Region (Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. xv, pl. 45, 1904), showing the promi- nent fault lines, and a map of the Distribution of Earthquakes in the United States (F. de Montessus de Ballore, Les Etats-Unis sismiques ; Archives des Sci. phys. et nat. de Genéve, vol. v, pl. 3, 1898), where a complete concordance is shown. This illustra- tion is particularly striking because of the fact that the two maps were made entirely independently and with different purposes in view. Another important conclusion is suggested by the study of the relation of earthquakes to fault lines, viz., that the local value of gftavity seems to be altered as the result of local dis- placements which produced earthquakes. The far-reaching im- portance of this conclusion as an aid in the explanation of uplifted blocks, trough lines, and ocean valleys, is evident. The law of distribution of seismicity, as stated by Montessus, Milne, and others, considers earthquakes as directly related to regions of marked change of relief, and is restated by Professor Hobbs in a single sentence, viz., ‘Seismicity is localized on earth lineaments —faults—and is greatest at their intersection.” The Geotectonic and Geodynamic Aspects of Calabria and Northeastern Sicily; by Witt1am Hersert Hosss, with an Introduction by the Count DE Monrtessus DE Batiore. Pp. 293-362, with 10 pls., 3 figs. Leipzig, 1907 (Wilhelm Engel- mann).—As stated by the author, this article is a study in orienta- tion; it is a geological study of a well-known earthquake region, as compared with the usual investigation along physical and commercial lines. The attitude of the author gives a clue to the value of this work. After some twenty years’ experience in Geology and Mineralogy. 311 the complex crystalline rocks of New England, Professor Hobbs reached the conclusion that the well-recognized methods of inter- pretation of structure by folds was not applicable. His view, that the region is one marked by a well-defined fracture system which has determined the character of the topography and the boundaries of rock formations, met with strong opposition. As a method of testing his conclusions, the Calabrian district, where the geology is well-known and the fault lines and distribution of earthquakes have been made out, was chosen for study. A detailed study of this region, concluded by careful mapping, has shown a most marked concordance between the topography and the fault lines on the one hand and between the fracture system and earthquakes on the other. The views advanced by Professor Hobbs may well seem radi- cal, but the field evidence, as presented, seems so conclusive, and a study of the literature has been so thorough, that, in the absence of satisfactory data to the contrary, we must recognize that faulting is a much more important factor in dynamical geology than we have been accustomed to admit, and that earth- quakes, as indicative of the location of fault lines, are worthy of the most careful and systematic study on the part of geologists. H. E.G. 6. Die Fossilen Insekten und die Phylogenie der rezenten Form- en. Ein Handbuch fiir Paldontologen und Zoologen,; von Anton Hanpiirscu. hLieferungen I-IV, 640 pp. and 36 double plates. Price per part, 8 marks ; the book is to consist of from 8 to 10 parts with 50 plates. Leipzig, 1906 (W. Engelmann).—In this very valuable treatise there will be brought together all that is known in regard to fossil insects. The author has now been at work several years in an investigation based primarily on the materials in the museums of Europe and America, and this has been made possible through the support of the Royal Academy of Natural History of Vienna. The chief object of this elaborate study is the establishment of a classification of the Hexapoda based on the morphology and chronology of recent and fossil forms. Among fossil insects, itis seldom that more than the wings are preserved and upon these the paleontologist has in the main to depend. Until recently no adequate account of the venation of wings among living insects, as a basis for classification, was accessible ; the work of Comstock and Needham, however, has supplied this great lack. Further, the application of the knowledge of recent . forms to fossil specimens could be made only by an entomologist of general training, and paleontologists will ever be grateful to Handlirsch for the extended and successful work he is now see- ing throngh the press. The final results of his studies will appear in the concluding chapters of this book, the completion of which must be awaited for another year. As will be seen later, he has divided the fossil material into two categories, material that is well preserved, thus revealing the essential ore 312 Scientific Intelligence. acters, and poor material, which is not to be despised but to be used cautiously in determining the evolution of the Hexapoda. He has taken as his motto: ‘ Better a little certain than much doubtful.” The plan of the work is as follows: The introduction contains an account of the more important morphologic characters and their phylogenetic application. Main reliance is placed on the morphology of the wing and on convergent evolution. The introduction closes with a description of the hypothetic primor- dial insect, the Protentomon. In Part I (pp. 13-51) are described the orders of recent insects along with descriptions of the various terms used throughout the work. Here are also given schematic figures to illustrate the venation of the various types of wing. Part II (pp. 55-393) treats of the Paleozoic forms, and throughout the work all the species will be illustrated as far as possible. Part III (pp. 394— 640, as far as published) takes up the Mesozoic insects. Part IV will treat of the Tertiary forms; V, of the Quaternary; VI will give a summary of the paleontologic results attained ; VII will present a short historical summary of the proposed system, and the closing part, VIII, will include the new classification of the Hexapoda and the author’s conclusion on the phylogen of the Arthropoda. The work teems with new names of all grades and .may cause alarm to some ; yet when one considers for a moment the extraor- dinary differentiation among living insects (there are about 360,000 described), it is seen that even with these hundreds of new generic names a beginning only in paleo entomology has been made. Fossil insects, as a rule, are but accidentally entombed and the fact that nearly every wing reveals a new species and often a new genus indicates how little of the myriads of insects that lived at any given time is preserved; the present work treats of all extinct Hexapoda. Carboniferous.—There are no fossil insects known previous to the Coal Measures or Pennsylvanian, the so-called insects of the Silurian having proved to belong to a trilobite or are lusus nature. Those of the New Brunswick Little River group, sup- posed to be of Devonian age, are here referred to the Upper Pottsville (Pennsylvauian), a conclusion in harmony with the paleobotanical results of Mr. David White. In the Upper Carboniferous the first undoubted insects appear both in North America and western Europe. The climate is assumed to have then been mild and damp, and free from frost into the arctic regions. The insect-bearing beds were probably the deposits of swamps and forest moors, and from them are here recorded 546 good species and 267-poor ones. The former are arranged in 252 genera, and while the greater number of these have but from one to four species, yet there are a few having a goodly number, as Phyloblatta with 89; Sysciophlebia, 45 ; Orthomylacris, 11; Mylacridium, 16, and Poroblattina, 19. Of ee + o Geology and Mineralogy. 313 the clearly ascertained species 220 are restricted to North America, the remainder to Europe. Not a single species seems to be common to two localities and of the 252 good genera only 11 are common to America and Europe, all belonging to the order Blattoidea. These are: Aphthoroblatiina, Asemoblatta, Blattinopsis, Dictyomylacris, Humorphoblatta, Olethroblatia, . Phyloblatta, Poroblattina, Syscioblatta, Sysciophlebia, and Nenoblatta. In another publication, however, the author re- marks: “In such groups as first exist in single individuals, no sort of conclusion as to their actual horizontal distribution can be obviously drawn, and it consequently follows that there is a striking agreement in the Paleozoic fauna in both continents,” America and Europe. The ordinal evolution is as follows: The stem group of all winged insects, Palaeodictyoptera, has 116 species. In these the structure was of the simplest order, and they were apparently without adaptation to the definite modes of life which we are accustomed to see in nearly all existing insects. Out of these were evolved all the higher orders of Hexapoda. The other more prominent orders are: Protorthoptera (primitive Orthop- tera, or locusts), with 43 good species ; Protoblattoidea (ancestors of cockroaches and mantids), with 39; Blattoidea (cockroaches), with 320; Protodonata (primitive Odonata, or dragon-flies), with 6, and Megasecoptera (ancestral panorpatids, or scorpion-flies), with 18 species. But a single one of the Paleozoic orders,— Blattoidea, passes into the Mesozoic. Many of these Carbon- iferous insects attained considerable size, and some are known much more than half a meter across the wings. Permian.—The climate at the beginning of the Permian is thought to have been like that of the Carboniferous ; later it changed remarkably, for in the Southern Hemisphere there was then an extended glacial period across South America, Australia, South Africa, and even to India. It also exerted its influence upon the Northern Hemisphere, where the mild, damp Carboni- ferous conditions passed at least locally into a desert climate. Our knowledge of the Permian insects is restricted to the Upper Permian deposits of Russia and to the Lower Permian of North America and Europe. The Fairplay, Colorado, beds, . which Scudder was disposed to regard as of Triassic age, the present author regards as belonging to the Permian, as there is nothing which in the least points to Triassic development. The Permian insects here described number 112 good species in 45 genera, besides 36 poor ones. Nearly all the genera are represented by one or two species, but Phyloblatta has 44 and Sysciophlebia has 13 species. Of Carboniferous genera continued into the Permian there are Phyloblatta, Sysciophlebia, Dicla- doblatta, Poroblattina, and Nearoblatta. Ot these the first two genera are also common to North America and Europe. In the Permian there are none of the most primitive insects, the Palaeodictyoptera, while the order Protorthoptera is repre- 314 Scientific Intelligence. sented by a single form, and the Protoblattoidea by two. On the other hand, Blattoidea are well represented by 98 species. In the higher or true Permian of Russia the first Plecoptera, or May-flies, are found, in 4 species, and the first transitional forms to the hemipteroids in the Protohemiptera and Palaeohemiptera. Triassic.—The number of good species is 21 in 20 genera. Nineteen of these relate to the cover wings of Coleoptera and 2 are Neuroptera. This marked paucity of insects in the Triassic is explained on the ground that the climate was then arid and consequently there was a scarcity of insect life. These fossils occur in Germany, southern Sweden, Queensland, and Massachusetts. The American Mormolucoides articulatus, the author states, is. certainly a water-inhabiting larva. Its insect nature is indicated by the division of the body into three parts,—head, thorax with 3 segments, and abdomen with 9 segments. The postabdomen is. terminated by short cerci. It is more probable that this form is the larva of a megalopteron- or neuropteron-like insect. Lias.—Of good species there are 266 in 145 genera. In addi- tion there are 149 poor species. Nearly all these are dwarf forms found chiefly in Switzerland, Mecklenburg, and England. There are as yet no butterflies and but few Hymenoptera, while the caddice-flies and scorpion-flies were abundantly represented. There were also dragon-flies, bugs, small cicadas, grasshoppers, locusts, and cockroaches. C. S. 7. Geology and Coal Resources of the Cape Lisburne Region, Alaska ; by Antuur J. Cottier. Bull. No. 278, U.S. Geol. Surv., 1906, 54 pp., 9 pls.—This bulletin is especially interesting in establishing the fact that workable coals of Lower Carbonifer- ous (Mississippian) and of Upper Jurassic age occur in this far northern region. The Paleozoic coals are noncoking semibitumin- ous in beds up to four feet of clean coal. These are at the bottom of the section, and the plants indicate a Lower Mississippian age “slightly younger than the Ursa flora.” Above is a great series. of marine beds with many corals, also indicating Mississippian age. The Upper Jurassic section is very thick, not less than. 15,000 feet, in which the author notes 39 coal beds varying in _thickness from a few inches to 30 feet. The total thickness of all the coals is 137 feet. They are of low grade, but better than average lignite, and are noncoking. The flora indicates Upper Jurassic age “not younger than the Wealden.” C..S. 8. Die Trochilisken ; von A. Karpinsky. Mem. Comité Géol. St. Petersbourg, new ser., liv. 27, 1906, 166 pp., 3 pls.— Under this little-known term, first used by Pander, are described and discussed with great care those minute Devonian fossils known in America as Calcisphera, Mecellerina, and in part as Saccamina. Their nature is as uncertain as their names, since authors have regarded them as calcareous alge, Foraminifera, and the eggs of armored fishes. All occur in marine or brackish- water deposits. Karpinsky recognizes two genera,—Sycidium (3 Geology and Mineralogy. 315 species) restricted to Europe, and Zrochiliscus (syn. Calcisphera in part and Meellerina), with 3 or more species, common to Russia and North America. “Compared with known organic remains, the Trochilisks agree best with the Characez and especially with the calcareous cover- ing of the spore buds (oogonia). They can not, however, be united with any living or extinct genus of Characeze, nor can they be regarded as ancestral to living forms, but appear to represent an extinct side branch of that old and peculiar group of plants the Charophyta; this completely isolated type of plants was differ- entiated not later than Jurassic time” (pp. 87, 88). C. S. 9. Eehinoderma,; by Miss M. Grant. Zool. Record, xi, 1905, January, 1907, 92 pp.—This very useful record of the Kchinoderma literature prepared in previous years by Dr. Bather is here continued by Miss Grant. As the Zoological Record is to be amalgamated with the International Catalogue, future lists will be looked for in the last-named publication. The Echinoderma literature here catalogued embraces 381 papers. C. S. 10. Revision der Ostbaltischen Silurischen Trilobiten ; von FR. Scumipt. Mem. de l’Acad. Imp. Sci. de St. Petersburg, viii ser., Vol. XIX, No. 10, November, 1906, 62 pp., 8 pls.—This part closes Akademiker Schmidt’s extensive revision of the Kast-Baltic trilobites. The next and final number will give a summary of the results attained, including corrections and additions. It will appear toward the close of 1907. Here are described Megalaspis and its 24 forms occurring in the lower half of the Ordovician, 9 of which also occur in Sweden or Norway. A pygidium of J. heros is figured, having a length of 64 inches, indicating an animal about 18 inches long. The illustrations are good photographs of the specimens. C. 8. 11. A Contribution to the Genus Fusulina, with Notes on a Fusulina-Limestone from Korea; by H. Yasr. Jour. Coll. Sci., Imperial Univ., Tokyo, Japan, 1906, 36 pp., 3 pls.—This article in English treats of Fusulina, Schwagerina, Doliolina, and WNeoschwagerina (new). Sumatrina Volz is regarded as a synonym of the last-named genus, here defined as new. If this is true, the matter will then stand the other way around, because of the law of priority. Z7iticites Girty is regarded as a probable synonym of Fusulina. There is also given a review of the known species of these genera, with their distribution for all countries, On 12. Palaeontologia Universalis, Fasc. II, ser. ii, May 1906.— This part contains sheets numbered 95-111, and gives the original description and figures, with additional remarks and illustrations by authors, of 17 species of Mollusca. There is also a complete index to the first one hundred sheets of this publication. CES: 13. The Primary Septa of the Rugosa; by J. E. DurnrprEn, and Zhe Primary Septal Plan of the Rugosa; by R. G. CarruTHers. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Sept. and Nov., 1906, pp. 316 Scientific Intelligence. 226-242, 306-363.—In this and other publications, Duerden main- tains that the Paleozoic corals begin their calcareous structures with six primary septa, asin modern corals. The opinion generally held is that ancient corals begin with four primary septa, there- fore the name Tetracoralla. This view of tetramerism has lately been reasserted by Gordon in this Journal (Feb., 1906). Carru- thers shows that “the primary septal plan of these Rugose corals is hexamerous” and “that Gordon’s careful observations are in no way inconsistent with the presence of a primary hexamerous plan in the Rugosa, but, on the contrary, support that view.” Gordon maintains that in the Ordovician Streptelasma there are four primary septa, and that the presence of six in the Carboniferous Lophophyllum is due to accelerated development having pushed two secondary septa into the nepionic or brephic stage of growth. Carruthers shows that in Ordovician Streptelasma and Carbonifer- ous Cyathaxonia, Lophophyllum, and Zaphrentis, they first develop a single septum, thus dividing the corallum into two halves ; this he calls stage I. In stage II, these same corals develop two new septa, ‘one on each side of the ‘main’ end of the axial septum” and ‘eventually form the ‘alar’ primary septa of Kunth.” This stage then has four septa, to which in stage III is added quickly another pair at “the opposite or ‘counter’ end of the axial septum,” when the individuals may be said to have attained final brephic growth. The discussion is of the greatest importance and out of it wili come a final classification of the Anthozoa. Cc. 8. 14. La Faune Marine du Trias Supérieur de Zacatecas ; par Cartos BurckuarptT. Boletin 21, Inst. Geol. de Mexico, 1905, 44 pp., 8 pls.—Until this bulletin appeared last summer, during the meetings of the Tenth International Congress, no marine Triassic strata were known in Mexico. Previously the record indicated terrestrial deposits with a flora of uppermost Triassic (Rhaetic) age. In the work under review are described 5 species of ammonites (Sirenites, Protrachyceras, Clionites, and Anato- mites) and 21 species of Palaeoneilo. Elsewhere Frech has described a new genus, Cassianella, of this fauna. On the basis of the ammonites, the author, James Perrin Smith, and Ed. von Mojsisovics have correlated the fauna of Zacatecas with the Upper Triassic (Carnian) of California and the Julian stage of the Austrian Alps. Strenites smithi is closely related to S. lawsoni of California, while the genera Clionites and Anatomites have allied species in the same state. The forms of Palaeonetlo remind one of the American Devonian and basal Mississippian, but no particular importance can be ascribed to .these bivalves, because the same genus is also reported in the Alpine Triassic and in the Upper Jurassic of Russia. The other Paleozoic reminder, one of the Aviculidae described by Frech as Casstanella, also occurs in the region about San Cassiano of the Tyrolese Alps This Mexican marine Upper Triassic invasion is a shallow-water Geology and Mineralogy. 317 invasion of short duration, for during Lower and Middle Jurassic times Mexico appears to have been land. This fact may explain the very isolated occurrence of the Triassic fauna as a preserved remnant of a wide removal during the land interval. Over it repose marine strata of Upper Jurassic age, and from that time to the close of the Mesozoic, Mexico was apparently continuously beneath the sea. @2)8: 15. La Fawne Jurassique de Mazapil; par CarLos Burcx- HARDT. SBoletin 23, Inst. Geol. de Mexico, 1906, 192 pp., 43 pls. —This work should be studied in connection with Géologie de la Sierra del Mazapil et Santa Rosa; by Cartos BurRcKHARDT. Guide Géol. au Mexique, Tenth Internat. Geol. Congress, 1906, pt. XXV1. In this handsome and welcome quarto volume are described 85 (45 new) species of ammonites in 16 genera (Jdocerus new). Of these, 7 are definitely identified with central European forms ( Opellia flexuosa costata, Aspidoceras contemporaneum, A. bispi- nosum, Idoceras laxevolutum, LI. balderum, Haploceras filiar, Phylloceras apenninicum), 1 with the boreal fauna of Russia (Perisphinctes nikitini), 2 with India (at Spiti, Aspidoceras arellanoides, Haploceras ordonezi), and 1 in the Cordilleras of Argentina (Aspidoceras cyclotum). There are likewise 14 species more or less closely related to forms from other regions. Of these, 11 go with central European regions and 3 with Argentina. The Upper Jurassic strata of the Santa Rosa and Caja Moun- tains about Mazapil in the State of Zacatecas are well developed. These are divided into two main groups correlated with the Kimmeridgian and Portlandian of Europe. The former is again divided into four zones,—shales with Waagenia, zone of Haplo- ceras filiar, zone of Aucella pallasi mexicana, and basal zone of ZIdoceras, while the Portlandian is divisible into three zones,— whitish calcareous shales with Hoplites of the group Calisto, gray phosphatic limestones, and red phosphatic limestones with Aspidoceras cyclotum and Perisphinctes cfr. danubiensis. The thickness of these strata appears not to exceed 260 feet. The general aspect of the ammonites here described reminds one greatly of those of central Europe. This is seen not only in the species common to the regions on both sides of the Atlantic, but also in the identical succession of the faunas. In comparing the formations of Mazapil with those of southeastern France, the author states : “The analogy of the Mexican series with that of Europe is striking. In both cases, above the Lower Kimme- ridgian there are deposits with a great development of Haploce- ras filiar and Oppelia of the group of O. flexuosa. In the two regions the remarkable genus Waagenia also appears in the higher beds, and these in turn are overlaid, in Mexico as well as in France, by the zone with Oppelia lithographica and by the Lower Portlandian” (178). The fact that the Mazapil ammo- nites also have affinities with those of the Cordilleras of Argen- tina is not thought to indicate a direct communication between this area and Mexico. Cus: 318 Scientific Intelligence. 16. Lu FKuuna de Moluscos del Senoniano de Cardenas, San Luis Potosi; por Emirio Boss. Boletin 24, Inst. Geol. de Mexico, 1906, 95 pp., 18 pls.—This quarto volume should be studied in connection with the pamphlet De San Luis Potosi a Tampico; by Emilio Bose. Guide Géol. au Mexique, Tenth Internat, Geol. Congress, 1906, pt. xxx. In this work are described the Mollusca of the Cardenas series (Lower Senonian) of the Upper Cretaceous found near the edge of the Mexican plateau between Cardenas and Las Canoas, on the railroad from San Luis Potosi to Tampico. Of species there are 41 (27 new); Plesioptygmatis is the only new subgenus. The Cardenas limestone series reposes on other limestones with Rudistes, referred to the Turonian or middle Cretaceous portion of the Upper Cretaceous. It has an approximate thickness of 1800 feet and is divisible into three formations yielding the fol- lowing fossils: Beginning at the base are the Gryphaea beds with Gryphaea vesicularis, Exogyra costata, and Ostrea agui- lerae. ‘These are followed by the Orbitoides limestones having also Ostrea cfr. goldfussi, Inoceramus cfr. cripsii, and corals. The upper member is the Coralliochama limestone with C. boehmi, Radiolites austinensis, Biradiolites (3 species), Kxogyra costata, Ostrea glabra and 3 other species, Anomia argentaria, A, gryphor hynchus Lima (2 species), and gastropods of the genera Natica (1 species), Zurritella (3), Nerinea (1), Cerithium (4), Actaeonella (10), and banks of corals. “Our fauna is apparently isolated among the Cretaceous deposits of America. As American elements we do not find more than Jnoceramus cfr. simpsoni, Anomia argentaria, A. gryphorhynchus, Ostrea glabra, Exogyra costata and the genus Coralliochama.” “From the foregoing we see that probably the fauna of the lower division of the Blue Mountain Series [Jamaica| represents one similar to ours; but the necessary paleontological proofs are wanting ; only a careful study of the fauna can solve the prob- lem. “Our fauna is in intimate relation with those of Europe and especially with those having the mediterranean facies [as those of Gosau], but to it have been added some types of the fauna of the North. As already stated, however, our faunas are not always identical with those of Europe, but generally they are somewhat distinct in character ; there must have been a relatively rapid migration from Europe to America, and as all our species lived near the coast this migration should have been effected largely by means of a continent or a series of islands instead of the present Atlantic ; perhaps a study of the fauna of Jamaica will demonstrate later that that place was one of the stations on the road over which the animals came.” “In Europe the Gosau strata represent a mediterranean facies and are notably distinguished in their paleontological character from the Senonian of the North of Europe. In America we Geology and Mineralogy. 319 observe a surprising analogous circumstance. We have known for some time that the Cenomanian strata of Mexico and Texas represent a mediterranean facies, but the Senonian also represents an analogous facies in Mexico (and Jamaica ?). In northern United States, that is to say, in New Jersey, is found, according to Credner, a facies of the Senonian which corresponds closely with that of the northern part of Europe; on the.other hand, the fauna described represents in this work a facies which corre- sponds fairly well with that of Gosau, in the way that the facies of the Senonian of northern America corresponds with that of the north of Europe.” Cus: 17. An almost complete specimen of Strenuella strenua (Bill- ings) ; addendum by H. W. Suimer (communicated).—A peculiar oversight prevented the author of the article in the March num- . ber (p. 199) from seeing Shaler and Foerste’s figures of this spe- cies under the name of Ptychoparia mucronatus 8. and F. in Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., xvi, pl. 2. They here give four figures,— a thorax of 13 segments minus the pygidium, attached to a par- tial, unidentifiable cephalon, two cephala without free cheeks, and a free cheek. The thorax shows a median row of mucronate tubercies. The free cheek figured as belonging to this species has a much longer genal spine than the present specimen. The latter (xxili, p. 200), which shows very closely the relationship of the different parts, has no tubercles upon the first and last seg- ments, which alone preserve this portion unbroken. The relation of the plural to the axial segments is similar in each. It thus appears that S. strenwa is quite variable in the shape of the free cheeks and in the ornamentation of the axis. 18. Black Sands of the Pacific Slope in 1905 ; by Davin T. Day and R. H. Ricuarps. Pp. 84. Advance chapter from Mineral Resources of the United States for 1905. The call sent out in March, 1905, by the U. 8. Geological Survey to placer miners at different points in this country, alluded to in an earlier number of this Journal (xx, 410), has now resulted in the bring- ing together of a large amount of material, the discussion of which is given very thoroughly in this pamphlet. The exami- nation of the samples received has shown that the following min- erals, in the order named, are most commonly found in these sands: Magnetite, gold, ilmenite, garnet, zircon, hematite, chrom- ite, platinum, iridosmium, mercury, amalgam, olivine, and iron silicates, pyrite, monazite, copper, cinnabar, cassiterite, and corun- dum. Other heavy minerals are only exceptionally found. With respect to the occurrence of platinum, information with regard to which was the primary object of the undertaking, the following statement is made; “ Platinum was found in 120 local- ities. The investigation showed that the largest field of plati- num, and the most profitable field for commercial exploitation, is comprised in Coos, Jackson, Curry, and Josephine counties, Oregon, and in Del Norte, Siskiyou, Humboldt, and Trinity coun- ties, California. Outside of this region platinum is also found to 320 Scientific Intelligence. a notable extent in Plumas and Butte counties, Cal., and, although the proportion of platinum per cubic yard of oray el is not so great, the large dredging operations in Butte County make this an important “locality. Platinum was also found occasionally on the Snake and the Columbia rivers and on various beaches of the Washington coast. It was found in place in chromite near Ana- cortes, Wash., as well as at the previously known locality, the rambler mine, in Albany County, Wyoming.” It has also been found that magnetite is a prominent constit- uent of the black sands of the Pacific slope, constituting a greater supply of useful iron ore than that from any other available source in that region. This magnetite usually contains from 5 to 10 per cent of titanium, but this offered no obstacle to the pro- duction of high-grade cast iron in the electric furnace, and in a modification of this electric furnace the cast iron could even be decarburized to a very soft iron of high quality. By the use of careful concentration methods it has further proved possible to separate gold and platinum from the sands with comparative ease, while a partial separation of various other minerals can be made at the same time, so as to render available for the market at low cost: monazite, zircon, ilmenite, chromite, garnet, and cassiterite. This pamphlet gives a detailed statement in regard to the samples from the many different local- ities represented, and also an account of the various methods by which they have been examined. 19. Mineralogia Groenlandica ; af O. B. Boceitp. Saertryk af Meddelelser om Grénland, xxxii. Pp. xix, 625, with one colored map, and 117 figures. Copenhagen, 1905 ( Bianco Luno).—Greenland has proved to be a most interesting source of minerals from the time of the investigations of Giesecke, one hundred years ago (1806-1813), to the present. Recent investi- gations, particularly those with which the names of Steenstrup, Johnstrup, Flink, Ussing, and of the author of the present work are closely connected, have served to bring to light a wonderful series of new species and interesting occurrences, especially on the southwest coast at Kangerdluarsuk and Narsarsuk, near Julian- ehaab. The cryolite locality at Ivigtut and the region about Disco, with its remarkable supply of telluric iron, have also furnished much that is new and important. Dr. Boggild has now brought together all the information that has been developed in regard to these and other localities, and has presented it in a concise and systematic form in the present handbook. It will serve, therefore, as a very convenient source of information in regard to some of the very interesting mineral occurrences that are known. The species are arranged after Groth’s tables, and the occurrences of each of the localities are given with admirable fullness. The closing chapters of the work are devoted to a geographical list of all the Greenland localities, followed by an alphabetical index. There is also a map, which is important for those who are not minutely acquainted with the geography of the country. The preface, by N. V. Ussing, is in English, as is also the short summary of contents with which the work closes. Miscellaneous Intelligence. Co bo — UII. MisceLLANEous SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. 1. British Museum Publications.— The following important works have recently been received : The History of the Collections contained in the Natural His- tory Departments of the British Museum. Vol, IL. Separate Historical Accounts of the Several Collections included in the Department of Zoology. Pp. 782.—This history of the zoolog- ical collections of the British Museum contains much that is of more than a local interest. There are eleven chapters, prepared by separate authors. Of these that by RK. Bowlder Sharpe on the Birds is much the longest (pp. 79-516), for this department was one to which attention was given very early. Unfortunately many of the older specimens known to have been in the Museum no longer survive. Catalogue of the Madreporian Corals in the British Museum (Natural History). Volume VI. The Family Poritide. -II. The Genus Porites. Part II. Porites of the Atlantic and West Indies, with the European Fossil Forms. The Genus Goniopora, a Sup- plement to Volume IV. By Henry M. Bernarp. Pp. vi, 173, with 17 plates.—The fifth volume of this work (see v. xxi, 474) was given to the Poritids of the Indo-Pacific region. The present volume goes on with the account of the genus embrac- ing the forms so far known living in the North and South Atlan- tic, in the West Indies and the Gulf of Mexico, also fossil forms from the Paris and Mediterranean Basins. A Synonymic Catalogue of Orthoptera; by W. F. Krrpy. Volume If. Orthoptera Saltatoria. Part I, Achetidez et Phas- gonuride. Pp. vill, 562.—The first volume of Dr. Kirby’s Cata- logue of the Orthoptera was issued in 1904 (see v. xix, 332). The present volume includes the Crickets and Long-horned Grasshoppers ; the Locustide, or the Short-horned Grasshoppers, will form the third and concluding volume. Catalogue of the Lepidoptera Phalene in the British Museum. Volume VI. Catalogue of the Noctuidee in the Collection of the British Museum ; by Sir Grorce F. Hampson. Pp. xiv, 532. Plates xevi—-evil.—This sixth volume of the Catalogue of Moths (see v. xix, 472) is devoted to the Cucullianz, the third of the fifteen subfamilies; 692 species belonging to 111 genera are described. 2. Report of the Surveyor to the Governor of the Territory of Hawaii for the Highteen Months ending December 31, 1906.— This report of the Surveyor, Mr. Walter E. Wall, to Governor G. R. Carter, closes with the following paragraph, emphasizing the need of a geological survey to which the general Government should well give liberal support. ** As to the survey needs of the Territory which this office has not the force to meet, a geological survey which would include a study of the water resources of the country appears most 322 Scientifie Intelligence. important, The richest soils of the country are in general the driest ones, and while private enterprise has done and is doing much to develop water resources and has reduced to cultivation much of this dry land, a more comprehensive study of the matter is needed. Waters are still running to waste that are needed for power and irrigation; tunnelling has developed considerable water and might develop much more with the help of better geo- logical information ; the conservation of storm waters is still in its infancy. While the Survey Department is not equipped for the study of this matter, it is in a position to codperate with and assist any survey, Federal or Territorial, that might be intrusted with this important work.” 3. The Bureau of Science, Manila.—The Fifth Annual Report by Dr. Paut C. Freer of the Philippine Bureau of Science for the year ending August 1, 1906, has recently been issued. It will be remembered (see xxi, 336) that the Bureau in its pres- ent form has resulted from the merging of the Bureau of Mines with that of Government Laboratories, which took place at the close of 1905. This arrangement gives a wide scope to the work done by the Department, and a summary of this is given in the present paper. In its systematic work the Bureau aims to inves- tigate the distribution and nature of the fauna and flora, and also the geologic and petrographic resources of the islands. There are, further, divisions of biology, of chemistry, and of serums and prophylactics, in all of which much useful work has been done. The division of Mines is immediately engaged in the investi- gation of the coal areas, which promise in the future to satisfy the local needs of the islands and make them independent of the present Japanese supply. The occurrence of asbestus deposits of considerable magnitude is also alluded to. The Philippine Journal of Science has now completed its first year, more than fulfilling the promises made at its start. In consequence of the widely diverse character of the papers included, the advisa- bility is suggested of publishing in three independent sections, one for biological work connected with tropical diseases, a second for general scientific papers, and a third for systematic botany and botanical subjects. 4. Bulletin of the Imperial Earthquake Investigation Com- mittee. Volume I, No. 1. Pp. 51, with 15 plates. Tokyo, 1907. —The Japanese Earthquake Investigation Committee has re- cently inaugurated the publication of a Bulletin which is to serve as a quick method of presenting short notes and preliminary re- ports on subjects which should be given to the public without delay. The present number, the first of the series, contains six papers by Dr. F. Omori. One of these deals with the time of the occurrence at the origin of a distant earthquake, another with the methods of calculating the velocity of propagation of earth- quakes, and two others are given to the San Francisco earthquake of April, 1906; the first discussing its cause, and the second the seismographic observations. Miscellaneous Intelligence. 323 The Commission also continues the publications which are de- voted to papers of greater length and detail. Recent issues include No. 22 B, Art. 1-3, pp. 1-50, and Art. 4, pp. 51-74. The last named, by K. Honda and T. Terada, is on the Geyser of Atami, Japan, whose periodic eruptions exhibit some remark- able features for which an explanation is offered. 5. Mield, Laboratory, and Library Manual in Physical Geography ; by C. T. Wriaur. Pp. xii and 178, with 46 figures. 1906 (Ginn & Co., New York and Boston).—A distinct feature of this very practicable book by a High School teacher of Phys- ical Geography is its three-fold division into “Library Manual”, “Field and Laboratory Manual” and “Note Book”. The Library Manual includes lists of text-books and reference books and a category of special terms to which the references relate. It is noteworthy that the lists of references as distinct from the lists of texts includes a commendably large proportion of books which emphasize the scenic phases of the subject in addition to the strictly scientific. The scenic aspects of Physical Geography are too often overlooked at the expense of interest and influence in the later relations of the student. The second division of this manual does not rely throughout upon meagre cross-section exercises on topographic maps, the mainstay of more than one recent manual, but includes serious exercises on evaporation and condensation in relation to rainfall, winds and temperature in relation to zones of climate, the appar- ent motions of the sun in relation to latitude, and geologic pro- cesses as factors in the evolution of topographic forms. The ontographic section on plants, animals, and man, although not Physical Geography, is suggestive, and is desirable inasmuch as many students do not continue academic studies beyond the High School and are never otherwise brought into contact with this interesting aspect of Geography. 1eB 6. Symposium on Water Supplies in Mocliears Reprinted from the Eighth Annual Report of the Michigan Academy of Science; by Frank Leverert, Vicror C. VauGuan, G. S. Wiz- LiAMS, M. O. Letentron, and Isrant C. Russert. Pp. 99-136, 1906.—This paper includes a discussion of the geological con- ditions governing the occurrence of the water supply of Michigan, the pollution and purification of municipal supplies and ideals concerning them. Numerous data of general interest to geolo- gists are presented i in compact form in the first section by Frank Leverett, with reference to the chemical composition of the lake waters and the water of str eams, lakes and ponds, as well as that from underground sources. In the last section, ‘Ideals concern- ° ing Municipal Water Supplies”, Prof. Russell presents some interesting theoretical considerations on the whole subject of water supply. Mo 8 Astronomical Observatory of Harvard College, Epwarp C. proce. Director.—Recent publications from the Harvard College Observatory are included in the following list (see v. AMVs ie ” pes os et Poe aR 2b 324 Scientific Intelligence. Annats. Volume LII, Part I. Eclipses of Jupiter’s Satellites 1878-1903. Pp. 148, with 13 tables. Volume LV, Part I. See- ond Catalogue of Variable Stars; by Anniz J. CANNON under the direction of Epwarp C. Pickrerine. Pp. 94, with 6 tables, Cambridge (1907). Volume LX, No. III. Positions of Phoebe 1898-1904. Pp. 85, with 12 tables. ‘Appendix to Annals, LX, No11. P. 1, with 1 table. Crrcutars. No. 119. Observations of Phoebe in August and September, 1906. P. 1, with 1 table. No. 120. Thirty-one New Variable Stars. Pp. 4, with 4 tables. No. 121. Novo Velorum. Pp. 2, with 1 table. No. 122. Thirty-six New Variable Stars. Pp. 4 with 2 tables. No. 123. Photographs of Faint Stars. Pp. 3. No. 124. Stars having Peculiar Spectra. 18 New Variable Stars. Pp. 4, with 1 table. 8. euelications of the Washburn Observatory of the Uni- versity of Wisconsin. —Part 3 of Volume x (pp. 1-106) has recently been issued. It is devoted to observations of double stars made in 1897-1906 by the Director, Grorar C. Comstock. These observations are in continuation of the series published in Part I of the same volume. OBITUARY. M. Henri Morssan, Professor of General Chemistry at the Sorbonne, died at Paris on February 20 at the age of fifty-five years. He had accomplished much brilliant chemical work, notably in the isolation of fluorine and the study of its proper- ties, also in high-temperature researches and the use of the elec- tric furnace. M. Pierre Evckne Marceriin BertHeEenot, the eminent French chemist, died in Paris on March 17 in his eightieth year. Professor WitHetmM von Bezoxp, Director of the Prussian Meteorological Institute, died on February 17 in his seventieth year. M. Marcer Been well known for his work on the geolog ry of the French Alps and the origin of mountains, died on Febru- ary 13. Dr. Nicotas Soxonoy, Geologist in charge of the Russian Comité Géologique, and corresponding member of the Imperial Academy of Sciences at St. Petersburg, died on February 15. Dr. Joun Krom Ress, Professor of Geodesy and Astronomy -in Columbia University and Director of the Observatory since 1881, died on March 9 in his fifty-sixth year. Professor Henry Dayis Topp, of the departments of Physics and Chemistry in the U.S. Naval "Academy. at Annapolis, died on March 8 at the age of sixty-nine years. Mr. W. J. Runes, keeper of archives of the Smithsonian Insti- tution, died at Washington on March 18 in his seventy-sixth year. He had been connected with the Smithsonian since 1852. BIOLOGICAL SUPPLIES. We make a specialty of supplying schools and colleges with biological material for laboratory work and illustrative purposes. SENDS TOR OURY PRICE ‘EIST 52% ey al A ele ible. We have the finest stock of shells on sale in this country. Write for our circulars, and send us your name for new lists as they are issued. WARD’S NATURAL SCIENCE ESTABLISHMENT, (Invertebrate Department) 2 70-104 COLLEGE AVE., : ROCHESTER, N. Y. Warns Natura Science EstaBLisHMENT A Supply-House for Scientific Material. Founded 1862. Stadt Incorporated 1890. DEPARTMENTS: Geology, including Phenomenal and Physiographic. Mineralogy, including also Rocks, Meteorites, etc. ‘Palaeontology. Archaeology and Ethnology. Invertebrates, including Biology, Conchology, ete. Zoology, including Osteology and Taxidermy... Human Anatomy, including Craniology, Odontology, ete. Models, Plaster Casts and Wall-Charts in all departments. Circulars in any department free on request; address Ward's Natural Science Establishment, 76-104 College Ave., Rochester, New York, U.S. A. C:.0' NoPE NDS. Page Art. X XIII.—Topographie Features Formed at the Time of Earthquakes and the Origin of Mounds in the Gulf Plain;sby- WiM.cbay HLOBES a eee ane 245 XXIV.—Contributions to the Geology of New Hampshire, No. III. On Red Hill, Moultonboro; by L. V. Pirsson and: HS. WASHINGTON .20 0520.5) 23 ae Se ee ee XXV.—Developmental Stages in Streptelasma rectum Hall ; by 2. C. BROWN = 2 oie See Ae ee 277 XXVI.—A New Fly (Fam. Mycetophilide) from the Green River, Beds; by T.-D. A. CockhRErn=223 2. eae 285 XXVII.—Marignacite, a New Variety of Pyrochlore from Wausau, Wisconsin; by S. Werpman and V. LENHER 287 XXVIII.—Arsenate Process for the Separation of Magne- sium and the Alkalies; by P. E. Brownine and W. A. DROS Hse oe oe Se ee ee oe 293 X XIX.—Chemical Composition of Molybdic Ocher; by W. MS CHALLERS 552 2 S22 Bek ee ee eR aaa et ee 297 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. Chemistry and Physics—Preparation of Pure Helium, JacquERop and Perrot: Calcium as an Absorbent of Gases, Soppy, 304.—Method for Determining Halogens in Organic Compounds, E. CHaBuay: Hydrates in Aqueous Solution, H. C. Jonss, 305.—Entwicklungsgeschichte der Chemie, A. LaDENBURG, 306. Geology and Mineralogy—Geological Survey of Canada, 306.—Cruise of the Neptune, A. P. Low, 307.— Geological Survey of Brazil: Geological Com- mission, Cape of Good Hope, 308.—Seismic Geology, W. H. Hosss, 309.— Die Fossilen Insekten, A. HANDLIRSCH, 311.—Geology of the Cape Lis- burne Region, Alaska, A. J. Couuier: Die Trochilisken, A. KARPINSKY, 314.—EHchinoderma, Miss M. Grant: Die Osthbaltischen Silurischen Trilo- biten, Fr. Scumipt: The Genus Fusulina, H. Yasr: Palaeontologia Universalis: Primary Septa of the Rugosa, J. E. DuERDEN and R. G. CARRUTHERS, 315.—Marine Trias, Zacatecas, C. BurcKHARDT, 316.—La Faune Jurassique de Mazapil, C. BurckHaRptT, 317.—La Fauna de Molus- cos de Cardenas, E. Bésn, 318.—Strenuella strenua, H. W. Simmer: Black Sands of the Pacific Slope in 1905, D. T. Day and R. H. RicHarps, 319.— Mineralogia Groenlandica, O. B. B6eerLp, 320. Misce!laneous Scientific Intelligence—British Museum Publications ; Report of the Surveyor of Hawaii, 321.—The Bureau of Science, Manila, Pau. C. Freer: Bulletin of the Imperial Earthquake Investigation Committee, Tokyo, 322.—Manual in Physical Geography, C. T. Wricut: Symposium on Water Supplies in Michigan: Astronomical Observatory of Harvard College Publications, 323.—Publications of the Washburn Observatory, 324. Obituary—HeEnri Moissan: P. E. M.: BertHELotT: WILHELM VON BEZOLD: MarceLt BERTRAND: NICOLAS SOKOLOV : JOHN K, REES: HenRy D; Topp: W. J. Russ, 324. pe ? Dr. Cyrus Adler, ee Smithsonian Institution. VOL. XXIII. MAY, 1907. Established by BENJAMIN SILLIMAN in 1818. AMERICAN JOURNAL OF SCIENCE. Epitror: EDWARD S. DANA. ASSOCIATE EDITORS Proressorgs GEORGE L. GOODALE, JOHN TROWBRIDGE, W. G. FARLOW anp WM. M. DAVIS, or Camsrincez, Proressorss ADDISON E. VERRILL, HORACE L. WELLS, L. V. PIRSSON anp H. E. GREGORY, or New Haven, Proressor GEORGE F. BARKER, or PHILADELPHIA, Proressor HENRY S. WILLIAMS, or IrHaca, Proressor JOSEPH S. AMES, or Bautimore, Me. J. S. DILLER, oF Wasuineton. FOURTH SERIES VOL. XXIII—[WHOLE NUMBER, CLXXIIL] No. 137—MAY, 1907. ; : r Aven as tet, NEW HAVEN, CONNECH om” a g 1907 3 1907 f ations f Kucrt 5 j “See THE TUTTLE, MOREHOUSE & TAYLOR CO., PRINTERS, 123 TEMPLE STREET. Published monthly. Six dollars per year, in advance. $6.40 to countries in the Postal Union ; $6.25 to Canada. Remittances should be made either by money orders, registered letters, or bank checks (preferably on New York banks). Two Remarkable Well-known Collections. We have secured two collections which, if we mentioned their owners’ names, would cause surprise. The collections. one of Fine Minerals, and the other of Rare Indian Relics, are so choice, that it does not need the names of their collectors to sell them. We were so busy with our mining exhibition that no special mention could be made in this advertisement. They will be on exhibition on and after May first (1st). First come, first served, as we havé no time to get out Circular letters. Particulars on appli- cation. RARE NORWAY MINERALS. Some of the finest of these specimens still remain. A few we name below :— Leucophane crystals in the matrix, finest in the world. Tintaneisen crys- tals in the matrix; Thorite crystals; Gadolinite crystals ; Polycrase, crys- tals in matrix; Broggerite crystals ; Native Silver, group of rare erystals ; Hellandite, new mineral, crystals in matrix; Monazite crystals in the mat- rix, and loose crystals; Rutile crystals; Malakon crystals in the matrix ; Apatite crystals, Xenotime crystals, Huxenite crystal in matrix; Katapleit, erystals in matrix. THE NEW CRYSTALLIZED NATIVE COPPER which was advertised and illustrated in the March No. of this Journal met with the approval and admiration of our foremost Colleges and collectors. Of the 10 specimens which we had, one was sold to the American Museum of Nat- ural History, one to Harvard University, two to Yale University and one to a -prominent collector. As these Colleges have the most extensive and valuable collections in this country, the purchase of these specimens shows their great beauty and rarity. Five specimens yet remain, price $10 to $70. CALIFORNIA MINERALS. I still have left a fine lot from the last consignment, since which another fine shipment has been received. Pink Beryls, in matrix and loose xls, $8 to $100. Blue and white Topaz xls, Romona, $8 to $10. Colemanite, San Bernardino Co., $2 to $5. Cali- fornite, Pala, polished slabs, $1 to $5. Kunzite, Pala, $2 to$75. Cinnabar, in fine brilliant xls, $2 to $5. Tourmaline, Mesa Grande and Pala, xls and matrix specimens, all colors, $50 to $200. HUNGARIAN MINERALS. We still have on hand many fine specimens from this locality. Stibnite xls, and groups, 25c. to $7.50; with Barite, $1.50 to $7.50 ; with Quartz, $1.50 to $3: with Cervantite, $2.50 to $4; with Stibnite on Plumosite, $3 to $9 ; Barite, different colors, $1 to $5. Realgar, $1 to $5. Orpiment, $1.50 to $3. Cinnabar, $2 to $5. Sphalerite and Quartz, 50c. to $4. Bournonite, $1 to $3. Blue Chalcedony pseudomorphs, 50e. to $2. RECONSTRUCTED RUBIES. We have just received another fine lot from Paris, in the raw and cut state. Do not fail to secure one of them. The majority of the Scientists and collec- tors of this country have secured some of them for their collection, or to make up into jewelry. These rubies are as good as the natural ones, if not better ; they have the same hardness, also the same true pigeon-blood color. We have them on hand, from 4 up to 24k. ; they cost $5 per k. Please write for further particulars. : RARE MINERALS. Anatase, Binnenthal, and St. Gothard, Switz., $4 to $10. Slippery Beryls, new find, Brazil, $3 to $6. Huclase, Brazil, and Ural Mts. $5 to $10. Diop- tase, Congo, Africa, $7.50 to $15. Microlite, Va., $2.50 to $7.50. Phosgenite. Eng., $2 to $10. Zeophyllite, Radzein, Bohemia, $5 to $10. Argentite, Ger- many, $12 to$15. Bismuthinite, Eng., $4 to$6. Eulytite, Saxony, $5 to $6. Rare Pseudomorph from Chalcedony, Germany, $38 to $10. Alexandrite, Ural Mts.; crystals cost from $3 to $5, and matrix specimens from $20 to $25. ALBERT H. PETEREIT, 81 & 83 Fulton Street, New York City. THE AMERICAN JOURNAL OF SCIENCE [FOURTH SERIES.| Art. XXX.— Wave-cut Terraces in Keuka Valley, Older than the Recession Stage of Wisconsin Ice ; by FRANK CaARNEY. Tue tracing of the shore phenomena of the high-level lakes which characterized the recession of the Wisconsin ice sheet in New York State, particularly by Fairchild,* is one of the most interesting and fascinating of the contr ibutions to glacial geology Other geologists have performed similar tasks here and al opis in the basin of the Great Lakes.t The post- Wisconsin deformation or tilting of these ancient beaches has attracted the attention of many investigators, Dr. G. K. Gil- bert having given the subject special study.§ So far as = he writer is aware, however, no study has been given to the evidence of static water bodies that presumably *H. L. Fairchild, this Journal, vol. vii, 1899, ‘‘ Glacial Lakes Newberry, Warren and Dana in Central New York”; Bulletin Geological Soc. Am., vol. x, pp. 27-68, 1899; New York State Museum, 20th Rep. of the State Geologist, 1901, ‘‘ The Iroquois Shore Line,” pp. 1106-1112. +G. K. Gilbert, Geol. Survey of Ohio, Rep. of Progress, 1870, pp. 488-90 ; same, vol. i, 1873, pp. 549-555, 559-560, 569-570; Sixth Rep. of the Niagara Commission, pp. 61-84, 1890 ; T. C. Chamberlin, Geol. Survey of Wiscon- sin, vol. ii, pp. 219-229, 1877; J. W. Spencer, Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. i, pp. 70-86, 1899 ; same, vol. ii, pp. 465-476, 1891 ; same, vol. iii, pp 488-492, 1892; A. C. Lawson, Geological and Natural History Surv. of Minnesota, 20th Annual Rep., pp. 230-289, 1891; F. B. Taylor, American Geologist, vol. Xvili, pp. 108-120, 1896; Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. viii, pp. 31-58, 1897; same, vol. ix, pp. 59-84, 1898; Frank Leverett, Monograph XLI, U. S. Geol. Survey, pp. 371-883, 1902. {F. B. Taylor, American Geologist, vol. xili, pp. 316-327, pp. 871-883, 1894 ; J. W. Spencer, this Journal, xli, pp. 201-211, 1891; G. K. Gilbert, Smith- sonian Report, 1890, pp. 236-244. (For more extended bibliographies under HoounOlss see R. S. Tarr, Physical Geog. of New York State, pp. 240-265, 1902.) $G. K. Gilbert, 18th Ann. Rep., U. S. Geol. Surv., 1898, pp. 595-647. Am. Jour. Sct.—FourtxH Series, Von. XXIII, No. 137.—May, 1907. 23 326 F. Carney — Wave-cut Terraces in Keuka Valley existed in this region in front of the advancing Wisconsin ice, nor to those which on @ priori grounds probably existed in connection with both the retreat and advance of preceding me -sheets. There is very slight reason for thinking that the topographic relations of the lowland area north from the Niagara escarpment and the Allegheny plateau section of cen- tral and western New York have changed much since the beginning of the Pleistocene period. Such being the case, then the duration of the pre- Wisconsin ice-dammed Jakes deter- mined the emphasis of the shore phenomena attained. Exist- ing evidence of these old shore lines must, in most cases, stand for sharp initial development, as the vigorous Wisconsin ice with its great amount of debris tended to ‘obliterate such minor details of pre-Wisconsin topography. Landwarping. Geologists early recognized the proof of instability in the altitude “of land areas. It was further recognized that the range of vertical variation is not constant for any great hori- zontal distance. The Great Lakes area has alr eady been shown to be rich in the evidence of such deformations. That the oscillations in the altitude of northeastern North America incident to the late Wisconsin® stage and the suc- ceeding stage of the Hochelagan formation? represent the entire range of such variations during the Pleistocene period is not necessarily true. With marine fossils in clays and sandy clays 540 to 560 feet above present sea-level,t and stream-cut channels at least 630 feet below present sea- level, §$ we have an interval of altitude that probably dates from the earliest ice- epoch or even earlier. The surprising erosion in the Seneca Lake Valley at Watkins, N. Y., reported by Tarr, bas increased significance when connected with the deductions made by Fairchild concerning the ancient valley that leads into the Sodus Bay arm of Lake Ontario.| These deeply buried val- ie far inland, and mature but riverless valleys seaward, sug- est landwarping of like nature, but of far greater antiquity ‘lien that proved in the iny estigations of the Iroquois beach. The Alteration of Shore Lines by Later Ice-Invasions. Partial or complete effacement of the constructional and destructional products of wave and current work in these pre- * DeGeer. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. xxv, pp. 494-477, 1892. +J. B. Woodworth, New York State Museum, Bulletin 84, p. 204, 1905. ¢J. B. Woodworth, ibid., pp. 215-216, 1905; ibid., Bulletin 83, pp. 46-00, 1905. SR. 8. Tarr, American Geologist, vot Xxxiil, p. 277, 1904, Professor Tarr reports a well boring at Watkins, N. Y., 1080 feet deep without reaching rock. | Bulletin Geol. Soc. Am., vol. xvi, pp. 70-71, 1905. F. Carney — Wave-cut Terraces in Keuka Valley. 327 Wisconsin ice-dammed Jakes would be expected. The sweep of an ice-invasion, followed by the destructional work of the slowly falling bodies of water marking the period of ice-reces- sion, would necessarily modity, remove or cover such features as terraces in unconsolidated materials s, as bars, spits, cusps, ete.; whereas the cliffs and terraces in rock would be much less altered. The potency of ice as a factor in erosion does not make an identical appeal to all observers; this is when the sculpturing Fie. 1. View just north of Dunning’s landing. Terraces No. 2 and No. 3 show here. The steepened slope nearest the lake may represent the lowest terrace altered by ice-erosion. of bed-rock is under consideration. So it is possible that all will consent to the general, though not complete, removal by erosion of the constructional products of lake waves and cur- rents. Asa matter of field study, however, it may as well be granted ee these constructional forms have been entirely obliterated ; the differentiation of a bar, or delta belonging to some pre- -Wisconsin lake, from the water-laid portions ‘of “ola- cial drift would require an environment unusually free of other deposits. But we must grant that cliffs and terraces formed in rock would be less affected by glacial erosion. The extent to which these cliffs might be modified by erosion would depend upon their topographic relations. Ice abrasion is more effective on the slopes opposed to ice motion ; it is more effective also along the lower contours of the walls of the 328 L Carney — Wave-cut Terraces in Keuka Valley. valleys trending with the direction of the moving ice. Hence in a series of terraces along a valley wall, the lowest one would be the most modified by glacier i Ce: The beach structures of these former lakes have suffered further from wave work of more recent water bodies, espec- ially of the high-level lakes. The degree of effacement through this agency depends upon the coincidence of the surface- planes of the two bodies of water, or upon their approximation to coincidence; if these planes intersected at a very slight angle, the vertical range of beach agents would at least par- tially overlap for a considerable horizontal distance; if the planes were actually coincident, then the extent of the deface- ment would depend largely upon the relative duration of the two bodies of water. Probably the most effective agency in the obliteration of these shore structures is the deposit of drift made by an ice sheet. Within the belts of thickened drift the burial must be quite complete, the chances of survival being greater with the higher beaches. But at all levels the mantle of ground moraine would in any event partially cover the weaker expres- sions of wave and current work. And even the pronounced cliffs and terraces might be covered in places. Furthermore, normal subaerial weathering has tended to render less obvious such remnants of these old beaches as have survived the factors above described; the least changed would be the forms cut in the mere resistent rocks. ; Forms which Simulate Wave-cut Terraces. 1. Variation in the texture of rocks is manifest in differen- tial weathering ;* sharp slopes simulating cliffs may be thus produced. The resemblance, however, leads to confusion only when the plane of the lake surface coincides with, or is par- allel to and vertically within a few feet of the hard layer or horizon of rock which marks the bench; such a ledge, in the absence of a terrace or other evidence of a beach, cannot be defined finally as a wave-cut cliff. The attitude of a bench resulting from weathering, in reference to the horizon, depends upon the dip and strike of the hard layers; because of this fact, it is not difficult to distinguish the wave-cut cliff, except when the bench is discontinuous, showing only in short seg- ments, a condition not unusual in the coarse sandstone hori- zons because of the horizontal variations in texture. 2. Streams held against a slope, or against a rock salient, by ice, often form a bench somewhat simulating a wave-cut ter- to) race and cliff.t Such benches have been investigated by Fair- *T. L. Watson, N. Y. State Mus., 51st Ann. Rep., vol. i, p. r76, 1897. +G. K, Gilbert, Bulletin Geol. Soc. Am., vol. viii, p. 285, 1897. FF. Carney— Wave-cut Terraces in Keuka Valley. 329 celild,* who shows how the banks of glacial dramage streams differ from the wave-cut cliff.+ The latter is not so localized as the former, nor, in general, so marked in development. Considerable effort was devoted to explaining the terraces in question as the result of differential weathering. The other explanation, ice-stream work, was easily eliminated. The third interpretation discussed in this paper suggested itself after it became apparent that neither of the other two was pertinent. Stratigraphy of Bluff Point.t The succession of formations as given in Bulletin 101 of the N. Y. State Museum (which appeared after the close of the 2 Fic. 2. View of west shore of Penn Yan branch about two miles north of Dunning’s landing. Shows terrace No. 2, and what is apparently the lowest terrace altered probably by ice-erosion. field season during which this stndy of wave-cut terraces was prosecuted), a report prepared by Luther, has been used by the writer in checking up his field notes on the stratigraphy of the area involved ; these notes concern only the lithological aspect of the formations exposed, and since the slopes of Bluff Point are rather sharp, the rock section is almost complete. The compact sandstone layer, referred to by Clarke and Luther, about 125 feet above the base of the Cashaqua as revealed in the Naples region,$ appears near Keuka Park and *N. Y. State Mus., 22d Rep. of State Geologist, pp. 123-180, 1902. + Ibid., 2ist Rep. of State Geologist, pp. r33-r35, 1901. ¢ The Penn Yan Quadrangle will serve as an index map for this region. SN. Y. State Mus., Bulletin 63, p. 31, 1904. 330) F. Carney — Wave-cut Terraces in Keuka Valley. persists southward about one and one-half miles; much of this distance it forms a prominent bench. The next formation that might include beds for registering differential weathering effects is the Hatch shales and flags, which attain a thickness of about 300 feet.* Along the slopes of Bluff Point the sandy layers of this formation, though i irregu- lar in both horizontal and vertical distribution, are conspicu- ous. The greatest thickness of shale noted in anny exposure is about 12 feet ; the base of this horizon is 261 feet (corrected aneroid reading) above lake-level ; it could not be demonstrated that this horizon of shale had much horizontal extension. Likewise the arenaceous layers, the heaviest noted bemy under 2 feet, do not persist horizontally. Next in rising section is the Grimes sandstone, estimated by Luther to be 75 feet thick.+ This formation is above the ter- races in question, so its characteristics do not concern us. It appears, therefore, that there is no factor in the strati- graphy of this area to account for the marked benches. No conditions could be more favorable for registering the differ- ential effects of weathering than the topography formed by this peninsula of rock dividing the two arms of Keuka Lake. Cliffs in Keuka Valley. The succession of post-Wisconsin high level lakes that for- merly occupied this region has been worked out by Fairchild. He designates the overflow channels of the principal stages, eorrelates the deltas, and points out some localities of waye- work.+ The terraces and cliffs which occasion the present paper have been studied in some detail along the flanks of Bluff Point. Terraces apparently of the same age have been noted elsewhere on the walls of Keuka valley, but have not been critically examined. The most obvious reason for not associating these cliffs and terraces with the work already done is the fact that they are overlain and intersected by lines of Wisconsin drift. . This drift is in place, and so far as observed, shows no evidence of wave-work along the planes of the terraces in question ; furthermore, the drift is particularly well developed where it crosses the terraces (fig. 3). These terraces, Neal by numerals, are described in regular order ascending from present lake- level : No. 1. This is not a clear case. For some distance south- *D. D. Luther, N. Y. State Mus., Bulletin 101, p. 47, 1906. t Ibid., p. 49, 1906. ¢{ This Journal, vol. vii, pp. 255-56, 258. 1899; Bulletin Geol. Soc. Am., vol. x, pp. 4-41, 1899. F. Carney — Wave-cut Terraces in Keuka Valley. 331 ward from Keuka Park is a bench and terrace; the relation here is conspicuous enough, but the cliff consists of the hard beds in the Cashaqua already alluded to; it stands about 70 feet above the lake, but descends southward. There is, how- ever, a persistent suggestion of a bench southward to vicinity of Dunning’s, not a continuous shoulder, but a recurrence of over-steepened short slopes forming a plane that ultimately dips beneath the water. That the “intervals of these benches are connected genetically with the more continuous shoulder and terrace to the north is not established. Furthermore, the Fie. 3. Shows a lateral moraine which crosses the middle and highest terraces, and descends to lake level south of Ogoyago. discontinuity southward of the better developed cliff is possi- bly due to the vigorous ice-erosion that altered the lower hori- zons of the walls of these longitudinal valleys. No. 2. This bench and terrace first shows about two and one- half sales north of Dunning’s Landing. It is remarkably con- tinuous (figs. 1, 2), and generally sharp in development. At one locality towards the north, where the eastern slope of Bluff Point blends into the northern slope, the twelve foot horizon of shale, mentioned in preceding section, was noted; here the shale is nearer the top of the bench; not much importance, 332 Ff. Carney — Wave-cut Terraces in Keuka Valley. however, is attached to this vertical position, further than to note that it could have no genetic association with the beneh. The original relationship of terrace and cliff, so far as analysis of a par rticular cross-section is concer ned, has been given much indefiniteness by the agents of degradation ; whereas this rela- tionship is still conspicuous when viewed from a distance. As a distinct feature of the slope, this terrace disappears where the valley wall becomes very steep towards the southern end of the Bluff. The till at the end of the Bluff is made up largely of local material; there is other evidence also of vigor- ous corrasive work by the glacier on the slopes near the end of Bluff Point. No. 3. On the supposition that these terraces represent a body of water that fell successively to the levels indicated, terrace No. 3 is the oldest; but the difference in the degree of weathering attained, or in the sharpness of profile, is not noticeable. This terrace apparently does not extend as far north as No. 2; there is, however, some obscurity in this direc- tion due to its disappearing beneath a wide band of drift. Furthermore its identification is not obvious quite as far south as Ogoyago; so terrace No. 3, in linear extent, falls short of the next lower terrace. S Time Periods of these Cliffs. The measure of post-Pleistocene time has been attempted through several lines of observations: The years involved in the carving of the Niagara and other gorges, in the construc- tion of flood plains, ete., have been estimated relatively to units which do not admit of very accurate deter mination because of the interdependence of degradational activities, a variation in any one of which would give the units quite dif- ferent values. Time-ratios of the continuity of certain phases of geological activities are less 0 bjectionable. From a study of the extent to which erosion has effected the several sheets of till, certain ratios have been deduced using the erosion period of the Late Wisconsin drift as a time-datum. The approximate value of this ratio, which may be subject to alteration through the acquirement of new facts, for the Early Wisconsin is 2; for the Iowan, 4; for the Illinoian, 8 ; for the Kansan, 16.* The drift of the Missis ssipp1 Basin has furnished most of the data concerning these epochs of glaciation. It has already been established that the glacial period i in the East * Chamberlin and Salisbury, Geology. vol. iii, pp. 413-421, 1906. Here is found a succinct presentation of the data on which are based the relative time-periods of the stages of the Glacial Period. F. Carney — Wave-cut Terraces in Keuka Valley. 388 was also composite ;* but a parallelism of epochs has not been worked out. For the purposes of the present paper, however, it is assumed that the Lake Region of New York bad een olaci- ated previous to the Late Wisconsin stage, an hypothesis already used by others;t+ and that the interval or intervals of deglaciation were not shorter than the time-ratios held tenta- tively for the Mississippian area. Illustrations of the wave-cutting work done by some of the Finger Lakes since they were lowered to their present levels are common in geological literature.t One who is acquainted with Seneca Lake will recall the high cliff on the east shore near Watkins, at the head of the lake : and other localities along this lake show quite as marked wave-work. Along the present shore of Keuka Lake the cliffs are not so well devel- oped, but benches of 20 feet or more are not uncommon. If lakes occupied these longitudinal valleys during the interims of glaciation, cliff-cutting could have pr oceeded to such an extent as to make survival in certain localities, at least, probable. Even the shortest inter-glacial period, on ‘the assumption that the stages of the ice age represent oscillations of the ice from continuously i ice-covered dispersion areas, was much longer than post-Wisconsin time, which has sufficed for defining exact shore lines. But terrace No. 3 has an altitude that is impossible if the body of water with which it is geneti- cally connected discharged over any of the present cols leading: into the Susquehanna area; all of the overflow channels reported for the Keuka valley are too low. It may be said, however, that many of these interlocking valleys of the St. Lawrence- “Susquehanna basins, through which the waters of the high-level ice-front lakes spilled, have local characteristics which are not normal to the regular development of valleys ; the conditions here alluded to will be discussed in a separate paper, since the problem constitutes a unit of investigation. Nevertheless there is nothing incompatible between the alti- tude of terrace No. 3 and a land ice-locked basin for a body of water. Deformation of these old Shore Lines. From data supplied by Gilbert, it has been estimated that the post-Wisconsin deformation of the Iroquois shore line in = “i D. Salisbury, nae Surv. of New Jersey, Ann. Rep. for 1893, pp. 73, etc. ; J. B. Woodworth, Y. State Mus., Bulletin 48, pp. 618-670, 1901 ; F, Carney, Journal Gees vol. xv, 1907. +R. S. Tarr, American Geologist, vol. xxxili, p. 284, 1904; H. L. Fair- child, Bulletin Geol. Soe. Am., vol. xvi, p. 66, 1905. +t Natural Hist. of N. Y., Part IV, Geology, p. 192, 1843; R.S. Tarr, Ele- mentary Geology, p. 279, 1898 : LeConte, Elements of Geology, p. 286, 1905. 334 EF. Carney — Wave-cut Terraces in Keuka Valley. Cayuga valley is 2°7 feet per mile.* Fairchild measures the warp of the Dana beach in the Seneca valley at 3 feet per mile.t In reference to the shore phenomena with which we are concerned the latter beach is more pertinent in location, and shehtly less dissimilar in age. The pre-Wisconsin shore lines embody whatever tilting is shown by the post-Wisconsin water-levels, plus any earlier deformation that remained uncor- rected by later land movements. The shore lines shown in figs. 1 and 2 have obviously a greater tilt than has been reported for the post-Wisconsin beaches. No instrumental measurements of the deformation have been made, though an attempt was made by a long series of aneroid readings, checked with a bench aneroid,t to approxi- mate a degree of correctness ; but the line of contact between cliff and terrace is so obscured by products of weathering aud glacial drift that it is impos ssible to get any results from this method, although the line is distinet enough when viewed from a distance. It is apparent to the eye that the highest, and presumably the oldest, terrace is the most warped. The existence of these waye-cut cliffs, older than the Late Wisconsin stage, and their present attitude in reference to the horizon, snegest a relation of factors that have a bearing on a phase in the drainage history of the St. Lawrence- Susquehanna divide region, and on the question of ice-erosion in the Finger Lake valleys. A reference to the drainage problem was made under the preceding section. The connection with the ice- erosion problem, briefly stated, is this: These old cliffs imply an ice-dammed lake that was not ephemeral ; the topography admits such a lake only when the ice-front is nearby. With such a position for the ice west of the Seneca valley, both it and the Cayuga valley were occupied by lobes from the main body of ice ‘Such lobes, it has been suggested,§ would be competent to accomplish erosion; the non-existence of such lobes has been hypothecated on the absence of moraine belts, hence it is claimed that there was no erosion. But since the stage of glaciation concerned antedated the Late Wisconsin which extended into Pennsylvania, the normal imbrication arrangement of drift sheets may explain the absence of the recessional moraine correlating with the ice-halt that was con- temporaneous with the cliff-cutting and the over-steepening of *R.S. Tarr, Journal Geology, vol. xii, pp. 79-80, 1904. + Bulletin Geol. Soc. Am., vol. x, p. 68, 1899. tIn the Journal of Geology, vol. xiv, 1907, the writer explains this method of working aneroids in pairs. Sel, ib Fairchild, Ice Erosion Theory a Fallacy, Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. xvi, p. 58. | Ibid., pp. 59-60. FF. Carney— Wave-cut Terraces in Keuka Valley. 335 the lower contours in the Seneca and Cayuga valleys by ice- erosion. Summary. The cliffs described in this paper are the product of wave- work since they show no connection with such variation in stratigraphical structure as often produce benches, and since it has been found impossible to account for them in any other manner ; furthermore, the presence of a cliff-cutting body of water is attested indirectly by other phases in the drainage and ice-erosion history of the region. That these shore lines are older than the recession stage of the Wisconsin (Late) ice sheet, follows from their being overlain by intersecting bands of Wisconsin drift. F 336 FE. Carney—Form of Outwash Drift. Art. XXXI—A Form of Outwash Drift; by Frank CARNEY. Tue triangular area indicated in fig. 1 encloses a formation of outwash drift in an association undescribed in the literature so far as the writer is aware. This drift forms a terrace in the gradual slope to the north, the decline being about 500 feet in three and one-half miles. Approaching the area along the highway from Blutf Point postoftice (v. Penn Yan Quadrangle, N.Y .), one notes the closeness of rock to the surface and the general absence of glacial drift. The slope, though gradual, is presumably the resultant of stream work, being the south wall of an old valley, and of ice-corrasion; but the “marked ch range as one nears this triangle is due to an unusual accumulation of drift which is somewhat interlobate in origin; but the further differences between this and the typical outwash plain are so marked as to warrant a more definite description, and possibly a distinct designation. Topography of the Region. The drift under consideration lies on the north slope of Hall’s peninsula,* designated on the Penn Yan quadrangle as Bluff Point, which attains an elevation of 700 feet above lake level. A nine-mile cross section, having a general east-west direction through the highest part of Bluff Point, resembles the letter ““ W”, the inner legs being steepest but symmetrical to a vertical axis, while the left or west of the outer legs is the longer and has a gentler slope. The general relation of the two arms of Lake Keuka is strikingly suggestive of an origin- ally south-flowing stream, the valley of w hich has been blocked by a great mass of glacial drift southwest of Hammondsport, a village at the southern end of this body of water, thus giving rise to the lake, which now has an outlet past Penn Yan into the Seneca valley. Obviously this cross-section, W-lke in shape, is made at the junction of the old south- flowing river and a tributary. The general topography ot the Finger Lake region, so fre- quently “alluded to in geological articles, is a sy stematic assem- blage of trough-like valleys opening into the Ontario lowland. Ter esumably the bed rock of these troughs slopes northward, as do also the divides between them. The Penn Yan quadrangle extends almost to the edge of this Ontario lowland. The Drumlin region reaches its maximum southern extension north *James Hall, Geology of the Fourth District, Natural History of N. Y., Part IV, p. 459, 1843. DodT F.. Carney—Florm of Outwash Drift. of the Penn Yan sheet, and a few miles southwest of Geneva, which lies within the flaring walls of the Seneca valley. Ice-Front and Drift as Affected by Topography. The Ontario lobe, as the ice which occupied this lowland is designated, maintained along its sonthern margin, during the a x Re \ STeAu Boy, NG): et tt) TRS pk Yar Pe SE pe Fic. 1. A part of the Penn Yan (N. Y.) Quadrangle. advance and retreat of the ice sheet, valley dependencies, the development of which was directly in proportion to the depth of the troughs above alluded to. Of these troughs those of the Seneca and Cayuga valleys are the deepest and therefore probably were occupied longest by tongue-like projections of ice. Contiguous to these troughs are upland valleys which 338 EF. Carney—Fform of Outwash Drift. were also occupied by ice showing more or less dependence upon the lobes lying in the Seneca and Cayuga valleys. But as the general bor der of the ice retreated, the divide ridges separating these trough-like valleys were re evealed farther and farther to the north between the converging lines of ice; and in an analogous manner the lesser divides marking and forming the valleys contiguous to the Cayuga and Seneca troughs became reéntrant angles between converging walls of ice. It is the work of two such lesser valley dependencies that is sup- posed to have given rise to the peculiar drift accumulation with which we are concerned. A study of the drift about Penn Yan reveals a massive accumulation, of debris which begins southward a mile or so from Milo Center and continues a mile or more north of Penn Yan. This moraine, approximately three miles wide, suggests a very slow retreat of the ice in this region. It is evident also that this wide band of moraine represents more than the decay of the ice reaching out from the Ontario lobe into Seneca val- ley coeeli mone likely is an indication of the general northwest trend of the ice-front crossing Flint, Naples, and Canandaigua valleys. When the ice stood with a reéntrant angle approxi- mately at Milo Center, the Seneca tongue reached many miles oe d towards Watkins, while the ‘lesser lobe in the Keuka ralley was shorter. A detail of this lesser lobe evidently W aoa give two tongues of ice, one occupying each arm of Keuka lake, with the reéntrant angle along the north-south axis of Bluff Point, and the drift of our trianeular area (fig. 1) in process of construction. Along the margin of these valley lobes drift ridges, often widening into morainic areas, were being formed. The uni- formity ‘of such ridges as traced by Tarr on the Watkins quad- rangle has stiegested the characterization, “almost diagrammatic in Aisbe simplicity,’ »* Each such moraine is indicative of stability in the reach of a valley lobe. Two contiguous valleys as those of Keuka and Seneca lakes would give us contem- poraneously formed contouring moraines. The particular form assumed by the glacial debris at the angle of two such contig- uous moraines will depend in the first place upon the nor thward slope of the divide; in the second place, upon the debris melted out of the ice at this particular point; and, in the third place, upon the amount of glacial drainage diverging at this point, carrying the material thus melted along the margin of the Vv alley lobes. Froma study of these intertrough divides of the Finger Lake region, it is noted that their northward slope is gradual. The * Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. xvi, p. 218, 1905. FE. Carney—Form of Outwash Drift. 339 normal condition then of drift where the lateral moraines of two adjacent lobes unite reveals no special thickening. Where, however, the slope of the divide in question is steepened, and bhleerce immediately northward if perhaps more stagnant, or where it contains less debris, then we would anticipate a tend- eney toward the general removal of such debris, and the axis of the slope or divide would have less than the normal veneer of drift. On the other hand, when the axis of the northward slope is more in line with the general deployment of the ice, the chances for the accumulation of drift will certainly be enhanced. It should be noted that the northern part of the longitudinal axis of Bluff Point does trend to the east quite in unison with the direct deployment of ice from the Seneca lake lobe. This being the case then, we have the hypothetical con- ditions favorable to an assemblage of debris in the triangular area. There is, however, still a further factor that favors accumula- tion of the drift, which is operative when the divide flattens immediately to the north, a topographic relationship due to the drainage history of the uplands or divide areas between these northward opening troughs. This fact taken in conjunction with the one just mentioned, that is, when the topography favors free movement from the major lobe, thus directing thitherward more active ice with this load of debris, will give us the conditions that account for the peculiar localization of the drift of the area under discussion. Description of the Drift in Question. A detailed study of this particular interlobate outwash material reveals the following facts: (1) the ice-contact face RS not accentuated, that is, there is no cliff or terrace to sugges the speedy w ithdrawal of the ice from a position of long halt ; (2) the northern part of the accumulation presents a subdued morainic surface; (3) rather numerous bowlders may be seen, some of which are the largest noted in the region. To the southward, however, this morainic topography oradually blends into a normal outwash slope. The control exercised by the falling contours of the rock slopes both east and west, 1s mani- fest in the expanding outwash when considered in connection with the moraine to which it belongs, and in the gradual falling contours of the outwash, 1. e., this development of drift has something of a saddle form. Judged from the surface appear- ance—there is an absence of sections-—the outwash material is entirely normal; there is a blending distally from coarser to finer sediments, with a few bumps suggestive of kame topog- raphy. 340 Ff’. Carney—Lorm of Outwash Drift. Proceeding southward from this area along the east slope of Bluff Point, one traces a very sharp lateral moraine marking the position ‘of the valley tongue which occupied the Penn Yan arm of the lake contemporaneously with the building up of the outwash. This band of lateral moraine may be traced without a break until it disappears beneath the surface of the lake at a point a little south of Ogoyago. The counterpart of this band of drift on the eastern wall of the Penn Yan branch has not been traced continuously. It has been picked up, how- ever, along the highway directly west of Warsaw, also to a point northeast of Crosby, and continuously traced where it makes the angle around the divide west of a blending then into mar ginal drift of the Seneca valley lobe. But the moraine which marks the position of, the valley dependency occupying the west branch of Keuka lake, at the time the outwash was developing, attained only faint expression. Its most pronounced development exists through the first mile and one-half southwest of the drift in question. From that point one cannot be certain of the outline of this valley depend- ency. Its form, as suggested by drift flanking the west wall of this branch of the lake, has not been investigated. The Normal Outwash Plain. Chamberlin cites* references to descriptions of the general type of “ glacio-tfluvial aprons,” ’ variously named by eeologists from 1874-1893. But a precise summary of the terminology of the deposits made | yy glacial waters, together with accurate distinctions on genetic and topographic principles, + appeared in 1902 in Salisbury’s Glacial Geology of New Jersey, from which we quote: “ Where the subglacial streams did not oceupy subglacial valleys, they did not always find valleys at hand when they igsued from the ice. Under such circumstances, each heavily loaded stream coming out from beneath the ice tended to develop a plain of stratitied material (a sort of alluvial fan), near its point of issue. Where several such streams came out from beneath the ice near one another for a considerable period of time, their several plains, or fans, were likely to become continuous by lateral growth.......... Thus arose the type of stratified drift variously known as overwash plains, outwash plains, morainic plains, and morainie aprons.” + This definition of an outwash plain leaves no uncertainty : genetically it results where there is a lack of alignment between * Glacial Phenomena of North America, in Geikie’s ‘‘ The Great Ice Age,” footnote p. Tol, 1894. + Brief descriptions are also given in Chamberlin and Salisbury, Geology, vol. i, p. 806; vol. iii, p. 372, 1906. t Geological Survey of New Jersey, vol. v, pp. 128-9, 1902. F.. Carney—Lorm of Outwash Drift. 341 subglacial valleys and subglacial loaded streams ; topographically these streams should flow out upon a plain where their individ- ual fans may coalesce. It is also evident, as Salisbury states elsewhere, that the degree of development of this drift-form varies with the time the ice stands at a given halt. Woodworth alludes* to a washed drift which confronts the terminal moraine on Long Island ; this formation, as described, is a normal outwash plain. In his deseription of the drift in southern Wisconsin, Aldent describes an “ outwash apron” which constitutes a portion of the deposits in the interlobate angle between the Lake Michi- gan Glacier and the Delavan lobe; his usage of the term out- wash elsewhere in the paper is also in accord with the standard of definition. In applying this definition to the localization of drift referred to on the north slope of Bluff Point, we note the fol- lowing facts: (1) the absence of an initial plain, (2) the prob- able absence of a strong subglacial stream, (3) a constancy in the position of adjacent ice-lobes which built up lateral mo- raines, (4) a synchronous accumulation of debris at the reéntrant ice-angle, (5) diverging slopes to the south that insured rather active drainage away from this angle, and (6) a single alluvial fan-like body of washed drift blending northward into moraine. The normal outwash plain is an assemblage of such alluvial fan-like units. The drift in question is quite identical with an outwash plain in structure, but different from it in degree of development and in topographic environment; ignoring the latter discrepancy, we may say it is a very subdued form of outwash plain that represents a constant position of the ice at the junction of two rather small valley dependencies. Since Bluff Point is a not uncommon type of topography in the Finger Lake region, and since the writer has mapped on the Moravia quadrangle similar deposits of drift, he suggests, as a designation for such deposits, the term enter-lobule (or inter-tongue) fan. *N. Y. State Mus., Bulletin 84, p. 90, 1905. + Professional Paper, No. 34, U.S. Geol. Surv., pp. 31-2, 1904. Am. Jour. Sci.—FourtH Series, Vou. XXIII, No. 137.—May, 1907. 9 a 342 U. Barus— Vapor Nucleation in the Lapse of Time. Art. XX XII.— Vapor Nucleation in the Lapse of Time ; by C. Barus. 1. Nucleations depending upon p/p.—As contemplated in my last article,* I have since computed the nucleation of dust- free wet air in the lapse of time in terms of the relative drop dp/p, where 6p=p—p,, the difference between the atmos- pheric and the adiabatic pressure in the fog chamber after exhaustion. I have also taken advantage of new tables for the expression of nuclei per cubic centimeter in terms of the apertures of corresponding coronas, based on data since inves- tigated. The nucleations to be compared in the lapse of time were all reduced to the fiducial values of the relative drop dp /p = 845, which is sufficiently near the region of ions for practice, and sufficiently large to insure moderate-sized coronas. Omitting the tables, I will give the data for the vapor nucleation of the dust-free wet air in the fog chamber and the corresponding temperature in the accompanying graphs, the abscissas showing the running dates. The ordinates are aver- aged in groups of from two to four successive days, as in the last paper. It is in this presentation that the issue of greatest moment will appear, for the nucleations in their narrower variations (from hour to hour) are similar to those already shown (1. c.). The data for x.,,, have been corrected for the effect of temperature, 7, on the amount of water precipitated, by taking from the recent results referred to, the temperature coeflicients 6n/nét, an example of the values for different relative drops being : dp/p = all 2 °3 “4 5 10°x dn /ndt = 14 18 23 27 30 These data would not, however, seriously modify the trend of the curves. The graph shows that the effect of temperature in the lapse of time has not been eliminated by replacing the extreme variable (69—(7—7,))/(p—m) by the other extreme variable dp/p. In other words, if the nucleation corresponding to a fixed exhaustion 6p/p = °345 is studied in the lapse of time, the successive nucleations show a dependence on the tempera- ture of the fog chamber which can no longer be explained away. Both the details and the general character of the graphs for 7.3,; follow the fluctuations of temperature to an extent which may be estimated from the figure as an inere- ment of about 2000 nuclei per rise of temperature of 1° C. * This Journal, xxiii, 1907, $10, p. 209. O. Barus— Vapor Nucleation in the Lapse of Time. 348 at about 20° C. and for 6p/p = 345. Finally there is no ade- quate reason why the effect of cooling below a higher sur- rounding temperature should be more efficient than the corresponding effect below a slightly lower temperature ; for the rate of reheating would depend on the difference of tem- peratures. 2. Possible suggestions as to the temperature effects.—To obtain a suggestion as to the reason of the apparent increase of the size of colloidal nuclei with rise of temperature (caet. par.), 11 Aug 21 31 10 Sept 20 30 10 Oct. 20 30 effectively therefore of their apparent increase in number at a given supersaturation, it is expedient to recall the form of Helmholtz’s modification of Kelvin’s vapor pressure equation. If the ratio of pressures at a convex surface, 7, and at a plane surface be p,/p,, & the gas constant of water vapor, @ its absolute temperature, s the density, and 7’ the surface tension of the Jiquid, Py [P. — ¢ °T/Rsbr whence it appears that the increments of 6 and / may recipro- cally replace each other. A small radius at a high temperature is as effective as a larger radius at a low temperature, @; and that isabout what the above data have brought out. Naturally the equation has been pushed beyond its limits for the mean- ing of 7, for particles not large as compared with molecular dimensions is obscure; but it appears in other cases and is probably true here that the suggestions of the equation are trustworthy in a general way. Computing p,/p, by the aid of the adiabatic equation, we may write 10°r = 19°5/0, log,, (p,/p,.), where log,,p,/p,, = 8, and @,r = 2/10", nearly. But @, = 262° if the gas is originally at temperature ¢ = 20°, whence 7 = 75/10". Since dr/r =— d@,/@,, an increment of 344. C. Barus— Vapor Nucleation in the Lapse of Time. the radius of but ‘038 under the given conditions, is equiva- lent to arise of temperature of 1° C. of the air within the fog chamber or to 2000 more available nuclei according to the above figure. 3. Another suggestion. —The increment of about 2000 nuclei per degree of temperature under the conditions given may also be looked on as a parallel to what occurs in case > of a radiant field like that produced by the X-rays. One may regard ionization as a state of dissociation suthciently advanced to set free electrons and from this point of view equivalent to a very high degree of temperature. One may thus expect a passage of the vapor nuclei of wet dust-free air into the ions through a continuous gradation of nuclei, and in fact they always occur together. Brown University, Providence, R. I. E.. H. Sellards—Types of Permian Insects. 345 Arr. XXXII. — Types of Permian Insects; by E. H. SELLARDS. [Continued from vol. xxii, p. 258, Sept. 1906. ] Parr IJ.—PLecroprTera. Epruemertips have been until very recently unknown from Permian deposits. The group is scantily represented in the Russian Permian, according to Handlirsch, by one imperfectly preserved wing and three larval forms.* ‘That Ephemerids were present in considerable numbers during Permian time is, however, clearly indicated by the collections made from the Kansas Permian. True Ephemerids make up a conspicu- ous element in the insect fauna of these deposits. Protereismephemeride, new family. The insects of this new family are true Ephemerids. In the general shape of the wings and the body, as well as in the manner of holding the body, they very much resemble 1 many of the modern large Ephemerids. The prothorax cb and head are of medium size; j Se the thorax is large and arched ; the mesothorax and metathorax are equal in size or nearly so; ue O, the abdomen is long and _slen- SS “ der and terminates in stream- : EOME Noss seg 0 ers. The wings are elongate with rounded inner border; Fic. 1. Arrangement of veins at the the two pairs are equally base of the wing as seen in the type , ee genus of the family Protereismephe- developed, on nearly so. The meridz. Veins drawn to scale from venation of the wing As of a nature. C, costa; Se, subcosta; R, fixed and characteristic type, radius; Rs, radial sector; M, media; 5 ae 5 : Cu, first division of the cubitus ; Cu, indicating a well established second division of cubitus; A,’ first family. The subcosta, as is anal: Ch, costal brace. Enlarged 6 usual with Ephemerids, lies times. close to the border and extends to the apex of the wing. The radius is strong at the base and extends parallel to the subcosta to the apex. The radial sector is very uniform throughout the family. Its divisions, as is true also of other veins of the wing, are by sets of threes, the typical number being three sets of three veins each, or nine ‘branches to the sector in all. The first division of the sector is commonly *Uber einige Insektenreste aus der Permformation Russlands. Mémoires de L’Académie Impériale des Sciences de St.-Pétersbourg, (ser. 8) vol. xvi, 0. 0, 1904, pp. 6-7 ; Die Fossilen Insekten, Lieferung II], pp. 386-387, 1906. 346 EE. 1. Sellards Types of Permian Insects. somewhat in front of the middle line of the wing. The two lower branches resulting from this division are simple; the upper division, after continuing simple a distance of four or five millimeters, breaks into a “second set of three veins, of which the two upper are simple ; the lower, continuing simple a variable distance, ultimately breaks into a third set of three veins. The middle vein of these sets of three lies on the fold, is usually weaker, and has the appearance of an interpolated vein. Its attachment is variable, sometimes with the upper 9 ~ RS See ee M Fic. 2. The radial sector (Rs) and the media (M), as typically developed in the family Protereismephemeridze, The attachment of the middle vein of the sets of three is variable. division, sometimes with the lower, or, rarely, directly between the two. In all genera and species thus far made known the radius conforms to this general type. The attachment of the sector is usually with the media. The media is equally con- stant and characteristic. This vein continues simple to or beyond the middle of the wing, where it breaks into a set of three veins, all of which remain simple. The interpolated vein lies in the furrow, the outer branches and the media itself lying on a fold. ‘The attachment of the interpolated vein is variable with the different genera. The media, usually carrying the sector, is fused at the base with the radius. Cubitus, and cubitus, separate just at their basal origin. Each is typically three branches, but in some species additional branches appear at the border. The first anal is a strong, simple, deeply impressed vein, with an abrupt char: acteristic downward eurve at the base. A strong brace occurs at the base of the wing. The vein forming the brace is without doubt the costa combined with a strong cross vein. This vein arises at the base of the wing E. A. Sellards—Types of Permian Insects. BAT between the border and the subcosta. It extends, following an arched course, between the subcosta and the border, a distance of two to four millimeters (variable with the different genera), where it divides. The stronger division turns with a uniform curve across the subeosta and ends on the radius, thus forming the brace. The weaker division turns upward, reaching to and quickly joining the costal border. This structure is also seen in the wings of many modern Ephemerid genera, where it is apparently a disappearing character. As a convenience of reference I suggest for this structure the term Costal brace. 3 Fic. 3. Type specimen of the genus Protereisma. Head, thorax, and first seven segments of the abdomen preserved. The wings are preserved com- plete except at the tips. The wings are thin and flat. The venation is made more indistinct by the fact that the four wings lie together. The dotted veins and the tips of the wings restored from a second specimen of the same species. Enlarged 4 times. Protereisma gen. n. The genus Protercisma* is regarded as the type genus of the family. The wings are thin, elongate, and but slightly corrugated. The costal border is straight, the inner border rounded. The greatest width is near the middle line of the wing. The venation conforms to the type described for the family. The middle vein of the sets of three arises from the upper division. This feature together with the but slightly corrugated membrane gives a more lax appearance to the wing * Protos, first ; Ereisma, brace. 348 EL. H. Sellards—Types of Permian Insects. than is the case with most other genera of the family. The radius is thickened at the base. The costal brace is strong. Cross veins are numerous, but weak. The abdomen is long, being fully twice the length of the thorax. Protereisma permianum n. sp. Text figure 3. This, the type species of the genus, is large, and is to be recognized by the long cubitus, reaching beyond the middle of 4 Fic. 4. A male specimen of the genus Protereisma, probably P. pernianum, or the related P. latum. Head, thorax and abdomen preserved; also the bases of the wings and parts of the legs. The forceps are thick and strong. Enlarged 4 times. the wing. The cross veins are numerous, but so weak as to be but indistinetly preserved. Length of the front wing, 20"; width, at the middle, 6™. Length of hind wing, 18 to 19"™; breadth, 5 3/4™™. Length of abdomen, 20"™ ; total length of body, 28 to 30™™. Protereisma minus n. sp. Text figure 9. This isa small species. The wing is thin and flat, the veins thin; the cross veins numerous, but weak. The cubitus is short, not reaching beyond the middle of the wing. Length of wing, 16"; width, 4 2/3™™. EF. H. Sellards—Types of Permian Insects. B49 Protereisma latum n. sp. A third species of this genus is present in the collection. The front and hind wings in the type specimen lie together. The wing membrane is of a brownish color. The wings of this, as of the other species of the genus, are but slightly corrugated, the cross veins weak. Length of front wing, 25"; width, 7 1/2™™. Length of hind wing, 22"; width, 6". / Protechma acuminatum gen. et sp. n. Text figure 8. _ The shape of the wing of this genus is characteristic, the apex being much more slender and pointed than in any other genus of the family. The wing membrane is corrugated, although not strongly so. The media joins the radius well in front of the costal brace. The interpolated veins of the sector arise from the lower branches. The middle division of the sector forks well toward the apex. ‘The cross veins are of medium strength. Length of the wing, 20"; width, 51/2™™. | Prodromus rectus gen. et sp. n. Text figure 10. The wings of this genus are corrugated, but not strongly so. The costal border is straight, the apex rounded; the inner border slightly rounded. The cross veins of the wing are comparatively strong. The forking of the middle division of the sector is shallow. The interpolated veins of the sector arise from the lower divisions. Cubitus, is five branched at the border. Cubitus, is partly obscured in the specimen illus- trated. A second specimen of the species, however, has this area of the wing preserved. Cubitus, is seen in this second specimen to give off two branches early, as is usual for the Fame oy Length of wing, 18""; width, 5™™. Bantiska elongata gen. et sp. n. Text figure 7. Wings corrugated, costal and inner borders straight, costal brace thin. The interpolated veins of the sector arise from the superior divisions; the middle radial sector branch is deeply forked. The interpolated vein of the media arises from directly between the two outer branches. The cross veins of the wing are numerous, regularly placed and of medium strength. Length of wing, 16 to 17™™; width, 5™™. Rekter arcuatus gen. et sp. n. Text figure 6. The wings of this species are characterized by their unusually arched form. The costal brace is thin and lies close to the E. H. Selards— Types of Permian Insects. 350 gL pT TTT YL TT ee: -- 2 2A See A A A as 0 a a a oy 2 Se SS a oS eee ~—a Spo---- TOT rr = = * ~ =< The forking of the median division of the radial sector is shallow; the interpolated vein arises from the costal border. E. H. Sellards—Types of Permian Insects. B51 upper branch. The media divides early and turns abruptly toward the inner border at the point of division; the inter- polated vein arises from the upper branches yery close to the fork. Cubitus branches very tardily as compared with other genera of the family. The wing membrane is not strongly corrugated ; the cross veins are uniformly and regularly placed. Length of wing, 16 1/2™; width, 4 or 4 1/2™™. Rekter (?) extensus sp.n. Text figure 5. The species illustrated by text figure 5 is placed doubttfully in the genus Rekter. The part of the front wing seen is strongly arched. The wings are probably longer than are the wings of 72. arcuata, and the median branch of the sector is much more deeply forked. The terminal seven segments of the abdomen are preserved. The abdomen is very slender, the segments much longer than wide. The cross veins of the wing are somewhat more numerous than those of the type species of the genus. The hind wing of the specimen illus- trated has suffered lateral crushing, obscuring the venation in the central part of the wing. Length of front wing, estimated, 16 or 17°"; width, 4 to 4 OE Dromeus obtusus gen. et sp. n. The genus Dromeus is proposed for a small Ephemerid of this family. The wing is corrugated, the cross veins numerous and regularly placed. The middle branch of the sector is deeply forked, the interpolated vein attached to the upper division. The wing of the type species is much smaller than that of any other described species of the family. The genus Kxeplanation of Figures. Fic. 5. Rekter extensus sp. n. Apical parts of the wings and the terminal segments of the abdomen preserved. The abdomen is unusually slender. The forcepsare slender. Twosegments of the forvepsare seen. The abdomen is viewed from the side. The wings are but slightly longer than the abdomen. Enlarged 4 times. Fic. 6. Rekter arcuatus gen. et sp. n. The basal attachment of the radial sector is obscured. The second anal is displaced, lying across the first anal. Enlarged 4 times. Fie. 7. Bantiska elongata gen. etsp.n. A genus with wings strongly . corrugated and resembling in general form the Odonates. The radial sector is, as a result of lateral crushing, crowded close to R,, obscuring the cross veins. Enlarged 4 times. Fie. 8. Protechma accuminatum gen. et sp. n. The wing has suffered slight lateral crushing, bringing the middle veins of the radial sector close together. Enlarged 4 times. Fic. 9. Protereisma minus sp. n. Enlarged 4 times. Fie. 10. Prodromus rectus gen. et sp.n. The wing membrane, as indi- cated by the jagged line, is broken from lateral crushing. Enlarged 4 times. 352 Ei. H. Sellards—Types of Permian Insects. is easily recognized by the regularly and uniformly rounded apex of the wing. Length of wing, estimated 12™™ ; width, 4™™. Pinctodia curta gen. et sp. n. Text figure 11. The genus Pinctodia is based upon two specimens each pre- serving the body and parts of the wings. The head is rather large. The thorax is of the arched, humped form common to the family. The abdomen is proportionally short, being some- what less than twice the length of the thorax. The segments of the abdomen are broader than long. Length of front wings probably not less than 15™™. Length of hind wing not less than 14. il Fie. 11, Pinetodia curta gen. et sp.n. Head, thorax, abdomen, base of wings, and two legs preserved. The thorax and first five segments of the abdomen are seen from the side. Between the fifth and sixth segments the abdomen is broken and turned so that the remainder of the abdomen is viewed from above. The abdomen is relatively short and thick as compared with other genera of the family. The cross veins are indistinct. Those shown are in part restored. The wings are much macerated, the impression of the stronger veins only remaining. Enlarged 5 times. Scopus gracilis gen. et sp.n. Text figure 12. This genus has a very long, slender abdomen ; slender, thin, delicate wings ; and apparently rather long legs. The abdomen of the type specimen is preserved complete; the segments are longer than broad. Two segments of the forceps are seen, indicating a male. The caudal sete are apparently slender. The wings, notwithstanding their thin texture, are strongly corrugated. The cross veins are numerous but weak. The E. H. Sellards—Types of Permian Insects. 353 interpolated veins of the sector arise from the upper division. The media is deeply forked; the cubitus is long. The cos- tal brace is rather long. The slender body and wings give to this genus much resemblance to the Zygopterous Odonates. 12 Fic. 12. Scopus gracilis gen. et sp. n. A genus with very slender, long abdomen, and with delicate corrugated wings. Male specimen ; two segments of the forceps are seen. The caudal sete are apparently slender. Their preservation, however, is not very distinct. Other specimens, not illustrated, but belonging with the group of genera with slender abdomen, have caudal setee of the ayerage size and of some considerable length. The segments in the median area of the abdomen of this genus are approximately one and one-half times as long as broad. . Enlarged 4 times. The delicate wings of the type specimen have suffered lat- eral compression, partly obscuring the radial area at the base of the wings. The subcosta and radius have the appearance 354 E.. H. Sellards—Types of Permian Insects. of uniting at the base. This is doubtless due to crushing by which the radius is pushed partly over the subcosta. “The subcosta is restored in the drawing as seen in other genera of the family. : Length of abdomen, 16"". Length of wing, 17™"; width, 4 1B. Therates plunus gen. et sp. n. An aberrant genus probably indicating a subfamily of the Protereismephemeridz is represented by two specimens, one showing the basal three-fourths, the other the basal one-half of the wing. The wings are slender, thin and but feebly cor- Fic. 18. Doter minor gen. et sp. n. Body, caudal sete, and one pair of wings preserved. The inner half of the right wing is folded across the outer half. In the left wing a small part only of the inner border, including the anal area and a smail part of the cubital area, is folded across the rest of the wing. The wings are shown beneath in the figure as they would appear with the folds straightened out. In the counterpart of the specimen the seg- ments of the abdomen are somewhat more distinctly seen. The segments are short, being somewhat wider than long. The dotted vein in the right wing connecting the radial sector with the media is not observed in the specimen, being either lacking or obscured by the folded wing. It is restored as seen in the left wing. Enlarged 5 times. rugated. The costal brace is strong and reaches 3 to 3 1/2™™ from the base. - The costal border is straight; the inner border is gradually rounded to the slender basal attachment. The media is strong and fuses with the radius back of the costal brace, not in front of the brace as in other genera described. The cubitus approaches very ‘close to the radius, lying either E. Hf. Sellards—Types of Permian Insects. 355 against or partly under that vein. The first anal is strongly curved at the base as in the case of other genera of the family. Cross veins are numerous but weak. The radius is much thickened at the base. The special peculiarity of this genus is the late origin of the media, and the close approach of the cubitus to the radius. Width of the wing, 4 1/2™"; length, partly estimated, 15™™. Doter minor gen. et sp.n. Text figure 13. The genus Doter is proposed for a small insect the rela- conehin! ‘of which has not been fully determined. The genus clearly can not be referred to the Protereismephemeride, the venation being altogether different. It is possible that the genus will be found to fall within the Protephemeride. The body is small and slender; the abdomen is of equal width throughout or nearly so;.the segments are short, being wider than long. The abdomen is terminated by two caudal sete. Two wings only are preserved on the type specimen. These are proportionally large, longer than the abdomen, and of an ovate shape, the inner border full and rounded. A _ costal brace such as is seen in the Protereismephemeridee is lacking. The subcosta and the radius are either united at the base or lie so closely together as to give the appearance of being united. The sector is three branched. The media is simple. Oubitus, is three branched, cubitus, five branched. Two anal veins are seen beyond the cubitus. The wing membrane is thin and clear and the veins distinct. Cross veins occur but are not numerous. Length of the wing, 7"; width, 2 1/2™™. Total length of body, (not including sete), 4™™. Notwithstanding the presence of fully developed hind wings, the relationship of the Protereismephemeride is much closer with the Ephemeride than with the earlier and somewhat doubtfully constituted groups of Palephemeridz and Prote- phemeride. The venation agrees essentially with that of the more generalized of the modern Ephemerids. The wing is similarly, although often not so strongly, corrugated. The main veins are readily identified with the corresponding veins in the wings of modern forms. The conclusions of Comstock and Needham* regarding the homologies of the main veins of the wings of Plectoptera find support from a study of these earliest known true Ephemerids. * Amer. Nat., vol. xxxiii, p. 117, 1899. 356 FB. Loomis— Origin of the Wasatch Deposits. Art. XXXIV.—Origin of the Wasatch Deposits > by Haas Loomis. Waite cataloguing the collection from the Wasatch beds of the Big Basin, secured by the Amherst expedition of 1904, the predominance of terrestrial forms raised the question as to the mode of deposit of these strata. It has been the general impres- sion that they represent an ancient lake bottom,* and this view has been adopted in text-books, except in Chamberlin and Salis- bury’s Geology, where exposure to the air is suggested. Recent studies of epicontinental modes of deposition have made easy their application to the case inyhand. Two means of approach are available: (1) By an analysis of the fauna, - and (2) by a study of the section. Both these methods will be employed. In the following table the fauna is carefully arranged, the groups being given according to their probable terrestrial, arboreal, amphibious and aquatic habits. The collections are from two levels on Tatman Mountain and one level in Buffalo Basin. The upper Tatman Mountain horizon is about 100 feet above the lower, while both Tatman Mountain levels are con- siderably below the Buffalo Basin level. \ Lower Higher level level Tatman Tatman Buffalo Mt. Mt. Basin Total Aérial forms: Gallinuloides prentici ---- 3 we Ae 3 Arboreal forms: ‘Pelycodus frugivorus- ---- 2 26 3 oe fs GUbUB Ree eles Esa 2 ae 2k Anaptomorpha minutus -. —-- 1 ne 34 Terrestrial Forms : Carnivora: Stypolophus whitiae --__-- 1 5 a ae mas Bae were 1 4 esi Ess Viverravus protenus ----- 4 1 au ao leptomylus --- 2 1 bia ee : a altidens -_-. -- ae au 1 te Oxyaenaulupinages anes ss 2 3 aS ae Wiunitacyonus aes seo See 3 Ee Ae Anacodon ursidens-- ~_--- 1 4 oe ES SS Seip ee eee 1 2 ae 36 * Wortman, 1892, Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., vol. iv, p. 185.’ Or I. B. Loomis—Origin of the Wasatch Deposits. 3 Lower Higher level level Tatman Tatman Buffalo Mt. Mt. Basin Total Ungulata : Upland: Bolippus borealises= 425. 37 59 = as angustidens _-.- 6 15 ie op 2 MESALCUSH sae =e 5 9 ba 4 cc cristonense ___-. es 2 ne oli ne montanus ___--- 1 1 es aut cs CrIstaluspe se = 9 112 3 159 Lowland: Phenacodus wortmani-- .. 3 1 2) nS se brachypternus = 2 1 Le si fe primaevus - - Prise ss 1 ve Heptodon posticus----.-. -- ae 3 é Eetocion osbornianus .--. - as 1 a PRS Lambdotherium primaevum _- Systemodon semihians. - -- 2 €¢ primaevus -.- 6 wed “ protapirinus _- Bie Trigonolestes chacensis: 22 i= oe metsiacus -- ae es CiSa@ICusee aia Amphibious (?) forms: Gonyphadon armatus ..-.- 6 cinetus === - -- a g elephantopsis —__- cc lobatus 2252: ae es testisaqiascs. 5 <¢ cuspidatus..- - -- a 35 Oy oe eis le 11 Insectivora: Terrestrial: Hyopsodus simplex -_-- -- 6 ss powellianus ~~ - 1 es Jemoinianns -- - 3 6 ee ae 2 6 Bere wDwa ca! po SGNOnNNFH OS ' \ 1 ‘ — Sarcolemur bicuspis ---- -- Esthonyx burmeister - - - - - oe SDs pMON ater nhc = i oe S ce ce 9 Fctopse spa sscs Mee see 2 Be 60 Rodents: Terrestrial : Paramys atwateri..---.--- oe 3 om ne ee primaevus ------ a ah 2 xe gs quadratus _.---- a8 1 6 Am. JouR. ScI.—FouRTH SERIES, Vol. XXII, No. 187.—May, 1907, 25 358 Ff. B. Loomis—Origin of the Wasatch Deposits. Lower Higher level level Tatman Tatman Buffalo Mt. Mt. Basin Total Lizards: Terrestrial: Glyptosaurus obtusidens._ —__ 4 Age 4 Crocodiles: Aquatic: Crocodilus heterodon ___- 4 4 van ee ce wheeleri __..___ 6 8 2 ans SG lodonyass= es H 2 ] a Diplocynodus sphenops__- 1 yu as 29 Turtles : Aquatic: Trionyx leptomitus _____- i 4 a “« scutumantiquum - 1 2 aS Li: 6 SP epee ee ae ya y) nae asics fractuse ee ] 1 1 ah Sa communis - 1 2 m3 as Se corrugatus -. ate ] =i pes Kimyseuthnetay. 36 28s 2 2 22 Fishes: Aquatic: Lepidosteus integer ______ 2 4 1 a Vertebrae indet.?__.. 1.2 1 1 BS 9 Me heds tote milan em wiet ee 2 ty a wa 2 beds of Cerithium sp. ?___- 1 as oe Summary : 151 303 34 4885 end Aéreal, Teriecttiel and arboreal, 375 or 77 per cent Amphibious, 60 or 12 per cent _. Aquatic, 50 or 10 per cent. Ina lake basin land forms would be expected to be washed in, making possibly from ten per cent to fifteen per cent of the total number of individuals. However, strictly aquatic forms should predominate, and where conditions were such as to preserve bones and teeth, invertebrates, also, in the form of shells would be generally distributed. In the Wasatch beds, fish remains were especially sought, but the number of these, including single vertebre, is far below what would be a fair proportion in a lake basin. While Eohippus, the predominant form, is typical of plains or open country, the remains of this genus alone make up 32 per cent of the total fauna, 77 per cent of the latter being land animals, a proportion so large as to preclude the possibility of attr ibuting it to such a deposit. F. B. Loomis—Origin of the Wasatch Deposits. 359 1 ~ 3 os ~o Xe 3 SSeS 20 40 0 160 rd ' {mile ! ' On the other hand, the presence of crocodiles, aquatic tur- tles and fishes in numbers sufficient to make up ten per cent of the whole fauna would be very remarkable in a land deposit (zolian for example). More or less water is necessary to account for the appearance of these animals. The mode of deposition, therefore, which would account for their presence, together with large numbers of terrestrial forms, would be that of flood plains. Further, just such deposits might be expected where the streams debouch from recently formed Section from Owl Creek Mountains across Buffalo Basin, 17 miles to the top of Tatman Mountain, Wyo. ; showing the character of the Wasatch deposits. ile Fic. 360) EF. B. Loomis—Origin of the Wasatch Deposits. and forming mountains surrounding the basin; namely, the Big Horn Mountains to the east, the Rocky Mountain ‘chain to the west and the Owl Creek Mountains to the south. The mingling of remains of fishes, turtles and crocodiles with those of Eohippus, Hyopsodus and Systemodon would occur when the flooded areas dried off, leaving water animals stranded here and there. Approaching the present problem from a stratigraphic point of view, a section of the Ow! Creek Mountains near Meeteetse, Wyo., across Buffalo Basin, seventeen miles to the top of Tat- man Mountain, gives the following, reading from the top of the series downward : Feet 1. Coarse gravel, pebbles all trap and up to a foot and more in diameter .-----.--.---- 30 9: Coarse Sandstone 2.422 No anes ee eee 30 3. Clayey shales, brown and gray .---.---. eet ee 1S) 4, Sandy clays, red, with bands of cream-colored sandstone every 10 feet or thereabouts ---. 150 5. Sandstone, dirty cream color-2_-___5-222225 15 6. Clay shales, gray and brown..----.-..------ 46 jee Sandstone. cream colored = 59 = 545 eee 5 8. Clay shales, banded red and gray._..-...--. 30 9: Sandstone, cream> colored | 5s = eee ee 5 10. Gray shales, brown ces eel OU een 11. Coarse sandstone, pebbles up to 10 inches.-_ — 15 12. Sandstone, varying from fine to gravel. ----- 185 13. Clays, var iegated, mostly gray and brown... 75 14. Sandstone, Gieamcoloreds) ean pitt uae 2 14a. Clay shales, variegated, blue, brown, and red = 75 15. uSandstonescreamicoloredias se ao eee 3 iG sshales, sray, ana slate colors sss" 74 ee 32 dvVieaashales. dirty creamncolote = ees sa ae 6 185 (Shales; slate colored 22 5s ae ee ee 25 D9." SAM GA SEON C52 We ee ae es Sesion 1 20. Shales, slate colored, with frequent thin bitu- HHMOUST Aversa ee eee ee eee anes 100 oN. asandstone, cream colored!= 204. = 35s =a 12 997 Shales: slate zcolorediaa ee ae ereo ee reer 33 3) Sanadstone, cream colored messes 20 24, Shales, slate color and brown _------------=- 138 OF. Sandstone: 2. s> eee ees cee eeet ae ene 2 26. v Shale. dark crayish) black =2a2 3 === 90 OF. Wand stone 2.1 so. bee Sener ee ee ee 1 98. Sandy shale, erayish black 225 ess ssa 29. Soft sandstone, cream colored __--..---.----- 141 30; shlardésandstone se: eee eee tel eee 2 31. Soft sandstone, eray 2-2) eee 32. Sandstone, dirty gray and cream colored..-. 360 Total <3 -250.52 52 55 eee 2391 33. Carboniferous limy sandstone. EF. B. Loomis—Origin of the Wasatch Deposits. 361 Certain general features should be especially noted: There is a lack of sharp cleavage planes between the stratification layers ; the sorting is irregular, so that the clays are a mixture of variable sands and clays, and the sandstones partake of the. nature of gravels in that pebbles and grains of various sizes occur; beds change their character or run out, making levels hard to follow for considerable distances. These are all flood- plain characteristics, the sorting in a lake being much more uniform. On analyzing the section, it is noticeable that the upper part is composed chiefly of brown and gray clays, the middle por- tion has the red beds, while the basal portion tends to blackish and dark shales. These colors are largely due to the content of iron, which in the presence of considerable bituminous material makes carbonates and gives the black and slate colors. Where little vegetable matter is present, the hydrated oxid, limonite, makes ‘the sandstone and shales cream and brown in color; however, when exposed to air, if under dry and hot conditions, the limonite is reduced to hematite, the color then changing to red. With these points in mind, it would appear on consulting the section that the lower sandstones were deposited rather rapidly, the dark shales representing the alluvium spread over a country covered with vegetation. This opinion is further confirmed by finding in level 21, at the point marked «, a rich bed of plant remains. Above this red beds soon begin to appear, and are apparently due to the alluvial deposits being exposed to the sun, the vegetation cover being scantier and the effect of the heat greater. Above level 12, red beds with bands of sandstone predominate. In the Buffalo Basin, the fossiliferous layer is just, below level 11, and very little was found in any other horizon. On the opposite side of Tatman Mountain, however, such layers are considerably lower, the upper most being a full 100 feet below the Buffalo Basin level and the lower ievel 100 feet below the upper one. The deposits on the north side of the mountain are more predomi- natingly red. These red beds seem to have been exposed some time to the air and presumably, in the natural course of events, the bones of terrestrial animals were left on these flats and were subsequently covered by an alluvial deposit; at the same time, occasional crocodiles, fishes, or turtles, becoming stranded far from the river, mixed their remains with those of the land forms. The coryphodons seem to have been amphibious, some- what like the hippopotamus, and would be either in the stream or would follow the flooded country. The uppermost 900 feet are non-fossiliferous, mostly clays brown to greenish in color, as though not exposed to the com- 362 EF. B. Loomis—Origin of the Wasatch Deposits. plete drying postulated for the red beds. The top of Tatman Mountain is flat and on a level with several adjoining buttes north of the Grey Bull River. It probably marks about the end of these deposits. To the north and in the center of the basin, the Wasatch beds are very nearly horizontal, but approaching the Owl Creek Mountains there is a constantly increasing dip rising to 23 degrees immediately adjoining these mountains, so that they would seem to have become greatly elevated since the Wasatch was laid down. As to correlation, the Tatman Mountain fossil levels are the typical and classical locality for Wasatch fossils, and these have furnished the standard. I find little difference between the two levels. The Buffalo Basin level, however, is a distinet horizon, and while the fossils are scarce they show a material approach to the typical Wind River series. There is (1) a noticeable paucity of horses, especially of the species most abundant in the Wasatch, Hohippus cristatus alone being represented ; (2) Systemodon is entirely lacking, as in the Wind River; (3) Heptodon, a good Wind River genus, is present, and Phenacodus is unexpectedly abundant ; (4) Lamb- dotherium, another Wind River type, is common, while Coryphodon is rare. The two species of rodents found were typical of that locality. Paramys was not obtained in the ~ lower level on Tatman Mountain, but increases in abundance as one goes upward. This Buffalo Basin fossil level is, I believe, very close to, or represents the base of the Wind River, which would make the uppermost 1000 feet of the Wasatch beds belong to the same period as the Wind River in the basin south of Owl Creek Mountains. My former opinion is thus reversed, yet taking the presence of Lambdotherium, Heptodon ani Par amys into consideration, together with the lack of Systemodon and the typical species “of Kohippus, it seems a necessary conclusion. A comparison of the above summary with that of Wortman* in 1891 shows little agree- ment between them, his list being typically that of Wasatch species. However, from the description of the camp in but- falo Basin,t I am convinced that his locality represents a lower level than that explored by the Amherst expedition, since it lies much further to the southeast. The Amherst party worked from a spring in the western border of the basin, at the very head of Fifteen Mile Creek ; Wortman’s list is simi- lar to that of the upper level on Tatman Mountain. In summarizing the foregoing statements, it is seen by an analysis of the fauna that the Wasatch beds seem to be the result of flood-plain deposits; a study of the lithological nature * Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., vol. iv, p. 83. + Loe. cit., p. 146. F. B. Loomis—Origin of the Wasatch Deposits. 363 of the material likewise furnishes the same result. The upper 1000 feet of the Wasatch appear to overlap in time the base of the Wind River, as shown by the fauna of the upper Buffalo Basin beds. Appended are the descriptions of two new gece from these beds: Lambdotherium primaevum sp. nov. Type No. 254, consisting of Sane molars 1 and 2 of the right side and lower molars 1, 2 and 3 from the same Role. the specimen being from the aalp Basin, near Meeteetse, Wyo. This species is fairly abundant at this horizon and is inter- mediate in size between L. brownianum and L. popoagicum. 2 Fic. 2. Lambdotherium primaevum. A, upper molars 1 and 2; B, lower molars 1-3. Natural size. On the upper molars the parastyle, though strong, is not so well developed as in the foregoing forms; the paraconule is well developed, but the metaconule is so annexed to the meta- cone as to appear like a buttress of this cusp. The second molar measures 12™™ transversely by 17™™ lengthwise. The robust lower molars have the protoconid markedly bifid, while the paraconid and hypoconid are each high crescents. The heel of the last molar is a high shallow basin completely sur- rounded by an outer rim. The three molars occupy 41™. Glyptosaurus obtusidens sp. nov. Type No. 133, a lower jaw of the left side, with five teeth ; from Tatman Mountain, Wyo. Cotype No. 106, a ventral shield from the same locality. The genus is characteristic of the Bridger beds, from which eight species have been described, mostly larger than the present one. The genus is characterized by pleur odont teeth on the jaws, the presence of a surface of tiny teeth on the pterygoids, and by osteoderms on the head and body, espec- lally the belly, these osteoderms being characteristically orna- mented. Cope* described some of the latter and attributed * Geog. Surv. West of 100th Mer., vol. iv, p. 42, 1877 364 FE. B. Loomis—Origin of the Wasatch Deposits. them to the Placosauridze, without giving them any name. It seems to me, however, that the presence ‘of teeth on the ptery- golds, the shape of the teeth on the jaws, and the osteoderms would indicate rather affinity with the Lacertide. The species from the Bridger are, with one exception, much larger. In the present form the cylindrical teeth are attached in a pleurodont manner, with about one-third of the tooth above the outer margin of the jaw. The crown of each tooth is slightly compressed, making a blunt edge front and back. Fic. 3. Glyptosaurus obtusidens. A, lower jaw, inner view; B, the same, outer view; C, ventral shield. x3. Near the base is a small opening for the blood vessels into the pulp eavity, and on each alternate tooth this is enlarged by the absorption which has taken place near the successional new tooth. The five teeth oceupy 64™". An ornamented shield characteristic of the genus was found near by, and probably belongs to this species. It has a slight ridge along the mid- dle, but is otherwise flat. The tubercles along the margin are somewhat larger than those near the center. This shield measures 8°7™™ long by 4°™ wide. Beside the above speci- mens, a second jaw and some vertebree were found. Gooch and Newton—Method for the Estimation of Iron. 365 Arr. XXXV.—A Method for the Estimation of Iron in presence of Titanium; by F. A. Goocn and H. D. Newton. {Contributions from the Kent Chemical Laboratory of Yale Univ.—clvi. ] For analytical purposes, a ferric salt in solution is most easily and conveniently reduced to the ferrous condition by the action of zine; and where many determinations of iron are to be made, the use of the well known reductor, first proposed by Jones* and described in simple form by Blair,t yields accurate results very rapidly. The use of zinc, whether in the flask or in the reductor, has, however, been precluded when the ferric salt is accompanied by titanic acid, for this substance is reduced with the iron and subsequently oxidized by the permanganate in the titration process. When, therefore, titanium is present with the iron, it has been customary to have recourse to other methods of reduction. In this event, either hydrogen sulphide or sulphur dioxide is substituted for the zine to bring about the reduction of the ferric salt, while titanic acid is not reduced by these reagents; but the removal of the excess of hydrogen sulphide or of sulphur dioxide from solution without oxidation of the ferrous salt is not an easy or rapid process. The present investigation was undertaken for the purpose of adapting the ordinary convenient process of reducing the ferric salt by zine to the estimation of iron in presence of tita- nium. It is obvious that to solve this problem it is only neces- sary to find and employ some reagent which shall be neutral toward the ferrous salt but capable of reoxidizing the titanium compounds formed by the reducing action of the zine and with- out action on the permanganate. Compounds of silver, copper, or bismuth oxidize very easily the reduced titanium salt ; but the use of a compound of silver is precluded by the fact that it oxidizes also the ferrous salt to some extent as well as the tita- nium sait. Cupric salts and pure bismuth oxide prove, how- ever, to be without action upon the ferrous salt. For the work to be described, ferric oxide was Brecered from pure ferrous oxalate and converted to ferric sulphate, and a solution of this salt was made up of convenient strength and standardized by reducing the iron with zine in a small flask, as recommended by Blair,t and titrating with potassium per- manganate. ‘Titanium sulphate was prepared in solution by digesting pure titanic acid in concentrated sulphuric acid and diluting | the filtered solution to known volume. * The Chemical Analysis of Iron, Blair, 2d edition, p. 203. + Ibid., 6th edition, p. 94. : ¢ The Chemical Analysis of Iron, Blair, 6th ed., p. 225. 366 Gooch and Newton—Method for the Estimation of Iron. In preliminary experiments it was found that the violet color of the solution containing the titanium compound produced by the action of zine upon the titanium sulphate was discharged by adding a little cupric sulphate to the solution and heating and, after filtering, a drop of potassium permanganate gave its characteristic rose tint to the solution. It was found also that when cupric oxide was added to a similarly reduced solution of the titanium salt the characteristic color vanished on shaking the solution. The following table contains the results obtained in titrating with potassium permanganate the ferrous salt left atter reducing by zine in small flasks carefully measured amounts of ferric sulphate and titanium sulphate, treating the mixture thus obtained with cupric sulphate or with cupric oxide, and filtering off the reduced copper and cuprous salt. TABLE I. Fe.0O; TiO. Fe.0; taken taken found Error erm. erm. erm, 0:1375 Orl 0°1378 + 0°0003 : 0°1375 0-1 01374 ea ae 0'13875 Orl ONS 7 + 0:0002 \ 4 0°1375 Ol 0°1378 + 0°0003 : 0°1375 0-1 01378 4. 0°0003 Uae 0°1375 *0°2 0°13882 + 0:0007 So it appears that either cupric sulphate or cupric oxide may be used to reoxidize the salt of titanium reduced by zine, with- out affecting appreciably the ferrous sait in solution. Similar experiments in which bismuth oxide was_substi- tuted for the copper oxide are recorded in Table II. To the measured amount of ferric sulphate and titanium sul- phate contained in a small flask, provided as usual with the funnel valve, zine was added and the reduction effected in the ordinary manner. The titanium salt appears to act catalyti- cally in this process, so that reduction goes on more easily and with less expenditure of zine than in the similar reduction of the ferric salt taken by itself. After the zine had disappeared, the solution, of characteristic violet color, was cooled in the flask, treated with a little bismuth oxide, gently shaken, filtered from the excess of bismuth oxide and the precipitated bismuth into about a liter of cold water, and titrated with stand- ard potassium permanganate. In Table III are given the results obtained when reduction was effected by passing the ferric sulphate solution through a column of amalgamated zinc, 20-30 mesh, used in the simple ae Gooch and Newton— Method for the Estimation of Iron. 367 TABLE II. Ferric Sulphate TiO, KMn0, Fe,O; eine germ. em? Taken Found Hrror 10 0°04 12°84 0°0993 0°0992 —0 0001 10 0°06 12°85 0:0993 0°0993 + 0:0000 10 0°08 12:90 0°0998 0'0997 + 0:0004 10 0-1 12°90 0°0993 0°0997 +0°0004 10 Ovl 12°89 0°0993 0°0996 + 0°0008 10 Orl 12°85 070993 00998 +0°0000 10 Ol 12°80 0°0993 0°0989 —0°0004 10 Orl 12 90 0°09938 0:0997 + 0°0004 10 0-2 12°90 0°0998 00997 + 0:0004 10 0-2 12°89 0°09938 0°0996 + 0°0008 10 0-2 12 90 0°0998 0:0997 + 0:0004 20 Ovl 25°70 0°1986 0°1986 +0°0000 form of reductor recommended by Blair.* The receiving flask was kept cool in running water, a small amount of bis- muth oxide added, the flask shaken and allowed to stand a few minutes, and filtration made with the aid of the suction pump. In the cold solution free from dissolved oxygen there is little danger of reoxidation of ferrous sulphate, as has been shown by Peters and Moody.t TABLE III. Ferric Sulphate TiO: KMn0O, Fe.03 ane erm. cms. Taken Found Error 40 0°01 46°80 0°3943 0°3943 +0:0000 40 0°02 46°79 0°3943 0°3942 —0-:0001 40 0°04 46°80 0°3943 0°3943 +0°0000 40 0-06 46°83 0°3943 0°3946 +0°0008 40 Ol 46°75 0°3943 0°3939 — 0°0004 40 Ol 46°82 0°3943 0 3945 +0°0002 40 Ol 46°78 0°3943 0:3941 — 00002 40 Ol 46°80 03943 0°3943 +0°0000 40 Ol 46°75 0°3943 0°3939 —0°0004 40 20d 46°80 0°3943 0°3948 + 0°0000 40 0:2 46°77 0°3943 0°3940 —0°00038 40) 0°2 46°81 0°3943 0°3944 + 90001 40 0-2 46°85 0°3943 0°3947 + 0°0004 These results show plainly that the ordinary process of reducing ferric salts by means of-zine, either in the flask or in the reductor, may be made applicable in presence of titanium compounds by adding copper oxide or preferably bismuth oxide to the reduced solution and filtering before titrating with potassium permanganate. * Loc. cit. + This Journal, xii, 367. 368 Phelps and Hubbard—Esterification of Suceinie Acid. Art. XXXVI.—On the Esterification of Succinic Acid; by I. K. Puers and J. L. Husparp. [Contributions from the Kent Chemical Laboratory of Yale Univ.—celvii.] Iy a former paper®* from this laboratory it has been shown that succinic acid analytically pure may be prepared from suc- cinic ester by hydrolysis in presence of a small amount of nitric acid; and, further, that the acid prepared in this way is of a decidedly higher degree of purity than that of the socalled chemically pure acid of commerce. This paper concerns the study of certain conditions under which the preparation of the pure diethyl ester, C,H,COOO,H.,),, is readily made and, also, certain conditions under which the esterification of the acid seems to be almost quantitatively complete. The reaction for the formation of an ester from an alcohol and an acid with the elimination of water is a common example of what is termed a reversible reaction. In order to avoid reversion of the reaction various methods of dehydration have been made use of in the processes brought out for the formation of esters. This seems to have been accomplished most successfully by Fischert and Speier, although as early as 1864 Carey Leat showed that in the esterification of oxalic acid there in an advantage in acting upon the acid in a tube with gaseous alcohol, in comparison with the usual method of esterification by heating oxalic acid with alcohol. Fischer and Speier have shown that when one part by weight of acid and three, four, or five parts of absolute aleohol containing one or three per cent of hydrochloric acid are boiled on a return con- denser for four hours, the product poured into cold water after distilling off half to three quarters of the excess of alcohol, the aqueous mixture shaken out with ether, the ethereal extract dried, and fractioned, gives of the ester ‘a yield which is con- sidered good when compared with the amount obtainable by other methods. While this procedure generally gives good yields when used for the esterification of organic acids, the esterification of each individual acid must, nevertheless, be studied by itself in detail; for, as Fischer has stated, the best yields in yiven cases are obtained by varying the general pro- cedure. In Fischer’s procedure for the preparation of the ethyl ester of succinic acid the absolute alcohol is a solvent for succinic acid and its esters. It is, also, a dehydrating agent. But imas- much as the water remains with the alcohol and the ester s, 1t * This Journal, xxiii, p. 211. + Berichte der Chem. Ges., xxviii, 3252, 1895. } This Journal [2], xxxix, 210. Phelps and Hubbard—Esterification of Succinic Acid. 369 may still be active in holding back the completion of the reaction in which the normal ester is formed. Fischer's best yield was 73°9 per cent of that theoretically possible. In the work here described the attempt has been made to reduce the proportion of water, the presence of which may retard the completion of the action, by introducing the vapor of aleohol charged with dry hydrochloric acid into the solution of succinic acid in alcohol also charged with hydrochloric acid, and allowing the alcohol, water, and hydrochloric acid to pass out from the hot solution to a condenser. In every experiment recorded in the table, aleohol charged with dry hydrochloric acid was boiled in a 500°™* flask fitted with a separating funnel and an outlet tube, and passed in vapor to the bottom of a 250°* sideneck flask containing a definite weight of succinic acid and a definite volume of alco- hol charged with a definite weight of dry hydrochloric acid. The temper ature of the mixture in the sideneck flask was kept between 100° and 110° by heating the flask in a bath of sulphuric acid* and potassium sulphate, and this temperature was indicated by a thermometer dipping in the mixture and held in a two-bored stopper fitted to the sideneck flask and carrying also the glass tube for the introduction of the vapor. The vapor liberated in the sideneck flask passed through the sideneck to a condenser and was collected as the liquid distillate. This distillate contained whatever ester may have passed along with the hydrochloric acid, aleohol and water mixture. As succinic ester boils at 213°°3 and as the temperature in the sideneck flask was maintained between 100° and 110°, the amount of succinic ester in the distillate was necessarily a small part of the total ester produced in the reaction. The mass of ester with its impurities from the sideneck flask was poured into a separating funnel containing a little ice, the last traces of the liquid being transferred from the flask to the funnel by successive rinsings swith ether. The i impure ester in the funnel was treated with an excess of dissolved sodium car- bonate, and the water solution was drained off from the super- natant mixture. This mixture was washed free from sodium carbonate with a water solution of sodium chloride of sufficient density to separate it easily from the mixture. To recover any portion of the ester carried along in the water solution of sodium carbonate and the washwater containing sodium chloride, each solution was shaken out separately three times with fresh por- tions of ether which were added to the main portion of the mixture. These mixtures of ester in the etherial solutions were gathered in a 250°™ sideneck flask connected with a 100°™* side- *H. Scudder, Jour, Am, Chem. Soc., xxv, 161, 1903. 370 Phelps and Hubbard—Esterification of Succinie Acid. neck flask as a receiver in the usual way for a vacuum distillation. The lower boiling point impurities in the succinic ester, pre- sumably composed chiefly of ether, aleohol and water, were removed by allowing a gentle current of air to pass through the apparatus while the flask containing the ester solution was heated ina waterbath raised finally to 66° until the pressure regis- tered on the manometer—15"™"—indicated that only succinic ester remained in the flask to be distilled. The ester was then distilled over by heating the 250°™* flask in a bath of sulphuric acid and potassium sulphate at 140°-150°, and collected in the second flask, which was cooled by allowing a current of cold water to pirilce it constantly during distillation: The last traces of ester left on the distilling flask were removed by flaming suitably the sidewalls of the flask and at the same time increasing the current of air that was passing through the apparatus. The increase in weight of the receiver gave the weight of the succinic ester left in the sideneck flask when the acid was esterified as completely as possible under the condi- tions imposed in each experiment. To recover whatever succinic ester might have been carried to the condenser with the alcohol and other vapors during esterification, the acid alcoholic distillate was chilled with ice, diluted with three or four times its volume of water, and shaken out three times in a separating funnel with fresh por- tions of ether. The ethereal solution thus obtained was treated with an excess of sodium carbonate in solution, washed with distilled water, and distilled in vacuo, in the manner described above, to separate the low boiling point materials present, largely ether, alcohol, and water, and finally to distil the succinic ester, which was weighed. The sources of loss inherent in this method for the preparation of pure succinic ester were carefully studied. It was found, first, that if a known weight of pure succinic ester—75 grms —was taken in a separating funnel, shaken with sodium ear- bonate solution containing ice, separated from the sodium ear- bonate solution, washed with distilled water containing common salt, and united with the portions of ester carried on mechanically and recovered from the water solutions by shak- ing out three times with fresh portions of ether, that the weight of the ester recovered on distilling in vacuo the ethereal solu- tion containing some water was less than the amount taken by only 0°60 grm. It was found, further, that when a portion of 5 grms. of suc- cinic ester was put with 300%? of the alcoholic hydrochloric acid mixture used in esterification and treated exactly in the manner described for the recovery of the ester from the acid alcoholic distillate, the mass of succinic ester recovered showed a loss of only 0°50 grm. Phelps and Hubbard—Esterification of Succinic Acid. 371 TABLE I, Succinic Ester Gua Sats freer Found Succinic in Total acid Alcohol with HCl Theory Found distillate yield Reaction time No grm. cm? q, grim. grm, erm, in% hr. min, A (1) 50 100 UL Se OOO ne OOS = (otek) 30 CVS 00 ts 100) MICI5) Seis 055 06710,00) 9 74-9) Sy aioe (Syn O 505 Goan 73. en 62026.) Oar Sool 45 (4) 50 200 M25 a 73ei 6630; 0:90 1 .91:2 ] 55 (50) a 200K. gd 25 e857 COT. 140) 491-8) a0 (6) 50 250 125) gon menoosG One 2 hoy 2609 2 25 (7) 50 250 NOS AB OOO, — Os Se) 3 (8) 50 300 eee Ol Orato ion ors 4 (9) 3-507) 300 T2532 i. OOrGo M65 6 OO) eo. 720 (O50) 8502 125 7807 63180, 4:70, 92-9 2 Ts C50 S50) 2b) 8% 6/e3h 2:60) 94-900 15 Br (12) 50 200 Po si HOGr2 6. ol 82) 2 9OKO 2 20 (IB) 50 200 1:25 73-7 "65°30 5:27 195-8 3 (14) 50 350 1:25. 73:7 66:05 2°90 93:6 3 45 (Cees OPet es 50a 25) ae 7 6S8e751 0 Leo 9or4a aa ne 30) (16) 50 200 10 Ox tOo On ores a1 Oi od 20 (17) 50 200 10 (ace GUE IOs N50) 2 9429 2 25 10 (is) 50 200 and 73:7 68)32,| 3:30) '95'8 Lan 5 Gaseous C . Wes 200 1:25 2 10 isis) 10) a7 oreo 160 949 i 300 1°25 2, 5) (20) 100 | 200 10 147°4 1382°80 6°32 94:4 ] 15 S200 1:25 1025 2 OU i Ol ie CORO FEO Ore I 300 1°25 2. 99 ) 2) NU Gs a ee Fe ee It was found, also, that when 75 grms. of succinic ester held in a flask fitted with a receiver and capillary tube for a vacuum distillation were heated for an hour in a waterbath at 60° under a pressure of 15™™, that the weight of the ester was diminished by less than 0:05 grm. From these experiments it appears that the losses in the pre- paration of pure succinic ester should not exceed two grams. While the general process of treatment described above was applied in all the experiments recorded in the table, some 372 Phelps and Hubbard—Esterification of Succinie Acid. experiments differed from others in respect to the proportions of the reagents and to supplementary treatment. In the experiments of series A of the table the alcohol used was 99°5 per cent pure and this was charged with dry gaseous hydrochloric acid to the amount of 10 grams to the liter. The suecinic acid was the pure acid of commerce. In the experiments of series B, the alcohol used was made more nearly absolute than that used in series A by heating 99°5 per cent alcohol for an hour over fresh calcium oxide with a return condenser, and distilling to a protected receiver open to the air through a calcium oxide tube. In experiments (12), (13), (14), and (15) succinic acid prepared pure by hydrolysis of the ester in the presence of nitric acid was. used, in the others, the acid of commerce. The alcohol was charged with dry hydrochloric acid to the amount of 10 grams to the liter. In (16) and (17) the alcohol was charged with dry hydrochloric acid to the amount of 80 grams to the liter, and in experiment (18) the alcohol or iginally charged with 80 grams to the liter was reinforced by passing into the sideneck flask a rapid cur- rent of hydrochloric acid gas, dried by passing through concen- trated sulphuric acid in a bead tower of thirty centimeters length, simultaneously with the charged alcohol vapor. An inspection of the yields obtained in the experiments of series B, in which the more nearly absolute alcohol was employed with experiments otherwise nearly similar of series A in which alcohol of 99°5 per cent purity was used, show per- haps a trifling advantage in favor of the slightly stronger alcohol. _ Thus (12) of B gave 1 per cent more yield than (6) of A though in the latter 25 per cent more of the charged alcohol was used under conditions otherwise closely similar; (13) of B gave about the same yield as (7) of A, though in the latter 25 per cent more of the charged alcohol was used; but the yield in (15) of B with an increase of 16°6 per cent in the amount of charged alcohol and 12°5 per cent in the reaction time was a trifle less than that of (8) of series A. Upon examining the yields of experiments in which equal amounts of the alcohol similarly charged were brought into action with a given amount of succinic acid, it appears, as is natural, that the amount of succinic ester produced increased with the time of reaction. This inference becomes evident in a comparison of experiments (1) and (2), (6) and (7), (8) and (9), (10) and (11), (12) and (13), and (14) and (15). It appears also that the proportion of similarly charged alco- hol, for a given weight of succinic acid, affects the yield of ester—very markedly at first, but that the effect of increasing beyond a moderate limit the amount of alcohol passed through the apparatus in a given time is not so important. ‘This effect Phelps and Hubbard— Esterification of Succinie Acid. 378 is not surprising when it is remembered that the larger part of the water liberated is found early in the reaction and that the effect of the continued distillation would be naturally more in evidence at that time. Thus the yield of experiment (3), in which 150°™* of the charged alcohol were used, is 8 per ae greater in half the reaction time than that of experiment (1), in which 100 of the same mixture were employed ; while the difference between the yield of (6) from 250° of the charged alcohol and that of (10) from 350° of the similarly charged alcohol is 1-1 per cent. In (12) of B with purer acid and alcohol of greater concentration the process gives the same yield as in (10). Increase in the amount of dry hydrochloric acid with which the alcohol is charged is effective in increasing the yield. From (18) it appears that a current of dry hydrochloric acid has such an effect. This appears when (18) is compared with (17), and, more strikingly when compared with (5), where the differences are largely the concentration of the hydrochloric acid with a gain of 4 per cent in the yield of (18). In the experiments of series C the process of forming the ester was conducted in two stages in an attempt to cause the esterification of the final portions of the succinic acid more advantageously. It is obvious from the work recorded in series A and series B that it is comparatively easy to cause the esterification of a little more than 90 per cent of the acid. In experiment (19), after the first portion of aleohol—200°*—of highest purity charged with dry gaseous hydrochloric acid in the proportion of 10 grams to the liter had acted upon the commercial succinic acid in the manner described above, a fresh portion of aleohol—150°™°—containing 10 per cent ‘of dry hydrochloric acid gas was put with the ‘ester solution and the whole was heated at the boiling point for an hour with a return condenser in an attempt to learn whether a fresh mass of the absolute alcohol hydrochloric acid mixture containing 10 per cent of hydrochloric acid could serve sufficiently as a dehydrating agent to allow the completion of the reaction. It does not seem evident that the second treatment is markedly advantageous in completing the reaction. Its effect, if any- thing, is slight. In case of experiment (20), after completing esterification of the pure acid so far as possible with 200° of the purest alcohol with hydrochloric acid in the usual way, 200" more of the same alcohol with 10 per cent of hydro- chloric acid was driven through the ester as in the first half of the procedure. The effect of this second treatment is not apparently of marked advantage in esterifying the final por- Am. Jour. Sci.—FourtH Series, Vou. XXIII, No. 137.—May, 1907. 26 ° 374 Phelps and Hubbard— Esterification of Succinic Acid. tions of the acid. In experiments (21) and (22) after the treat- ment for esterification, as given earlier, was completed, all low boiling point material, chiefly alcohol, water, and hydrochloric acid, was removed from the ester in the sideneck flask by a vacuum fractionation, carricd out by heating the flask ina waterbath finally at 60° with the pressure on the manometer registering 15™", this pressure -and temperature being main- tained fifteen minutes. The material in the flask was then treated with fresh alcohol and hydrochloric acid in amounts given in the table in gaseous form as in the first half of the experiment. Pure succinic acid was used in case of (21), and commercial acid in case of (22). This process of removing traces of water by the intermediate vacuum distillation from the mixture containing the ester is obviously very effective, and the yield of experiment (21) is the best of the entire suite. Indeed if it be recalled that the losses inherent in the processes of obtaining the pure ester are a fraction more than a gram, it is seen that all of the acid taken appears as ester except a portion as small as 0°30 of a gram. So it appears that while high purity of the succinic acid and the alcohol, the proportion of the hydrochloric acid, the time of the reaction, are all influential factors in the process of forming the ethyl ester, the thing most important in obtaining a high yield is the removal of the water as it is formed in the reaction : and we have found that this may. be done most easily and very effectively by passing the vapor of alcohol charged with a small proportion of hydrochloric acid into a con- tinuously distilling mixture of succinic acid and alcohol also charged with hy drochlorie acid. By thus acting with a total volume of 300°* of the alcohol char ged with 1: D5 per cent of hydrochloric acid upon 50 grms. of succinic acid, the yield in action of five hours reached 97 per cent of the theor y, while this time of action was cut in two and the yield at the same time slightly increased to 97-7 per cent by interpolating in the process a vacuum distillation to remove water more effectively from the reacting mixture. Even if the usually small amounts of ester which pass to the distillate are disregarded in the process of recovery, the yield of the process in its simpler form is still 20 per cent higher than that of any other described procedure known to us for making the ethyl ester of succinic acid by the inter- action of the acid and alcohol. Oo “1 Or J. M. Adams—Transmission of Rontgen Rays. Arr. XXX VII.—The Transmission of Rontgen Rays through Metallic Sheets ;* by Joun Meap ApAms. Tuts subject presented itself in connection with an investiga- tion of the energy of Rontgen rays as measured by a radiomi- crometer. In that investigation the rays were allowed to fall upon a thin sheet of platinum at one junction of a thermo- electric circuit suspended in a magnetic field; the heat devel- oped by the absorption of the rays in the platinum was measured by the deflections of the instrument. The necessity of making correction for the incomplete absorption of the rays in the platinum, together with the well known fact that the character of Réntgen rays is changed by passage through sub- stances, made it seem desirable to investigate the phenomena of the transmission of the rays through metallic sheets. The general law of the absorption of the rays in a metal, viz., that each successive equal -increment of thickness is less effective as an absorbing medium than the one preceding it, was confirmed by experiments with the radiomicrometer ; and curves showing the relation between the thickness of a metallic sheet and its absorbing power were plotted and were found to have the same general characteristics as similar curves which other investigators had obtained by means of the fluoroscope, the photographie plate, or the ionization electroscope. The dependence of the absorbing power of a given metallic sheet upon the intensity of the rays incident upon it was examined for sheets of silver, platinum, copper, tin, and aluminium, and in every case it was found that the effective- ness of a sheet as an absorbing medium is independent of the intensity of the incident rays; in other words, the deflection of the radiomicrometer suffered an equal percentage reduction upon the interposition of a metallic sheet in the path of the rays, whether the latter were strong or weak. The rays were weakened by moving the tube away from the rest of the apparatus. It was found that the effect of the swrfaces of metallic sheets upon transmission is small, in the case of copper and of aluminium, the only metals examined. To show this, a laminated plate of the metal in question was prepared, equal in total thickness to another solid plate of the metal. These two plates were interposed in turnin the path of the rays, and pro- duced equal reductions in the deflection of the radiomicrometer. The transmission of a beam of Rontgen rays through a metallic sheet has generally been supposed to render the beam * Abstract of a paper published (April, 1907) in the Proceedings of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences. 3876 J. M. Adams—Transmission of Réntgen Rays. more penetrating ioward a second sheet of any other metal than the original beam was. Experiments with the radiomi- erometer have confirmed this view in most cases; but the effect of transmission through silver on penetrating power for aluminium was found to be ver y small, while transmission through aluminium appeared to decrease the penetrating: power of the rays for silver, so far as the deflections of the instrument are an indication. This last result is contrary to a conclusion reached by Walter* by a fluoroscopic methed, and throws some doubt upon the necessity of the transfor mation theory which he proposes. In view of this doubt, direct experimental evidence of transformation of one sort of ray into another sort of ray in transmission through a metallic sheet, was sought, with a negative result. The experiment was perfor med by interposing in the path of the rays a plate made of two sheets of different metals placed face to face. It is to be expected that if transformation occurs in the metals, the effect of the second metal upon rays transformed by the first will not be quantitatively the same as the effect of the first metal upon rays transformed by the second, when the order of the two sheets in the plate is reversed. In other words, the transformation theory leads us to expect that the effect of a two-piece plate upon the deflection of the radiomicrometer will depend upon the order of the pieces. The absence of such dependence was shown by experiment, and is evidence of the absence of transformation. With the probability of transformation in transmission thus removed, and with experimental evidence showing that any effect of the surfaces of the metal upon transmission is small, the only conceivable action produced upon a beam of rays by transmission through a metallic sheet is an absorbing action. To explain the phenomenon observed with different thicknesses of the same metal, we must suppose, as Rontgen}+ has sug- gested, that the rays from a tube are heterogeneous, and that different kinds of rays are differently absorbed in any one metal. To explain the apparent reduction of penetrating power by transmission in certain cases, we must suppose that rays which are more penetrating for some metals are less pene- trating for others,—that is, that metals show relatively selec- tive absorption,+ and that the apparent reduction of penetrating power by transmission through silver, etc., is a real reduction of penetrating power with respect to aluminium. In judging of the significance of Walter’s fluoroscopic work, as in fact of all work on Réntgen rays, it must be borne in mind that the * B, Walter, Ann. d. Phys., xvii, p. 561, 1905. + W. C. Réntgen, Ann. d. Phys., lxiv, p. 18, 1898. t J. M. Adams, this Journal, xxiii, p. 91, 1907. J. M. Adams—Transmission of Réntgen Rays. 377 selectivity of the absorbing media of the instruments them- selves must greatly affect the magnitude of their indications, and that an exact interpretation of those indications is beyond our knowledge at present. This consideration will explain many disagreements in the results obtained by observers using different instruments. It is simplest to suppose that the effect of transmission through a metallic sheet upon any one component of a hetero- geneous beam is independent of the presence or absence of the other components. In other words, the effect of a given sheet upon the transmission of a particular sort of ray is measured by an absorption coefticient which may change ‘with the con- ditions of the experiment only in so far as ‘those conditions affect the ray in question. An attempt has been made to test the constancy of these coefficients under changing intensity of the rays, by the experiments where the dependence of the per- centage reduction of deflection upon the distance between the tube and the sheet was investigated. It seems very probable that in experiments so conducted the variation in the intensity of the rays incident on the sheet, involved in moving the tube, very nearly fulfills the condition that the changes in the intensities of all the components of the beam shall be in one ratio. Except for the absorption by the air, this ratio is doubtless fixed for all the different sorts of rays by some function of the distances involved; and from numerous experiments with various instruments* it appears that the absorption by air of Rontgen rays in general is negli- gible for such short distances as these. Of course a real dis- turbing factor is the changing behavior of the tube, for which correction is made, as well as possible, by alternating and checking readings. Granting that these sources of error have had no appreciable effect, we learn from the observations that the percentage reductions of deflections, due to the metallic screens examined, are independent of the total intensity of the incident radiation, when that intensity changes in such a way that the intensities of all the componcuts change i in the same ratio. If we examine this result in the light of the conclusions already reached in this paper, its practical importance will appear. It is plain that if we knew in advance that all of the absorption coefficients for the metallic sheet and the beam in question are constant so far as intensity is concerned, the con- stancy of the percentage reduction of deflection would neces- sarily follow, provided we grant that all of the absorption coefficients of platinum are independent of the intensity. But * J. Trowbridge and J. E. Burbank, this Journal, vii, p. 396, 1899; A. M. Mayer, ibid., i, p. 467, 1896; C. G. Barkla, Phil. Mag. vii, p. 595, 1904. 378 = =S. M. Adams— Transmission of Léntgen Rays. to draw conclusions as to the constancy of any or all of the separate coefficients from the constancy of the percentage reduction is not in strictness possible ; it might be that two or more of the coeticients changed together in such a way as to keep the percentage reduction constant. The repetition of this coincidence, however, in experiments with different metals and with rays from tubes in very different conditions is exceedingly unlikely, and the constancy of the percentage reduction of deflection with varying intensity is at least very good presumptive evidence that the coefficients characteristic of the absorption of Rontgen rays in metallic sheets are all constant with varying intensity of the rays. Jefferson Physical Laboratory, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass. K. S. Howard— Elm Creek Aérolite. 379 Art. XXXVIII.—TZhe Him Creek Aérolite; by Kennetu 8. Howarop. AnorHeR aérolite from Kansas has just been obtained by ‘Ward’s Natural Science Establishment, of Rochester, N. Y. It is of especial interest as having been found near Admire, Lyon County, where the Admire pallasite was found in 1902. 1 The Elm Creek Aérolite. About May 10, 1906, J. R. Waters ploughed up the meteor- ite some three miles N.N.E. of Admire. It was buried about eight inches deep in a field that up to that time had never been cultivated to any depth. Mr. Waters also says that ‘it was on a slope where the soil would wash off of it instead of burying it up deeper.” The exterior of the stone exhibits con- siderabie oxidation, so that it has evidently lain in the ground for a number of years. There have been so many aérolites 380 KS. Howard—Etlin Creek Aérolite. found in Kansas that at first there was a question as to whether this one constituted a distinct fall or if it were merely one of a shower. An examination of a polished surface, however, showed that it is entirely different from other Kansas stones. Elm Creek, a branch of the Marais des Cygnes river, flows about three-fourths of a mile from where the stone was found, and as one meteorite has already been named after Admire this one will be called the Elm Creek aérolite. Micro-section. x 45 By W. Harold Tomlinson, Germantown, Pa. Its weight is 7075 grams. It measures approximately 22 1am x 12™, its general shape being shown in the accom- panying photograph. As will be seen the stone is highly oriented, the pittings radiating from a point shown in the pho- tograph as being a little below the center. Any markings that may have been on the reverse side have been obliterated by oxidation. The stone is very firm and excepting where a few small chips have scaled off shows no signs of fracture. Dr. Geo. P. Merrill of the National Museum has made a micro- scopic examination of the aérolite and describes it as follows: “The stone on a polished surface is of a dark gray, nearly black color, thickly studded with metallic iron and with numer- ous indistinct chondrules which break in large part with the groundmass. Under the microscope the silicate portion is found to consist essentially of olivine and enstatite with a twinned monoclinic pyroxene. The olivine occurs in the usual clear, colorless forms quite free from enclosures; m minute K. S. Howard—Elm Creck Aérolite. 381 fragments and splinters and in chondrules of the barred and porphyritic type common to meteorites. A part of the por- phlyritic forms show a base of yellowish glass, while others seem holocrystalline. Occasional forms are met with in ee the entire chondrule is composed of a single individual, i which case the central portion is clear and colorless, while ne borders are of a light smoky-brown color and show a fibrous structure. All portions are, however, optically a unit. “ The enstatites like the olivines occur in scattered fragmental particles and in chondrules, the latter of the common crypto- crystalline and radiate type, and in porphyritic forms. In the latter the crystal outlines are at times very well developed. The eryptocrystalline forms are often remar ‘kably spherical, or at least circular in outline in the section. As such they rarely polarize as a single individual, but as is commonly the case the field breaks up into sectors, as the stage is revolved between erossed Nicols. It is of course possible that not all of these eryptocrystalline forms are of enstatite; some may be of augite or possibly olivine. An optical determination is impos- sible, and the determination is based on their resemblance to others which have been tested chemically. “The monoclinic pyroxene is of interest on account of the beautifully developed polysyntnetic twinning which it presents when either in chondrules or in fragments in the groundmass. In this respect it would seem to be ‘fully comparable with the meteorite of Renazzo, Italy, as figured by Tschermak on Plate ok ds ikroskopische Beschaffenheit der Meteoriten. Crystal outlines are rare and the mineral is a trifle less limpid than the enstatite. A prismatic cleavage is fairly well devel- oped. No feldspars or other silicates than those mentioned were detected. “The most striking feature of the stone is the spherical per- fection of many of the chondrules and the pertection of the twinning in the pyroxene. As a whole the stone is plainly fragmental—is composed of a moderately firm mass of angular fragments in which are imbedded the chondrules. I am dis- posed to class it with those of Allegan, Michigan, San Emig- dio, California, and Warrenton, Missouri. ' This, following Brezina, would throw it in the group of Ornansite (CeO), from which it differs only in its firm character. I confess, however, that I fail to see the necessity of attempting to name rocks according to their degree of compactness or friability.” 382 Scientipic Intelligence. SCIEN TIFT CEC) INTE LEA G Nes I. CHEMISTRY AND PHYSICS. 1. Orysulphides of Zirconium and Thorium.—In attempting to prepare sulphides of these metals by heating the sulphates in a stream of hydrogen sulphide, Orro Hauser has found that sulphides could not be prepared in this way, but that well characterized, perfectly pure oxysulphides corresponding to the formulas ZrOS and ThOS were readily produced. The prepar- ation of the compounds succeeds well only when the sulphides are thoroughly dry. For this purpose they were heated in a stream of dry air at 380-400°. Then they were heated in a combustion tube to a moderate red heat in a rapid stream of hydrogen sul- phide. A change of color from pure white to yellowish brown indicated a chemical action, while the weights of the resulting products, and analyses of them, corresponded closely to the com- positions required by the formulas. The oxysulphides, particu- larly the zirconium compound, are inclined to ignite spontane- ously when exposed to the air, unless they are allowed to remain in the hydrogen sulphide for some time after cooling. The formation of these compounds is of considerable theoretical inter- est on account of the existence also of COS, with carbon, the typical element of their group. Their formation indicates also that one of the SO, groups in the sulphates, Zr(SO,), and Th(SO,), is more firmly combined than the others, at least at high temper- atures.—Zeitschr. fi anorgan. Chen, liii, 74. HL. We 2. New Method of Preparing Titanium Tetrachloride.—A con- venient method for preparing titanium tetrachloride on a rather large scale is described by Vicourouxand Arrivant. They make use of commercial ferro-titanium, which is now manufactured with a contents of above 55 per cent of titanium. The direct treatment of this material with chlorine gas ina heated porcelain tube gives ferric and titanium chlorides, which may be separ- ated to a great extent by their different volatility, but in this procedure the apparatus soon becomes clogged by the conden- sation of the iron compound. They recommend, therefore, the elimination of the greater part of the iron as a preliminary step by treating the powdered ferro-titanium with dilute hydrochloric acid as long as it reacts. A heavy residue very rich in titanium is thus obtained, which is used as before in the preparation of the tetrachloride. The product is collected in a cooled glass condenser. It is always colored by ferric chloride, but the latter being very insoluble in the liquid can be almost completely removed by simple filtration. Fractional distillation then gives a completely pure product, boiling at 136°, free from chlorides of iron and silicon, entirely colorless, and not fuming in the air.— Comptes Rendus, exliv, 485. H. L. W. se) Chemistry and Physics. 83 3. Separation and Estimation of Beryllium.—Parsons and Barnes have devised an analytical method for the heretofore very troublesome sepatation of beryllium from iron and alumi- num. The principle is simple and the execution of the process has given excellent results in the hands of the authors. The sep- aration is effected by the action of a 10 per cent solution of acid sodium carbonate upon the hydroxides. The liquid is heated rapidly and is just brought to boiling for not over a minute. Beryllium hydroxide dissolves, while the other hydroxides remain undissolved. A double application of the operation appears to be necessary with large quantities. Inthe filtrate, or united filtrates, the beryllium may be precipitated, after acidifying and boiling off the carbon dioxide, by means of ammonia. The washing of the beryllium hydroxide with ammonium acetate is recommended, as in the absence of an electrolyte it tends to pass through the filter in a colloidal condition.— Jour. Am. Chem. Soc., xxviii, 1589. H. 1. W. 4. Atomic Weights of Manganese and Cobalt.—Baxtrr and Hines have made an elaborate series of determinations of the atomic weight of manganese by analyzing the chloride and bro- mide, obtaining in both cases the number 54:96. Hence no change is recommended at present in the number 55:0 now ac- cepted. BaxtrEr and Corrin have made anew determination of the atomic weight of cobalt by means of an extensive series of analyses of the chloride and have obtained 58:997, which is the same as the result of Richards and Baxter upon the bromide. Both of the investigations here mentioned are good examples of the refined work on atomic weights that are being carried on under the leadership of Professor T. W. Richards.—Jour. Am. Chem. Soc., xxviii, 1560 and 1580. H. L. W. 5. Introduction to Metallurgical Chemistry; by J. H. Stranspre. 12mo, pp. 252. New York, 1907 (Longmans, Green & Co.).— Although purported to be published in New York, this is an English book. The author has prepared it for technical students in connection with his work with night classes in the Birming- - ham Municipal Technical School. Its object is to give such stu- dents the chemistry needed for the subsequent ‘study of metal- lurgy. While the book is admitted to be mainly practical in its character, and to deal particularly with the metals, it treats the subject much more broadly than might be expected, and shows so much originality, and so many good experiments, that it is well worth the attention of teachers of chemistry as a book that may furnish many useful suggestions. H. L. W. 6. A Text-Book of Hlectro-Chemistry ; by Max Lr Branc. Translated by W. R. Whitney and J. W. Brown. 8vo, pp. 338. New York, 1907 (The Macmillan Company).—This is a trans- lation of the fourth German edition of a well known and valuable work. The earlier translation of the first edition by one of the collaborators in the present work has been mostly rewritten, and extensive additions and changes have been made in it. For the 384 Scientific Intelligence. benefit of those who may be unfamiliar with the work, it may be added that it is a theoretical treatment of the subject, with many references to practical applications. H. L. W. 7. Exercises in Chemisiry ; by W. McPurrson and W. E. HENDERSON. 12mo, pp. 69. New York, 1906 (The Ginn Com- pany).—This little book comprises directions for 49 laboratory exercises in elementary chemistry. It is designed to be used in conjunction with the authors’ text-book, “An Elementary Study of Chemistry.” The experiments are well chosen for simplicity and for imparting knowledge of the subject, while the directions are clear and the illustrations showing the arrangements of appa- ratus are excellent. The book appears to be an excellent one for the use of younger students. H. L. W. 8. Specific Charge and Velocity of Cathode Rays excited by Réntgen Rays.—A. BESTELMEYER employs in his investigation a magnetic field with lines of force at right angles to the lines of force of an electric field so arranged that they exercise oppo- site effects upon the moving electrons. He concludes that : (1) The velocity of the excited cathode rays is independent of the intensity of the exciting Rontgen rays and increases with the hardness of the latter rays. (2) The value of Sp 107 obtained is much smaller than Simon’s number. (8) This value changes with the velocity. (4) Although this value is nearer Lorentz’s value than those of . Abraham and Bucherer, the conditions are not sufficiently exact to form a conclusion. (5) The method of crossed magnetic and electric fields is much to be preferred to the method of parallel fields.— Ann. der Physik., No. 3, pp. 429-447. June 9. Wave Length of Rintgen Rays.—J. D. Van DER WAALS, Jr. points sut that the value of wave length obtained by various observers, notably Haga and Wind, Sommerfeld and Wien, depends upon the manner of impact of the electrons. Wien had assumed that the cathode ray particles gave up their great veloc- ity to the anticathode in astraight line impact. If, however, there isa scattering effect, collisions not in a straight line, zigzag effects, another value of wave length might be anticipated.—Ann. der Physik., No. 3, p. 603, 1907. . Jeoks 10. Chemicat Effects of the Electric Discharge in Rarified Hydrogen and Oxygen.—Rev. P. J. Kirsy calls attention to a previous paper by him, Phil. Mag., Jan. 1905, which showed that the chemical effects were most intense within the region of the cathode fall of potential. He has taken up the subject with modified apparatus and has confirmed his previous results. He estimates that 5107" ergs is the superior limit of the work involved in separating the atoms of oxygen. Very little ozone is formed during the discharge in rarified oxygen. The quanti- Chemistry and Physics. 385 ties of water vapor formed in the positive column .and in the cathode fall were in the ratio of 4°5 to 6.—Phil. Mag., March, 1907. Ag, ft 11. Radio-active Matter in the Earth and the Atmosphere.— Observers differ in regard to the amount of this matter. (so) 392 Scientific Intelligence. accepted. As yet the writer has heard no dissent from these conclusions. If the hypothesis of fluviatile origin be accepted, it may be further stated that the character of the sediments indicates an origin in down-sinking basins with no necessary connection with the sea, and in those north of Virginia, under a sub-arid climate. The last chapter in the volume, on the glacial geology, by the junior author, gives a clear presentation of the problem pre- sented by the Saree features of the state and how the solution, step by step, has led to one of the most astounding conceptions in geology,—that of a continental ice sheet which in very recent geological times spread from Canada over the northern portion of the United-States , incidentally burying the entire land surface of Connecticut. i Tn conclusion it is not too much to say that this volume will do more toward the dissemination of first hand geological knowl- edge through the state than all papers previously published, and in all geological instruction will be found by the teacher within the state an invaluable adjunct to the text-book. JB: 2. Preliminary Geological Map of Connecticut ; by HERBERT Ernest Gregory and Henry Hotuster Rosixson. Accom. panied by Bulletin No. 7, explanatory of the map. Connecticut State Geological and Niel History Survey. Hartford, 1907.— Since Percival’s map of 1842, no geological map of Connecticut has been published until the ‘present. “As a consequence, to all except specialists in Connecticut geology the districts outside of the Connecticut valley have formed a terra incognita. This map is, therefore, a most welcome addition to geological literature and will be of great value for educational purposes, especially within the state. On account of the lack of detailed surveys over much of the area, it is stated by the authors in the accom- panying bulletin to be a preliminary map only, and to be open to correction upon the completion of such detailed surveys. Never- theless it will take its place as an important contribution to Con- necticut geology. The difficulties of the region are such as those geologists work- ing in more favored regions can with difficulty appreciate, and account for the interval of sixty-five years between the first and second geological maps of the state. These are due in general, first, to the high. degree of metamorphism of all but the Triassic of the valley of the Connecticut, which has destroyed all fossils and obscured the original nature and relations of the formations. As a result the age of the greater number of formations is unknown and such as are known have been determined by trac- ing them into the state. A second difficulty arises from the com- plex and repeated deformations to which the region was subjected in Pajeozoic times and the faulting of the Mesozoic. Again, the tangle of granitic injections, more or less gneissoid, which on their margins are sometimes interfingered and infiltrated with the surrounding schists for miles; and lastly the covering of Geology and Mineralogy. 393 glacial drift which largely mantles the state. It is to be expected, therefore, that detailed study may result in minor shiftings of such granite boundaries as are of a transitional character, and possibly further determinations of age. As noteworthy features indicated on the present map and dif- ferent from the earlier conceptions of the geology may be noted the large areas of granite-gneiss which are regarded as mostly intrusive of Paleozoic age and the reduced areas of gneiss which are regarded as of pre-Cambrian age. In the accompanying bulletin a sketch is given of the history of Connecticut geology and also credit for the sources,of informa- tion. Especially to be noted is the following tribute to the work of Percival done from 1835 to 1842: “The more the modern geologist becomes familiar with the involved structures and exasperating variations found within the metamorphic rocks of the state, the more respect and admiration he has for Percival’s discrimination and skill in delineation. It is doubtful if a more accurate discrimination of the various members of a complicated series of crystalline rocks on field evi- dence alone was ever accomplished ” (p. 16). The latter part. of the bulletin contains brief lithological descriptions of the forty-two rock formations which are mapped. J, Be 3. Second Biennial Report of the Commissioners of the State Geological and Natural History Survey of Connecticut. Bulle- tin No. 9, State Geological and Natural History Survey. Pp. 23. Hartford, Conn., 1906.—This report states the scope and plan of the Survey, gives a synopsis of the bulletins already published, of those accepted, and of the work still in progress. Plans for future work in geology, botany and zoology are also outlined. In connection with the tabulation of expenses of the Survey the Superintendent remarks: ‘The fact will be noted that the compensation is in all cases very smail in relation to the amount of work done and the grade of ability and attainment of the scientific men employed. The work has been indeed on the part of all who have engaged in it a labor of love JB: 4. Iowa Geological Survey, Volume XVI. Annual Report, 1905, with Accompanying Papers. Frank A. -WILpER, State Geologist. T. EK. Savace, Assistant State Geologist. Pp. vii+ 673, pls. vill, figs. 78, maps 14. Des Moines, 1906.—In this well bound, well printed and well illustrated volume, besides the administrative reports and recommendations and _ statistics of mineral production for 1905, there are the detailed reports of the geology of eight counties, viz: Winneshiek, Clayton, Bremer, Black Hawk, Franklin, Sac, Ida, and Jackson ; also a report on the plants of Winneshiek County. The greater part of the state has now been covered in detail. Je Bs 5. Limeless Ocean of Pre-Cambrian Time (A correction).— Through a mistake of the author the conditions of an experiment, cited by R. A. Daly on page 102 of this volume, were wrongly 394 Scientific Intelligence. stated. In justice to the experimenters, Messrs. Irvine and Woodhead, to whom also sincere apology is due, and at Mr. Daly’s s request, the following correction is here made. On page 102, line 19, the words ‘lime salts” should read “calcium carbo- nate.” In ‘the second line following, the expression “ calcium sulphate” should be inserted before the word “and.” The proper meaning of the context will be discerned after this correc- tion is made. 6. Samples of the Sea-floor along the Coast of East Green- land, 743-70 WN. L. ; by O. B. Bocerrp. Mineralogical and Geo- logical Museum of ‘the Seas Copenhagen. Contributions to ~ Mineralogy, INOS as, le Oy Oa 5, pls. 9.—This paper is a study of the character of 41 samples taken approximately along the 100 fathom line off the east coast of Greenland above latitude 70° N. A geological map of the coast from Nathorst is given between these latitude limits showing areas of Archean, sedimentary and voleanic rocks but without giving any ages for the latter two groups. These sea-floor deposits give a clue as to the lithologi- cal nature of the land formations. Jabs Mikroscopische Physiographie der Mussigen Gesteine ; von eh Rosensuscu. Erste Hilfte, Tiefengesteine, Ganggesteine, 4te Aufl. 1997, pp. 716; 8°.—In this, the fourth edition of this well-known handbook, whose first edition dates back to 1877, the old material has been thoroughly worked over and a vast amount of new added. The use of a somewhat larger page and a thin, tough paper will make the completed volume presumably no more bulky than before, in spite of probably fifty per cent of added matter. In essence, so far as the development of classification and the treatment of the subject from the theoretical standpoint is concerned, there is little that is new, the work agreeing with the ideas enunciated in the last edition. A constant tendency, however, may be noticed to treat the classification of rocks more strongly from the genetic point of view. An instance of this may be seen in the charnockite-mangerite-anorthosite series, which is, So to speak, rather suggested than actually installed. The author states, in reference to the series, that it parallels the lime-alkah-granite, syenite, gabbro and the alkali-granite, alkali- syenite, nephelite-syenite, essexite-shonkite, etc., series ; that it 1s chemically Shaeronned by the striking avert of iron and magnesia (leaving, of course, lime and alkalies), and mineralog- ically by the predominance of a peculiar microperthite, of pyrox- enes rather than hornblende or mica, as well as by the extension of orthoclase and quartz into the very basic forms. Charnockite, it may be recalled, is the hypersthene granite from India of Horzanp, while mangerite is the name given by the author to rocks composed chiefly of microperthite associated with the anor- thosites of Norway and termed monzonite, etc., by KoLpDERUuP. lf the idea involved in the erection of this new series takes root and flourishes, it will be of interest in the future to see the growth of the new cian-of dike rocks that will inevitably arise. Here Miscellaneous Intelligence. B95 will be a new source of difficulty for the unlucky field-geologist who is striving to carry all the details of petrographic classifi- cations into field practice. In regard to the femic differentiates of the new series, Rosen- busch says that to separate, in the gabbro family, those which belong to the new series from those of the old, mentioned above, is at present impossible. Whether the reader agrees with the ideas of classification which characterize the author’s work or not, the volume still remains as before, the indispensable handbook, ‘the best. digested treatise of the literature, the needed work of reference that every working petrographer must have. The added matter covers what has appeared during the last ten years and brings the work down to date. Perhaps the most notable feature which the survey of it reveals is the very great amount of work, during this time, which has been done upon the alkali rocks and the great extension which our knowledge of them has received. The appearance of the second half of the work will be awaited with great interest. TeV Be 8. Hendersonville Meteorite.—An account of the new meteorite from Hendersonville, North Carolina, was given in this Journal by L. C. Glenn in 1904 (vol. xvii, p. 215). Dr. G. P. Merritt now gives a detailed account of its mineralogical composition and micro-structure, with a series of analyses by Wirt Tassin. It is characterized by the presence of numerous spherulitic chrondules of radiating and cryptocrystalline enstatite, with also others of the ordinary porphyritic type of enstatite and olivine. Certain peculiarities of structure are similar to these of the Kernouvé meteorite which have been ascribed to mechanical trituration and resintering from a subsequent elevation of temperature.— Proce. US. Nat. Mus., xxx, pp: 79-82. 9. Reproduction Artificielle de Mineraux au «ix? siécle ; par Prerre Tcuiruwinsky. Pp. 637, Ixxxilil, with 22 plates. Kieff : 1903-1996.—This very important volume contains a com- plete and careful summary of the work accomplished during the nineteenth century on the artificial reproduction of mineral species. How exhaustively the author has accomplished his work can be seen from the survey of the list of chemists and mineral- ogists whose*results have been cited. ‘The work is published in the Russian language but includes a brief résumé in French. TV. Misceritannous Screntiric INTELLIGENCE. 1. National Academy of Sciences.—The annual spring meeting of the National Academy was held in Washington on April 16-18 ; forty members were in attendance. The following ofticers were elected : President, Ira Remsen; Vice President, Chas. D. Wal- cott; Home Secretary, Arnold Hague. The new members elected are as follows: Joseph P. Iddings, Chicago; F. P. Mall, Balti- more ; Harmon N. Morse, Baltimore ; Elihu Thomson, Institute 396 . . Scientific Intelligence. of Technology, Boston, Mass. Prof. Dr. David Hilbert of Gdot- tingen, Sir James Dewar, of London, Prof. A. R. Forsythe, of Cambridge, and -Prof. John C. Kapteyn, of Groningen, were elected for eign associates. The next meeting of the Academy will be held at Columbia University, New Y ork “City, on Noy. 19. The following is a list of the papers presented at the meeting : W. T. Swrnete and Lyman J. Briaes: Utilization of ultra violet rays in microscopy, and demonstration of the apparatus employed. Karu F, KELLERMAN: On the purification of the Isthmian potable water supply. y PW. GIpLEY: A new horned rodent from the Miocene of Kansas. F. H. Knowxiron: The Laramie problem. Davip Wuite: Permo-Carboniferous climatic changes in South America. F. W. True: On the occurrence of European genera of fossil Cetacea in America. J. M. Crarts: A new and more accurate form of normal barometer. The catalysis of sulphonic acids in concentrated solutions. F. H. BiczLtow : A solution of the vortices in the atmospheres of the earth and the sun. L. A. Bauer: Results thus are obtained by the oceanic magnetic survey of the Carnegie Institution of Washington, and their bearing. Ricuarp B. Moore: The relation of radium to hot spring and geyser action. Henry F. Ossporn: Exploration in the Upper Hocene of the Fayum Desert. Lewis Boss: Remarks on the solar motion. A. L. Day: Some new measurements with the gas thermometer. Simon Newcoms: On the optical principles involved in the interpretation of the canals of Mars. Methods of detecting correlations between the varia- tions of fluctuating quantities with an application to the question of the variability of the Sun’s radiation. W. W. CampspetL: The D. D. Mills Expedition to the Southern Hemi- sphere. C. D. PerRINE: Results of the Intramercurial planet search. ALEXANDER AGassiz: The eges of Hying fishes. The elevated reefs of the Windward Islands. BatLey WILLIS: Continental structure of Asia. Wirt Tassin: The occurrence of elemental silicon in a meteoric iron. R. von LENDENFELD: Description of Zeiss’ microscopic apparatus for ultra violet rays as applied to the study of sponges. Horace L. WEtus: Biographical notice of Samuel L. Penfield. E. W. Hincarp : Biographical notice of Joseph Le Conte. 2. Commemoration of the Two Hundredth Anniversary of the birth of Linnceus.—The two hundredth anniversary of the birth of the Swedish naturalist Linneus, on May 23, 1907, will be com- memorated at New York City under the auspices of the New York Academy of Sciences. The exercises will begin in the morning at the American Museum of Natural History, with addresses and an exhibition of the animals, minerals and rocks first classified by Linneus. They continue in the afternoon at the Botanical Garden and Zoological Park in Bronx Park, with addresses and suitable exhibits of plants and animals and the dedication of the‘ Linnean Bridge.” This bridge, recently com- pleted, over the Bronx river connects the Botanical Garden and the Zoological Park and is to be named in honor of Linnzus ; a bronze tablet with suitable inscription will commemorate his work Miscellaneous Intelligence. 397 in Natural History. The exercises will be concluded in the even- ing with simultaneous exercises at the Museum of the Brooklyn Institute, Eastern Parkway, and at the New York Aquarium in Battery Park. : 3. Director United States Geological Survey.—On May first Dr. George Otis Smith assumes the Directorship of the United States Geological Survey, made vacant by the appointment of Dr. Charles D. Walcott as Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Dr. Smith was born in Hodgdon, Maine, Feb. 22, 1871, graduated at Colby College and Johns Hopkins ‘University, entered the government service as assistant geologist in 1896, was appointed geologist in 1901 and later made chief of the section of petrology. The publications of Dr. Smith relate chiefly to the areal geology and petrography of Washington, Utah and Maine. 4, Ricerche Lagunari: in charge of GaP Maerini, L. DE Marcut, and T. Gnxsorro, under the auspices of the Reale Instituto Veneto di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti.—The commission appointed by the Venetian Institute to make a study of the waters of the northern Adriatic (this Journal, xxi, 407) has issued three bulletins: 1. Relazione Preliminare, 12 pp., 2. Muareometro Normale Lagunare, 17 pp., 2 pls., and 3. Mareografo Normale Lagunare, 22 pp., 5 figs. Bulletin No. 1 explains the commercial importance of a systematic study of the waters of the Venetian coast, and gives an historical sketch of work previ- ously carried out for the improvement of the local water ways. The present plan is to make a study of the tides, waves, and currents of the upper Adriatic, with especial reference to the Gulf of Venice. Bulletins Numbers 2 and 3 describe the type of instruments installed as tide gauges and give accounts of tests made. The investigation has been carried far enough to indi- cate satisfactory methods of collecting and interpreting data, but no detailed results are as yet available. 5. The iver Pileomayo; by Gunnar Lanen. Pp. 123, with 22 illustrations and portfolio of detailed map in 7 sheets. Buenos Aires, 1906 (Argentine Meteorological Office). — The exploration of the Pileomayo River from parallel 22° 8. to the Paraguay River was undertaken for the purpose of finding a feasible commercial route from Asuncion to the Argentine col- ony of Buena Ventura in the Gran Chaco. Observations in latitude, variations in compass and, especially, hydrographic measurements, were made in detail. Notes of types of forest trees were also made. The river was found to be aggraded throughout the entire extent and no bed-rock was seen. “At the rapids, and: elsewhere in the bed of the river, there is seen a “somewhat undulating surface of a layer of impermeable hard ‘tosca,’ which probably in remote times formed the bed of a great lake of little depth which gradually was filled up by the slime brought down by the upper rivers.” At the Arroyo Dorado the tributary streams are cutting back rapidly, perhaps indicating a recent elevation at this point, ‘and rafts (“ raigones ”’) 398 Scientific Intelligence. of hard-wood block the stream in a number of places. The Pil- comayo was found to be navigable for boats of light draft, with the exception of the marshes at Estero Patino, where canals and locks would be necessary. H. E. G. 6. Lhe British Tunicata ; by the late Josaua AtpER and the late ArsAny Hancock, edited by Joun Hopxryson. Vol. II, pp. XXvill+ 164, plates 21-50. London, 1907 (The Ray Society).— This is the second volume of an unfinished monograph which for more than thirty years after the death of both of the authors had remained unpublished. This portion completes the work on the solitary and social ascidians. The thirty plates, most of which are colored, furnish excellent illustrations of the appearance and anatomy of the 58 species discussed. The first volume was noticed in vol. xx, p. 469, of this Journal. Wiis 7. Die insektenfamilie der Phasmiden ; bearbeitet von K. BrunneR v. WaAtTTeNwyL, und Jos. ReprensacHER: Mit Unterstiitzung der Hohen k.k. Akademie der Wissenschaften in Wien aus der Treil-Stiftung. I. Lieferung: Bogen 1-23 und Tafel I-VI. Phasmidae Areolatae ; bearbeitet von J. ReprEn- BACHER. Pp. 180, 4to. Leipzig, 1906 (Wilhelm Engelmann),— This is the first installment of an extensive systematic mono- graph of all the species of Phasmids of the world. The senior author is a recognized authority on this group of the Orthoptera. WR. Cs 8. Trades and Anti- Trades.—The long-accepted theory of the existence of anti-trades blowing southwest and northwest above the northeast and southeast trade winds, and formed by the ascending currents above the thermal equator, has rested mainly upon the observations upon the Peak of Teneriffe. Here the southwest wind can be observed through the year, though it is lower in winter than in summer, The truth of this theory, how- ever, has been questioned, and in the summer of 1905 the steam yacht Otaria was purchased and equipped by M. Teisserene de Bort, and an expedition was made, the expenses of which were borne by him and by Mr. A. Lawrence Rotch of the Blue Hill Observatory, Hyde Park, Mass. The observers were Messrs. Maurice and Clayton, and observations were carried on chiefly in the neighborhood of the Azores, Madeira, the Canaries and Cape Verde Islands. Kites were used up to an altitude of 3000 meters and balloons above this level; the latter could be followed by the telescope to a height of 11,000 or 12,000 meters, The facts observed, given in detail in the original article, contain various points of considerable interest. The conclusion reached is stated as follows: “that the upper anti-trade is shown both by the balloons and by the drift of the clouds, the stratified conditions giving place to the southerly wind between 3000 and 4000 meters. Therefore, the classic observations of the return-trade, which were long ago made on the Peak of Teneriffe, indicate a general phenomenon and agree with those obtained over the open ocean by the present expedi- tion.”— Proc. Amer. Acad., xlii, 263-272. 9. The Museum of the Brooklyn Institute of Art and Sciences. Science Bulletin, Volume I, No. 10.—This bulletin contains a Miscellaneous Intelligence. 399 paper by Cuaries ScuarrrerR on New Bruchidae, with notes on known species and list of species known to occur at Brownsville, Texas, and in the Huachuca Mts., Arizona. Pp. 291-396. 10. University of Illinois Bulletin. Volume HY, Nog. Ep. 30, 5 figs. Urbana.—This bulletin Conte a report by EpwarpD Barrow, for the year ending Aug. 1906, entitled: Chemical and Biological Survey of the Wa ot Illinois. abe Bulletin, No. 1, of the Carnegie Foundution for the Advancement of Teaching. Pp. 45. March, 1907.—The import- ant question as to whether universities which are technically state institutions should profit by the Carnegie Fund for retiring allowances is discussed in the present Bulletin from the stand- point of these institutions. The following papers are included : Memorandum from the Officers of the National Association of State Universities ; another from Dr. Maurice Hutton, Acting President of the Univer sity of Toronto ; and a third from Pro. fessor Henry TT. Eddy, of the University of Minnesota. Dr. Henry 8. Pritchett, President of the Carnegie Foundation, pre- sents the subject fully and impartially in a paper prepared expressly for the benefit of the Trustees. Although no final decision of the question has thus far been reached, it is stated in the introduction that an unofficial expression of opinion indicated that a large majority of the Trustees were opposed to placing retiring officers of state institutions upon the Carnegie founda- tion. Dictionnaire-Manuel-Illustré de Géeographie ; par ALBERT DemanceEon. Pp. 860. Paris, 1907 (Librairie Armand Colin). —This Dictionary is one of a series dealing with different sub- jects in svience, letters, and the arts. It gives more than 850 closely printed pages, the vocabulary including not only names of prominent places, with statements in regard to them, but also definitions of general terms more or Jess closely related to the different branches of geography. In the case of important geo- graphical divisions, the definitions are much extended and are often accompanied by illustrations and maps. The variety and fullness of the information contained in this compact manual should give it a wide sphere of usefulness. 13. Self-Propelled Vehicles; by Jamms E. Homans. Pp. vu, 598. New York, 1907 (Theo. Audel & Co.).—TYhe sixth edition of a practical treatise on the theory, construction, operation, care and management of automobiles, covers the subject from tire to steering-wheel. About four hundred illustrations and diagrams aid in making’ the fundamental principles of the machine and its management intelligible even to those who are less mechanically inclined. The chapter on “care and operation ” is a short cut to a valuable fund of information that is usually obtainable only by long and varied experience. There can be no question but that a study of this book would bring to many owners increased pleasure in the use of an automobile, and a corresponding diminu- tion of business to the repair men. A complete index makes the contents readily available. iD, NGI 400 _ Scientific Intelligence. 14. Ostwald’s Klassiker der Exakten Wissenschaften. Leipzig, 1906 (Wilhelm Engelmann).—The following list includes the titles of recent additions to this valuable series of scientific classics (cf. p. 188, Feb. 1906). Nr. 151. Abhandlungen tiber die regelmissigen Sternkérper. Abhandlungen von L. Porinsot, J. Bertranp, A. L. Caucny, A. CayLEY. Jbersetzt und herausgegeben von Roperr HAussneEr. Pp. 127, mit 2 Tafeln. Nr. 152. Abhandlungen iiber Elektrizitit und Licht; von Theodor von Grotthuss. Herausgegeben von R. LurnHer und A. vy. OETTINGEN. Pp. 198, mit einem Bildnis und 5 Figuren in texte Nr. 153. Rein analytischer. Beweis des Lehrsatzes, dass zwischen je zwey Werthen, die ein entgegengesetztes Resultat gewihren, wenigstens eine reelle Wurzel der Gleichung liege ; von Brrnarp Bouzano. Untersuchen iiber die unendlich oft oszillierenden und unstetigen Funktionen ; von HERMANN Hanxet. Herausgegeben von Puitie E. B. Jourpary. Pp. 115. Nr. 154. Physiologische Untersuchungen iiber die Beweg- lichkeit der Pflanzen und der Tiere ; von Henrt Durrocuetr (1824). Ubersetzt und herausgegeben ; von ALEXANDER NATH- ANSOHN. Pp. 148, mit 29 text figuren. Nr. 155. Abhandlungen zur Kristallographie ; von QuINTINO Setta. Herausgegeben von F. Zamponrnt. Pp. 44, mit 8 figuren in text. Nr. 156. Neue Methode zur Integration partieller Differen- tialgleichungen erster Ordnung zwischen irgend einer Anzahl von Verinderlichen ;. von C. G. J. Jacont. Herausgegeben von G. KowaLewski. Pp. 227. Nr. 157. Beobachtungen nach einer neuen optischen Methode. Kin Beitrage zur Experimentalphysik ; von Aueust ToEPLER. Herausgegeben von A. Wirtine. Pp. 61, mit einem Bildnis von Toepler und 4 Tafeln. Nr. 158. Beobachtungen nach der Schlierenmethode ; von Aveust TOEPLER. Herausgegeben von A. AN ITTING. Pp. 102, mit 4 Tafeln and 1 Textfigur. 14. Frequency Curves and Correlation ; by W. Parry ELDER- TON. Pp. xiii, 172. London, 1906 (Published for the Institute of Actuaries by Charles and Edward Layton).—The science of Statistical Mathematics and its applications has been developed and made of practical value both in replacing empirical methods and in opening new fields of research,—as for example in eco- nomics,—largely within a decade or two, and chiefly by the investigations of Professor Karl Pierson of Oxford University. The present volume is an interpretation of his work for the benefit of actuaries in preparing mortality tables and the other statistical results of life insurance, the pioneer field of statistical investigation. The volume was prepared at the request of the Institute of Actuaries in order to put before the members of the profession generally a connected and practical exposition of Professor Pierson’s methods of dealing with statistics and the means of judging of their degree of usefulness,—as yet unproved —in this field. W. B. METEORITES. We intend to put on the market a series of collections of typical meteorites at a price within the reach of smaller museums and private collectors, and would be pleased to hear from all parties interested in securing one of these collections. EEG) MOE Wn A Some choice specimens of this remarkable Eurypterid are still in stock. Prices will be quoted on application. WARD’S NATURAL SCIENCE. ESTABLISHMENT, ROGHES TERS NeW Warps Naturat Science EstaBlisHMENT A Supply-House for Scientific Material. Founded 1862. Incorporated 1890. DEPARTMENTS: Geology, including Phenomenal and Physiographic. Mineralogy, including also Rocks, Meteorites, etc. Palaeontology. Archaeology and Ethnology. Invertebrates, including Biology, Conchology, ete. Zoology, including Osteology and Taxidermy. Human Anatomy, including Craniology, Odontology, ete. Models, Plaster Casts and Wall-Charts in all departments. Circulars in any department free on request; address Ward’s Natural Science Establishment, 76-104 College Ave., Rochester, New York, U.S. A. CONTE NES. Page Art. XXX.—Wave-cut Terraces in Keuka Valley, Older than the Recession Stage of Wisconsin Ice; by F. XXXI.—Form of Outwash Drift; by F. Carnny XXXII.—Vapor Nucleation in the Lapse of Time; by C. XX XIII.—Types of Permian Insects ; by E. H. Setnarps__ 345 XXXIV.—Origin of the Wasatch Deposits; by F. B. Loomis 356 XXX V.—Method for the Estimation of Iron in presence of Titanium ; by F. A. Goocu and H. D. Nsewron XXXVI—KEsterification of Succinic Acid; by I. K. Puetps and J. L. Hussparp XXXVII.—Transmission of Réntgen Rays through Metallic Sheets; by J. M. Apams 375 XXXVIII.—The Elm Creek Aérolite; by K. 8. Howarp .. 379 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. Chemistry and Physics —Oxysulphides of Zirconium and Thorium, O. Hatser: New Method of Preparing Titanium Tetrachloride, VigcouRoux and ARRIVANT, 382.—Separation and Estimation of Beryllium, Parsons and BaRNES: Atomic Weights of Manganese and Cobalt, Baxter and Hines: Introduction to Metallurgical Chemistry, J. H. Sranspre: A Text- Book of Electro-Chemistry, M. Lz Buanc, 383.—Exercises in Chemistry, W. McPxHERson and W. EK. HenpEeRsoN: Specific Charge and Velocity of Cathode Rays excited by Réntgen Rays, A. BESTELMEYER: Wave Length of Réntgen Rays, J. D. Van DER Waats, Jr. : Chemical Effects of the Electric Discharge in Rarified Hydrogen and Oxygen, P. J. Kirpy, 384.— Radio-active Matter in the Earth and the Atmosphere, G. A. Buanc, 389. Geology and Mineralogy—Manual of the Geology of Connecticut, W. N. Rice and H. E. Gregory, 38).—Preliminary Geological Map of Connecticut, H. E. Grecory and H. H. Roginson, 892.—Second Biennial Report of the Commissioners of the State Geological and Natural History Survey of Con- necticut : Iowa Geological Survey, Volume XVI: Limeless Ocean of Pre- Cambrian Time, 393.—Samples of the Sea-floor along the Coast of East Greenland, 744-70 N. L., O. B. B6gertp : Mikroscopische Physiographie der Massigen Gesteine, H. RosenpuscH, 394.—Hendersonville Meteorite, G. P. MERRILL: Reproduction Artificielle de Mineraux au xix® siécle, P. TCHIRUWINSKY, 395. Miscellaneous Scientific Intelligence—National Academy of Sciences, 395.— Commemoration of the Two Hundredth Anniversary of the birth of Lin- neus, 396.—Director United States Geological Survey : Ricerche Lagunari : River Pileomayo, GunnaR Lance, 397.—British Tunicata, ALDER and Hancock : Die Insektenfamilie der Phasmiden, WATTENWYL und REDTEN- BACHER: Trades and Anti-Trades: Museum of the Brooklyn Institute of Art and Sciences, CHARLES SCHAEFFER, 398.—University of Illinois Bulle- tin, E>pwarp Bartow: Bulletin, No. 1, of the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching: Dictionnaire-Manuel-Illustré de Géo- graphie, A. DEmMANGEON: Self-Propelled Vehicles, J. E. Homans, 399.— Ostwald’s Klassiker der Exakten Wissenschaften : Frequency Curves and Correlation, W. P. ELpERTon, 400. Dr. Gyrus Adler, Librarian U. S. Nat. Museum. al me iat. SOa-TS x VOL PXXaAIT. JUNE, 1907. Established by BENJAMIN SILLIMAN in 1818. | AMERICAN JOURNAL OF SCIENCE. EDITOR: EDWARD S. DANA. ASSOCIATE EDITORS Proressorss GEORGE L. GOODALE, JOHN TROWBRIDGE, W. G. FARLOW ann WM. M. DAVIS, or Camprince, Proressors ADDISON E. VERRILL, HORACE. L. WELLS, L. V. PIRSSON anp H. E. GREGORY, or New Haven, Proresson GEORGE F. BARKER, or PHILADELPHIA, Proressor HENRY S. WILLIAMS, or IrHaca, Proressorn JOSHPH S. AMES, or Battimore, Mr. J. S. DILLER, or Wasuineton. FOURTH SERIES VOL. XXTI—[WHOLE NUMBER, CLXXIIT.] No. 138—JUNE, 1907. WITH 1 PLATE. NEW HAVEN, CONNECTICUT. 1 OOF THE TUTTLE, MOREHOUSE & TAYLOR CO., PRINTERS, 123 TEMPLE STREET. : Published monthly. Six dollars per year, in advance. $6.46 to countries in the “ . Postal Union; $6.25 to Canada. Remittances should be made either vag hos? ordérs, registered letters, or bank checks (preferably on New York banks)\ y 5 Nat by cei RARE, SHOWY MINERALS AND GEMS. IMPORTANT NOTICE. Special sales and reduced prices for the month of June only. We have now an elegant stock of regular, showy, rare minerals and gems. We secured them specially for that Mining Show, which went on last month, at the Grand Central Palace in New York City. We still have a large number left, and will sell them at reduced prices, so do not fail to take advantage of this ex- cellent opportunity ; you can get fine minerals and gems at exceedingly low prices. We can supply you with every mineral in existence, and name a few below :— RARE NORWAY MINERALS. Some of the finest of these specimens still remain. Afewwename below ; Leucophane crystals in the matrix, finest in the world. Titaneisen xls in the matrix; Thorite xls; Gadolinite xls; Polycrase xls in the matrix: Broggerite xls ; Native Silver, group of rare xls; Hellandite, new mineral, xls in matrix; Monazite xls in the matrix, and loose xls; Rutile xls; Mal- akon xls in the matrix ; Apatite xls; Xenotime xls; Euxenite xls in matrix ; Katapleit xls in matrix. : NEW CRYSTALLIZED NATIVE COPPER, : which was advertised and illustrated in the American Journal of Science and Mineral Collector. We secured the whole output of one pocket, consisting of ten specimens, five of which are now sold: one to the American Museum of Natural History, one to Harvard University, two to Yale University, and one to a prominent collector. As these Colleges have the most extensive and valuable collections in the country, the purchase of these specimens shows their great beauty and rarity. Five of them still remain, prices from $10 to $70. (Write for illustrated circular.) CALIFORNIA MINERALS. Pink Beryls, Pala, in matrix, and loose xls, $8-$35. Blue and white Topaz, Romana Co., $8-$10. Colemanite, San Bernardino Co., $2 to $9. Californite, Pala, polished slabs, $1-S5. Kunzite xls, $2-345. Cinnabar, fine xls in matrix, $2-$5. Large xl of Green Tourmaline, in matrix, Romana Co., $15.00. Tourmalines, Mesa Grande and Pala, in matrix, and xls, dif- ferent colors, 50e—-$100. RECONSTRUCTED RUBIES. We have received still another fine lot from Paris, so do not fail to secure one of them. The majority of the Scientists and collectors of this country have secured some of them for their collection, or to make up into jewelry. These rubies have the same hardness and true pigeon-blood color as the gen- uine ruby, and are even better than the genuine Rubies. We have them on hand, from 1g to 21g karats; they cost $5 per karat. Write for further particulars. RARE MINERALS. Anatase, Binnenthal, and St. Gothard, Switz., $4-$10. Dioptase, Siberia ; Congo, Africa, $7.50-$20. Phosgenite, Eng., $2-$10. The new mineral, Zeophyllite, Radzein, Bohemia, $3-$7.50. Argentite, Germany, with rare xls in matrix, $12-$15. Bismuthinite, $4-$6. Hulytite, Saxony, $5-$6. Alex- andrite, Ural Mts., xls from $3-$5, matrix specimens from $20-$25. HUNGARIAN MINERALS. Stibnite, from 25c to $7.50. Barite, different colors, $1-$5. Realger, $4— $5. Orpiment, $1.50-$3. Cinnabar, $2-$5. Bournonite, $1-$3. Sphalerite and Quartz, 50c-$4. Blue Chaleedony Pseudomorph, 50e-8$2. CRYSTALLIZED GOLD, SILVER, CALAVERITE, AND COPPER. We have a fine lot of crystallized Gold, Silver, Calaverite, and Copper from the different localities ; also Calcite enclosing Copper. GEM XLS, MATRIX SPECIMENS, AND CuT GEMS. We have every known gem xl, and in the matrix, and every cut gem known, also semi-precious stones. Have large and small Opals, from differ- ent localities, in matrix, and polished on one side, showing gem quality.